Un  3u 


The  person  charging  this  material  is  re- 
sponsible for  its  return  to  the  library  from 
which  it  was  withdrawn  on  or  before  the 
Latest  Date  stamped  below. 

Theft,  mutilation,  and  underlining  of  books 
are  reasons  for  disciplinary  action  and  may 
result  in  dismissal  from  the  University. 

UNIVERSITY   OF    ILLINOIS   LIBRARY  AT  URBANA-CHAMPAIGN 


m  1 5  m 


The  person  charging  this  material  is  re- 
sponsible for  its  return  to  the  library  from 
which  it  was  withdrawn  on  or  before  the 
Latest  Date  stamped  below. 

Theft,  mutilation,  and  underlining  of  books 
are  reasons  for  disciplinary  action  and  may 
result  in  dismissal  from  the  University. 

UNIVERSITY   OF    ILLINOIS   LIBRARY  AT  URBANA-CHAMPAIGN 


^E8 1  %  m 


FPB  1  5  m 


Digitized  by  \he  Internet  Arcliive 
in  2015 


https://archive.org/details/usinfantrytacticOOunit 


5^ 

l.C  ^ 


1  -'r  Lvvzszo'n 


Jlujlvt 

Cap  taw 

A. 

First  Lidzcb . 

SecotjA.  Lieut 

Third.'  Lieut. 

First  Serf  ^ 

Se.c/jTLd.  SerJ.  ^ 

E3 

Thirds  S&f^  i^ 

Fourth  Ser/'* 

□ 

Fifth  Serj^- 

6 

First  Lieut . 

Seiknid.  Lieut: 

Thzr-d  Lvaut. 

Se-corul  Serj  ^ 

FoiiTtrh  St/j^ 

Ftfdi  Ser^-^ 

7''^'  to  in  p  any 


□  DD     □  □dixiiiCiniZOiZjari]: 


■A. 


/C     '  LOnipu.7U' 


J. 


A.JLdbutcoir. 

^  Cr>b'r  niul.  c/uard 


Rig  }iZ  Wriui 


6  Cofitaxrh 

6    Se-ikfTid,  Lieut: 


Foy  f/uiXij^n.  (.)f(i,  ("oynpuj 

phirrens 

■  6 

Thzrd  Lieut. 

I  i  !  1  1  1  1  1  ;  1    i   r-  I  r  ■ !  -I 

I  — i-  r- 

 ? 

El 

— ^r' — — ' — ' — ' — ' — 1 — 1 — j  ' — 1 — 1 — I — i — 1  1 — I  1  

1    !  1    1    1    1    i    1    i    J     1    i    1    1    1    1    1    I  I 

— I  1  J .  '  ..'   1    1   1   1   1   1   (   1   1   1  1   t   1   1  1 

S&coruL  Serj  ^ 

E    6    6  ■ 

Q 

1  1 — 1_J  L.- 

El  - 

\    \    \    \    \    \    \    \  \ 

6 

1  1  1  1  1  1^ 
□ 

23 

Third,  Se?y  '.^ 
Fourth,  Sit/j* 

1  PUu.unt 


[BY  AUTHC  RI^Y.] 


U.S.. INFANTRY  TACTICS, 

FOR  THE 

INSTRUCTION,  EXERCISE,  AND  MANffiUTRES 

OF  THE 

UNITED  STATES  mFANTRY, 

INCLUDIXG 

litfanteg  at  i\t  fine,  f ig|t  Infitntrg, 

PREPARED  UNDER  THE  DIRECTION  OF  THE 
WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

AND  AUTHORIZED  AND  ADOPTED  BY 

THE  SECRETARY  OF  WAR, 

MAY  1,  1861. 

CONTAINING 

THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER;   THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE 
COMPANY;   INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS;  THE 
GENERAL  CALLS,  THE  CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS, 
AND  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION; 
(NCLUDING  THE  ARTICLES  OF  WAR  AND  A  DICTIONARY 
OF  MILITARY  TERMS.  ^ 


J.  B. 


PHILADELPHIA: 
LIPPINCOTT   &  CO. 
1863. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1861,  by 
J.  B.  LlPl'INCOTT  &  CO. 
in  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  the  United  States  for 
the  Eastern  District  of  Pennsylvania. 


The  numbers  under  the  illustrationB  in  the  School 
%f  the  Soldier  refer  to  theparoigraiiha. 


War  Department, 
Washington,  May  1,  1861. 

This  System  of  United  States  In- 
fantry Tactics,  prepared  under  the 
direction  of  the  War  Department, 
having  been  approved  by  the  Presi- 
dent, is  adopted  for  the  instruction  of 
the  troops  and  for  the  observance  of 
the  militia  when  so  employed. 

SIMON  CAMERON, 
Secretary  of  War. 


368895 


PREFACE. 


The  following  system  of  Infantry  Tactics,  based 
upon  the  latest  improvements  in  French  military  ex- 
perience, and  adapted  to  the  peculiar  wants  of  our 
service,  has  been  prepared  by  order  of  the  United 
States  Government,  and  is  now,  after  the  most  satis- 
factory evidence  of  its  efficiency,  authorized  and 
adopted  by  the  Secretary  of  War  for  the  instruction 
of  the  troops. 

Infantry  is  divided  into  Heavy  Infantry — also 
called  Infantry  of  the  Line — and  Light  Infantry. 
The  difference  between  Heavy  and  Light  Infantry 
is  twofold:  1st.  In  their  weapons  and  equipment, 
the  former  being  armed  with  the  musket,  and  the 
latter  with  the  rifle,  when  it  may  be  had.  2d.  lu 
the  order  of  battle.  Heavy  Infantry  being  in  com- 
pact order,  while  Light  Infantry  is  dispersed  or  de- 
ployed as  skirmishers,  the  men  being  separated  and 
more  independent  in  delivering  their  fire  as  sharp- 
shooters. 

In  the  school  of  the  company  and  of  the  battalion, 
the  instruction  for  Heavy  and  Light  Infantry  is  the  same, 
every  regiment  of  Infantry  having  one  company  of 


c 


PREFACE. 


Liglit  Infantry  as  a  part  of  its  organization,  and  all 
these  companies  being  drilled  as  Infantry  of  the 
Line. 

The  system  now  presented  gives  a  complete  course 
of  instruction  for  both  kinds  of  Infantry,  in  the 
schools  of  the  company  and  battalion,  and  has  be- 
sides a  special  drill  for  Light  Infantry  when  employed 
as  skirmishers. 

The  advantages  claimed  by  this  system  of  tactics 
over  former  ones  are  numerous  and  decided :  greater 
celerity  in  movements,  forming  in  line  from  column 
without  halting,  changing  direction  from  front  to 
rear  while  marching,  doubling  the  files  when  march- 
ing by  a  flank,  the  omission  of  unnecessary  com- 
mands, or  parts  of  commands,  more  varied  formation 
of  squares  against  cavalry,  and  many  others. 

A  complete  manual  of  arms  for  the  musket  will  be 
found  at  the  end  of  the  school  of  the  soldier,  p.  74. 

It  is  believed  that,  with  the  same  materiel,  this 
By  stem  will  render  a  company  or  regiment  much 
more  effective  than  any  other. 

With  a  view  to  insure  uniformity  in  a  system  of 
instruction  the  merits  of  which  are  acknowledged 
by  the  highest  authority,  it  is  now  presented  to  the 
volunteers  and  militia  called  into  service,  as  the 
authorized  drill  for  the  United  States  Infantry,  and 
that  by  which  they  will  be  instructed  and  disciplined. 

Washington,  D.C,  May  1,  1861. 


MwM  states  |nfentrg  Cattb. 


TITL.E  FIRST. 


Article  First. 
Formation  of  a  Regiment  in  order  of  battle,  or  in  line. 

1.  A  REGIMENT  is  composed  of  ten  companies,  which 
will  habitually  be  posted  from  right  to  left,  in  the 
following  order :  fir?^  sixth,  fourth,  ninth,  third, 
eighth,  fifth,  tenth,  seventh,  second,  according  to  the 
rank  of  captains. 

2.  With  a  less  number  of  companies  the  same  prin- 
ciple will  be  observed,  viz. :  the  first  captain  will 
command  the  right  company,  the  second  captain  the 
left  company,  the  third  captain  the  right  centre  com- 
pany, and  so  on. 

3.  The  companies  thus  posted  will  be  designated 
from  right  to  left,  first  company,  second  company,  &o. 
This  designation  will  be  observed  in  the  manoeuvres. 

4.  The  first  two  companies  on  the  right,  whatever 
their  denomination,  will  form  the  first  division;  the 
next  two  companies  the  second 'division;  and  so  on,  to 
the  left. 

5.  Each  company  will  be  divided  into  two  equal 
parts,  which  will  be  designated  as  the  first  and  second 
platoon,  counting  from  the  right ;  and  each  platoon, 
in  like  manner,  will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections. 

6.  In  all  exercises  and  manoeuvres,  every  regiment, 

7 


8 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


or  part  of  a  regiment,  composed  of  two  or  more  com- 
panies, will  be  designated  as  a  battalion. 

7.  The  color,  with  a  guard  to  be  hereinafter  de- 
signated, will  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre 
battalion  company.  That  company,  and  all  on  ita 
right,  will  be  denominated  the  right  wing  of  the  bat- 
talion ;  the  remaining  companies  the  left  wing. 

8.  The  formation  of  a  regiment  is  in  two  ranks ; 
and  each  company  will  be  formed  into  two  ranks,  in 
the  following  manner:  the  corporals  will  be  posted 
in  the  front  rank,  and  on  the  right  and  left  of  pla- 
toons, according  to  height ;  the  tallest  corporal  and 
the  tallest  man  will  form  the  first  file,  the  next  two 
tallest  men  will  form  the  second  file,  and  so  on  to  the 
last  file,  which  will  be  composed  of  the  shortest  cor- 
poral and  the  shortest  man. 

9.  The  odd  and  even  files,  numbered  as  one,  two, 
in  the  company,  from  right  to  left,  will  form  groups 
of  four  men,  which  will  be  designated  comrades  in. 
battle. 

10.  The  distance  from  one  rank  to  another  will  be 
thirteen  inches,  measured  from  the  breasts  of  the 
rear  rank  men  to  the  backs  or  knapsacks  of  the  front 
rank  men. 

11.  For  manoeuvring,  the  companies  of  a  battalion 
will  always  be  equalized,  by  transferring  men  from 
the  strongest  to  the  weakest  companies. 

Posts  of  Company  Ofiicers,  Sergeants  and  Corporals. 

12.  The  company  officers  and  sergeants  are  nine  in 
number,  and  will  be  posted  in  the  following  manner: 

13.  The  cdptain  on  the  right  of  the  company,  touch- 
ing with  the  left  elbow. 

14.  The  first  sergeant  in  the  rear  rank,  touching 
with  the  left  elbow,  and  covering  the  captain.  In 
the  manoeuvres  he  will  be  denominated  covering  ser- 
geanty  or  right  guide  of  the  company. 

15.  The  remaining  officers  and  sergeants  will  be 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


9 


posted  as  file  closers,  and  two  paces  behind  tlie  rear 
rank. 

16.  Tke  first  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
fourth  section. 

17.  The  second  lieutenant^  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
first  platoon. 

18.  The  third  lieutenant,  opposite  the  centre  of  the 
second  platoon. 

19.  The  second  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  left  of  the  company.  In  the  manoeuvres  he 
will  be  designated  left  guide  of  the  company. 

20.  The  third  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from 
the  right  of  the  second  platoon. 

21.  The  fourth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file 
from  the  left  of  the  first  platoon. 

22.  The  fifth  sergeant,  opposite  the  second  file  from 
the  right  of  the  first  platoon. 

23.  In  the  left  or  tenth  company  of  the  battalion, 
the  second  sergeant  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank, 
and  on  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

24.  The  corporals  will  be  posted  in  the  front  rank, 
as  prescribed  No  8. 

25.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  replaced, 
ofiSicers  by  sergeants,  and  sergeants  by  corporals. 
The  colonel  may  detach  a  first  lieutenant  from  one 
company  to  command  another,  of  which  both  the 
captain  and  first  lieutenant  are  absent ;  but  this 
authority  will  give  no  right  to  a  lieutenant  to  demand 
to  be  so  detached. 

Posts  of  Field  Officers  and  Regimental  Staff. 

26.  The  field  officers,  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel 
and  major,  are  supposed  to  be  mounted,  and  on 
active  service  shall  be  on  horseback.  The  adju- 
tant, when  the  battalion  is  manoeuvring,  will  be  ou 
*^oot. 

27.  The  colonel  will  take  post  thirty  paces  in  rear 
of  the  file  closers,  and  opposite  'iie  centre  of  the  bat- 


10 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


talion.  This  distance  will  be  reduced  whenever  there 
is  a  reduction  in  the  front  of  the  battalion. 

28.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major  will  be 
opposite  the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  wings  re- 
spectively, and  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

29.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  be  oppo- 
site the  right  and  left  of  the  battalion,  respectively; 
and  eight  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers. 

30.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant  major  will  aid  th€ 
lieutenant  colonel  and  major,  respectively,  in  the 
manoeuvres. 

31.  The  colonel,  if  absent,  will  be  replaced  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  latter  by  the  major.  If 
all  the  field  offtcers  be  absent,  the  senior  captain  will 
command  the  battalion;  but  if  either  be  present,  he 
will  not  call  the  senior  captain  to  act  as  field  officer, 
except  in  case  of  evident  necessity. 

32.  The  quarter-master,  surgeon,  and  other  staff 
officers,  in  one  rank,  on  the  left  of  the  colonel,  and 
three  paces  in  his  rear, 

33.  The  quarter-m.aster  sergeant,  on  a  line  with 
the  front  rank  of  the  field  music,  and  two  paces  on 
the  right. 

Posts  of  Field  Music  and  Band. 

34.  The  buglers  will  be  drawn  up  in  four  ranks, 
and  posted  twelve  paces  in  rear  of  the  file  closers,  the 
left  opposite  the  centre  of  the  left  centre  company. 
The  senior  principal  musician  will  be  two  paces  in 
front  of  the  field  music,  and  the  other  two  paces  in 
the  rear. 

35.  The  regimental  band,  if  there  be  one,  will  be 
drawn  up  in  two  or  four  ranks,  according  to  its  num- 
bers, and  posted  five  paces  in  rear  of  the  field  music, 
having  one  of  the  principal  musicians  at  its  head. 

Color-guard. 

86.  In  each  battalion  the  color-guard  will  be  com- 


FORMATION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


11 


posed  of  eight  corporals,  and  posted  on  the  left  of  the 
right  centre  company,  of  which  company,  for  the  timo 
being,  the  guard  will  make  a  part. 

37.  The  front  rank  will  be  composed  of  a  sergeant, 
to  be  selected  by  the  colonel,  who  will  be  called,  for 
the  time,  color-hearer^  with  the  two  ranking  corporals, 
respectively,  on  his  right  and  left;  the  rear  rank  will 
be  composed  of  the  three  corporals  next  in  rank;  and 
the  three  remaining  corporals  will  be  posted  in  their 
rear,  and  on  the  line  of  file  closers.  The  left  guide 
of  the  color-company,  when  these  three  last  named 
corporals  are  in  the  rank  of  file  closers,  will  be  imme- 
diately on  their  left. 

38.  In  battalions  with  less  than  five  companies  pre- 
sent, there  will  be  no  color-guard,  and  no  display  of 
colors,  except  it  may  be  at  reviews. 

39.  The  corporals  for  the  color-guard  will  be  se- 
lected from  those  most  distinguished  for  regularity 
and  precision,  as  well  in  their  positions  under  arms 
as  in  their  marching.  The  latter  advantage,  and  a 
just  carriage  of  the  person,  are  to  be  more  particu- 
larly sought  for  in  the  selection  of  the  color-bearer. 

General  Guides. 

40.  There  will  be  two  general  guides  in  each  bat- 
talion, selected,  for  the  time,  by  the  colonel,  from 
among  the  sergeants  (other  than  first  sergeants)  the 
most  distinguished  for  carriage  under  arms,  and 
accuracy  in  marching. 

41.  These  sergeants  will  be  respectively  denomi- 
nated, in  the  manoeuvres,  right  general  guide,  and  left 
general  guide,  and  be  posted  in  the  line  of  file  closers; 
the  first  in  rear  of  the  right,  and  the  second  in  rear 
of  the  left  flank  of  the  battalion. 


12  INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Article  Second. 
Instruction  of  the  Battalion. 

42.  Every  commanding  officer  is  responsible  for 
the  instruction  of  his  command.  He  will  assemble 
the  officers  together  for  theoretical  and  practical  in- 
struction as  often  as  he  may  judge  necessary,  and 
when  unable  to  attend  to  this  duty  in  person,  it  will 
be  discharged  by  the  officer  next  in  rank. 

43.  Captains  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  theo- 
retical and  practical  instruction  of  their  non-commis- 
sioned officers,  and  the  adjutant  for  the  instruction 
of  the  non-commissioned  staff,  .  To  this  end,  they  will 
require  these  tactics  to  be  studied  and  recited  lesson 
by  lesson;  and  when  instruction  is  given  on  the 
ground,  each  non-commissioned  officer,  as  he  explains 
a  movement,  should  be  required  to  put  it  into  practi- 
cal operation. 

44.  The  non-commissioned  officers  should  also  be 
practised  in  giving  commands.  Each  command,  in  a 
lesson,  at  the  theoretical  instruction,  should  first  be 
given  by  the  instructor,  and  then  repeated,  in  succes- 
sion, by  the  non-commissioned  officers,  so  that  while 
they  become  habituated  to  the  commands,  uniformity 
may  be  established  in  the  manner  of  giving  them. 

45.  In  the  school  of  the  soldier,  the  company  offi- 
cers will  be  the  instructors  of  the  squads  ;  but  if  there 
te  not  a  sufficient  number  of  company  officers  pre- 
sent, intelligent  sergeants  may  be  substituted ;  and 
two  or  three  squads,  under  sergeant  instructors,  be 
superintended,  at  the  same  time,  by  an  officer. 

46.  In  the  school  of  the  company,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  the  major,  under  the  colonel,  will  be  the 
principal  instructors,  substituting  frequently  the  cap- 
tain of  the  company,  and  sometimes  one  of  the  lieu- 
tenants ;  the  substitute,  as  far  as  practicable,  being 
Buperintended  by  one  of  the  principals. 


INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION.  13 


47.  In  the  school  of  the  battalion,  the  brigadier 
general  may  constitute  himself  the  principal  instructor, 
frequently  substituting  the  colonel  of  the  battalion, 
sometimes  the  lieutenant  colonel  or  major,  and  twice 
or  thrice,  in  the  same  course  of  instruction,  each  of 
the  three  senior  captains.  In  this  school,  also, 
the  substitute  will  always,  if  practicable,  be  super- 
intended by  the  brigadier  general  or  the  colonel,  or 
(in  case  of  a  captain  being  the  instructor)  by  the 
lieutenant  colonel  or  major. 

48.  Individual  instruction  being  the  basis  of  the 
instruction  of  companies,  on  which  that  of  the  regi- 
ment depends,  and  the  first  principles  having  the 
greatest  influence  upon  this  individual  instruction, 
classes  of  recruits  should  be  watched  with  the  great- 
est care. 

49.  Instructors  will  explain,  in  a  few  clear  and 
precise  words,  the  movement  to  be  executed ;  and  not 
to  overburden  the  memory  of  the  men,  they  will 
always  use  the  same  terms  to  explain  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

60.  They  should  often  join  example  to  precept, 
should  keep  up  the  attention  of  the  men  by  an  ani- 
mated tone,  and  pass  rapidly  from  one  movement  to 
another,  as  soon  as  that  which  they  command  has 
been  executed  in  a  satisfactory  manner. 

51.  The  sabre  bayonet  should  only  be  fixed  when 
required  to  be  used,  either  for  attack  or  defence ;  the 
exercises  and  manoeuvres  will  be  executed  without 
the  bayonet. 

52.  In  the  movements  which  require  the  bayonet 
to  be  fixed,  the  chief  of  the  battalion  will  cause  the 
signal  to  fix  bayonet,  to  be  sounded ;  at  this  signal 
the  men  will  fix  bayonets  without  command,  and  im- 
mediately replace  their  pieces  in  the  position  they 
were  before  the  signal. 


14  INSTRUCTION  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Instruction  of  Officers. 

63.  The  instruction  of  officers  can  be  perfected  only 
by  joining  theory  to  practice.  The  colonel  will  often 
practise  them  in  marching  and  in  estimating  distances, 
and  he  will  carefully  endeavor  to  cause  them  to  take 
steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness.  They  will  also 
be  exercised  in  the  double  quick  step. 

54.  The  instruction  of  officers  will  include  all  the 
Titles  in  this  system  of  drill,  and  such  regulations  as 
prescribe  their  duties  in  peace  and  war. 

55.  Every  officer  will  make  himself  perfectly  ac- 
quainted with  the  bugle  signals,  and  should,  by  prac- 
tice, be  enabled,  if  necessary,  to  sound  them.  This 
knowledge,  so  necessary  in  general  instruction,  be- 
comes of  vital  importance  on  actual  service  in  tho 
field 

Instruction  of  Sergeants. 

56.  As  the  discipline  and  efficiency  of  a  company 
materially  depend  on  the  conduct  and  character  of 
its  sergeants,  they  should  be  selected  with  care,  and 
properly  instructed  in  all  the  duties  appertaining  to 
their  rank. 

57.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include 
the  School  of  the  Soldier,  the  School  of  the  Company, 
and  the  Drill  for  Skirmishers.  They  should  likewise 
know  all  the  details  of  service,  and  the  regulations 
prescribing  their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

58.  The  captain  selects  from  the  corporals  in  his 
company  those  whom  he  judges  fit  to  be  admitted  to 
the  theoretical  instruction  of  the  sergeants. 

Instruction  of  Corporals. 

59.  Their  theoretical  instruction  should  include 
the  School  of  the  Soldier,  and  such  regulations  as 
prescribe  their  duties  in  garrison  and  in  campaign. 

60.  The  captain  selects  from  his  company  a  few 


INSTRUCTIDN  OF  THE  BATTALION.  15 


privates,  who  may  be  admitted  to  the  theoretical  in- 
struction of  the  corporals. 

61.  As  the  instruction  of  sergeants  and  corporals 
is  intended  principally  to  qualify  them  for  the  in- 
struction of  the  privates,  they  should  be  taught  not 
only  to  execute,  but  to  explain  intelligibly  every 
thing  they  may  be  required  to  teach. 

Commands. 

There  are  three  kinds. 

62.  The  command  of  caution,  which  is  attention. 

63.  The  preparatory  command,  which  indicates  th« 
movement  which  is  to  be  executed. 

64.  The  command  of  execution,  such  as  march  or 
halt,  or,  in  the  manual  of  arms,  the  part  of  command 
which  causes  an  execution. 

65.  The  tone  of  command  should  be  animated,  dis- 
tinct, and  of  a  loudness  proportioned  to  the  number 
of  men  under  instruction. 

66.  The  command  attention  is  pronounced  at  the 
top  of  the  voice,  dwelling  on  the  last  syllable. 

67.  The  command  of  execution  will  be  pronounced 
in  a  tone  firm  and  brief. 

68.  The  commands  of  caution  and  the  preparatory 
commands  are  herein  distinguished  by  italics,  those  of 
execution  by  capitals. 

69.  Those  preparat  ory  commands  which,  from  their 
length,  are  difficult  to  be  pronounced  at  once,  must  be 
divided  into  two  or  three  parts,  with  an  ascending 
progression  in  the  tone  of  command,  but  always  in 
Buch  a  manner  that  the  tone  of  execution  may  be 
more  energetic  and  elevated;  the  divisions  are  indi- 
cated by  a  hyphen.  The  parts  of  commands  which 
are  placed  in  a  parenthesis  are  not  pronounced. 


16 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 


TITIiE  SECOM^I>. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIEH. 

General  Rules  and  Division  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier. 

70.  The  object  of  this  school  being  the  individual 
and  progressive  instruction  of  the  recruits,  the  in- 
strucTor  never  requires  a  movement  to  be  executed 
until  ne  has  given  an  exact  explanation  of  it;  and  he 
executes,  himself,  the  movement  which  he  commands, 
80  as  to  join  example  to  precept.  He  accustoms  the 
recruit  to  take,  by  himself,  the  position  which  is  ex- 
plained— teaches  him  to  rectify  it  only  when  required 
by  his  want  of  intelligence — and  sees  that  all  the 
movements  are  performed  without  precipitation. 

71.  Each  movement  should  be  understood  before 
passing  to  another.  After  they  have  been  properly 
executed  in  the  order  laid  down  in  each  lesson,  the 
instructor  no  longer  confines  himself  to  that  order ; 
on  the  contrary,  he  should  change  it,  that  he  may 
judge  of  the  intelligence  of  the  men. 

72.  The  instructor  allows  the  men  to  rest  at  the 
end  of  each  part  of  the  lessons,  and  oftener,  if  be 
thinks  proper,  especially  at  the  commencement ;  for 
this  purpose  he  commands  Rest. 

73.  At  the  command  Rest,  the  soldier  is  no  longer 
required  to  preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  his 
place.  If  the  instructor  wishes  merely  to  relieve  the 
attention  of  the  recruit,  he  commands,  in  place — 
Rest  ;  the  soldier  is  then  not  required  to  preserve 
his  immobility,  but  he  always  keeps  one  of  his  feet 
in  its  place. 

74.  When  the  instructor  wishes  to  commence  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 


17 


mstruction,  he  commands — Attention  ;  at  this  com- 
mand, the  soldier  takes  his  position,  remains  motion- 
less, and  fixes  his  attention. 

75.  The  School  of  the  Soldier  will  be  divided  into 
three  parts :  the  first,  comprehending  what  ought  to 
be  taught  to  recruits  without  arms ;  the  second,  the 
manual  of  arms,  the  loadings  and  firings ;  the  third, 
the  principles  of  alignment,  the  march  by  the  front, 
the  difi*erent  steps,  the  march  by  the  flank,  the  princi- 
ples of  wheeling,  and  those  of  change  of  direc-  i 
tion;  also,  long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and 

the  run. 

76.  Each  part  will  be  divided  into  lessons,  as  , 
follows : — 

PART  FIRST. 

Lesson  1.  Position  of  the  soldier  without  arms: 
Eyes  right,  left  and  front. 

Lesson  2.  Facings.  ' 

Jjesson  3.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  common 
and  quick  time. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  double  , 
quick  time  and  the  run.  ( 

PART  SECOND. 

Lesson  1.  Principles  of  shouldered  arms.  i 

Lesson  2.  Manual  of  arms.  ' 

Lesson  8.  To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will. 

Lesson  4.  Firings,  direct,  oblique,  by  file,  and  by 
rank. 

Lesson  5.  To  fire  and  load,  kneeling  and  lying. 

Lesson  6.  Bayonet  exercise. 

PART  THIRD. 

Lvesson  1.  Union  of  eight  or  twelve  men  for  in- 
struction in  the  principles  of  alignment. 

Lesson  2.  The  direct  march,  the  oblique  march,  and 
ihe  different  steps. 

2 


18' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 


Lesson  3.  The  march  by  the  flank. 
Lesson  4.  Principles  of  wheeling  and  change  of 
direction. 

Lesson  5.  Long  marches  in  double  quick  time,  and 
the  run,  with  arms  and  knapsacks. 


PART  FIRST. 

77.  This  will  be  taught,  if  practicable,  to  one  re- 
'  cruit  at  a  time ;  but  three  or  four  may  be  united, 
when  the  number  be  great,  compared  with  that  of  the 
instructors.  In  this  case,  the  recruits  will  be  placed 
in  a  single  rank,  at  one  pace  from  each  other.  la 
this  part,  the  recruits  will  be  without  arms. 


Lesson  I. 
Position  of  the  Soldier. 

78.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as 
the  conformation  of  the  man  will  permit; 

The  feet  turned  out  equall}^  and  forming  with  each 
other  something  le.^s  than  a  right  angle; 

The  knees  straight  without  stiffness ; 

The  body  erect  on  the  hips,  inclining  a  little  for- 
ward ; 

The  shoulders  square  and  falling  equally ; 
The  arms  hanging  naturally  ; 
The  elbows  near  the  body ; 

The  pnlra  of  the  hnnd  turned  a  little  to  the  front, 
the  little  linger  behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons; 

The  head  erect  and  square  to  the  front,  without 
constraint ; 

The  chin  near  the  stock,  witljout  covering  it; 
The  eyes  fixed  s(rai2;lit  to  tl\e  front,  and  striking 
the  ground  about  the  disLaiice  of  fifteen  paces. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 


19 


Eemai  ks  on  tlie  position  of  the  Soldier. 

Heels  on  the  same  line; 

79.  Because,  if  one  were  in  rear  of  the  other,  the 
shoulder  on  that  side  would  be  thrown  back,  or  the 
position  of  the  soldier  would  be  constrained. 

Heels  more  or  less  closed ; 

Because,  men  who  are  knock-kneed,  or  who  have 
legs  with  large  calves,  cannot,  without  constraint, 
make  their  heels  touch  while  standing. 

The  feet  equally  turned  out,  and  not  forming  too  large  an 
angle; 

Because,  if  one  foot  were  turned  out  more  than 
the  other,  a  shoulder  would  be  deranged,  and  if  both 
feet  be  too  much  turned  out,  it  would  not  be  practi- 
cable to  incline  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward 
without  rendering  the  whole  position  unsteady. 

Knees  extended  loithout  stiffness ; 

Because,  if  stiffened,  constraint  and  fatigue  would 
be  unavoidable. 

The  hody  erect  on  the  hips ; 

Because,  it  gives  equilibrium  to  the  position.  The 
instructor  will  observe  that  many  recruits  have  the 
bad  habit  of  dropping  a  shoulder,  of  drawing  in  a 
side,  or  of  advancing  a  hip,  particularly  the  right, 
when  under  arms.  These  are  defects  he  will  labor  to 
correct. 

The  upper  part  of  the  hody  inclining  foricard; 

Because,  commonly,  recruits  are  disposed  to  do 
the  reverse,  to  project  the  belly,  and  to  throw  back 
the  shoulders,  wlien  they  wish  to  hold  themselves 
erect,  from  wliicli  result  great  inconveiiences  in 
inarching.  The  habit  of  inclining  forward  the  upper 


20 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 


part  of  the  body  is  so  important  to  contract,  that  the 
instructor  must  enforce  it  at  the  beginning,  particu- 
larly with  recruits  Trho  have  naturally  the  opposite 
habit. 

Shoulders  square  ; 

Because,  if  the  shoulders  be  advanced  beyond  the 
line  of  the  breast,  and  the  back  arched  (the  defect 
called  round- shouldered,  not  uncommon  among  re- 
cruits), the  man  cannot  align  himself,  nor  use  his 
piece  with  address.  It  is  important,  then,  to  correct  this 
defect,  and  necessary  to  that  end  that  the  coat  should 
set  easy  about  the  shoulders  and  armpits ;  but  in 
correcting  this  defect,  the  instructor  will  take  care 
that  the  shoulders  be  not  thrown  too  much  to  the 
rear,  which  would  cause  the  belly  to  project,  and  the 
small  of  the  back  to  be  curved. 

The  arms  hanging  naturally,  elbows  near  the  hody,  the 
palm  of  the  hand  a  little  turned  to  the  fronty  the  little 
finger  behind  the  seam  of  the  pantaloons  ; 

Because,  these  positions  are  equally  important  to 
the  shoulder -arms,  and  to  prevent  the  man  from  occu- 
pying more  space  in  a  rank  than  is  necessary  to  a 
free  use  of  the  piece ;  they  have,  moreover,  the  ad- 
vantage of  keeping  in  the  shoulders. 

The  face  straight  to  the  front,  and  without  constraint ; 

Because,  if  there  be  stiffness  in  the  latter  position, 
it  would  communicate  itself  to  the  whole  of  the  upper 
part  of  the  body,  embarrass  its  movements,  and  give 
pain  and  fatigue. 

Eyes  direct  to  the  front  ^ 

Because,  this  is  the  surest  means  of  maintaining 
the  shoulders  in  line — an  essential  object,  to  be  in- 
sisted on  and  attained. 

80.  The  instructor  having  given  the  recruit  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 


21 


position  of  the  soldier  without  arms,  will  now  teach 
him  the  turning  of  the  head  and  eyes.  He  will 
command : 

1.  Eyes — Eight.    2.  Front. 

81.  At  the  word  right,  the  recruit  will  turn  the 
head  gently,  so  as  to  bring  the  inner  corner  of  the 
left  eye  in  a  line  with  the  buttons  of  the  coat,  the 
eye.s  fixed  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  in,  or 
supposed  to  be  in,  the  same  rank. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  the  head  will  resume 
the  direct  or  habitual  position. 

83.  The  movement  of  Eyes — Left  will  be  executed 
by  inverse  means. 

84.  The  instructor  will  take  particular  care  that 
the  movement  of  the  head  does  not  derange  the 
squareness  of  the  shoulders,  which  will  happen  if 
the  movement  of  the  former  be  too  sudden. 

85.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  recruit  to 
pass  from  the  state  of  attention  to  that  of  ease,  he 
will  command : 

Rest. 

86.  To  cause  a  resumption  of  the  habitual  posi- 
tion, the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Attention.    2.  Squad. 

87.  At  the  first  word,  the  recruit  will  fix  his  atten- 
tion ;  at  the  second,  he  will  resume  the  prescribed 
position  and  steadiness. 

Lesson  IL 
Facings. 

88.  Facing  to  the  right  and  left  will  be  executed 
in  one  time,  or  pause.    The  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Right  (or  left) — Face. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  raise  the  right  foot 


22  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SCLDIER — PART  I. 


slightly,  turn  on  the  left  heel,  raising  the  toes  a 
little,  ana  then  replace  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of 
the  left,  and  on  the  same  line. 

90.  The  full  face  to  the  rear  (or  front)  will  be 
executed  in  two  times^  or  pauses.  The  instructor 
ivill  command: 

1.  Squad,    2.  Abolt — Face. 

91.  (First  time.)  At  the  word  about,  the  recruit 
will  turn  on  the  left  heel,  bring  the  left  toe  to  the 
front,  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  the  hollow 
opposite  to,  and  full  three  inches  from,  the  left  heel, 
the  feet  square  to  each  other. 

92.  (Second  time.)  At  the  word  face,  the  recruit 
will  turn  on  both  heels,  raise  the  toes  a  little,  ex- 
tend the  hams,  face  to  the  rear,  bringing,  at  the  same 
time,  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

93.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  these  mo- 
tions do  not  derange  the  position  of  the  body. 

Lesson  III. 
Principles  of  the  Direct  Step. 

94.  The  length  of  the  direct  step,  or  pace,  in  com- 
mon time,  will  be  twenty-eight  inches,  reckoning  from 
heel  to  heel,  and  in  swiftness,  at  the  rate  of  ninety 
in  a  minute. 

95.  The  instructor,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmed 
in  his  position,  will  explain  to  him  the  principle  and 
mechanism  of  this  step — placing  himself  six  or  seven 
paces  from,  and  facing  to,  the  recruit.  He  will  him- 
self execute  slowly  the  step  in  the  way  of  illustra- 
tion, and  then  command : 

1.  Squad  J  forward.    2.  Ccmmon  time, 
3.  March. 

96.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  thron 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I.  23 

the  weight  of  the  body  on  the  right  leg,  without 
bending  the  left  knee. 

97.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  smartly,  but 
without  a  jerk,  carry  straight  forward  the  left  foot 
twenty-eight  inches  from  the  right,  the  sole  near  the 
ground,  the  ham  extended,  the  toe  a  little  depressed, 
and,  as  also  the  knee,  slightly  turned  out ;  he  will, 
at  the  same  time,  throw  the  weight  of  the  body  for- 
ward, and  plant  flat  the  left  foot,  without  shock, 
precisely  at  the  distance  where  it  finds  itself  from 
the  right  when  the  weight  of  the  body  is  brought 
forward,  the  whole  of  which  will  now  rest  on  the 
advanced  foot.  The  recruit  will  next,  in  like  man- 
ner, advance  the  right  foot  and  plant  it  as  above, 
the  heel  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  heel  of  the 
left  foot,  and  thus  continue  to  march  without  crossing 
the  legs,  or  striking  the  one  against  the  other,  with- 
out turning  the  shoulders,  and  preserving  always  the 
face  direct  to  the  front. 

98.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the 
march,  he  will  command: 

1.  Squad.    2.  Halt. 

99.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
the  foot  in  the  rear  will  be  brought  up,  and  planted 
by  the  side  of  the  other,  without  shock. 

100.  The  instructor  will  indicate,  from  time  to  time, 
to  the  recruit,  the  cadence  of  the  step  by  giving  the 
command  one  at  the  instant  of  raising  a  foot,  and 
two  at  the  instant  it  ought  to  be  planted,  observing 
the  cadence  of  ninety  steps  in  a  ninute.  This  method 
will  contribute  greatly  to  impress  upon  the  mind  the 
two  motions  into  which  the  step  is  naturally  divided. 

101.  Common  time  will  be  employed  only  in  the 
first  and  second  parts  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier. 
As  soon  as  the  recruit  has  acquired  steadiness,  has 
become  established  in  the  principles  of  shoaliered 


24 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I. 


arms,  and  in  the  mechanism,  length  and  swiftness  of 
the  step  in  common  time,  he  will  be  practised  only  in 
quick  time,  the  double  quick  time,  and  the  run. 

102.  The  principles  of  the  step  in  quick  time  are 
the  same  as  for  common  time,  but  its  swiftness  is  at 
the  rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  steps  per  minute. 

103.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march  in 
quick  time,  will  command : 

1.  Squad,  forward.    2.  March. 

Lesson  IV. 
Principles  of  the  Double  Quick  Step. 

104.  The  length  of  the  double  quick  step  is  thirty- 
three  inches,  and  its  swiftness  at  the  rate  of  one 
hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  per  minute. 

105.  The  instructor  wishing  to  teach  the  recruits 
the  principles  and  mechanism  of  the  double  quick 
step,  will  command: 

1.  Double  quick  step.    2.  March. 

106.  At  the  first  command,  the  re^cruit  will  raise 
his  hands  to  a  level  with  his  hips,  the  hands  closed, 
the  nails  towards  the  body,  the  elbows  to  the  rear. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  raise  to  the 
front  his  left  leg  bent,  in  order  to  give  to  the  knee 
the  greatest  elevation,  the  part  of  the  leg  between  the 
knee  and  the  instep  vertical,  the  toe  depressed;  he 
will  then  replace  his  foot  in  its  former  position;  with 
the  right  leg  he  will  execute  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  left,  and  the  alternate  movement  of 
the  legs  will  be  continued  until  the  command: 

1.  Squad.    2.  Halt. 

108.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruit  will  bring 
the  foot  which  is  raised  by  the  side  of  the  other,  and 
dropping  at  the  same  time  his  hands  by  his  side,  will 
resume  the  position  of  the  soldier  without  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  I.  25 


109.  The  instructor  placing  himself  seven  or  eight 
paces  from,  and  facing  the  recruit,  will  indicate  the 
cadence  by  the  commands,  one  and  two,  given  alter- 
nately at  the  instant  each  foot  should  be  brought  to 
the  ground,  which  at  first  will  be  in  common  time, 
but  its  rapidity  will  be  gradually  augmented. 

110.  The  recruit  being  sufficiently  established  in  the 
principles  of  this  step,  the  instructor  will  command; 

1.  Squady  forward,    2.  Double  quick. 
3.  March. 

111.  At  the  first  command,  the  recruit  will  throw 
the  weight  of  his  body  on  the  right  leg. 

112.  At  the  second  command,  he  will  place  his  arms 
as  indicated  No.  106. 

113.  At  the  third  command,  he  will  carry  forward 
the  left  foot,  the  leg  slightly  bent,  the  knee  somewhat 
raised — will  plant  his  left  foot,  the  toe  first,  thirty- 
three  inches  from  the  right,  and  with  the  right  foot 
will  then  execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for 
the  left.  This  alternate  movement  of  the  legs  will 
take  place  by  throwing  the  weight  of  the  body  on 
the  foot  that  is  planted,  and  by  allowing  a  natural, 
oscillatory  motion  to  the  arms. 

114.  The  double  quick  step  may  be  executed  with 
different  degrees  of  swiftness.  Under  urgent  circum- 
stances the  cadence  of  this  step  may  be  increased  ia 
one  hundred  and  eighty  per  minute.  At  this  rate  a 
distance  of  four  thousand  yards  would  be  passed  over 
in  about  twenty-five  minutes. 

115.  The  recruits  will  be  exercised  also  in  running. 

116.  The  principles  are  the  same  as  for  the  double 
quick  step,  the  only  difference  consisting  in  a  greater 
degree  of  swiftness. 

117.  It  is  recommended  in  marching  at  double  quick 
time,,  or  the  run,  that  the  men  should  breathe  as  much 
as  possible  through  the  nose,  keeping  the  mouth 
closed.    Experience  has  proved  that,  by  conforming; 


26  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


to  this  principle,  a  man  can  pass  over  a  mucli  longer 
distance,  and  with  less  fatigue. 


PART  SECOND. 

GENERAL  RULES. 

118.  The  instructor  will  not  pass  the  men  to  this 
second  part  until  they  shall  be  well  established  in  the 
position  of  the  body,  and  in  the  manner  of  marching 
at  the  different  steps. 

119.  He  will  then  unite  four  men,  whom  he  will 
place  in  the  same  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  instruct 
them  in  the  position  of  shouldered  arms,  as  follows : 

Lesson  I. 
Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms. 

120.  The  recruit  being  placed  as  explained  in  the 
first  lesson  of  the  first  part,  the  instructor  will  cause 
him  to  bend  the  right  arm  slightly,  and  place  the 
piece  in  it,  in  the  following  manner: 

121.  The  piece  in  the  right  hand — the  barrel  nearly 
vertical  and  resting  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder — 
the  guard  to  the  front,  the  arm  hanging  nearly  at  its 
full  length  near  the  body;  the  thumb  and  fore-finger 
embracing  the  guard,  the  remaining  fingers  closed 
together,  and  grasping  the  swell  of  the  stock  just 
under  the  cock,  which  rests  on  the  little  finger. 

122.  Ilecruits  are  frequently  seen  with  natural 
defects  in  the  conformation  of  the  shoulders,  breast 
and  hips.  These  the  instructor  will  labor  to  correct 
in  the  lessons  without  arms,  and  afterwards,  by 
steady  endeavors,  so  that  the  appearance  of  the 
pieces,  in  the  same  line,  may  be  uniform,  and  this 
without  constraint  to  the  men  in  their  positions. 

123   The  instructor  will  have  occasion  to  remark 


SHOXJLDEB  AKMS  (No.  120X 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


27 


that  recruits,  on  first  bearing  arms,  are  liable  to 
derange  their  position  by  lowering  the  right  shoulder 
and  the  right  hand,  or  by  sinking  the  hip  and  spread- 
ing out  the  elbows. 

124.  He  will  be  careful  to  correct  all  these  faults 
by  continually  rectifying  the  position ;  he  will  some- 
times take  away  the  piece  to  replace  it  the  better ;  he 
will  avoid  fatiguing  the  recruits  too  much  in  the  be- 
ginning, but  labor  by  degrees  to  render  this  position 
so  natural  and  easy  that  they  may  remain  in  it  a  long 
time  without  fatigue. 

125.  Finally,  the  instructor  will  take  greax  care 
that  the  piece,  at  a  shoulder,  be  not  carried  too  high 
nor  too  low :  if  too  high,  the  right  elbow  would  spread 
out,  the  soldier  would  occupy  too  much  space  in  his 
rank,  and  the  piece  be  made  to  waver ;  if  too  low, 
the  tiles  would  be  too  much  closed,  the  soldier  would 
not  have  the  necessary  space  to  handle  his  piece 
with  facility,  the  right  arm  would  become  too  much 
fatigued,  and  would  draw  down  the  shoulder. 

126.  The  instructor,  before  passing  to  the  second 
lesson,  will  cause  to  be  repeated  the  movements  of 
eyes  right,  left,  and  front,  and  the  facings. 

Lesson  II. 
Manual  of  Arms. 

127.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  to  four 
men,  placed,  at  first,  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow, 
and  afterwards  in  two  ranks. 

128.  Each  command  will  be  executed  in  one  time 
(or  pause),  but  this  time  will  be  divided  into  motions, 
the  better  to  make  known  the  mechanism. 

129.  The  rate  (or  swiftness)  of  each  motion,  in 
the  manual  of  arms,  with  the  exceptions  herein  in- 
dicated, is  fixed  at  the  ninetieth  part  of  a  minute ; 
but,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  attention,  the  instruc- 
tor will,  at  first,  look  more  particularly  to  the  exe- 


28  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


cution  of  the  motions,  without  requiring  a  nice  ob- 
Bervance  of  the  cadence,  to  which  he  will  bring  the 
recruits  progressively,  and  after  they  shall  have  be- 
come a  little  familiarized  with  the  handling  of 'the 
piece. 

130.  As  the  motions  relative  to  the  cartridge,  to 
the  rammer,  and  to  the  fixing  and  unfixing  of  the 
bayonet,  cannot  be  executed  at  the  rate  prescribed, 
nor  even  with  a  uniform  swiftness,  they  will  not  be 
subjected  to  that  cadence.  The  instructor  will,  how- 
ever, labor  to  cause  these  motions  to  be  executed  with 
promptness,  and,  above  all,  with  regularity. 

131.  The  last  syllable  of  the  command  will  decide 
the  brisk  execution  of  the  first  motion  of  each  time 
(or  pause).  The  commands  two^  three,  and  four,  will 
decide  the  brisk  execution  of  the  other  motions.  As 
soon  as  the  recruits  shall  well  comprehend  the  posi- 
tions of  the  several  motions  of  a  time,  they  will  be 
taught  to  execute  the  time  without  resting  on  its 
difierent  motions ;  the  mechanism  of  the  time  will 
nevertheless  be  observed,  as  well  to  give  a  perfect 
use  of  the  piece,  as  to  avoid  the  sinking  of,  or  slur- 
ring over,  either  of  the  motions. 

132.  The  manual  of  arms  will  be  taught  in  the 
following  progression :  The  instructor  will  command : 

Support — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

138.  [First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece,  with  the  right 
hand,  perpendicularly  to  the  front  and  between  the 
eyes,  the  barrel  to  the  rear ;  seize  the  piece  with  the 
left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  raise  this  hand  as  high 
as  the  chin,  and  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with 
the  right  hand  four  inches  below  the  cock. 

134.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front;  carry  the  piece  to  the 
left  shoulder,  and  pass  the  fore-arm  extended  on  the 


28 


PL  2. 


r 


STJPPORT  ABMS  (No.  133*) 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.  29 


breast  between  the  right  hand  and  the  cock  ;  support 
the  cock  against  the  left  fore-arm,  the  left  hand  rest- 
ing on  the  right  breast. 

135.  {Third  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  by  tho 
Bide. 

136.  AVhen  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose 
in  this  position,  he  will  command : 

Rest. 

137.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  bring  up 
smartly  the  right  hand  to  the  handle  of  the  piece 
(small  of  the  stock),  when  they  will  not  be  required 
to  preserve  silence,  or  steadiness  of  position. 

138.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits  to 
pass  from  this  position  to  that  of  silence  and  steadi- 
ness, he  will  command : 

1.  Attention.   2.  Squad. 

139.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume 
the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  support  arms. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  three  motions, 

140.  {First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  under  and  against  the  left  fore-arm ;  seize  it 
with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  ex- 
tended ;  detach  the  piece  slightly  from  the  shoulder, 
the  left  fore-arm  along  the  stock. 

141.  {Second  motion.)  Carry  the  piece  vertically  to 
the  right  shoulder  with  both  hands,  the  rammer  to 
the  front,  change  the  position  of  the  right  hand  so 
as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger, slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder, 
the  fingers  extended  and  joined,  the  right  arm  nearly 
straight. 

142.  {Tlird  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by 
the  side. 

$ 


30 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


Present — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

143.  [First  motion.)  AVith  the  right  hand  bring  th^ 
piece  erect  before  the  centre  of  the  body,  the  ram- 
mer  to  the  front ;  at  the  same  time  seize  the  piece 
with  the  left  hand  half-way  between  the  guide  sight 
and  lower  band,  the  thumb  extended  along  the 
barrel  and  against  the  stock,  the  fore-arm  horizontal 
and  resting  against  the  body,  the  hand  as  high  aa 
the  elbow. 

144.  [Second  motion.)  Grasp  the  small  of  the  stock 
with  the  right  hand  below  and  against  the  guard. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

145.  [First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder,  at  the  same  time  change  the  position  of 
the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger,  slip  up  the  left  hand  to  the 
height  of  the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended  and 
joined,  the  right  arm  nearly  straight. 

146.  [Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Order — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

147.  [First  motio7i.)  Seize  the  piece  briskly  with 
the  left  hand  near  the  upper  band,  and  detach  it 
slightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand : 
loosen  the  grasp  of  the  right  hand,  lower  the  piece 
with  the  left,  reseize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand 
above  the  lower  band,  the  little  finger  in  rear  of  the 
barrel,  the  butt  about  four  inches  from  the  ground, 
the  right  hand  supported  against  the  hip,  drop  the 
left  hand  by  the  side. 

148.  [Second  motion.)  Let  the  piece  slip  through 


PZ.  3. 


PEESENT  ARMS  (No.  143). 


31 


PI. 


OEDEB  ARMS  (No.  147). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.  31 

the  right  hand  to  the  ground  by  opening  slightly 
the  fingers,  and  take  the  position  about  to  be 
described. 

Position  of  Order  Arms. 

149.  The  hand  low,  the  barrel  between  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger  extended  along  the  stock ;  the  other 
fingers  extended  and  joined;  the  muzzle  about  two 
inches  from  the  right  shoulder ;  the  rammer  in 
front;  the  toe  (or  beak)  of  the  butt,  against,  and 
in  a  line  with,  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  the  barrel 
perpendicular. 

160.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  to  give  repose 
in  this  position,  he  will  command : 

Rest. 

151.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  will  not  be 
required  to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness. 

152.  When  the  instructor  may  wish  the  recruits 
to  pass  from  this  position  to  that  of  silence  and 
steadiness,  he  will  command : 

1.  Attention,    2.  Squad. 

153.  At  the  second  word,  the  recruits  will  resume 
the  position  of  order  arms. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  tirne  and  two  motions, 

154.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  vertically  with 
the  right  hand  to  the  height  of  the  right  breast,  and 
opposite  the  shoulder,  the  elbow  close  to  the  body ; 
seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below  the  right, 
and  drop  quickly  the  right  hand  to  grasp  the  piece 
at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the  thumb  and  fore-finger 
embracing  the  guard ;  press  the  piece  against  the 
shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  the  right  arm  nearly 
straight. 


32 


SCnOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


165.  (Second  motion,)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Load  in  nine  times, 
1.  Load.* 
One  time  and  one  motion, 

156.  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  as  high 
as  the  right  elbow,  and  bring  it  vertically  opposite 
the  middle  of  the  body,  shift  the  right  hand  to  the 
upper  band,  place  the  butt  between  the  feet,  the 
barrel  to  the  front ;  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  near 
the  muzzle,  which  should  be  three  inches  from  the 
body ;  carry  the  right  hand  to  the  cartridge  box. 

2.  Handle — Cahtridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

157.  Seize  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  next 
two  fingers,  and  place  it  between  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion, 

158.  Tear  the  paper  to  the  powder,  hold  the 
cartridge  upright  between  the  thumb  and  first  two 
fingers,  near  the  top ;  in  this  position  place  it  in 
front  of  and  near  the  muzzle — the  back  of  the  hand 
to  the  front. 

4.  Charge — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

159.  Empty  the  powder  into  the  barrel :  disengage 
the  ball  from  the  paper  with  the  right  hand  and  the 
thumb  and  first  two  fingers  of  the  left ;  insert  it  into 
the  bore,  the  pointed  end  uppermost,  and  press  it  down 


*  Whenever  the  loadings  and  firings  are  to  be  executed,  the 
instructor  will  cause  the  cartridge  boxes  to  be  brought  to  the  iroui. 


32 


IiOAD  (Ho.  160. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


33 


with  the  right  thumb  ;  seize  the  head  of  the  rammer 
with  the  thumb  and  fore-linger  of  the  right  hand,  the 
Dther  fingers  closed,  the  elbows  near  the  body. 

6.  Draw — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

160.  {First  motion.)  Half  draw  the  rammer  by  ex- 
tending the  right  arm ;  steady  it  in  this  position  with 
the  left  thumb ;  grasp  the  rammer  near  the  muzzle 
with  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  uppermost,  the 
nails  to  the  front,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  ram- 
mer. 

161.  (Second  motion.)  Clear  the  rammer  from  the 
pipes  by  again  extending  the  arm ;  the  rammer  in  the 
prolongation  of  the  pipes. 

162.  (Third  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  little 
end  of  the  rammer  passing  near  the  left  shoulder; 
place  the  head  of  the  rammer  on  the  ball,  the  back 
of  the  hand  to  the  front. 

6.  Ram — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion, 

163.  Insert  the  rammer  as  far  as  the  right,  and 
steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  thumb  of  the  left 
hand;  seize  the  rammer  at  the  small  end  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  right  hand,  the  back 
of  the  hand  to  the  front ;  press  the  ball  home,  the 
elbows  near  the  body. 

7.  Return — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

164.  (First  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  half-way  out, 
and  steady  it  in  this  position  with  the  left  thumb ; 
grasp  it  near  the  muzzle  with  the  right  hand,  the  little 
finger  uppermost,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  thumb 
along  the  rammer;  clear  the  rammer  from  the  bore 


34  SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


hy  extending  the  arm,  the  nails  to  the  front,  the  ram- 
mer in  the  prolongation  of  the  bore. 

165.  (Second  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer,  the  head 
of  the  rammer  passing  near  the  left  shoulder,  and  in- 
sert it  in  the  pipes  until  the  right  hand  reaches  the 
muzzle,  the  nails  to  the  front. 

166.  [Third  motion.)  Force  the  rammer  home  by 
placing  the  little  finger  of  the  right  hand  on  the  head 
of  the  rammer ;  pass  the  left  hand  down  the  barrel 
to  the  extent  of  the  arm,  without  depressing  the 
shoulder. 

8.  Peime.* 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

167.  (First  motion.)  With  the  left  hand  raise  the 
piece  till  the  hand  is  as  high  as  the  eye,  grasp  the 
small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand ;  half  face  to 
the  right ;  place,  at  the  same  time,  the  right  foot  be- 
hind and  at  right  angles  with  the  left ;  the  hollow  of 
the  right  foot  against  the  left  heel.  Slip  the  left 
hand  down  to  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  along  the 
stock,  the  left  elbow  against  the  body  ;  bring  the  piece 
to  the  right  side,  the  butt  below  the  right  fore-arm — 
the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two  inches 
below  the  right  breast,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  muzzle 
on  a  level  with  the  eye. 

168.  (^Second  motion.)  Half  cock  with  the  thumb  of 
the  right  hand,  the  fingers  supported  against  the  guard 
and  the  small  of  the  stock — remove  the  old  cap  with 
one  of  the  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  and  with  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  of  the  same  hand  take  a  cap 
from  the  pouch,  place  it  on  the  nipple,  and  press  it 


*  If  Maynard's  primer  be  used,  the  command  will  be,  load  in  eight 
times,  aud  the  eighth  command  will  be,  shoulder  arms,  and  executed 
from  return,  rammer,  hi  one  time  and  two  motions,  as  follows : 

(First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  take  the 
position  of  shoulder  arms,  as  indicated  No.  145. 

{^Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly  by  the  side. 


It 


i 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.  35 

down  with  the  thumb;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock 
with  the  right  hand. 

9  Shoulder — Arms. 
One  )ime  and  two  motions. 

169.  [First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder  and  support  it  there  with  the  left  hand,  face 
to  the  front ;  bring  the  right  heel  to  the  side  of  and 
on  a  line  with  the  left ;  grasp  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand  as  indicated  in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 

170.  [Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  quickly 
by  the  side. 

Reai>t. 

One  time  and  three  motions. 

171.  [First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with 
the  right  hand,  making  a  half  face  to  the  right  on 
the  left  heel ;  carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  and 
place  it  at  right  angles  to  the  left,  the  hollow  of  it 
opposite  to,  and  against  the  left  heel ;  grasp  the  piece 
with  the  left  hand  at  the  lower  band  and  detach  it 
slightly  from  the  shoulder. 

172.  [Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  upwards,  the  left  thumb  ex- 
tended along  the  stock,  the  butt  below  the  right  fore- 
arm, the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body  and  two 
inches  below  the  right  breast,  the  muzzle  as  high  as 
the  eye,  the  left  elbow  against  the  side ;  place  at  the 
same  time  the  right  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  cock, 
the  other  fingers  under  and  against  the  guard. 

173.  [Third  motion.)  Cock,  and  seize  the  piece  at 
the  small  of  the  stock  without  deranging  the  position 
of  the  butt. 


36  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  11. 

Aim. 

One  time  and  one  motion, 

174.  Kaise  the  piece  with  both  hands,  and  support 
the  butt  against  the  right  shoulder ;  the  left  elbow 
down,  the  right  as  high  as  the  shoulder ;  incline  the 
head  upon  the  butt,  so  that  the  right  eye  may  per- 
ceive quickly  the  notch  of  the  hausse,  the  front  sight, 
and  the  object  aimed  at;  the  left  eye  closed,  the 
right  thumb  extended  along  the  stock,  the  fore-finger 
on  the  trigger. 

175.  When  recruits  are  formed  in  two  ranks  to 
execute  the  firings,  the  front  rank  men  will  raise  a 
little  less  the  right  elbow,  in  order  to  facilitate  the 
aim  of  the  rear  rank  men. 

176.  The  rear  rank  men,  in  aiming,  will  each  carry 
the  right  foot  about  eight  inches  to  the  right,  and  to- 
wards the  left  heel  of  the  man  next  on  the  right,  in- 
clining the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward. 

Fire. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

177.  Press  the  fore-finger  against  the  trigger,  fire, 
without  lowering  or  turning  the  head,  and  remain  in 
this  position. 

178.  Instructors  will  be  careful  to  observe  when 
the  men  fire,  that  they  aim  at  some  distinct  object, 
and  that  the  barrel  be  so  directed  that  the  line  of  fire 
and  the  line  of  sight  be  in  the  same  vertical  plane. 
They  will  often  cause  the  firing  to  be  executed  on 
ground  of  difi"erent  inclinations,  in  order  to  accustom 
the  men  to  fire  at  objects  either  above  or  below  them. 

Load. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

179.  Bring  down  the  piece  with  both  hands,  at  the 
eame  time  face  to  the"  front  and  take  the  position  of 


36 


pn. 


AIM  (Ifo.  174), 


37 


Pl.S. 


AS  KEAB  BAKE,  AIM  (So,  I7S. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


37 


load  as  indicated  No.  156.  Each  rear  rank  man  will 
bring  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

180.  The  men  being  in  this  position,  the  instructor 
will  cause  the  loading  to  be  continued  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  prescribed  No.  156  and  following. 

181.  If,  after  firing,  the  instructor  should  not  wish 
the  recruits  to  reload,  he  will  command : 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion, 

182.  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly  with  the  left 
hand,  and  resume  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  at 
the  same  time  face  to  the  front,  turning  on  the  left 
heel,  and  bring  the  right  heel  on  a  line  with  the  left. 

183.  To  accustom  the  recruits  to  wait  for  the  com- 
mand fire,  the  instructor,  when  they  are  in  the  posi- 
tion of  aim,  will  command : 

Recover — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

184.  At  the  first  part  of  the  command,  withdraw 
the  finger  from  the  trigger ;  at  the  command  arms, 
retake  the  position  of  the  third  motion  of  ready. 

185.  The  recruits  being  in  the  position  of  the  third 
motion  of  ready,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  td 
bring  them  to  a  shoulder,  he  will  command : 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion, 

186.  At  the  command  shoulder,  place  ^the  thumu 
upon  the  cock,  the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger,  half- 
cock,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand.  At  the  command  arms,  bring  up  the  piec© 
briskly  to  the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position 
of  shoulder  arms. 

4 


38  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 


187.  The  recruits  being  at  shoulder  arms,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  fix  bayonets,  he  will 
command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

One  tirne  and  three  motions, 

188.  (First  motion.)  Grasp  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  and  detach  it 
elightly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand. 

189.  (Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  lower  it  with  the  left  hand,  opposite  the  middle 
of  the  body,  and  place  the  butt,  between  the  feet 
without  shock ;  the  rammer  to  the  rear,  the  barrel 
vertical,  the  muzzle  three  inches  from  the  body ; 
seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  upper  band,  and 
carry  the  left  hand  reversed  to  the  handle  of  the 
sabre-bayonet. 

190.  (Third  motion.)  Draw  the  sabre-bayonet  from 
the  scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  extremity  of  the  bar- 
rel ;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  arm  ex- 
tended, the  right  hand  at  the  upper  band. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions, 

191.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  and  place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  the 
rammer  to  the  front ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time 
with  the  right  hand  at  the  swell  of  the  stock,  the 
thumb  and  fore-finger  embracing  the  guard,  the  right 
arm  nearly  extended. 

192.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  briskly  the  left  hand  by 
the  side. 

Charge — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  tivo  motions. 

193.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  slightly  with 
lie  right  hand  and  make  a  half  face  to  the  right  on 


38 


PL  9. 


CHABGE  BAYONET  (No.  193). 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II.  39 


the  left  heel ;  place  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  oppo- 
site to,  and  three  inches  from  the  left  heel,  the  feet 
square ;  seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the 
left  hand  a  little  above  the  lower  band. 

194.  (Second  motion.)  Bring  down  the  piece  with 
both  hands,  the  barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow 
against  the  body ;  seize  the  small  of  the  stock,  at  the 
game  time,  with  the  right  hand,  which  will  be  sup- 
ported against  the  hip  ;  the  point  of  the  sabre-bayonet 
as  high  as  the  eye. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

195.  {First  motion.)  Throw  up  the  piece  briskly 
with  the  left  hand  in  facing  to  the  front,  place  it 
against  the  right  shoulder,  the  rammer  to  the  front ; 
turn  the  right  hand  so  as  to  embrace  the  guard,  slide 
the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder,  the  right 
hand  nearly  extended. 

196.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by 
the  side. 

Trail — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions, 

197.  [First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of 
order  arms. 

198.  [Second  motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to 
the  front,  the  butt  to  the  rear  and  about  four  inches 
from  the  ground.  The  right  h.ind  supported  at  the 
hip,  will  so  hold  the  piece  that  the  rear  rank  men 
may  not  touch  with  their  bayonets  the  men  in  the 
front  rank. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

199.  At  the  command  shoulder,  raise  the  piece  per- 
pendicularly in  the  right  hand,  the  little  finger  in  rear 
of  the  barrel ;  at  the  command  arms,  execute  what  has 


40  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


been  prescribed  for  the  shoulder  from  tbe  position  of 
order  arms. 

Unfix — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  three  motions, 

200.  [First  and  second  motions.)  The  same  as  the  first 
and  second  motions  of  fix  bayonety  except  tiiat,  at  the 
end  of  the  second  command,  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand  will  be  placed  on  the  spring  of  the  sabre-bayo- 
net, and  the  left  hand  will  embrace  the  handle  of  the 
sabre-bayonet  and  the  barrel,  the  thumb  extended 
along  the  blade. 

201.  [Third  motion.)  Press  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand  on  the  spring,  wrest  off  the  sabre-bayonet,  turn 
it  to  the  right,  the  edge  to  the  front,  lower  the  guard 
until  it  touches  the  right  hand,  which  will  seize  the 
back  and  the  edge  of  the  blade  between  the  thumb 
and  first  two  fingers,  the  other  fingers  holding  the 
piece ;  change  the  position  of  tJie  hand  without  quit- 
ting the  handle,  return  the  sabre-bayonet  to  the  scab- 
bard, and  seize  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  arm 
extended. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions, 

202.  [First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion 
from^x  buyoneiy  No.  191. 

203.  [Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  motion 
from  fix  bayonet,  No.  1V?2. 

Secure — Ar3IS. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

204.  [First  motion.)  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of 
support  armsy  No.  133,  except  with  the  right  hand 
Beize  the  piece  at  the  small  of  the  stock. 

205.  [Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both 


40 


PL  la 


UNFIX  BAYONET  (No.  200). 


41 


Fl.  11. 


6ECim£  ABMS  {No.  aoD. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.  41 


hands,  the  barrel  to  the  front ;  bring  it  opposite  the 
left  shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  hand 
at  the  lower  band,  the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin  and 
extended  on  the  rammer ;  the  piece  erect  and  detached 
from  the  shoulder,  the  left  fore-arm  against  the  piece 

206.  [Third  motion. )  Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it  undei 
the  left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the  lowei 
band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent  it  from 
eliding  out,  the  little  finger  resting  against  the  hip, 
the  right  hand  falling  at  the  same  time  by  the  side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions, 

207.  [First  motion,)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand,  and  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small 
of  the  stock.  The  piece  erect  and  detached  from  the 
shoulder,  the  butt  against  the  hip,  the  left  fore-arm 
along  the  piece. 

208.  (Second  motion.)  The  same  as  the  second  motion 
of  shoulder  ar7ns  from  a  support. 

209.  [Third  motion.)  The  same  as  the  third  motion 
of  shoulder  arms  from  a  support. 

Right  shoulder  shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions, 

210.  [First  motion.)  Detach  the  piece  perpendicu 
larly  from  the  shoulder  with  the  right  hand,  and  seizi 
it  with  the  left  between  the  lower  band  and  guide 
sight,  raise  the  piece,  the  left  hand  at  the  height  of 
the  shoulder  and  four  inches  from  it ;  place,  at  th( 
same  time,  the  right  hand  on  the  butt,  the  beak  betweei 
the  first  two  fingers,  the  other  two  fingers  under  th( 
butt  plate. 

211.  [Second  motion.)  Quit  the  piece  with  the  lefl 
band,  raise  and  place  the  piece  on  the  right  shouldei 


42 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II. 


With  the  right  hand,  the  lock  plate  upwards;  let  faU 
at  the  same  time,  the  left  hand  by  the  side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

K^i^;  ({r'^"''"^"!'-)  Raise  the  piece  perpendicularly 
by  extending  the  right  arm  to  its  full  length,  the  ram^ 

the  eft  hand  between  the  lower  band  and  guide  sight 

bond   if  i      T''-'"-)  b^ttwith  the  right 

hand,  which  will  immediately  embrace  the  eua?d 

up  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of  the  shoulder  the 
fmgers^extended  and  closed.'  Drop  the  left  hand  by 

win\^;  being  at  support  arms,  the  instructor 

will  sometimes  cause  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  rieht 
Shoulder.    To  this  effect,  he  will  command :  ^ 

Jiiffht  shoulder  shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

hand^h^f"""^''"-)  piece  With  the  right 

hand,  be  ow  and  near  the  left  fore-arm,  place  the  left 

turotgt S 

shoulder  the  left  hand  still  holding  the  bmt  ?he 
muzzle  elevated;  hold  the  piece  in  this  position  and 
place  the  nght  hand  upon  .he  butt  as  is  prescribed 
Uo.  210,  and  let  fall  the  left  hand  by  the  side 

Support—Anus. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

rf^V'  /f^""""'!""-)  The  same  as  the  first  motion 
of  shoulder  arms,  No.  212.  mouon 


42 


PI.  12. 


43 


PI.  13. 


QBOXTNI}  ABMS  (No.  2223. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


43 


218.  {Second  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  both 
hands,  the  barrel  to  the  front,  carry  it  opposite  the 
left  shoulder,  slip  the  right  hand  to  the  small  of  the 
stock,  place  the  left  fore-arm  extended  on  the  breast 
as  is  prescribed  No.  134,  and  let  fall  the  right  hand 
by  the  side. 

Arms — At  will. 
One  time  and  one  motion, 

219.  At  this  command,  carry  the  piece  at  pleasure 
on  either  shoulder,  with  one  or  both  hands,  the  muz- 
zle elevated. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

220.  At  this  command,  retake  quickly  the  position 
of  shoulder  arms. 

221.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  the  pieces  to  be  placed 
on  the  ground,  he  will  command : 

Ground — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

222.  [First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  right 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  at  the  same  time  seize 
the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  bend  the  body, 
advance  the  left  foot,  the  heel  opposite  the  lower 
band ;  lay  the  piece  on  the  ground  with  the  right 
hand,  the  toe  of  the  butt  on  a  line  with  the  right  toe, 
the  knees  slightly  bent,  the  right  heel  raised. 

223.  [Second  motion.)  Kise  up,  bring  the  left  foot 
by  the  side  of  the  right,  quit  the  cartridge  box  with 
the  left  hand,  and  drop  the  hands  by  the  side. 

Raise — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions, 

224.  {First  motion.)  Seize  the  cartridge  box  with 


44 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


the  left  hand,  bend  the  body,  advance  the  left  foot 
opposite  the  lower  band,  and  seize  the  piece  with  the 
right  hand. 

225.  (Second  motion.)  Raise  the  piece,  bringing  the 
left  foot  by  the  side  of  the  right ;  turn  the  piece  with 
the  right  hand,  the  rammer  lo  the  front ;  at  the  same 
time  quit  the  cartridge  box  with  the  left  hand,  and 
drop  this  hand  by  the  side. 

Inspection  of  Arms. 

226.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  armSj  and  having 
the  sabre-bayonet  in  the  scabbard,  if  the  instructor 
wishes  to  cause  an  inspection  of  arms,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

Inspection— Arm  s  . 
One  time  and  tivo  motions, 

227.  [First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  below  and  near  the  upper  band,  carry  it  with 
both  hands  opposite  the  middle  of  the  body,  the  butt 
between  the  feet,  the  rammer  to  the  rear,  the  barrel 
vertical,  the  muzzle  about  three  inches  from  the  body  ; 
carry  the  left  hand  reversed  to  the  sabre-bayonet, 
draw  it  from  the  scabbard  and  fix  it  on  the  barrel; 
grasp  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  below  and  near  the 
upper  band,  seize  the  rammer  with  the  thumb  and 
fore- finger  of  the  right  hand  bent,  the  other  fingers 
closed. 

228.  [Second  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer  as  has  been 
explained  in  loading,  and  let  it  glide  to  the  bottom  of 
the  bore,  replace  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  opposite 
the  right  shoulder,  and  retake  the  position  of  ordered 
arms. 

229.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect  in  succession 
the  piece  of  each  recruit,  in  passing  along  the  front 
of  the  rank.  Each,  as  the  instructor  reaches  him, 
will  raise  smartly  his  piece  with  his  right  hand,  seize 
it  with  the  left  be:ween  the  lower  band  and  guide 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.  45 


sight,  the  lock  to  the  front,  the  left  hand  at  the  height 
of  the  chin,  the  piece  opposite  to  the  left  eye;  the 
instructor  will  take  it  with  tlie  right  hand  at  the  handle, 
and,  after  inspecting  it,  will  return  it  to  the  recruit, 
who  will  receive  it  back  with  the  right  hand,  and  re- 
place it  in  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

230.  When  the  instructor  shall  have  passed  him, 
each  recruit  will  ret.ike  the  position  prescribed  at 
the  command  inspection  arms,  return  the  rammer,  and 
resume  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

231.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  the  instructor 
should  merely  wish  to  cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  ho 
will  command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

232.  Take  the  position  indicated  No.  227,  fix  bayo- 
nets as  has  been  explained,  and  immediately  resume 
the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

233.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor,  after  firing, 
to  ascertain  whether  the  pieces  have  been  discharged, 
he  will  command : 

Spring — R  a  m  m  e  r  s . 

234.  Put  the  rammer  in  the  barrel  as  has  been  ex- 
plained above,  and  immediately  retake  the  position 
of  ordered  arms. 

235.  The  instructor,  for  the  purpose  stated,  can 
take  the  rammer  by  the  small  end,  and  spring  it  in 
the  barrel,  or  cause  each  recruit  to  make  it  ring  in 
the  barrel. 

236.  Each  recruit,  after  the  instructor  passes  him, 
will  return  rammer,  and  resume  the  position  of  or- 
dered arms. 

Eemarks  en  the  Manual  of  Arms. 

237.  The  manual  of  arms  frequently  distorts  the 
persons  of  recruits  before  they  acquire  ease  and  con- 


46 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


fidence  in  the  several  positions.  The  instructor  "will 
therefore  frequently  recur  to  elementary  principles 
in  the  course  of  the  lessons. 

238.  Recruits  are  also  extremely  liable  to  curve 
the  sides  and  back,  and  to  derange  the  shoulders, 
especially  in  loading.  Consequently,  the  instructor 
will  not  cause  them  to  dwell  too  long,  at  a  time,  in 
one  position. 

239.  When,  after  some  days  of  exercise  in  the 
manual  of  arms,  the  four  men  shall  be  well  esta- 
blished in  their  use,  the  instructor  will  always  ter- 
minate the  lesson  by  marching  the  men  for  some 
time  in  one  rank,  and  at  one  pace  apart,  in  common 
and  quick  time,  in  order  to  confirm  them  more  and 
more  in  the  mechanism  of  the  step ;  he  will  also 
teach  them  to  mark  time  and  to  change  step,  which 
will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner: 

To  mark  time. 

240.  The  four  men  marching  in  the  direct  step,  the 
instructor  will  command : 

1.  Mark  time.    2.  March. 

241.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  a  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the 
recruits  will  make  a  semblance  of  marching,  by 
bringing  the  heels  by  the  side  of  each  other,  and  ob- 
serving the  cadence  of  the  step,  by  raising  each  foot 
alternately  without  advancing. 

242.  The  instructor  wishing  the  direct  step  lo  be 
resumed,  will  command : 

1.  Forioard.    2.  March. 

243.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
as  prescribed  above,  the  recruits  will  retake  the  step 
of  twenty-eight  inches. 


SCHOOL  01   THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


47 


To  change  step. 

244.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor 
will  command: 

1.  Change  step.    2.  Maecii. 

245.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
ftt  the  instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  tlio  ground, 
bring  the  foot  which  is  in  rear  by  the  side  of  that 
which  is  in  front,  and  step  olf  again  with  the  foot 
which  was  in  front. 

To  march  backwards. 

246.  The  instructor  wishing  the  squad  to  march 
backwards,  will  command; 

1.  Squad  hackivard.    2.  Makch. 

247.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruits  will  step 
off  smartly  with  the  left  foot  fourteen  inches  to  the 
rear,  reckoning  from  heel  to  heel,  and  so  on  with  the 
feet  in  succession  till  the  command  halt,  which  will 
always  be  preceded  Vjy  the  caution  sguad.  The  men 
will  halt  at  this  command,  and  bring  back  the  foot  in 
front  by  the  side  of  the  other. 

248.  This  step  will  always  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

249.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  re- 
cruits march  straight  to  the  rear,  and  that  the  erect 
position  of  the  body  and  the  piece  be  not  deranged. 

Lesson  III. 
To  load  in  four  times. 

250.  The  object  of  this  lesson  is  to  prepare  the  re- 
cruits to  load  at  will,  and  to  cause  them  to  distinguish 
the  times  which  require  the  greatest  regularity  and 
attention,  such  as  charge  cartridge^  ram  cartridge^  and 
prime.    It  will  be  divided  as  follows: 

5 


48  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


251.  The  first  time  will  be  executed  at  the  end  of 
the  commjind ;  the  three  others  at  the  commands, 
two,  three  and/owr. 

The  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Load  in  four  times.    2,  Load. 

252.  Execute  the  times  to  include  charge  cartridge. 

Two. 

253.  Execute  the  times  to  include  ram  cartridge. 

Three. 

254.  Execute  the  times  to  include  prime. 

Four. 

255.  Execute  the  time  of  shoulder  arms. 

To  load  at  will. 

256.  The  instructor  will  next  teach  loading  at  will, 
wliich  will  be  executed  as  loading  in  four  times,  but 
continued,  and  without  resting  on  either  of  the  times. 
He  will  command : 

1.  Load  at  will.    2.  Load. 

257.  The  instructor  will  habituate  the  recruits,  by 
degrees,  to  load  with  the  greatest  possible  prompti- 
tude, each  without  regulating  himself  by  his  neigh- 
bor, and  above  all  without  waiting  for  him. 

258.  The  cadence  prescribed  No.  129,  is  not  appli- 
cable to  loading  in  four  times,  or  at  will. 

Lesson  IV. 
Firings. 

259.  The  firings  are  direct  or  oblique,  and  will  be 
executed  as  follows : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


49 


The  direct  fire. 

260.  The  instructor  will  give  the  following  coni- 
mauds : 

1    Fire  by  Squad.     2.  Squad.     3.  Keady.     4.  Aim. 
6.  Fire.    6.  Load. 

261.  These  several  commands  will  be  executed  aa 
has  been  prescribed  in  t  he  Manual  of  Arms.  At  the 
third  command,  the  men  will  come  to  the  position  of 
ready  as  heretofore  explained.  At  the  fourth  they 
will  aim  according  to  the  rank  in  which  each  may 
find  himself  placed,  the  rear  rank  men  inclining  for- 
ward a  little  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  in  order 
that  their  pieces  may  reach  as  much  beyond  the  front 
rank  as  possible. 

262.  At  the  sixth  command,  they  will  load  their 
pieces  and  return  immediately  to  the  position  of  ready. 

263.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by 
the  commands : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

264.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  firing  to  cease, 
he  will  command: 

Cease  firing. 

265.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing, 
but  will  load  their  pieces  if  unloaded,  and  afterwards 
bring  them  to  a  shoulder. 

Oblique  Firings. 

266.  The  oblique  firings  will  be  executed  to  the 
right  and  left,  and  by  the  same  commands  as  the 
direct  fire,  with  this  single  difference — the  command 
aim  will  always  be  preceded  by  the  caution,  right  or 
l^t  oblique. 


50 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  the 
right. 

2G7.  At  the  command  ready ^  the  two  ranks  will  exe- 
cute what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  direct  fire. 

268.  At  the  cautionary  command,  right  oblique^  the 
two  ranks  will  throwback  the  right  shoulder  and  look 
steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

269.  At  the  command  aim^  each  front  rank  man 
will  aim  to  the  right  without  deranging  the  feet; 
each  rear  rank  man  will  advance  the  left  foot  about 
eight  inches  towards  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next 
on  the  right  of  his  file  leader,  and  aim  to  the  right, 
inclining  the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and 
bending  a  little  the  left  knee. 

Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the  Oblique  Fire  to  the 
left. 

270.  At  the  cautionary  command  left  ohlique^  the 
two  ranks  will  throw  back  the  left  shoulder  and  look 
steadily  at  the  object  to  be  hit. 

271.  At  the  command  aim,  the  front  rank  will  take 
aim  to  the  left  without  deranging  the  feet;  each  man 
in  the  rear  rank  will  advance  the  right  foot  about 
eight  inches  towards  the  right  heel  of  the  man  next 
on  the  rin^ht  of  his  file  leader,  and  aim  to  the  left,  in- 
clining the  upper  part  of  the  body  forward  and  bend- 
ing a  little  the  right  knee. 

272.  In  both  cases,  at  the  comm.and  load,  the  men 
of  each  rank  will  come  to  the  position  of  load  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  direct  fire ;  the  rear  rank  men  bring- 
ing back  the  foot  which  is  to  the  right  and  front  by 
the  side  of  the  other.  Each  man  will  continue  to 
load  as  if  isolated. 

To  fire  by  file. 

273.  The  fire  by  file  will  be  executed  by  the  two 
ranks,  the  files  of  which  will  fire  successively,  and 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


51 


without  regulating  on  each  other,  except  for  the  first 
fire. 

274.  The  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Fire  by  file.    2.  Squad,    3.  Ready.    4.  Commence 

FIRINO. 

275.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will  take 
the  position  prescribed  in  the  direct  fire. 

276.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  file  on  the  right 
will  aim  and  fire;  the  rear  rank  man  in  aiming  will 
take  the  position  indicated  No.  176. 

277.  The  men  of  this  file  will  load  their  pieces 
briskly  and  fire  a  second  time ;  reload  and  fire  again, 
and  so  on  in  continuation. 

278.  The  second  file  will  aim,  at  the  instant  the 
first  brings  down  pieces  to  reload,  and  will  conform 
in  all  respects  to  that  which  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  first  file. 

279.  After  the  first  fire,  the  front  and  rear  rank 
men  will  not  be  required  to  fire  at  the  same  time. 

280.  Each  man,  after  loading,  will  return  to  the 
position  of  ready  and  continue  the  fire. 

281.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  fire  to  cease, 
he  will  command : 

Cease — FmiNa. 

282.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  cease  firing. 
If  they  have  fired  they  will  load  their  pieces  and 
bring  them  to  a  shoulder ;  if  at  the  position  of  ready ^ 
they  will  half-cock  and  shoulder  arms.  If  in  the  po- 
Bition  of  aim,  they  will  bring  down  their  pieces,  half- 
cock,  and  shoulder  arms. 

To  fire  by  rank. 

283.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by  eacii 
entire  rank,  alternately 


52 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


284.  The  instructor  wi^l  command : 

1.  Fire  hy  rank.    2.  Squad.    3.  Ready.    4.  Rear 
rank.    5.  Am.    6.  Fire.    7.  Load. 

285.  At  the  third  command,  the  two  ranks  will 
take  the  position  of  ready,  as  prescribed  in  the  direct 
fire. 

286.  At  the  seventh  command,  the  rear  rank  will 
execute  that  which  has  been  prescribed  in  the  direct 
fire,  and  afterwards  take  the  position  of  ready. 

287.  As  soon  as  the  instructor  sees  several  men  of 
the  rear  rank  in  the  position  of  ready,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Front  rank.    2.  Aim.    S.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

288.  At  these  commands,  the  men  in  the  front  rank 
will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  rear 
rank,  but  they  will  not  step  off  with  the  right  foot. 

289.  The  instructor  will  recommence  the  firing  by 
the  rear  rank,  and  will  thus  continue  to  alternate 
from  rank  to  rank,  until  he  shall  wish  the  firing  to 
cease,  when  he  will  command,  cease  firing,  which  will 
be  executed  as  heretofore  prescribed. 

Lesson  V. 
To  fire  and  load  kneeling. 

290.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  supposed 
loaded  and  drawn  up  in  one  rank.  The  instruction 
will  be  given  to  each  man  individually,  without  times 
or  motions,  and  in  the  following  manner. 

291.  The  instructor  will  command : 

Fire  and  load  kneeling. 

292.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the 
squad  will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt ;  then 
carry  the  right  foot  to  the  rear  and  to  the  right  of 
the  left  heel,  and  in  a  position  convenient  for  placing 
the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  in  bending  the  left 


52 


PI  14. 


FIKE  AND  LOAD  KNEELIITQ  (No.  292). 


1 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.  53 


leg ;  place  the  right  knee  upon  the  ground  ;  lower 
the  piece,  the  left  fore-arm  supported  upon  the  thigh 
on  the  same  side,  the  right  hand  on  the  small  of  tho 
stock,  the  butt  resting  on  the  right  thigh,  the  left 
hand  supporting  the  piece  near  the  lower  band. 

293.  He  will  next  move  the  right  leg  to  the  left 
around  the  knee  supported  on  the  ground,  until  this 
leg  is  nearly  perpendicular  to  the  direction  of  the 
left  foot,  and  thus  seat  himself  comfortably  on  tho 
right  heel. 

294.  liaise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  and  sup- 
port it  with  the  left,  holding  it  near  the  lower  band, 
the  left  elbow  resting  on  the  left  tliigh  near  the  knee ; 
seize  the  hammer  with  the  thumb,  the  fore-finger 
under  the  guard,  cock  and  seize  the  piece  at  the 
small  of  the  stock;  bring  the  piece  to  the  shoulder, 
aim  and  fire. 

295.  Bring  the  piece  down  as  soon  as  it  is  fired, 
and  support  it  with  the  left  hand,  the  butt  resting 
against  the  right  thigh  ;  carry  the  piece  to  the  rear 
rising  on  the  knee,  the  barrel  downwards,  the  butt 
resting  on  the  ground;  in  this  position  support  the 
piece  with  the  left  hand  at  the  upper  band,  draw 
cartridge  with  the  right  and  load  the  piece,  ramming 
the  ball,  if  necessary,  with  both  hands. 

296.  When  loaded  bring  the  piece  to  the  front  with 
the  left  hand,  which  holds  it  at  the  upper  band ;  S'size 
it  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small 
of  the  stock  ;  turn  the  piece,  the  barrel  uppermost 
and  nearly  horizontal,  the  left  elbow  resting  on  th^ 
left  thigh  ;  half-cock,  remove  the  old  cap  and  prime, 
rise,  and  return  to  the  ranks. 

297.  The  second  man  will  then  be  taught  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  through 
the  remainder  of  the  squad. 

To  fire  and  load  lying. 

298.  In  this  exercise  the  squad  will  be  in  one  rank 


64 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II. 


and  loaded  ;  the  instruction  will  be  given  individually 
and  without  times  or  motions. 

299.  The  instructor  will  command : 

Fire  and  load  lying. 

300.  At  this  command,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the 
squad  will  move  forward  three  paces  and  halt ;  he 
will  then  bring  his  piece  to  an  order,  drop  on  both 
knees,  and  place  himself  on  the  ground  flat  on  his 
belly.  In  this  position  he  will  support  the  piece 
nearly  horizontal  with  the  left  hand,  holding  it  near 
the  lower  band,  the  butt  end  of  the  piece  and  the 
left  elbow  resting  on  the  ground,  the  barrel  upper- 
most ;  cock  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  and  carry 
this  hand  to  the  small  of  the  stock  ;  raise  the  piece 
with  both  hands,  press  the  butt  against  the  shoulder, 
and  resting  on  both  elbows,  aim  and  fire. 

301.  As  soon  as  he  has  fired,  bring  the  piece  down 
and  turn  upon  his  left  side,  still  resting  on  his  left 
elbow;  bring  back  the  piece  until  the  cock  is  oppo- 
site his  breast,  the  butt  end  resting  on  the  ground ; 
take  out  a  cartridge  with  the  right  hand  ;  seize  the 
small  of  the  stock  with  this  hand,  holding  the  car- 
tridge with  the  thumb  and  two  first  fingers ;  he  will 
then  throw  himself  on  his  back,  still  holding  the  piece 
with  both  hands;  carry  the  piece  to  the  rear,  place 
the  butt  between  the  heels,  the  barrel  up,  the  muzzle 
elevated.  In  this  position,  charge  cartridge,  draw 
rammer,  ram  cartridge,  and  return  rammer. 

302.  When  finished  loading,  the  man  will  turn 
again  upon  his  left  side,  remove  the  old  cap  and 
prime,  then  raise  the  piece  vertically,  rise,  turn 
about,  and  resume  his  position  in  the  ranks. 

803.  The  second  man  will  be  taught  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  first,  and  so  on  through- 
out the  squad. 


54 


Fl.  15. 


aUAKD  AaAINST  INPANTEY  (No.  SOS). 


55 


PI,  IG. 


GUAKD  AGAZN-ST  CAVAIiRY  (No.  308) 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  II.  5& 


Lesson  VI. 
Bayonet  Exercise. 
804.  The  bayonet  exercise  in  this  book  will  be 
confined  to  two  movements,  the  guard  against  infantry, 
and  the  guard  against  cavalry.  The  men  will  be 
placed  in  one  rank,  with  two  paces  interval,  and  be- 
ing at  shoulder  arms,  the  instructor  will  command; 

1.  Guard  against  Infantry.    2.  Guard. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

305.  [First  motion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right, 
turning  on  both  heels,  the  feet  square  to  each  other ; 
at  the  same  time  raise  the  piece  slightly,  and  seize  it 
with  the  left  hand  above  and  near  the  lower  band. 

306.  (Second  motion.)  Carry  the  right  foot  twenty 
inches  perpendicularly  to  the  rear,  the  right  heel  on 
the  prolongation  of  the  left,  the  knees  slightly  bent, 
the  weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  on  both  legs ; 
lower  the  piece  with  both  hands,  the  barrel  upper- 
most, the  left  elbow  against  the  body  ;  seize  the  piece 
at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of 
the  stock,  the  arms  falling  naturally,  the  point  of  the 
bayonet  slightly  elevated. 

Shoulder — Akms. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

807.  Throw  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and 
place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time 
bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left  and  fac6 
to  the  front. 

1.  Guard  against  Cavalry.    2.  Guard, 

One  time  and  two  motions. 

308.  Both  motions  the  same  as  for  guard  against 
infantry^  except  that  the  right  hand  will  be  supported 


56        SCHOOL  or  the  soldier — part  hi. 


against  the  hip,  and  the  bayonet  held  at  the  height 

of  the  eye,  as  in  charge  bayonet. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

One  time  and  one  motion, 

809.  Spring  up  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  and 
place  it  against  the  right  shoulder,  at  the  same  time 
bring  the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left,  and  face 
to  the  front. 


PAET  THIRD. 

310.  When  the  recruits  are  well  established  in  the 
principles  and  mechanism  of  the  step^  the  position  of  the 
body^  and  the  manual  of  arms,  the  instructor  will  unite 
eight  men,  at  least,  and  twelve  men,  at  most,  in  order 
to  teach  them  the  principles  of  alignment,  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  touch  of  elbows  in  marching  to  the  front, 
the  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flanlc^  wheeling 
from  a  halt,  wheeling  in  marching,  and  the  change 
cf  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide.  He  will  place 
the  squad  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and  number 
the  men  from  right  to  left. 

Lesson  I. 
Alignments. 

811.  The  instructor  will  at  first  teach  the  recruits 
to  align  themselves  man  by  man,  in  order  the  better 
to  make  them  comprehend  the  principles  of  align- 
ment ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command  the  two  men  on 
the  right  flank  to  march  two  paces  to  the  front,  and 
having  aligned  them,  he  will  caution  the  remainder 
of  the  squad  to  move  up,  as  they  may  be  successively 
called,  each  by  his  number,  and  align  themselves 
successively  on  the  line  of  the  first  two  men. 

312.  Each  recruit,  as  designated  by  his  number, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.  57 


will  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  right  as  prescribed 
in  the  first  lesson  of  the  first  part,  and  will  march  in 
quick  time  tivo  paces  forward,  shortening  the  last,  so  as 
to  find  himself  about  six  inches  behind  the  new  align- 
ment, which  he  ought  never  to  pass:  he  will  next 
move  up  steadily  by  steps  of  two  or  three  inches,  the 
hams  extended,  to  the  side  of  the  man  next  to  him 
on  the  alignment,  so  that,  without  deranging  the 
head,  the  line  of  the  eyes,  or  that  of  the  shoulders, 
he  may  find  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  his  neighbor, 
whose  elbow  he  will  lightly  touch  without  opening 
his  own. 

313.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rank  well  aligned, 
will  command: 

Front. 

314.  At  this,  the  recruits  will  turn  eyes  to  the 
front,  and  remain  firm. 

316.  Alignments  to  the  left  will  be  executed  on  the 
same  principles. 

316.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  thus  learned  to 
align  themselves  man  by  man,  correctly,  and  without 
groping  or  jostling,  the  instructor  will  cause  the 
entire  rank  to  align  itself  at  once  by  the  command : 

Right  (or  left) — Dress. 

317.  At  this,  the  rank,  except  the  two  men  placed 
in  advance  as  a  basis  of  alignment,  will  move  up  in 
quick  time,  and  place  themselves  on  the  new  line,  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  312. 

318.  The  instructor,  placed  five  or  six  paces  in  front, 
and  facing  the  rank,  will  carefully  observe  that  the 
principles  are  followed,  and  then  pass  to  the  flank 
that  has  served  as  the  basis,  to  verify  the  alignment. 

319.  The  instructor  seeing  the  greater  number  of 
the  rank  aligned,  will  command  : 


58  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


Front. 

320.  Tlie  instructor  may  afterwards  order  this  oi 
that  filQ  forward  or  back,  designating  each  by  its  num- 
ber. Tlie  file  or  files  deyignnted,  only,  will  slightly 
turn  the  head  towards  the  basis,  to  judge  how  much 
they  ougnt  to  move  up  or  back,  steadily  phice  them- 
selves on  the  line,  and  then  turn  eyes  to  the  front, 
without  a  particular  command  to  that  eliect. 

821.  Alignments  to  the  rear  will  be  executed  on  the 
same  principles,  the  recruits  stepping  back  a  little 
beyond  the  line,  and  then  dressing  up  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  No.  312,  the  instructor 
commanding : 

Right  (or  left)  hachiuard — Dress. 

822.  After  each  alignment,  the  instructor  will  ex- 
amine the  position  of  the  men,  and  cause  the  rank  to 
come  to  drdered  arms,  to  prevent  too  much  fatigue,  and 
also  the  danger  of  negligence  at  shouldered  arms. 

Lesson  II. 

828.  The  men  having  learned,  in  the  first  and  second 
parts,  to  march  with  steadiness  in  common  time,  and 
to  take  steps  equal  in  length  and  swiftness^  will  be 
exercised  in  the  third  part  only  in  q^dc/c  tivic,  double 
quick  time,  and  the  rtm  ;  the  instructor  will  cause  them 
to  execute  successively^  at  these  ditlerent  gaits,  the 
march  to  the  front,  the  facing:  about  in  marching,  the 
march  by  the  fiank,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  march- 
ing, and  the  changes  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide. 

324.  The  instructor  will  inform  the  recruits  that  at 
the  command  march,  they  will  always  move  otF  in 
quick  time,  unless  this  command  should  be  preceded 
by  that  of  double  quick. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.  59 


To  march  to  the  front. 

325.  The  rank  being  correctly  aligned,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  by  the 
front,  he  will  place  a  well-instructed  man  on  the 
right  or  the  left,  according  to  the  side  on  which  he 
may  wish  the  guide  to  be,  and  command : 

\.  Squad,  forward.  2.  Guide  right  [ov  left),  S.March. 

326.  At  the  command  march,  the  rank  will  step  off 
smartly  with  the  left  foot ;  the  guide  will  take  care  iQ 
march  straight  to  the  front,  keeping  his  shoulders 
always  in  a  square  with  that  line. 

327.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  marching  te 
the  front,  that  the  men  touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards 
the  side  of  the  guide ;  that  they  do  not  open  out  the 
left  elbow,  nor  the  right  arm  ;  that  they  yield  to  press- 
ure coming  from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that 
coming  from  the  opposite  side ;  that  they  recover  by 
insensible  degrees  the  slight  touch  of  the  elbow,  if 
lost;  that  they  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front, 
no  matter  on  which  side  the  guide  may  be ;  and  if 
found  before  or  behind  the  alignment,  that  the  man 
in  fault  corrects  himself  by  shortening  or  lengthening 
the  step,  by  degrees,  almost  insensible. 

328.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  cause  recruits  to 
comprehend  that  the  alignment  can  only  be  preserved, 
in  marching,  by  the  regularity  of  the  step,  the  touch 
of  the  elbow,  and  the  maintenance  of  the  shoulders 
in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction ;  that  if,  for  ex- 
ample, the  step  of  some  be  longer  than  that  of  others, 
or  if  some  march  faster  than  others,  a  separation  of 
elbows,  and  a  loss  of  the  alignment,  would  be  inevi- 
table ;  that  if  (it  being  required  that  the  head  should 
be  direct  to  the  front)  they  do  not  strictly  observe 
the  touch  of  elbows,  it  would  be  impossible  fcr  an  in- 
dividual to  judge  whether  he  marches  abreast  with 

6 


60  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


his  neighbor,  or  not,  and  wliether  there  be  not  an  in- 
terval  between  them. 

329.  The  impulsion  of  the  quick  step  having  a  ten- 
dency to  make  men  too  easy  and  free  in  their  move- 
ments, the  instructor  will  be  careful  to  regulate  the 
cadence  of  this  step,  and  to  habituate  them  to  pre- 
serve always  the  erectness  of  the  body,  and  the  due 
length  of  the  pace. 

830.  The  men  being  well  established  in  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  direct  march,  the  instructor  will  exercise 
them  in  marching  obliquely.  The  rank  being  in 
march,  the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.    2.  March. 

331.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make 
a  half  face  to  the  right  (or  left),  and  will  then  march 
straight  forward  in  the  new  direction.  As  the  men 
no  longer  touch  elbows,  they  will  glance  along  the 
shoulders  of  the  nearest  files,  towards  the  side  to 
which  they  are  obliquing,  and  will  regulate  their 
steps  so  that  the  shoulders  shall  always  be  behind 
that  of  their  next  neighbor  on  that  side,  and  that 
his  head  shall  conceal  the  heads  of  the  other  men  in 
the  rank.  Besides  this,  the  men  should  preserve  the 
same  length  of  pace,  and  the  same  degree  of  obliquity 

382.  The  instructor  wishing  to  resume  the  primitive 
direction,  will  command: 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

383.  At  the  second  command,  each  man  will  make 
a  half  face  to  the  left  (or  right),  and  all  will  then 
march  straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  direct  march. 

To  march  to  the  front  in  double  quick  time. 

834.  When  the  several  principles,  heretofore  ex- 
plained, have  beccme  familiar  to  the  recruits,  and 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


61 


("hey  filiall  be  well  established  in  the  position  of  the 
body,  the  bearing  of  arms,  and  the  mechanism, 
length,  an(f  swiftness  of  the  step,  the  instructor  will 
pass  them  from  quick  to  double  quick  time,  and  the 
reverse,  observing  not  to  make  them  march  obliquely 
in  double  quick  time,  till  they  are  well  established  ia 
the  cadence  of  this  step. 

335.  The  ^squad  being  at  a  march  in  quick  time, 
the  instructor  will  command  : 

1.  Double  quick.    2.  March. 

836.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad 
will  step  off  in*  double  quick  time.  The  men  will  en- 
deavor to  follow  the  principles  laid  down  in  the  first 
part  of  this  book,  and  to  preserve  the  alignment. 

337.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  squad  to  re- 
Bume  the  step  in  quick  time,  he  will  command : 

1.  Quick  time.    2.  March. 

338.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  squad 
will  retake  the  step  in  quick  time. 

339.  The  squad  being  in  march,  the  instructor  will 
halt  it  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed  Nos. 
98  and  99.  The  command  halt  will  be  given  an  instant 
before  the  foot  is  ready  to  be  placed  on  the  ground. 

340.  The  squad  being  in  march  in  double  quick 
time,  the  instructor  will  occasionally  cause  it  to  mark 
time  by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  240.  The  men 
will  then  mark  double  quick  time,  without  altering 
the  cadence  of  the  step.  He  will  also  cause  them  to 
pass  from  the  dire(it  to  the  oblique  step,  and  recipro- 
cally, conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No. 
830,  and  following. 

341.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will 
cause  it  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  by  preceding 
the  command  march,  by  double  quick. 


62 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


842.  The  instructor  will  endeavor  to  regulate  weI3 
tlie  cadence  of  this  step. 

To  face  about  in  marching. 

843.  If  the  squad  be  marching  in  quick,  or  double 
quick  time,  and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  march 
it  in  retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.  Squad  right  about,    2.  March. 

344.  At  the  command  march^  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
the  recruit  will  bring  this  foot  to  the  ground,  and, 
turning  on  it,  will  face  to  the  rear ;  he  will  then  place 
the  right  foot  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  ofl  with 
the  left  foot. 

To  march  backwards. 

845.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  instructor 
should  wish  to  march  it  in  the  back  step,  he  will 
command  : 

\.  Squad  backward.  2.  Guide  left  [ov  right).  S.March. 

346.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  by  the  means 
prescribed  No.  247. 

347.  The  instructor,  in  this  step,  will  be  watchful 
that  the  men  do  not  lean  on  each  other. 

348.  As  the  march  to  the  front  in  quick  time 
should  only  be  executed  at  shouldered  arms,  the  in- 
structor, in  order  not  to  fatigue  the  men  too  much, 
RDd  also  to  prevent  negligence  in  gait  and  position, 
will  halt  the  squad  from  time  to  time,  and  cause  arms 
to  be  ordered. 

849.  In  marching  at  double  quick  tine,  the  men  will 
always  carry  their  pieces  on  the  right  shoulder,  or  at  a 
trail.     This  rule  is  general. 

350.  If  the  instructor  shall  wish  the  pieces  carried 
at  a  trail,  he  will  give  the  command  trail  ariJis,  before 
the  command  double  quick.    If,  on  the  contrary,  thia 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.  63 

comi]q|ind  be  not  given,  the  men  will  shift  their  pieces 
to  the  right  shoulder  at  the  command  double  quick. 
In  either  case,  at  the  command  halt,  the  men  will 
bring  their  pieces  to  the  position  of  shoulder  arms. 
This  rule  is  general. 

Lesson  III. 
The  march  by  the  flank. 

851.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  and  correctly 
aligned,  the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  Squad,  right — FApE.    2.  Forward.    3.  March. 

352.  At  the  last  part  of  the  first  command,  the 
rank  will  face  to  the  right ;  the  even  numbered  men, 
after  facing  to  the  right,  will  step  quickly  to  the 
right  side  of  the  odd  numbered  men,  the  latter  stand- 
ing fast,  so  that  when  the  movement  is  executed,  the 
men  will  be  formed  into  files  of  two  men  abreast. 

353.  At  the  third  command,  the  squad  will  step  off 
emartly  with  the  left  foot ;  the  files  keeping  aligned, 
and  preserving  their  intervals. 

354.  The  march  by  the  left  flank  will  be  executed 
by  the  same  commands,  substituting  the  word  left 
for  right,  and  by  inverse  means ;  in  this  case,  the 
even  numbered  men,  after  facing  to  the  left,  will 
stand  fast,  and  the  odd  numbered  will  place  them- 
eelves  on  their  left. 

355.  The  instructor  will  place  a  well-instructed 
soldier^by  the  side  of  the  recruit  who  is  at  the  head 
of  the  rank,  to  regulate  the  step,  and  to  conduct  him ; 
and  it  will  be  enjoined  on  this  recruit  to  march  always 
elbow  to  elbow  with  the  soldier. 

856.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  observed  in 
the  march,  by  the  flank,  the  following  rules : 

That  the  step  he  executed  according  to  the  principles  pre* 
ecrihed  for  the  direct  step  ; 

Because  these  principles,  without  which  men, 


64  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


placed  elbow  to  elbow,  in  the  same  rank,  <^nnot 
preserve  unity  and  harmony  of  movement,  are  of  a 
more  necessary  observance  in  marching  in  file. 

2'hat  the  head  of  the  man  who  immediately  precedes,  covert 
the  heads  of  all  who  are  in  front ; 

Because  it  is  the  most  certain  rule  by  which  each 
man  may  maintain  himself  in  the  exact  line  of  the 
file. 

357.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  habitually 
five  or  six  paces  on  the  flank  of  the  rank  marching 
in  file,  to  watch  over  the  execution  of  the  principles 
prescribed  above.  He  will  also  place  himself  some- 
times in  its  rear,  halt,  and  suifer  it  to  pass  fifteen  or 
twenty  paces,  the  better  to  see  whether  the  men  cover 
each  other  accurately. 

858.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  rank,  march- 
ing by  the  flank,  and  to  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 

359.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt, 
and  afterwards  no  man  will  stir,  although  he  may 
have  lost  his  distance.  This  prohibition  is  necessary, 
to  habituate  the  men  to  a  constant  preservation  of 
their  distances. 

360.  At  the  third  command,  each  man  will  front 
by  facing  to  the  left,  if  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
and  by  a  face  to  the  right,  if  marching  by  the  left 
flank.  The  rear  rank  men  will  at  the  same  time  move 
quickly  into  their  places,  so  as  to  form  the  squad 
again  into  one  rank. 

361.  When  the  men  have  become  accuslfomed  to 
marching  by  the  flank,  the  instructor  will  cause 
them  to  change  direction  by  file ;  for  this  purpose, 
lie  will  command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.  65 

I.  By  file  left  (or  right).    2.  March. 

862.  At  the  command  march^  the  first  file  will 
change  direction  to  the  left  (or  right)  in  describing 
a  small  arc  of  a  circle,  and  will  then  march  straight 
forward ;  the  two  men  of  this  file,  in  wheeling,  will 
keep  up  the  touch  of  the  elbows,  and  the  man  on  the 
side  to  which  the  wheel  is  made,  will  shorten  the  first 
three  or  four  steps.  Each  file  will  come  successively 
to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  where  that  which  preceded 
it  wheeled. 

363.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  the  squad  to 
face  by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching,  and  for 
this  purpose  will  command: 

1.  Squad  by  the  right  (or  left)  flanh.    2.  March. 

864.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
a  little  before  either  foot  comes  to  the  ground,  the 
recruits  will  turn  the  body,  plant  the  foot  that  is 
raised  in  the  new  direction,  and  step  ofl"  with  the 
other  foot  without  altering  the  cadence  of  the  step ; 
the  men  will  double  or  undouble  rapidly. 

365.  If,  in  facing  by  the  right  or  the  left  flank, 
the  squad  should  face  to  the  rear,  the  men  will  come 
into  one  rank,  agreeably  to  the  principles  indicated 
No.  360.  It  is  to  be  remarked  that  it  is  the  men  who 
are  in  rear  who  always  move  up  to  form  into  single 
rank,  and  in  such  manner  as  never  to  invert  the  order 
of  the  numbers  in  the  rank. 

366.  If,  when  the  squad  has  been  faced  to  the  rear, 
the  instructor  should  cause  it  to  face  by  the  left  flank, 
it  is  the  even  numbers  who  will  double  by  moving  to 
the  left  of  the  odd  numbers ;  but  if  by  the  right  flank, 
it  is  the  odd  numbers  who  will  double  to  the  right  of 
the  even  numbers. 

367.  This  lesson,  like  the  preceding  one,  will  b^ 
practised  with  pieces  at  a  shoulder ;  but  the  in- 
itructor  may,  to  give  relief  by  change,  occasionally 

6 


66  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 

order  support  arms,  and  lie  will  require  of  the  recruits 
inarching  in  this  position,  as  much  regularity  as  in 
the  former. 

The  march  by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time. 
868.  The  principles  of  the  march  by  the  flank  iu 
double  quick  time,  are  the  same  as  in  quick  time. 
The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  prescribed 
No.  351,  taking  care  always  to  give  the  command 
double  quick  before  that  of  march. 

369.  He  will  pay  the  greatest  attention  to  the  ca- 
dence of  the  step. 

370.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  change  of  direc- 
tion, and  the  march  by  the  flank,  to  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  by  the  same  commands,  and  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles,  as  in  quick  time. 

371.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  pieces  to  be  car- 
ried either  on  the  right  shoulder  or  at  a  (rail. 

372.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  march  the 
squad  by  the  flank,  without  doubling  the  files. 

373.  The  principles  of  this  march  are  the  same  as 
in  two  ranks,  and  it  will  always  be  executed  in  quick 
time. 

374.  The  instructor  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed No.  351,  but  he  will  be  careful  to  caution  the 
squad  not  to  double  files. 

375.  The  instructor  will  be  watchful  that  the  men 
do  not  bend  their  knees  unequally,  which  would  cause 
them  to  tread  on  the  heels  of  the  men  in  front,  and 
also  to  lose  the  cadence  of  the  step  and  their  dis- 
tances. 

376.  The  various  movements  in  this  lesson  will  be 
executed  in  single  rank.  In  the  changes  of  direc- 
tion, the  leading  man  will  change  direction  without 
altering  the  length  or  the  cadence  of  the  step.  The 
instructor  will  recall  to  the  attention  of  the  men,  that 
in  facing  by  the  right  or  left  flank  in  marching  they 
II? ill  not  double,  but  march  in  one  rank. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.  67 


Lesson  IV. 

WHEELINGS. 

General  principles  of  Wheeling. 

377.  Wheelings  are  of  two  kinds :  from  halts, 
or  on  fixed  pivots,  and  in  march,  or  on  movable 
pivots. 

378.  Wheeling  on  a  fixed  pivot  takes  place  in  pass- 
ing a  corps  from  the  order  in  battle  to  the  order  in 
column,  or  from  the  latter  to  the  former. 

379.  Wheels  in  marching  take  place  in  changes  of 
direction  in  column,  as  often  as  this  movement  is 
executed  to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide. 

380.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot-man  only 
turns  in  his  place,  without  advancing  or  receding. 

381.  In  the  wheels  in  marching,  the  pivot  takes 
steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches,  according  as  the  squad 
is  marching  in  quick  or  double  quick  time,  so  as  to 
clear  the  wheeling  point,  which  is  necessary,  in  order 
that  the  subdivisions  of  a  column  may  change  direc- 
tion without  losing  their  distances,  as  will  be  ex- 
plained in  the  school  of  the  company. 

382.  The  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  will  take  the 
full  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  or  thirty-three 
inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

Wheeling  from  a  halt,  or  on  a  fixed  pivot. 

883.  The  rank  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  will 
place  a  well-instructed  man  on  the  wheeling  flank  to 
conduct  it,  and  then  command : 

1.  By  squad,  right  wheel.    2.  March. 

384.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  step 
off  with  the  left  foot,  turning  at  the  same  time  the 
head  a  little  to  the  left,  the  eyes  fixed  on  the  line  of 
the  eyes  of  the  men  to  their  left;  the  pivot-man  will 
merely  mark  time  in  gradually  turning  his  body,  in 


68  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 

order  to  confoim  himself  to  the  movement  of  the 
marching  flank;  the  man  who  conducts  this  flank 
will  take  steps  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  from  the 
first  step  advance  a  little  the  left  shoulder,  cast  hia 
eyes  from  time  to  time  along  the  rank,  and  feel  con- 
Btantly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  lightly,  but  never 
push  him. 

385.  The  other  men  will  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of 
the  next  man  towards  the  pivot,  resist  pressure 
coming  from  the  opposite  side,  and  each  will  conform 
himself  to  the  marching  flank — shortening  his  step 
according  to  his  approximation  to  the  pivot. 

386.  The  instructor  will  make  the  rank  wheel 
round  the  circle  once  or  twice  before  halting,  in  order 
to  cause  the  principles  to  be  the  better  understood, 
and  he  will  be  watchful  that  the  centre  does  not 
break. 

387.  He  will  cause  the  wheel  to  the  left  to  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  same  principles. 

888.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  arrest  the 
wheel,  he  will  command ; 

1.  Squad.    2.  Halt. 

889.  At  the  second  command,  the  rank  will  halt, 
and  no  man  stir.  The  instructor,  going  to  the  flank 
opposite  the  pivot,  will  place  the  two  outer  men  of 
that  flank  in  the  direction  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the 
rank,  without  however  displacing  the  pivot,  who  will 
conform  the  line  of  his  shoulders  to  this  direction. 
The  instructor  will  take  care  to  have  between  these 
iwo  men,  and  the  pivot,  only  the  space  necessary  to 
contain  the  other  men.    He  will  then  command; 

Left  (or  right) — Dress. 

390.  At  this,  the  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  align- 
ment of  the  two  men  established  as  the  basis,  in  con- 
formity with  the  principles  prescribed. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


59 


891.  The  instructor  will  next  command  Front. 
Wliich  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  314. 

Remarks  on  the  principles  of  the  wheel  from  a  halt. 

892.  Turn  a  little  the  head  towards  the  marching  flanhp 
and  fix  the  eyes  on  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  who 
are  on  that  side  ; 

Because,  otherwise,  it  would  be  impossible  for  each 
man  to  regulate  the  length  of  his  step  so  as  to  con- 
form his  own  movement  to  that  of  the  marching 
flank. 

Touch  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  next  man  toioards  the  pivot ; 

In  order  that  the  files  may  not  open  out  in  the 
wheel. 

Resist  pressure  that  comes  from  the  side  of  the  marching 
fiank; 

Because,  if  this  principle  be  neglected,  the  pivot, 
which  ought  to  be  a  fixed  point,  in  wheels  from  a 
halt,  might  be  pushed  out  of  its  place  by  pressure. 

Wheeling  in  marching-,  or  on  a  movable  pivot. 

393.  When  the  recruits  have  been  brought  to  exe- 
cute well  the  wheel  from  a  halt,  they  will  be  taught 
to  wheel  in  marching. 

394.  To  this  end,  the  rank  being  in  march,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direc- 
tion to  the  reverse  flank  (to  the  side  opposite  to  the 
guide  or  pivot  flank),  he  will  command: 

1.  Right  (or  left)  wheel.    2.  March. 

395.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
rank  is  yet  four  paces  from  the  wheeling  point. 

396.  At  the  second  command,  the  wheel  will  be 
executed  in  the  same  manner  as  from  a  halt,  except 
that  the  touch  of  the  elbow  will  remain  towards  the 
marching  flank  (or  side  of  the  guide)  instead  of  tho 


70  SCHOOL  OF  TKE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 

tilde  of  the  actual  pivot;  that  the  pivot-man,  instead 
of  merely  turning  in  his  place,  will  conform  himself 
to  the  movement  of  the  marching  flank,  feel  lightly 
the  elbow  of  the  next  man,  take  steps  of  full  nine 
inches,  and  thus  gain  ground  forward  in  describing 
a  small  .curve  so  as  to  clear  the  point  of  the  wheel. 
The  middle  of  the  rank  will  bend  slightly  to  the  rear. 
As  soon  as  the  movement  shall  commence,  the  man 
who  conducts  the  marching  flank  will  cast  his  eyes 
on  the  ground  over  which  he  will  have  to  pass. 

397.  The  wheel  being  ended,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

898.  The  first  command  will  be  pronounced  when 
four  paces  are  yet  required  to  complete  the  change  of 
direction. 

399.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  of  completing  the  wheel,  the  man 
who  conducts  the  marching  flank  will  direct  himself 
straight  forward ;  the  pivot-man  and  all  the  rank  will 
retake  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  and  bring  the 
head  direct  to  the  front. 

Turning,  or  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

400.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide,  in  marching,  will  be  executed  as  follows :  The 
instructor  will  command : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  turn.    2.  March. 

401.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  rank 
is  jet  four  paces  from  the  turning  point. 

402.  At  the  command  march,  to  be  pronounced  at 
the  instant  the  rank  ought  to  turn,  the  guide  will  face 
to  the  left  (or  right)  in  marching,  and  move  forward 
in  the  new  direction  without  slackening  or  quickening 
the  cadence,  and  without  shorteniDg  or  lengthening 
the  step.    The  whole  rank  will  promptly  conform 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.  71 

itself  to  the  new  direction :  to  effect  which,  each  man 
will  advance  the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  guide,  tako 
the  double  quick  step,  to  carry  himself  in  the  new 
direction,  turn  the  head  and  eyes  to  the  side  of  the 
guide,  and  retake  the  touch  of  the  elbow  on  that  side, 
in  placing  himself  on  the  alignment  of  the  guide, 
from  whom  he  will  take  the  step,  and  then  resume 
the  direct  position  of  the  head.  Each  man  will  thus 
arrive  successively  on  the  alignment. 

Wheeling  and  changing  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide,  in  double  quick  time. 

403.  When  the  recruits  comprehend  and  execute 
well,  in  quick  time,  the  wheels  at  a  halt  and  in  march- 
ing, and  the  change  of  direction  to  the  side  of  the 
guide,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  same  movements 
to  be  repeated  in  double  quick  time. 

404.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed  by 
the  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  in  quick  time,  except  that  the  command 
double  quick  will  precede  that  of  march.  In  wheeling 
while  marching,  the  pivot-man  will  take  steps  of 
eleven  inches,  and  in  the  changes  of  direction  to  the 
side  of  the  guide,  the  men  on  the  side  opposite  the 
guide  must  increase  the  gait  in  order  to  bring  them- 
selves into  line. 

405.  The  instructor,  in  order  not  to  fatigue  the 
recruits,  and  not  to  divide  their  attention,  will  cause 
them  to  execute  the  several  movemelits  of  which  this 
lesson  is  composed,  first  without  arms,  and  next,  after 
the  mechanism  be  well  comprehended,  with  arms. 

Lesson  V. 

Long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run, 

406.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  resumed  the 
exercises  in  double  quick  time  and  the  run,  with 
arms  and  knapsacks. 


72 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III, 


407.  He  will  cause  long  marches  to  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  both  by  the  front  and  by  the  flank, 
and  by  constant  practice  will  lead  the  men  to  pasa 
over  a  distance  of  five  miles  in  sixty  minutes.  The 
pieces  will  be  carried  on  either  shoulder,  and  some- 
times at  a  trail. 

408.  He  will  also  exercise  them  in  long  marches  at 
a  run,  the  pieces  carried  at  will;  the  men  will  be  in- 
structed to  keep  as  united  as  possible,  without  how- 
ever exacting  much  regularity,  which  is  impracticable. 

409.  The  run,  in  actual  service,  will  only  be  re- 
sorted to  when  it  may  be  highly  important  to  reach  a 
given  point  with  great  promptitude. 

To  stack  arms. 

The  men  being  at  order  arms,  the  instructor  will 
command: 

Stack — Arms. 

410.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  man  of  every 
even  numbered  file  will  pass  his  piece  before  him, 
seizing  it  with  the  left  hand  near  the  upper  band; 
will  place  the  butt  a  little  in  advance  of  his  left  toe, 
the  barrel  turned  towards  the  body,  and  draw  the 
rammer  slightly  from  its  place ;  the  front  rank  man 
of  every  odd  numbered  file  will  also  draw  the  rammer 
slightly,  and  pass  his  piece  to  the  man  next  on  his 
left,  who  will  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  near  the 
upper  band,  and  place  the  butt  a  little  in  advance  of 
the  right  toe  of  the  man  next  on  his  right,  the  barrel 
turned  to  the  front ;  he  will  then  cross  the  rammers 
of  the  two  pieces,  the  rammer  of  the  piece  of  the  odd 
numbered  man  being  inside ;  the  rear  rank  man  of 
every  even  file  will  also  draw  his  rammer,  lean  hia 
piece  forward,  the  lock-plate  downwards,  advance 
the  right  foot  about  six  inches,  and  insert  the  rammer 
between  thft  rammer  and  barrel  of  the  piece  of  his 
front  rawk  man ;  with  his  left  hand  he  will  place  the 


STACK  AB^S  (No.  410). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III. 


73 


butt  of  his  piece  on  the  ground,  thirty-two  inches  in 
rear  of,  and  perpendicular  to,  the  front  rank,  bring- 
ing back  his  right  foot  by  the  side  of  the  left ;  the 
front  rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  at  the  same 
time  lean  the  stack  to  the  rear,  quit  it  with  his  right 
hand,  and  force  all  the  rammers  down.  The  stack 
being  thus  formed,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every  odd 
file  will  pass  his  piece  into  his  left  hand,  the  barrel  to 
the  front,  and  inclining  it  forward,  will  rest  it  on  the 
stack. 

411.  The  men  of  both  ranks  having  taken  the  po- 
sition of  the  soldier  without  arms,  the  instructor  will 
command: 

1.  Break  ranks.    2.  March. 
To  resume  arms. 

412.  Both  ranks  being  re-formed  in  rear  of  their 
stacks,  the  instructor  will  command: 

Take — Arms. 

413.  At  this  command,  the  rear  rank  man  of  every 
odd  numbered  file  will  withdraw  his  piece  from  the 
stack  ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  even  file  will  seize 
his  own  piece  with  the  left  hand  and  that  of  the  man 
on  his  right  with  his  right  hand,  both  above  the 
lower  band  ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  even  file  will 
seize  his  piece  with  the  right  hand  below  the  lower 
band ;  these  two  men  will  raise  up  the  stack  to 
loosen  the  rammers ;  the  front  rank  man  of  every  odd 
file  will  facilitate  the  disengagement  of  the  rammers, 
if  necessary,  by  drawing  them  out  slightly  with  tho 
left  hand,  and  will  receive  his  piece  from  the  hand 
of  the  man  next  on  his  left ;  the  four  men  will  retake 
the  position  of  the  soldier  at  order  arms. 


74  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


MANUAL  OF  ARMS  FOR  THE  MUSKET, 


414.  This  manual  differs  in  so  many  respects  from 
that  of  the  rifle  and  rifle  musket  that  it  becomes 
necessary  to  specify  it  for  the  use  of  infantry  troops 
armed  with  the  percussion-lock  musket. 

Shoulder — Aums. 

415.  The  piece  is  held  in  the  left  hand,  the  arm 
being  a  very  little  bent,  the  elbow  close  to  the  body, 
the  butt  of  the  musket  grasped  in  the  palm  of  the 
hand,  the  heel  of  the  butt  between  the  fore-finger 
and  the  middle  finger ;  the  thumb  on  the  front  screw 
of  the  butt-plate,  the  butt  kept  well  back,  so  that  the 
piece  shall  appear  perpendicular  when  seen  from  the 
front,  and  not  to  be  moved  from  its  position  by  the 
movement  of  the  thighs  in  marching ;  tne  stock,  be- 
low the  tail  band,  lying  in  the  hollow  of  the  shoul- 
der ;  the  right  arm  hanging  naturally  at  the  right 
side. 

416.  Care  should  be  taken  by  the  instructor  that 
the  recruit  acquires  this  position  of  the  musket  cor- 
rectly and  maintains  it  in  marching,  as  it  is  the  posi- 
tion from  which  most  others  are  taken  and  to  which 
the  soldier  must  constantly  return. 

Support — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

417.  {First  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  seize  the 
gmall  of  the  stock  four  inches  below  the  lock,  slightly 
raising  but  not  turning  the  piece. 


74 


PI,  17. 


SHOULDEH  AHMS 


415). 


Shoulder  Arms,  side  view; 


75 


PL  V6. 


SUPPORT  AKMS  PRESENT  ARMS 

(No.  417).  (No.  424). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.  75 

413.  [Second  motion.)  Take  the  left  liand  from  the 
butt,  extend  the  left  fore-arm  under  the  cock  upwards 
across  the  breast,  the  hand  flat  on  the  right  breast. 

419.  {Third  motion.)  Drop  the  right  arm  to  its  place 
at  the  side. 

420.  The  movement  to  return  to  the  position  of 
shouldered  arms  from  that  of  support  arms  is  always: 

Carry — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

421.  (First  motion.)  Carry  the  right  hand  to  the 
small  of  the  stock. 

[Second  motion.)  Place  the  left  hand  under  the  butt 
as  before. 

[Third  motion.)  Let  the  right  hand  fall  to  the  side, 
and  lower  the  piece  slightly  to  the  position  of  shoul- 
dered arms. 

422.  Note. — The  command  Carry  arms  is  only  given 
when  coming  from  the  support  to  the  position  of 
shouldered  arms.  In  every  other  case  the  command 
is  Shoulder  arms. 

423.  The  piece  being  at  the  shoulder,  the  next 
command  of  the  instructor  is : 

Present — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

424.  [First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand, 
the  lock  out,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the 
right  hand,  the  piece  kept  vertical  and  detached  from 
the  body,  the  left  hand  remaining  under  the  butt. 

425.  [Second motion.)  Bring  the  piece  erect  before  the 
centre  of  the  body,  turning  it  inwards,  the  rammer 
being  brought  to  the  front,  the  right  hand  close  under 
the  guard.  Seize  the  piece  at  the  same  time  with  the 
left  hand  above  the  lock,  the  thumb  extended  along 
the  barrel,  the  left  fore-arm  resting  on  the  body,  and 
the  hand  as  high  as  the  elbow. 

426.  To  return  to  the  position  of  shouldered  arms, 
the  instructor  will  command: 


76 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


Shoulder — A  R  s . 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

427.  [First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  witli  the  riglit 
hand,  the  barrel  to  the  front,  raise  and  keep  it  against 
the  left  shoulder  with  the  right  hand;  place  the  left 
under  the  butt,  the  right  hand  simply  resting  on  the 
small  of  the  stock  without  grasping  it. 

428.  (Second  niotion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  to  the  side. 

Order — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

429.  [First  motion.)  Extend  the  left  arm  so  as  to 
lower  the  piece,  and  seize  it  with  the  right  hand  just 
above  the  tail  band.  Let  go  witli  the  left  hand,  and 
carry  the  piece,  kept  vertical,  to  the  right  side,  the 
rammer  to  the  front,  the  little  linger  behind  the  barrel, 
the  right  hand  against  the  hip,  the  butt  of  the  piece 
tiiree  inches  from  the  ground,  the  piece  vertical,  the 
left  hand  hanging  by  the  side. 

430.  (Second  motion,)  Let  the  piece  slip  through  the 
right  hand  without  shock  to  the  ground,  so  that  the 
butt  will  be  on  a  line  with  the  toes;  at  once  drop  the 
arm  so  that  the  barrel  may  be  held  by  the  thumb  and 
extended  fore-fmger,  the  muzzle  of  the  piece  being 
about  two  inches  from  the  right  shoulder. 

431.  To  resume  the  position  of  shouldered  arms, 
\he  command  of  the  instructor  will  be: 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  tiro  motions. 

432.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right 
Dand,  and  carry  it  up,  kept  vertical,  to  the  left 
shoulder,  turning  it  in  the  passage  so  as  to  bring  the 
barrel  to  the  front;  place  the  left  hand  under  the 
butt,  and  slip  the  right  hand  down  to  the  lock. 

433.  (Second  motion.)  Let  the  right  hand  fall  to  the 
side. 


cTHAHGE  BAYONET  (No,  434 


OKDEfl  AHMS  (No.  42!3>. 


4 


j 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


77 


j  Charge — Bayonet. 
'  One  time  and  two  motions, 

434.  {First  motion.)  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right,  and 
take  the  position  of  the  first  motion  in  about  face.  Turn 
the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  outwards,  and 
seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand,  the 
piece  being  kept  vertical  and  slightly  detached  from 
the  shoulder;  the  left  hand  remaining  under  the  butt. 

435.  {Second  motion,)  Detach  the  left  hand,  bringing 
down  the  piece  with  the  right,  so  that  the  left  hand 
may  seize  it  a  little  above  the  tail  band,  the  barrel  up, 
the  left  elbow  near  the  body,  the  right  hand  against 
the  hip,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  as  high  as  the  eye. 

436.  To  resume  the  position  of  shouldered  arms, 
the  command  is : 

Shoulder — Arm  s. 
One  time  and  tivo  motions, 

437.  {First  motion.)  Face  to  the  front  by  turning 
on  the  left  heel  and  bringing  the  right  foot  along- 
side ;  spring  the  piece  up  to  the  left  shoulder  with 
the  right  hand,  and  place  the  left  under  the  butt  as 
heretofore  prescribed. 

438.  {Second  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  to  the  side. 

Loading  and  Firing. 

439.  In  order  to  instruct  recruits  in  the  details  of 
loading  and  firing  their  pieces,  the  first  command  of 
the  instructor  is : 

Load  in  ten  times — Load. 
One  time  and  two  motions, 

440.  (First  motion.)  Extend  the  left  arm  to  its  full 
length,  seize  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  just  above 
the  lower  band,  carry  the  right  foot  forward,  placing 


78  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


its  heel  against  the  hollow  of  the  left,  but  without 
altering  the  position  of  the  bod3^ 

441.  (Second  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  carry  the 
piece  directly  downwards  along  the  left  thigh,  seizing 
it  with  the  left  hand  above  the  right,  and  letting  the 
butt  come  to  the  ground  without  shock,  so  that  the 
piece  shall  touch  the  left  thigh ;  the  muzzle  opposite 
the  centre  of  the  body.  Then  carry  the  right  hand 
quickly  to  the  cartridge  box  and  open  it. 

2.  Handle — Cartuidge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

442.  Take  the  cartridge  in  the  thumb  and  first  two 
fingers,  and  place  the  end  of  it  in  the  teeth. 

3.  Tear — Cartridge. 

One  time  and  one  motion, 

443.  Tear  the  end  of  the  cartridge  down  to  the 
powder,  then  hold  it  upright,  and  place  it  in  front 
of  and  near  the  muzzle,  the  back  of  the  hand  to  the 
front. 

4.  Charge — Cartridge. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

444.  Turn  the  back  of  the  right  hand  towards  the 
body,  in  order  to  discharge  the  powder  into  the 
barrel,  raise  the  elbow  as  high  as  the  Avrist,  shake 
the  cartridge  and  insert  it  fully  into  the  muzzle;  leave 
the  hand  reversed,  the  fingers  closed,  but  the  hand 
extended. 

5.  Draw — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

445.  {First  motion.)  Drop  the  right  elbow,  and  seize 
the  rammer  between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  bent, 
the  other  fingers  being  closed ;  draw  the  rammer,  ex- 
tending the  arm ;  seize  it  again  at  the  middle  betweea 


78 


PL  20. 


LOAD  a^o.  441). 


CHARGE  CAHTHIDGB 
(No.  444). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SCLDIER^ — PART  lit.  79 

the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  the  hand  reversed,  the  palm 
to  the  front,  the  nails  up ;  then  clear  the  rammer  en- 
tirely by  again  extending  the  arm. 

446.  [Second  motion,)  Turn  the  rammer  between  the 
bayonet  and  the  face,  the  rammer  parallel  to  the 
bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the  butt  of  the  rammer 
near  the  muzzle,  but  not  inserted. 

447.  [Third  motion.)  Insert  the  rammer,  and  force 
it  down  as  low  as  the  hand. 

6.  Ram — Cartridge. 
07ie  time  and  one  motion. 

448.  Extend  the  arm  to  its  full  length,  seizing  the 
rammer  between  the  right  thumb  extended  and  the 
fore-finger  bent,  the  other  fingers  closed;  ram  the 
cartridge  home  twice  with  force,  then  seize  the  ram- 
mer at  the  little  end,  between  the  thumb  and  fore- 
finger bent,  the  other  fingers  being  closed,  and  the 
right  elbow  touching  the  body. 

7.  Return — Rammer. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

449.  [First  motion.)  Draw  the  rammer,  re-seize  it  at 
the  middle  between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  the 
palm  of  the  hand  to  the  front,  the  nails  up,  then  clear 
die  rammer  from  the  barrel  by  extending  the  arm. 

450.  [Second  motion.)  Turn  the  rammer  between  the 
bayonet  and  the  face,  closing  the  fingers,  the  rammer 
parallel  to  the  bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the  little 
end  of  the  rammer  near  the  first  pipe,  but  not  inserted. 

451.  [Third  motion.)  Insert  the  rammer,  and,  with 
the  thumb,  which  will  follow  the  mo  ^ement,  force  it 
as  low  as  the  middle  band.  Then  raise  the  hand, 
place  the  little  finger  on  the  butt  of  the  rammer  and 
force  it  down,  at  the  same  time  lowering  the  left  hand 
on  the  barrel  to  the  extent  of  the  arm,  without  de  • 
pressing  the  shoulder. 


80  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


8.  Cast — About. 
One  time  and  two  motions, 

452.  (First  motion.)  Bring  up  the  piece  vertically 
to  the  left  shoulder  with  the  left  hand,  seize  it  with 
the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  and  slide  the 
left  hand  down  as  low  as  the  ohin. 

453.  (Second  motion. )  Make  a  half  face  to  the  right 
as  in  about  facey  except  that  the  hollow  of  the  right 
foot  is  close  against  the  left  heel,  instead  of  three 
inches  to  the  rear  ;  carry  the  piece  opposite  the  right 
shoulder ;  with  the  right  hand  bring  it  down  into  the 
left,  seize  it  with  the  left  at  the  tail  band,  the  thumb 
extended  on  the  stock,  the  butt  under  the  right  fore- 
arm, the  small  of  the  stock  against  the  body,  the 
right  hand  grasping  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  muzzle 
as  high  as  the  eye. 

9.  Prime. 

One  time  and  one  motion, 

454.  Half-cock  the  piece  with  the  thumb  of  the 
right  hand,  keeping  the  piece  in  its  place  with  the 
left;  displace  the  old  cap,  and,  with  the  thumb  and 
first  two  fingers  of  the  right  hand,  take  a  cnp  from 
the  pouch,  place  it  upon  the  cone,  push  it  down  with 
the  thumb,  and  then  seize  the  piece  by  the  small  of 
the  stock. 

10.  Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

455.  This  command  is  executed  precisely  as  in 
coming  to  shouldered  arms  from  charge  bayonet.  (437-8. ) 

The  loading  being  thus  accomplished,  to  proceed 
to  firing  the  command  of  the  instructor  is: 

Ready. 
One  time  and  four  motions. 

456.  {First  motion.)  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left 


80 


PI  21. 


Ready  (from  position  of  Prime), 
One  time  and  one  motion. 
Place  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand  on  the  hammer  (the  fingers 
remaining  under  and  against  the 
guard),  cock  the  piece,  and  seize 
the  small  of  the  stock. 


READY  (No.  450). 


Shoulder — Arms  (from  this  position  of  Ready). 
At  the  command  shoulder,  support  the  piece  firmly  with 
the  left  hand,  half-cock  the  piece,  and  seize  it  at  the  handle 
with  the  right  hand.    At  the  word  arms,  face  to  the  front 
and  complete  the  time. 


81 


Fl  22. 


AIM,  FBOlfT  AND  REAR  RANK  OTo.  460> 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


81 


hand,  bringing  the  lock  to  the  front,  and  seize  it  with 
the  right  at  the  small  of  the  stock.  At  the  same 
time  make  a  half  face  to  the  right,  turning  on  the  left 
heel,  bringing  the  left  toe  to  the  front  and  placing  the 
right  foot  behind,  at  right  angles  to  the  left,  the  hollow 
of  the  right  against  the  heel  of  the  left. 

457.  [Second  motion.)  With  the  right  hand  bring 
the  piece,  kept  vertical,  to  the  centre  of  the  body,  the 
left  hand  placed  just  above  the  lock,  the  thumb  extended 
along  the  stock,  and  at  the  height  of  the  chin,  the  ram- 
mer being  turned  obliquely  to  the  left  and  front. 

458.  [Third motion.)  Place  the  thumb  on  the  head  of 
the  hammer,  the  fore-finger  under  and  on  the  guard, 
the  elbow  at  the  height  of  the  hand. 

459.  [Fourth  motion.)  Close  the  right  elbow  to  the 
body  in  cocking,  seize  the  piece  by  the  small  of  the 
stock  with  the  right  hand;  let  it  descend  along  the 
body  in  the  left  hand  to  the  tail  band,  which  should 
remain  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder. 

Aim. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

460.  Eaise  the  butt  of  the  piece  to  the  right 
shoulder,  at  the  same  time  dropping  the  muzzle,  the 
left  hand  remaining  at  the  tail  band,  the  left  elbow  a 
little  down  ;  direct  the  right  eye  along  the  barrel,  by 
dropping  the  head  upon  the  butt,  shut  the  left  eye, 
and  place  the  forefinger  upon  the  trigger. 

461.  At  the  command  aim,  the  rear  ranh  man  will 
also  carry  his  right  foot  about  eight  inches  to  the  right, 
to  enable  him  to  disengage  his  piece  in  firing  over  the 
shoulder  of  the  front  rank  man. 

FlEE. 

One  time  and  one  motion, 

462.  Without  any  other  movement,  pull  the  trigger 


82  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


firmly  and  without  jerking,  and  remain  in  that  po- 
sition. 

463.  After  the  piece  is  discharged,  the  instructor 
may  desire  at  once  to  re-load ;  or,  without  loading,  to 
resume  the  position  of  shouldered  arms.  If  the  latter 
be  his  wish,  the  command  is  : 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions, 

464.  (First  motioji.)  Bring  back  the  piece  with  both 
hands  to  its  vertical  position,  face  to  the  front,  the 
piece  at  the  left  shoulder,  and  place  the  left  hand 
under  the  butt. 

465.  [Second  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  to  its 
place. 

466.  If  it  be  desired  to  re-load  after  firing,  while  in 
the  position  of  aim,  the  instructor  will  command : 

Load. 

One  time  and  tvjo  motions. 

467.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  back  with  both 
hands,  depress  the  butt  strongly  by  extending  the 
right  arm,  carry  it  thus  to  the  left  side,  the  barrel  to 
the  front  and  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  the  left  hand 
with  the  back  turned  to  the  front,  and  as  high  as  the 
chin,  the  left  fore-arm  touching  the  stock.  At  tbo 
game  time,  face  to  the  front,  and  carry  the  heel  of  the 
right  foot  against  the  hollow  of  the  left. 

468.  (Second  motion.)  Let  go  the  small  of  the  stock 
with  the  right  hand,  let  the  piece  descend  to  the  ground 
without  shock  through  the  left,  and  take  the  second 
motion  of  load. 

The  loading  may  then  proceed  by  the  numbers  as 
before. 

469.  While  in  the  position  of  aim^  before  firing,  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


83 


instructor  maj  desire  to  exercise  his  men  by  bringing 
them  back  to  the  position  of  ready. 
To  do  this  the  command  will  be : 

Recover — Arms. 

470.  This  is  executed  precisely  as  in  the  manual  for 
the  rifle.  (184.) 

471.  The  men  being  in  the  position  of  ready  or 
recover  arms,  if  the  instructor  desire  to  bring  them 
to  that  of  shouldered  arms,  the  command  is ; 

Shoulder — Arms. 

472.  At  the  word  shoulder,  the  recruit  will  face  to 
the  front,  and  bring  his  piece,  kept  vertical,  to  the 
centre  of  the  body,  the  left  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin, 
the  little  finger  just  above  the  lock.  Next,  with  his 
right  thumb  on  the  head  of  the  hammer  and  the  fore- 
finger on  the  trigger,  he  will  carefully  half-cock  the 
piece,  and  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the  right 
hand.  At  the  command  arms,  the  piece  is  carried  to 
the  right  shoulder  in  the  position  of  shouldered  arm.s. 

473.  When  a  squad  has  been  found  to  execute  the 
loading  in  ten  times  well,  they  may  be  caused  to  exe- 
cute the  movement  with  fewer  numbers,  by  the  com- 
mand: 

Load  in  four  times — Load. 

474.  (First  motion.)  At  the  command  load,  the  re- 
cruit will  execute  the/r6'^  time  ofloadi7ig  (in  ten  times), 
handle  cartridge,  tear  cartridge,  and  charge  cartridge. 

475.  (Second  motion.)  At  the  command  two,  draw 
rammer,  enter  it  as  far  as  the  hand,  and  ram  twice. 

476.  (Third  motion.)  At  the  command  three,  return 
rammer,  cast  about,  o^nd  prime. 

477.  (Fourth  motion.)  At  the  command  four,  shoulder 
arms. 

478.  If  the  wish  of  the  instructor  be  to  remove  the 

8 


84  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  123. 


bayonet  while  in  the  position  of  shouldered  arms,  ks 
gives  the  command: 

JJjifa — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  three  motions, 

479.  (First  motion.)  Extend  the  left  arm,  seize  thd 
piece  with  the  right  hand  just  above  the  tail  band. 

480.  (Second  motion.)  Drop  the  .piece  with  the  right 
hand  along  the  left  thigh,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand 
above  the  right,  lengthen  out  the  left  arm,  rest  the 
butt  on  the  ground  without  shock  ;  carry  the  right 
hand  to  the  bayonet,  with  the  thumb  lower  the  clasp 
against  the  stop,  and  seize  the  bayonet  at  the  socket 
and  shank. 

481.  (Third  motion.)  Wrest  off  the  bayonet,  place  it 
in  the  scabbard,  and  then  rest  the  right  little  finger 
upon  the  butt  of  the  rammer,  lower  the  left  hand 
al ,  ng  the  barrel,  extending  the  arm,  without  depress- 
ing the  shoulder. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

482.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  along  the  left  side,  the  hand  as  high  as  the  chin, 
the  fore-arm  touching  the  piece,  the  barrel  to  the 
front;  drop  the  right  hand  to  seize  the  piece  a  little 
above  the  handle,  the  fore-finger  touching  the  ham- 
mer, and  the  thumb  on  the  counter-plate. 

483.  (Second  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right 
band,  place  the  left  under  the  butt.  Bring  back  the 
right  heel  to  the  side  of  the  left  on  the  same  line ; 
support  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  against  the 
shoulder,  as  at  shouldered  armsy  the  right  hand  resting 
on,  without  grasping,  the  piece. 

484.  (Third  motion.)  Let  the  right  hand  fall  to  its 
place. 


TRAIL  ARMS  (No.  493>, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — FART  III.  85 


Secure — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

485.  {First  motion.)  Seize  the  piece  witli  the  right 
hand,  the  thumb  on  the  counter-plate,  the  fore-linger 
against  the  cock  ;  detach  the  piece  from  the  shoulder, 
the  barrel  to  the  front;  seize  it  at  the  tail  band  with 
the  left  hand,  the  thumb  extended  on  the  rammer,  the 
piece  erect,  opposite  the  shoulder,  the  left  elbow  on 
the  piece. 

486.  [Second  motion.)  Reverse  the  piece,  pass  it 
under  the  left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the 
tail  band,  the  thumb  on  the  rammer  to  prevent  it  from 
sliding  out ;  the  little  finger  on  the  hip,  the  right  hand 
resuming  its  position  at  the  side. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions, 

487.  (First  motion.)  Raise  the  piece  carefully  with 
the  left  hand,  seize  the  small  of  the  stock  with  the 
right,  to  support  it  against  the  shoulder;  quit  the  hold 
of  the  left  hand  and  place  it  under  the  butt. 

488.  (Second  motion.)  Let  the  right  hand  drop  to  its 
place,  at  the  same  time  dropping  the  piece  slightly  in 
the  left,  so  as  to  take  the  position  of  shouldered  arms. 

Fix — Bayonet. 
One  time  and  three  motions. 

489.  (First  motion.)  The  same  as  in  unfix  bayonet. 

490.  (Second  motion.)  The  same  as  in  unfix  bayonet^ 
except  that  instead  of  carrying  the  right  hand  to  the 
place  where  the  bayonet  would  be,  if  fixed,  it  is  car- 
ried to  the  bayonet-scabbard,  so  as  to  seize  the  ba- 
yonet by  the  socket  and  shank,  so  that  the  lower 
(now  upper)  end  of  the  socket  shall  extend  about  an 
inch  above  the  heel  of  the  palm. 

491.  ( Third  motion. )  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the  scab- 
bard, carry  and  fix  it  on  the  muzzle,  turning  the  clasp 


86  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


toTrards  the  body  with  the  right  thumb ;  then  lower 
the  left  hand  along  the  barrel,  in  extending  the  arm. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
492.  The  same  as  from  unfix  bayonet.  (482.) 


493.  [First  motion.)  As  the  first  motion  of  order  arms. 


494.  (Second  motion.)  Incline  the  muzzle  slightly  to 
the  front,  and  the  butt  to  the  rear,  the  butt  being 
kept  about  three  inches  from  the  ground ;  the  right 
hand,  supported  at  the  hip,  will  sustain  the  piece  so 
that  the  rear  rank  men  may  not  touch  the  front  rank 
men  with  their  bayonets. 


495.  At  the  word  shoulder,  bring  back  the  muzzle 
so  as  to  make  the  piece  vertical.  At  the  word  armsy 
bring  the  piece  to  the  shoulder  as  prescribed  in  coming 
from  the  position  of  order  arms.  (432.) 


496.  Turn  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock 
to  the  front,  seize  it  at  the  same  time  with  the  right 
hand  at  the  handle,  place  it  on  the  right  shoulder, 
the  left  hand  not  quitting  the  butt,  the  muzzle  up, 
the  lock-plate  upwards.  Keep  the  piece  in  this  posi- 
tion by  placing  the  right  hand  on  the  flat  of  the  butt. 
Let  the  left  hand  fall  to  the  side. 


497.  Raise  the  piece  by  extending  the  right  arm ; 
seize  it  with  the  left  hand  above  the  lock,  carry  it 
against  the  left  shoulder,  turning  the  barrel  to  the 
front ;  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock ;  plact 


Trail — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 


Shoulder — Arms. 


Eif/ht  sho2ilder  shift — Arms. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 


Shoulder — Arm  s  . 
One  time  and  one  motion. 


86 


PL  24. 


KIGHT  SHOULDER  INSPECTION  OF 

SHIFT  AKMS  CNo.  486>.  ARMS  (No.  50). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III.  87 


the  left  under  the  butt,  and  then  let  the  right  fall  to 
its  place. 

Inspection  of — Arms, 

498.  From  the  position  of  ordered  arms,  the  ba- 
yonet being  in  the  scabbard. 

One  time  and  three  motions, 

499.  (First  motion.)  Face  to  the  right  once  and  a 
half  on  the  left  heel,  carrying  the  right  foot  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  rear,  at  right  angles  with  the  left  and 
about  six  inches  from  it ;  seize  the  piece  with  the  left 
hand  just  above  the  middle  band,  incline  the  muzzle 
to  the  rear  without  displacing  the  heel  of  the  butt, 
the  rammer  turned  towards  the  body.  Carry  the 
right  hand  to  the  bayonet  and  seize  it,  as  in  the 
second  motion  of  fix  bayonet,  (490.) 

600.  [Second  motion.)  Draw  the  bayonet  from  the 
scabbard,  carry  and  fix  it  on  the  muzzle;  then  seize 
the  rammer,  draw  it  as  has  been  explained  in  loading 
in  ten  times,  and  let  it  glide  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

601.  [Third  motion.)  Face  to  the  front,  seize  the 
piece  with  the  right  hand  and  retake  the  position  of 
ordered  arms. 

602.  The  instructor  will  then  inspect  as  in  the 
manual  for  the  rifle.  (229.) 

503.  If,  instead  of  inspection  of  arms,  the  instructor 
simply  desires  that  bayonets  should  be  fixed,  he  will 
command : 

Fix — Bayonet. 

504.  Take  the  position  as  in  the  first  motion  of  m- 
spection  of  arms,  fix  the  bayonet  as  explained  in  part 
of  the  second  motion,  and  face  to  the  front. 

505.  If  the  instructor  wish,  after  firing,  to  know 
whether  pieces  remain  undischarged,  he  will  com- 
mand: 


88  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER — PART  III. 


Spring — Rammers. 
606.  Which  "will  be  executed  as  in  the  manual  for 
the  rifle.  (284.) 

Arms — Port. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 

507.  Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body, 
the  lock  to  the  front,  seizing  it  at  once  with  both 
hands,  the  right  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  left  at 
the  tail  band,  the  two  thumbs  pointing  towards  the 
muzzle,  the  barrel  sloping  upwards,  and  crossing  op- 
posite to  the  point  of  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  pro- 
portionally lowered;  the  palm  of  the  right  hand 
above,  and  that  of  the  left  under  the  piece,  the  nails 
of  both  hands  next  to  the  body,  to  which  the  elbows 
will  be  closed. 

Shoulder — Arms. 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

508.  (First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  to  the  left 
shoulder,  placing  the  left  hand  under  the  butt. 

609.  [Second  motion.)  Drop  the  right  hand  to  its 
place  at  the  side. 

610.  In  order  to  relieve  the  soldier  from  the  con- 
straint of  any  fixed  position,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

Arms — At  Will. 
One  time  and  one  motion. 
511.  Carry  the  piece  at  pleasure  on  either  shoulder, 
or  with  one  or  both  hands,  the  muzzle  being  up. 

Shoulder — Arms. 

612.  Resume  at  once  the  position  of  shouldered  arms. 

613.  In  going  through  the  manual  of  arms,  the  in- 
structor will  see  that  the  recruit  constantly  retains 
the  position  of  the  soldier,  which,  under  the  pressure 
cf  his  arms,  he  is  liable  to  lose. 

END  OF  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 


88 


ri  25- 


ABMS  PORT  (No.  507^ 


SCHOOL  OF  TlfF  COMPANY, 


89 


TITIiE  THIKI>. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

General  Kules  and  Division  of  the  School  of  the  Com- 
pany. 

1.  Instuuctton  by  company  will  always  precede 
that  by  battalion,  and  the  object  being  to  prepare  the 
soldiers  for  the  higher  school,  the  exercises  of  detail 
by  company  will  be  strictly  adhered  to,  as  well  in  re- 
spect to  principles,  as  tlie  order  of  progression  herein 
prescribed. 

2.  There  will  be  attached  to  a  company  undergoing 
elementary  instruction,  a  captain,  a  covering  sergeant, 
and  a  certain  number  of  file  closers,  the  whole  posted 
in  the  manner  indicated,  Title  First,  and,  according 
to  the  same  Title,  the  officer  charged  with  the  exer- 
cise of  such  company  will  herein  be  denominated  the 
instructor. 

3.  The  School  of  the  Conxpany  will  be  divided  into 
six  lessons,  and  each  lesson  will  comprehend  five  arti- 
cles, as  follows : 

Lesson  I. 
To  open  ranks. 
Alignments  in  open  ranks. 
Manual  of  arms. 
To  close  ranks. 

Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks. 
Lesson  II. 

1.)  To  load  in  four  times  and  at  will. 
^2.)  To  fire  by  company. 


90 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANT. 


(3.)  To  fire  by  file. 

(4.)  To  fire  by  rank. 

(5.)  To  fire  by  tbe  rear  rank. 

Lesson  III. 

(1.)  To  march  in  line  of  battle. 

(2.)  To  halt  the  company  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
and  to  align  it. 

(3.)  Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle. 

(4.)  To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time, 
and  the  back  step. 

(5.)  To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle. 

Lesson  IV. 

(1.)  To  march  by  the  flank. 

(2.^  To  change  direction  by  file. 

(3.)  To  halt  the  company  marching  by  the  flank, 
and  to  fa^e  it  to  the  front. 

(4.)  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to 
form  it  on  the  right  or  left  by  file  into  line  of  battle. 

(5.)  The  company  marching  by  the  flank,  to  form 
it  by  company  or  platoon  into  line,  and  cause  it  to 
face  to  the  right  and  left  in  marching. 

Lesson  V. 

(1.)  To  break  into  column  by  platoon  either  at  a 
halt,  or  while  marching. 
(2.)  To  march  in  column. 
l^.S  To  change  direction. 
(4.)  To  halt  the  column. 

(5.)  Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right 
or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  marching. 

Lesson  VI. 

(1.)  To  break  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form  tha 
company. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 


91 


(2.)  To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to 
re-enter  into  line. 

(3.)  To  march  in  column  in  route^  and  to  execute  the 
movements  incident  thereto. 

(4.^  Countermarch. 

(5.)  Being  in  column  by  p.atoon,  to  form  on  the 
right  or  left  into  line  of  battle. 

4.  The  company  will  always  be  formed  in  two  ranks. 
The  instructor  will  then  cause  the  files  to  be  num- 
bered, and  for  this  purpose  will  command : 

In  each  rank — Count  Twos. 

5.  At  this  command,  the  men  count  in  each  rank, 
from  right  to  left,  pronouncing  in  a  loud  and  distinct 
voice,  in  the  same  tone,  without  hurry  and  without 
turning  the  head,  one,  two,  according  to  the  place 
which  each  one  occupies.  He  will  also  cause  the 
company  to  be  divided  into  platoons  and  sections, 
taking  care  that  the  first  platoon  is  always  composed 
of  an  even  number  of  files. 

6.  The  instructor  will  be  as  clear  and  concise  as 
possible  in  his  explanations;  he  will  cause  faults  of 
detail  to  be  rectified  by  the  captain,  to  whom  he  will 
indicate  them,  if  the  captain  should  not  have  him- 
self observed  them;  and  the  instructor  will  not 
otherwise  interfere,  unless  the  captain  should  not 
well  comprehend,  or  should  badly  execute  his  in- 
tentions. 

7.  Composure,  or  presence  of  mind,  in  him  who 
commands,  and  in  those  who  obey,  being  the  first 
means  of  order  in  a  body  of  troops,  the  instructor 
will  labor  to  habituate  the  company  to  this  essential 
quality,  and  will  himself  give  tlj^  example. 


92 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  I. 


LESSON  FIRST. 
Article  First. 
To  open  ranks. 

8.  The  company  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  ranka 
and  file  closers  well  aligned,  when  the  instructor 
shall  wish  to  cause  the  ranks  to  be  opened,  he  will 
direct  the  left  guide  to  place  himself  on  the  left  of 
the  front  rank,  which  being  executed,  he  will  com- 
mand: 

1.  Attention.    2.  Company.    3.  Shoulder — Arms. 
4.  To  the  rear  open  order. 

9.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  covering  sergeant, 
and  the  left  guide,  will  step  off  smartly  to  the  rear, 
four  paces  from  the  front  rank,  in  order  to  mark  the 
alignment  of  the  rear  rank.  They  will  judge  thia 
distance  by  the  eye,  without  counting  the  steps. 

10.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  at  the  same 
time  on  the  right  flank,  in  order  to  observe  if  these 
two  non-commissioned  officers  are  on  a  line  parallel 
to  ^he  front  rank,  and  if  necessary,  to  correct  their 
positions,  which  being  executed,  he  wili  command : 

5.  March. 

11.  At  this  command,  the  front  rank  will  stand 
fast. 

12.  The  rear  rank  will  step  to  the  rear,  without 
counting  the  steps,  and  will  place  themselves  on 
the  alignment  marked  for  this  rank,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
Ko.  321.  , 

13.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear 
rank  on  the  left  guide  placed  to  mark  the  left  of 
this  rank. 

14.  The  file  closers  will  march  to  the  rear  at  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  I. 


93 


same  time  with  the  rear  rank,  and  will  place  them- 
eelves  two  paces  from  this  rank  when  it  is  aligned. 

15.  The  instructor  seeing  the  rear  rank  aligned, 
will  command : 

6.  Front. 

16.  At  this  command,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of 
the  rear  rank  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer. 

17.  The  rear  rank  being  aligned,  the  instructor 
will  direct  the  captain  and  the  covering  sergeant 
10  observe  the  men  in  their  respective  ranks,  and 
to  correct,  if  necessary,  the  positions  of  persons  and 
pieces. 

Article  Second. 
Alignments  in  open  ranks. 

18.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will,  in 
the  first  exercises,  align  the  ranks,  man  by  man,  the 
better  to  inculcate  the  principles. 

19.  To  effect  this,  he  will  cause  two  or  four  men 
on  the  right  or  left  of  each  rank  to  march  two  or 
three  paces  forward,  and,  after  having  aligned  them, 
command : 

By  file  right  (or  left) — Dress. 

20.  At  this,  the  men  of  each  rank  will  move  up 
successively  on  the  alignment,  each  man  being  pre- 
ceded by  his  neighbor  in  the  same  rank,  towards  the 
basis,  by  two  paces,  and  having  correctly  aligned 
himself,  will  cast  his  eyes  to  the  front. 

21.  Successive  alignments  having  habituated  the 
soldiers  to  dress  correctly,  the  instructor  will  cause 
the  ranks  to  align  themselves  at  once,  forward  and 
backward,  sometimes  in  a  direction  parallel,  and 
sometimes  in  one  oblique,  to  the  original  direction, 
giving,  in  each  case,  two  or  four  men  to  serve  as  a 
basis  of  alignment  to  each  rank.  To  effect  which, 
he  will  command : 

9 


94      fscnooL  OF  the  company — lesson  I. 
1.  Right  (or  left) — Dress.    2.  Front. 


1.  Right  (or  left)  hackwa'^d — Dress.    2.  Front. 

22.  In  oblique  alignments,  in  opened  ranks,  the 
men  of  the  rear  rank  will  not  seek  to  cover  their  file 
leaders,  as  the  sole  object  of  the  exercise  is  to  teach 
them  to  align  themselves  correctly  in  their  respective 
ranks,  in  the  difi'erent  directions. 

23.  In  the  several  alignments,  the  captain  will 
superintend  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  ser- 
geant the  rear  rank.  For  this  purpose,  they  will 
place  themselves  on  the  side  by  which  the  ranks  are 
dressed. 

24.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  men  will  conform  the 
line  of  their  shoulders  to  the  new  direction  of  their 
rank,  and  will  place  themselves  on  the  alignment  as 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No'. 
317  or  No.  321,  according  as  the  new  direction  shall 
be  in  front  or  rear  of  the  original  one. 

25.  At  the  end  of  each  alignment,  the  captain  and 
the  covering  sergeant  will  pass  along  the  front  of  the 
ranks  to  correct  the  positions  of  persons  and  arms. 


26.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructor  will 
place  himself  in  a  position  to  see  the  ranks,  and 
will  command  the  manual  of  arms  in  the  following 
order : 


or 


Article  Third. 
Manual  of  Arms. 


Present  arms. 
Order  arms. 
Ground  arms. 
Raise  ar?ns. 
Support  arms. 
Fix  bayonet. 
Charge  bayonet. 


Shoulder  arms 
Shoulder  arms. 
Shoulder  arms. 
Shoulder  amis. 


Shoulder  arms. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  I. 


95 


Trail  arms. 
Unfix  bayonet. 
Secure  arms. 


Shoulder  arms. 
Shoulder  arms. 
Shoulder  arms. 


Load  in  nine  times. 


27.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  position 
of  the  body,  of  the  feet,  and  of  the  piece,  be  always 
exact,  and  that  the  times  be  briskly  executed  and 
close  to  the  person. 


28.  The  manual  of  arms  being  ended,  the  instructor 
will  command : 


29.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  will 
close  up  in  quick  time,  each  man  directing  himself 
on  his  file  leader. 


Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in  closed  ranks. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will 
cause  to  be  executed  parallel  and  oblique  alignments 
by  the  right  and  left,  forward  and  backward,  ob- 
serving to  place  always  two  or  four  files  to  serve  a^ 
a  basis  of  alignment.  He  will  give  the  commands 
prescribed,  No.  21. 

31.  In  alignments  in  closed  ranks,  the  captain  will 
superintend  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant 
the  rear  rank.  They  will  habituate  themselves  to 
judge  the  alignment  by  the  lines  of  the  eyes  and 
ehoulders,  in  casting  a  glance  of  the  eye  along  th« 
front  and  rear  of  the  ranks. 

32.  The  moment  the  captain  perceives  the  greater 
number  of  the  front  rank  aligned,  he  will  comn>and 


Article  Fourth. 
To  close  ranks. 


1.  Close  order.    2.  March. 


Article  Fifth. 


96  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  I. 


Front,  and  rectify,  afterwards,  if  necessary,  the 
alignment  of  the  other  men  by  the  means  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  320.  The  rear  rank 
will  conform  to  the  alignment  of  the  fror.t  rank,  su- 
perintended by  the  covering  sergeant. 

33.  The  ranks  being  steady,  the  instructor  will 
place  himself  on  the  flank  to  verify  their  alignment. 
He  will  also  see  that  each  rear  rank  man  covers  ac- 
curately his  file  leader. 

34.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  instructor  will  ob- 
serve what  is  prescribed.  No.  24. 

35.  In  all  alignments,  the  file  closers  will  preserve 
the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

36.  The  alignments  being  ended,  the  instructor  will 
cause  to  be  executed  the  manual  of  arms. 

37.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  rest  the  men,  with- 
out deranging  the  alignment,  will  first  cause  arms  to 
be  supported,  or  ordered,  and  then  command : 

In  place — Pvest. 

88.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  no  longer  be 
constrained  to  preserve  silence  or  steadiness  of  posi- 
tion ;  but  they  will  always  keep  one  or  other  heel  on 
the  alignment. 

39.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  instructor  should  wish 
to  rest  the  men  without  constraining  them  to  preserve 
the  alignment,  he  will  command  : 

Rest. 

40.  At  which  command,  the  men  will  not  be  re- 
quired to  preserve  immobility,  or  to  remain  in  their 
places. 

41.  The  instructor  may,  also,  when  he  shall  judge 
proper,  cause  arms  to  be  stacked,  which  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed,  school  of  the  soldier. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  II. 


97 


LESSON  SECOND. 

42.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  pass  to  the  second 
lesson,  will  cause  the  company  to  take  arms,  if  stacks 
have  been  formed,  and  command  : 

1.  Attention,    2.  Company.    3.  Shoulder — Arms. 

43.  The  instructor  will  then  cause  loadings  and 
firings  to  be  executed  in  the  following  order : 

Article  First. 

To  load  in  four  times  and  at  will. 

44.  Loading  in  four  times  will  be  commanded  and 
executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  251,  and  following.  The  instructor  will  cause 
this  exercise  to  be  often  repeated,  in  succession, 
before  passing  to  loading  at  will. 

45.  Loading  at  will  will  be  commanded  and  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No. 
256.  In  priming  when  loading  in  four  times^  and  also 
at  will,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  half 
face  to  the  right  with  the  men,  and  face  to  the  front 
when  the  man  next  to  them,  respectively,  brings  his 
piece  to  the  shoulder. 

46.  The  instructor  will  labor  to  the  utmost  to  cause 
the  men,  in  the  different  loadings,  to  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  Nos.  257 
and  258. 

47.  Loading  at  will,  being  that  of  battle,  and  con- 
sequently the  one  with  which  it  is  most  important  to 
render  the  men  familiar,  it  will  claim  preference  in 
the  exercises  the  moment  the  men  be  well  established 
in  the  principles.  To  these  they  will  be  brought  by 
degrees,  so  that  every  man  may  be  able  to  load  with 
cartridges,  and  to  fire  at  least  three  rounds  ia  a 
minute  with  ease  and  regularity. 


98  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  II. 


Article  Second. 
To  fire  by  company. 

48.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  hf 
company  to  be  executed,  will  command  : 

1.  Fire  hy  company.    2.  Commence  firing. 

49.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  promptly 
place  himself  opposite  the  centre  of  his  company, 
and  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  line  of  file  closers :  the 
covering  sergeant  will  retire  to  that  line,  and  place 
himself  opposite  to  his  interval.  This  rule  is  general^ 
for  both  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant^  in  all  the 
different  firings. 

60.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  add ; 
1.  Company \  2.  Ready;  3.  Aim;  4.  Fire;  5.  Load. 

51.  At  the  command  load,  the  men  will  load  their 
pieces,  and  then  take  the  position  of  ready,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

52.  The  captain  will  immediately  recommence  the 
firing,  by  the  commands ; 

1.  Company.    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

53.  The  firing  will  be  thus  continued  until  the  sig- 
nal to  cease  firing  is  sounded. 

54.  The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be 
taken  to  the  right  and  left,  simply  observing  to  pro- 
nounce right  (or  left)  oblique,  before  the  sommand  aim. 

Article  T?iird. 
The  Fire  by  file. 

55.  The  instructor  wishing  to  cause  the  fire  by  fil 
to  be  executed,  will  command : 

1.  Fire  by  file.    2.  Company.     3.  Ready.     4.  Com- 
mence firing. 

66,  The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  exe- 


SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  II.  99 

6Uted  as  prescribed  in  tlie  school  of  the  soldier,  No- 
275  and  following. 

57.  The  fire  will  be  commenced  by  the  right  file 
of  the  company ;  the  next  file  will  take  aim  at  the 
instant  the  first  brings  down  pieces  to  re-load,  and  so 
on  to  the  left;  but  this  progression  will  only  be  ob- 
served in  the  first  discharge,  after  which  each  man 
will  re-load  and  fire  without  regulating  himself  by 
others,  conforming  himself  to  what  is  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  280. 

Article  Fourth. 
The  Fire  by  rank. 

58.  The  instructor  wishing  the  fire  by  rank  to  be 
executed,  will  command : 

1.  Fire  hy  rank.    2.  Company,    3.  Ready. 
4.  Rear  rank — Aim.    5.  Fire.    6.  Load. 

59.  The  fifth  and  sixth  commands  will  be  executed 
as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  285 
and  following. 

60.  When  the  instructor  sees  one  or  two  pieces  in 
the  rear  rank  at  a  ready,  he  will  command : 

1.  Front  rank,    2.  Aim.    3.  Fire.    4.  Load. 

61.  The  firing  will  be  continued  thus  by  alternate 
ranks,  until  the  signal  is  given  to  cease  firing. 

62.  The  instructor  will  sometimes  cause  aim  to  be 
taken  to  the  right  and  left,  conforming  to  what  is 
prescribed  No.  64. 

63.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease, 
whether  by  company,  by  file,  or  by  rank,  by  sounding 
the  signal  to  cease  firing^  and  at  the  instant  this  sound 
commences,  the  men  will  cease  to  fire,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No. 
282. 

64.  The  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  always  fol' 


100       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  II. 

lowed  by  a  bugle  note ;  at  which  sound,  the  captain 
and  covering  sergeant  will  promptly  resume  their 
places  in  line,  and  will  rectify,  if  necessary,  the 
alignment  of  the  ranks. 

65.  In  this  school,  except  when  powder  is  used, 
the  signal  to  cease  firing  will  be  indicated  by  the  com- 
mand, cease  firing,  which  will  be  pronounced  by  the 
instructor  when  he  wishes  the  semblance  of  firing 
to  cease. 

66.  The  command  posts  will  be  likewise  substi- 
tuted, under  similar  circumstances,  for  the  bugle  note 
employed  as  the  signal  for  the  return  of  the  captain 
and  covering  sergeant  to  their  places  in  line,  which 
command  will  be  given  when  the  instructor  sees  the 
men  have  brought  their  pieces  to  a  shoulder. 

67.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  which  is  most  fre- 
quently used  against  an  enemy,  it  is  highly  import- 
ant that  it  be  rendered  perfectly  familiar  to  the 
troops.  The  instructor  will,  therefore,  give  it  almost 
exclusive  preference,  and  labor  to  cause  the  men  to 
aim  with  care,  and  always,  if  possible,  at  some  par- 
ticular object.  As  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance 
that  the  men  should  aim  with  precision  in  battle,  this 
principle  will  be  rigidly  enforced  in  the  exercises  for 
purposes  of  instruction. 

Article  Fifth. 
To  Fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

68.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  several  fires  to 
be  executed  to  the  rear,  that  is,  by  the  rear  rank.  To 
elfect  this,  he  will  command : 

1.  Face  hy  the  rear  rank.    2.  Company.    3.  About-- 
Face. 

69.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  step  out 
and  place  himself  near  to,  and  facing  the  right  file 
of  his  company;  the  covering  sergeant,  and  file 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  II.  101 

closers,  will  pass  quickly  through  the  captain's  inter- 
val, and  place  themselves  faced  to  the  rear,  th.9 
covering  sergeant  a  pace  behind  the  captain,  and  the 
file  closers  two  paces  from  the  front  rank  opposite 
to  their  places  in  line,  each  passing  behind  the  cover- 
ing sergeant. 

70.  At  the  third  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  last  file  closer  shall  have  passed 
through  the  interval,  the  company  will  face  about  ; 
the  captain  will  place  himself  in  his  interval  in  the 
rear  rank,  now  become  the  front,  and  the  covering 
sergeant  will  cover  him  in  the  front  rank,  now  be- 
come the  rear. 

71.  The  company  having  faced  by  the  rear  rank, 
4he  instructor  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  fire  by 
company,  both  direct  and  oblique,  the  fire  by  file, 
and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  commands  and  means 
prescribed  in  the  three  preceding  articles ;  the  cap- 
tain, covering  sergeant,  and  the  men  will  conform 
themselves,  in  like  manner,  to  what  is  therein  pre- 
scribed. 

72.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of 
the  company,  now  become  the  right.  In  the  fire  by 
rank,  the  firing  will  commence  with  the  front  rank, 
now  become  the  rear. 

73.  To  resume  the  proper  front,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.   2.  Comj)any.    3.  About — 
Face. 

74.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain,  covering 
sergeant  and  file  closers  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed  Nos.  69  and  70. 

75.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  having 
faced  about,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will 
resume  their  places  in  line. 

76.  In  this  lesson,  the  instructor  will  impress  Dn 
the  men  the  importance  of  aiming  always  at  some 


102       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  II. 


particular  object,  and  of  holding  the  piece  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  178. 

77.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  captain 
to  make  a  short  pause  between  the  commands  aim 
and  fire,  to  give  the  men  time  to  aim  with  accuracy. 

78.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  position 
to  see  the  two  ranks,  in  order  to  detect  faults ;  he 
will  charge  the  captain  and  file  closers  to  be  equally 
watchful,  and  to  report  to  him  when  the  ranks  are 
at  rest.  He  will  remand,  for  individual  instruction, 
the  men  who  may  be  observed  to  load  badly. 

79.  The  instructor  will  recommend  to  the  soldiers, 
in  the  firings,  the  highest  degree  of  composure  or 
presence  of  mind ;  he  will  neglect  nothing  that  may 
contribute  to  this  end. 

80.  He  will  give  to  the  men,  as  a  general  principUy 
to  maintain,  in  the  direct  fire,  the  left  heel  in  its  place, 
in  order  that  the  alignment  of  the  ranks  and  files  may 
not  be  deranged ;  and  he  will  verify,  by  examination, 
after  each  exercise  in  firing,  the  observance  of  this 
principle. 

81.  The  instructor  will  observe,  in  addition  to  these 
remarks,  all  those  which  follow. 

82.  When  the  firing  is  executed  with  cartridges,  it 
is  particularly  recommended  that  the  men  observe,  in 
uncocking,  whether  smoke  escapes  from  the  tube, 
which  is  a  certain  indication  that  the  piece  has  been 
discharged  ;  but  if,  on  the  contrary,  no  smoke  escapes, 
the  soldier,  in  such  case,  instead  of  re-loading,  will 
pick  and  prime  again.  If,  believing  the  load  to  be 
discharged,  the  soldier  should  put  a  second  cartridge 
in  Ills  piece,  he  ought,  at  least,  to  perceive  it  in  ram- 
ming, by  the  height  of  the  load;  and  he  would  be 
very  culpable,  should  he  put  in  a  third.  The  in- 
structor will  always  cause  arms  to  be  inspected  after 
firing  with  cartridges,  in  order  to  observe  if  the  fault 
has  been  committed,  of  putting  three  cartridges,  with- 


I 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  HI.  103 


out  a  discharge,  in  tlie  same  piece,  in  which  case  the 
ball  screw  will  be  applied. 

83.  It  sometimes  happens,  when  a  cap  has  missed 
fire,  that  the  tube  is  found  stopped  up  with  a  hp.rd, 
white,  and  compact  powder;  in  this  case,  picking 
will  be  dispensed  with,  and  a  new  cap  substituted 
for  the  old  one. 


LESSON  THIKD. 
Article  First. 
To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

84.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  cor- 
rectly aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  ex- 
ercise it  in  marching  by  the  front,  he  will  assure  him- 
self that  the  shoulders  of  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  are  perfectly  in  the  direction  of  their  re- 
spective ranks,  and  that  the  sergeant  accurately 
covers  the  captain ;  the  instructor  will  then  place 
himself  twenty-live  or  thirty  paces  in  front  of  them, 
face  to  the  rear,  and  place  himself  exactly  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  line  passing  between  their  heels. 

85.  The  instructor,  being  aligned  on  the  directing 
file,  will  command  : 

1.  Company,  forward. 

86.  At  this,  a  sergeant,  previously  designated,  will 
move  six  paces  in  advance  of  the  captain  :  the  in- 
structor, from  the  position  prescribed,  will  correctly 
align  this  sergeant  on  the  prolongation  of  the  direct- 
ing tile. 

87.  This  advanced  sergeant,  who  is  to  be  charged 
with  the  direction,  will,  the  moment  his  position  is 
assured,  take  two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight 
line  which  would  pass  between  his  own  and  the  heela 
of  the  instructor. 


104       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III. 


88.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor 
will  step  aside,  and  command : 

2.  March. 

89.  At  this,  the  company  will  step  off  with  life. 
The  directing  sergeant  will  observe,  with  the  greatest 
precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  march- 
ing on  the  two  points  he  has  chosen  ;  he  will  take  in 
succession,  and  always  a  little  before  arriving  at  the 
point  nearest  to  him,  new  points  in  advance,  exactly 
ill  the  same  line  with  the  first  two,  and  at  the  distance 
of  some  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  each  other.  The 
cfiptain  will  march  steadily  in  the  trace  of  the  directing 
sergeant,  keeping  always  six  paces  from  him  ;  the  men 
will  each  maintain  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  feel 
lightly  the  elbow  of  his  neighbor  on  the  side  of  direc- 
tion, and  conform  himself  to  the  principles  prescribed, 
school  of  the  soldier,  for  the  march  by  the  front. 

90.  The  man  next  to  the  captain  will  take  special 
care  not  to  pass  him ;  to  this  end,  he  will  keep  the 
line  of  his  shoulders  a  little  in  the  rear,  but  in  the 
same  direction  with  those  of  the  captain. 

91.  The  file  closers  will  march  at  the  habitual  dis- 
tance of  two  paces  behind  the  rear  rank. 

32.  If  the  men  lose  the  step,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

To  the— Stei^. 

93.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  glance  towards 
the  directing  sergeant,  retake  the  step  from  him,  and 
again  direct  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

94.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  captain  and  cover- 
ing sergeant  to  be  posted  sometimes  on  the  right,  and 
sometimes  on  the  left  of  the  company. 

95.  The  directing  sergeant,  in  advance,  having  the 
greatest  influence  on  the  march  of  the  company,  he 
will  be  selected  for  the  precision  of  his  step,  his  habit 
of  maintaining  his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  a  given 


SCHJOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III.  105 

line  of  direction,  and  of  prolonging  that  line  without 
variation. 

96.  If  this  sergeant  should  fail  to  observe  these 
principles,  undulations  in  the  front  of  the  company 
must  necessarily  follow ;  the  men  will  be  unable  to 
contract  the  habit  of  taking  steps  equal  in  length  and 
swiftness,  and  of  maintaining  their  shoulders  in  a 
square  with  the  line  of  direction — the  only  means  of 
attaining  perfection  in  the  march  in  line. 

97.  The  instructor,  with  a  view  the  better  to  esta- 
blish the  men  in  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step, 
and  in  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line,  will  cause 
the  company  to  advance  three  or  four  hundred  paces, 
at  once,  without  halting,  if  the  ground  will  permit. 
In  the  first  exercises,  he  will  march  the  company  with 
open  ranks,  the  better  to  observe  the  two  ranks. 

98.  The  instructor  will  see,  with  care,  that  all  the 
principles  of  the  march  in  line  are  strictly  observed ; 
he  will  generally  be  on  the  directing  flank,  in  a  posi- 
tion to  observe  the  two  ranks,  and  the  faults  they  may 
commit;  he  will  sometimes  halt  behind  the  directing 
file  during  some  thirty  successive  steps,  in  order  to 
judge  whether  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  directing 
file,  deviate  from  the  perpendicular. 

Article  Second. 

To  halt  the  company,  inarching  in  line  of  battle,  and 
to  align  it. 

99.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  halt  the  company, 
will  command : 

1.  Company.    2.  Halt. 

100.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt ;  the  directing  sergeant  will  remain  in  advance, 
unless  ordered  to  return  to  the  line  of  file  closers. 
The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor  may 


106       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III. 

advance  the  first  three  or  four  files  on  the  side  of 
direction,  and  align  the  company  on  that  basis,  or 
he  may  confine  himself  to  causing  the  alignment 
to  be  rectified.  In  this  last  case,  he  will  command : 
Captain,  rectify  the  alignment.  The  captain  will 
direct  the  covering  sergeant  to  attend  to  the  rear 
rank,  when  each,  glancing  his  eyes  along  his  rank, 
will  promptly  rectify  it,  conforming  to  what  is 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  320. 

Article  Third. 
Oblique  marcli  in  line  of  battle. 

101.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march, 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  march 
obliquely,  he  will  command : 

Right  (or  left)  oblique.    2.  March. 

102.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
take  the  oblique  step.  The  men  will  accurately 
observe  the  principles  prascribed  in  the  school  of  the 
soldier,  No.  331.  The  rear  rank  men  will  preserve 
their  distances,  and  march  in  rear  of  the  man  next  on 
the  right  (or  left)  of  their  habitual  file  leaders. 

103.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  direct  march  to 
be  resumed,  he  will  command: 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

104.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
resume  the  direct  march.  The  instructor  will  move 
briskly  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  and 
facing  the  company,  will  place  himself  exactly  in  the 
prolongation  of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant; 
and  then,  by  a  sign,  will  move  the  directing  sergeant 
on  the  same  line,  if  he  be  not  already  on  it ;  the  lat- 
ter will  immediately  take  two  points  on  the  ground 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III.  107 

between  himself  and  the  instructor,  and  as  he  advances, 
will  take  new  points  of  direction,  as  is  explained  No. 
89. 

105.  In  the  oblique  march,  the  men  not  having  the 
touch  of  elbows,  the  guide  will  always  be  on  the  side 
towards  which  the  oblique  is  made,  without  any  indi- 
cation to  that  effect  being  given  ;  and  when  the  direct 
march  is  resumed,  the  guide  will  be,  equally  without 
indication,  on  the  side  where  it  was  previous  to  the 
oblique. 

106.  The  instructor  will,  at  first,  cause  the  oblique 
to  be  made  towards  the  side  of  the  guide.  He  will 
also  direct  the  captain  to  have  an  eye  on  the  directing 
sergeant,  in  order  to  keep  on  the  same  perpendicular 
line  to  the  front  with  him,  while  following  a  parallel 
direction. 

107.  During  the  continuance  of  the  march,  the  in- 
structor will  be  watchful  that  the  men  follow  parallel 
directions,  in  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  for  preserving  the  gene- 
ral alignment ;  whenever  the  men  lose  the  alignment, 
he  will  be  careful  that  they  regain  it  by  lengthening 
or  shortening  the  step,  without  altering  the  cadence, 
or  changing  the  direction. 

108.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of 
the  company  and  face  to  it,  in  order  to  regulate  the 
march  of  the  directing  sergeant,  or  the  man  who  is 
on  the  flank  towards  which  the  oblique  is  made,  and 
to  see  that  the  principles  of  the  march  are  properly 
observed,  and  that  the  tiles  do  not  crowd. 

Article  Fourth. 

To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick  time,  and  the 
back  step. 

109.  The  company  being  in  the  direct  march  and 
in  quick  time,  the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  mark  time, 
will  command: 


108      SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  III. 


1.  Mark  time.    2.  March. 

110.  To  resume  the  march,  he  will  command: 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

111.  To  cause  the  march  in  double  quick  time,  the 
iustructor  will  command ; 

1.  Double  quick.    2.  March. 

112.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the 
instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

113.  To  resume  quick  time,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Quick  time.    2.  March. 

114.  The  command  march  will  be  pronounced  at  the 
instant  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground. 

115.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  the  instructor 
may  cause  it  to  march  in  the  back  step  ;  to  this 
eifect,  he  will  command: 

1.  Company  backioard.    2.  March. 

116.  The  back  step  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier 
No.  247,  but  the  use  of  it  being  rare,  the  instructor 
will  not  cause  more  than  fifteen  or  twenty  steps  to  be 
taken  in  succession,  and  to  that  extent  but  seldom. 

117.  The  instructor  ought  not  to  exercise  the  com- 
pany in  marching  in  double  quick  time  till  the  men 
are  well  established  in  the  length  and  swiftness  of  the 
pace  in  quick  time :  he  will  then  endeavor  to  render 
the  march  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  steps  in  the 
minute  equally  easy  and  familiar,  and  also  cause 
them  to  observe  the  same  erectness  of  body  and  com- 
posure of  mind  as  if  marching  in  quick  time. 

118.  When  marching  in  double  quick  time,  if  a 
subdivision  (in  a  column)  has  to  change  direction  by 
turning f  or  has  to  form  into  line,  the  men  will  quicken 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  ITI.  109 


the  pace  to  one  hundred  and  eighty  steps  in  a  minute. 
The  same  swiftness  of  step  Trill  be  observed  under  all 
circumstances  where  great  rapidity  of  movement  is 
required.  But,  as  ranks  of  men  cannot  march  any 
length  of  time  at  so  swift  a  rate,  without  breaking 
or  confusion,  this  acceleration  will  not  be  considered 
a  prescribed  exercise,  and  accordingly  companies  or 
battalions  will  only  be  habitually  exercised  in  the 
double  quick  time  of  one  hundred  and  sixty-five  steps 
in  the  minute. 

Article  Fifth. 
To  march  in  retreat. 

119.  The  company  being  halted  and  correctly 
aligned,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
march  in  retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.  Company.    2.  About — Face. 

120.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  rear,  the 
instructor  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  directing 
file,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  84. 

121.  The  instructor,  being  correctly  established 
on  the  prolongation  of  the  directing  file,  will  com- 
mand : 

3.  Company,  forward. 

122.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant  will  conform 
himself  to  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  86  and  87,  with 
this  difference — he  will  place  himself  six  paces  in 
front  of  the  line  of  file  closers,  now  leading. 

128.  The  covering  sergeant  will  step  into  the  line 
of  file  closers,  opposite  to  his  interval,  and  the  cap- 
tain will  place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become 
the  front. 

124.  This  disposition  being  promptly  made,  the 
instructor  will  command : 

4.  March. 
10 


110       SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  III. 


125.  At  this,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain, 
and  the  men,  will  conform  themselves  to  what  i€ 
prescribed  No.  89,  and  following. 

126.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed, 
marching  in  retreat,  all  that  is  prescribed  for  march- 
ing in  advance  ;  the  commands  and  the  means  of 
execution  will  be  the  same. 

127.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  company, 
will,  when  he  may  wish,  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front 
by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  119.  The  captain, 
the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  directing  sergeant, 
will  resume  their  habitual  places  in  line,  the  moment 
they  shall  have  faced  about. 

128.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  front 
rank,  if  the  instructor  should  wish  it  to  march  in 
retreat,  he  will  cause  the  right  about  to  be  executed 
while  marching,  and  to  this  elfect  will  command ; 

1.  Company.    2.  Right  about.    3.  March. 

129.  At  the  third  command,  the  company  will 
promptly  face  about,  and  recommence  the  march  by 
the  rear  rank. 

130.  The  directing  sergeant  will  face  about  with 
the  company,  and  v/ill  move  rapidly  six  paces  in 
front  of  the  file  closers,  and  upon  the  prolongation 
of  the  guide.  The  instructor  will  place  him  in  the 
proper  direction  by  the  means  prescribed  No.  104. 
The  captain,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  men,  will 
conform  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  march 
in  retreat. 

131.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  company  tc 
march  by  the  front  rank,  he  will  give  the  same  com- 
mands, and  will  regulate  the  direction  of  the  marcli 
by  the  same  means. 

132.  The  instructor  will  cause  to  be  executed  in 
double  quick  time,  all  the  movements  prescribed  in 
the  3d,  4th,  5th,  and  Gth  lessons  of  this  school,  with 
the  exception  of  the  march  backwards,  which  will 


Ill 


PL  20. 


0  ^0 


a 

& 

Q 
m 
ta 
csi 
a 
a 


i 

a 

a 

& 

i 

tB 

Q 

S3 

0 

i  ^ 

1  <a 

1 

13 

1  0 

Marching      «  rfo.'W<-"ff  ''''' 

or  riyht  (No.  135). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  IV.  Ill 

executed  only  in  quick  time.  He  will  give  the  sams 
commands,  observing  to  add  double  quick  before  the 
command  march. 

133.  When  the  pieces  are  carried  on  the  right 
shoulder,  in  quick  tim.e,  the  distance  between  the 
ranks  will  be  sixteen  inches.  Whenever,  therefore, 
the  instructor  brings  the  company  from  a  shoulder  to 
this  position,  the  rear,  rank  must  shorten  a  little  the 
first  steps  in  order  to  gain  the  prescribed  distance, 
and  will  lengthen  the  steps,  on  the  contrary,  in  order 
to  close  up  when  the  pieces  are  again  brought  to  a 
shoulder.  In  marching  in  double  quick  time,  the 
distance  between  the  ranks  will  be  twenty-six  inches, 
and  the  pieces  will  be  carried  habitually  on  the  right 
shoulder. 

134.  Whenever  a  company  is  halted,  the  men  will 
bring  their  pieces  at  once  to  a  shoulder  at  the  com- 
Hiand  hdlt.  The  rear  rank  will  close  to  it£  propor 
distance.    These  rules  are  general. 


LESSON  FOURTH. 

Article  First. 
To  march  by  the  fiank. 

135.  The  company  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  at  a 
halt,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
march  by  the  right  fiank,  he  will  command : 

1.  Company,  right — 1?  ace.    2.  Forward, 
3.  March. 

136.  At  the  first  command,  the  coippany  will  face 
to  the  right,  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself 
at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  the  captain  having 
stepped  out  for  the  purpose,  so  far  as  to  find  himself 
by  the  side  of  the  sergeant,  and  on  his  left ;  the  front 
rank  will  double  as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
fioldier,  No.  352 ;  the  rear  rank  will,  at  the  same  time, 


112       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  IT. 

Bide-step  to  the  right  one  pace,  and  double  in  the 
game  manner;  so  that  when  the  movement  is  com- 
pleted, the  files  will  be  formed  of  four  men  aligned, 
ani  elbow  to  elbow.  The  intervals  will  be  pre- 
served. 

137.  The  file  closers  will  also  move  by  side  step 
to  the  right,  so  that  when  the  ranks  are  formed, 
they  will  be  two  paces  from  the  rearmost  rank. 

138.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
move  off  briskly  in  quick  time  ;  tiie  covering  ser- 
geant at  the  head  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  cap- 
tain on  his  left,  will  march  straight  forward.  The 
men  of  each  file  will  march  abreast  of  their  re- 
spective front  rank  men,  heads  direct  to  the  front; 
the  file  closers  will  march  opposite  their  places  in 
line  of  battle. 

139.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  principles  of 
the  march  by  the  flank  to  be  observed,  in  placing 
himself,  pending  the  march,  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier,  No.  357. 

140.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  march  by  the 
left  flank  to  be  executed  by  the  same  commands, 
substituting  left  for  right;  the  ranks  will  double  as 
has  been  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
No.  354 ;  the  rear  rank  will  side-step  to  the  left  one 
pace  before  doubling. 

141.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left, 
the  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the 
front  rank ;  the  captain  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  left, 
and  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  this  guide ; 
the  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  captain  in 
the  front  rank,  the  moment  the  latter  quits  it  to  go 
to  the  left. 

Article  Second. 
To  change  direction  by  file. 

142.  The  company  being  faced  by  the  flank,  and 
either  in  march,  or  at  a  halt,  when  the  instructor 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  IV.  113 


shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  wheel  by  file,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  By  file,  left  {ov  right).    2.  March. 

143.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  will 
wheel ;  if  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  the 
latter  will  take  care  not  to  turn  at  once,  but  to  de- 
scribe a  short  arc  of  a  circle,  shortening  a  little 
the  first  five  or  six  steps  in  order  to  give  time  to  the 
fourth  man  of  this  file  to  conform  himself  to  the 
movement.  If  the  wheel  be  to  the  side  of  the  rear 
rank,  the  front  rank  man  will  wheel  in  the  step  of 
twenty-eight  inches,  and  the  fourth  man  will  con- 
form himself  to  the  movement  by  describing  a  short 
arc  of  a  circle  as  has  been  explained.  Each  file  will 
come  to  wheel  on  the  same  ground  where  that  which 
preceded  it  wheeled. 

144.  The  inetructcr  will  see  that  the  wheel  be  exe- 
cuted  according  to  these  principles,  in  order  that 
the  distance  between  the  files  may  always  be  pre- 
served, and  that  there  be  no  check  or  hinderance  at 
the  wheeling  point. 

Article  Third. 

To  halt  the  company  marching*  by  the  flank,  and  to  face 
it  to  the  front. 

145.  To  effect  these  objects,  the  instructor  will 
command : 

1.  Company,    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 

146.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  exe- 
cuted as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No8. 
859  and  360.  As  soon  as  the  files  have  undoubled,  the 
rear  rank  will  close  to  its  proper  distance.  The  cap- 
tain and  covering  sergeant,  as  well  as  the  left  guide, 
if  the  march  be  by  the  left  flank,  will  return  to  their 


114       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  IV. 

habitual  places  m  line  at  the  instant  the  company 
faces  to  the  front. 

147.  The  instructor  may  then  align  the  company 
by  one  of  the  means  prescribed,  No.  100. 

Article  Fourth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form  it  on 
the  right  (or  left)  by  file  into  line  of  battle. 

148.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right 
flank,  the  instructor  will  command : 

1.  On  the  rights  by  file  into  line.    2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  march^  the  rear  rank  men 
doubled  will  mark  time;  the  captain  and  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  turn  to  the  right,  march  straight 
forward,  and  be  halted  hy  the  instrvctor  when  they 
shall  have  passed  at  least  six  paces  beyond  the  rank 
of  file  closers;  the  captain  will  place  himself  cor- 
rectly on  the  line  of  battle,  and  will  direct  the  align- 
ment as  the  men  of  the  front  rank  successively 
arrive ;  the  covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  be- 
hind the  captain  at  the  distance  of  the  rear  rank ; 
the  two  men  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  doubled, 
will  continue  to  march,  and  passing  beyond  the 
covering  sergeant  and  the  captain,  will  turn  to  the 
right ;  after  turning,  they  will  continue  to  march 
elbow  to  elbow,  and  direct  themselves  towards  the 
line  of  battle,  but  when  they  shall  arrive  at  two 
paces  from  this  line,  the  even  number  will  shorten 
the  step  so  that  the  odd  number  may  precede  him  ou 
the  line,  the  odd  number  placing  himself  by  the  side 
and  on  the  left  of  the  captain ;  the  even  number  will 
afterwards  oblique  to  the  left,  and  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  odd  number ;  the  next  two  men  of  the 
front  rank  doubled,  will  pass  in  the  same  manner 
behind  the  two  first,  turn  then  to  the  right,  and  place 
themselves.^  according  to  the  means  just  explained, 


114 


PL  27. 


the  rifjlit  hy  file  into  line  (No.  14)i). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  lY.  115 

lo  the  left,  and  by  the  side  of,  the  two  men  already 
established  on  the  line  ;  the  remaining  files  of  this 
rank  will  follow  in  succession,  and  be  formed  to  the 
left  in  the  same  manner.  The  rear  rank  doubled 
will  execute  the  movement  in  the  manner  already 
explained  for  the  front  rank,  taking  care  not  to  com- 
mence the  movement  unt'l  four  men  of  the  front 
rank  are  established  on  the  line  of  battle ;  the  rear 
rank  men,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  cover  ac- 
curately their  file  leaders. 

150.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left 
flank,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  form  by  file  on 
the  left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  the  same  commands,  substituting 
the  indication  left  for  right.  In  this  case,  the  odd 
numbers  will  shorten  the  step,  so  that  the  even 
numbers  may  precede  them  on  the  line.  The  cap- 
tain, plpced  o'l  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  j:nd  th3 
left  guide,  vsjill  return  to  their  places  in  line  of  battle, 
by  order  of  the  instructor,  after  the  company  shall 
be  formed  and  aligned. 

151.  To  enable  the  men  the  better  to  comprehend 
the  mechanism  of  this  movement,  the  instructor  will 
at  first  ^ause  it  to  be  executed  separately  by  each 
rank  doubled,  and  afterwards  by  the  two  ranks 
united  and  doubled. 

152.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  line 
of  battle,  and  without  the  point  where  the  right  or 
left  is  to  rest,  in  order  to  establish  the  base  of  the 
alignment,  and  afterwards  he  will  follow  up  the 
movement  to  assure  himself  that  each  file  conforma 
itself  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  149. 


116       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  lY. 


Article  Fifth. 

The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  to  form  it 
by  company,  or  by  platoon,  into  line,  and  to  cause  it 
to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in  marching. 

153.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  right 
flank,  the  instructor  will  order  the  captain  to  form 
it  into  line ;  the  captain  will  immediately  command : 
1.  By  company^  into  line  ;  2.  March. 

154.  At  the  command  march,  the  covering  sergeant 
will  continue  to  march  straight  forward;  the  men 
will  advance  the  right  shoulder,  take  the  double 
quick  step,  and  move  into  line,  by  the  shortest  route, 
taking  care  to  undouble  the  files,  and  to  come  on  the 
line  one  after  the  other. 

155.  As  the  front  rank  men  successively  arrive  in 
line  with  the  covering  sergeant,  they  will  tdke  fr^m 
him  the  step,  and  chen  turn  their  eyes  to  the  front. 

156.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to 
the  movements  of  their  respective  file  leaders,  but 
without  endeavoring  to  arrive  in  line  at  the  same 
time  with  the  latter. 

157.  At  the  instant  the  movement  begins,  the 
captain  will  face  to  his  company  in  order  ..o  follow 
up  the  execution ;  and,  as  soon  as  the  company  is 
formed,  he  will  command,  guide  left,  place  himself 
two  paces  before  the  centre,  face  to  the  front,  and 
take  the  step  of  the  company. 

158.  At  the  command  guide  left,  the  second  ser- 
geant will  promptly  place  himself  in  the  front  rank, 
on  the  left,  to  serve  as  guide,  and  the  covering  ser- 
geant who  is  on  the  opposite  flank  will  remain  there. 

159.  When  the  company  marches  by  the  left  flank, 
this  movement  will  be  executed  by  the  same  com- 
mands, and  according  to  the  same  principles ;  the 
company  being  formed,  the  captain  will  command 
guide  right,  and  place  himself  in  front  of  his  company 
tts  above ;  the  covering  sergeant  who  is  on  the  right 


116 


PI.  28, 


By  compKmi)  inti)  Urns  (No.  153)» 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  IT.  117 


of  tlie  front  rank  will  serve  as  guide,  and  tlie  second 
Bergeant  placed  on  the  left  flank  will  remain  there. 

160.  Thus,  in  a  column  by  company,  right  or  left 
in  front,  the  covering  sergeant  and  the  second  ser  • 
geant  of  each  company  will  always  be  placed,  on  the 
right  and  left,  respectively,  of  the  front  rank ;  they 
will  be  denominated  right  guide  and  left  guide^  and 
the  one  or  the  other  charged  with  the  direction. 

161.  The  company  being  in  march  by  the  flank,  if 
it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  cause  it  to  form 
platoons,  be  will  give  an  order  to  that  efl"ect  to  the 
captain,  who  will  command ; 

1.  By  platoon,  into  line,    2.  March. 

162.  The  movement  will  be  executed  by  each 
platoon  according  to  the  above  principles.  The  cap- 
tain will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first 
platoon,  and  the  first  lieutenant  before  the  centre  of 
the  second,  passing  through  the  opening  made  in  the 
centre  of*  the  company,  if  the  march  be  by  the  right 
flank,  and  around  the  left  of  his  platoon,  if  the  march 
be  by  the  left ;  in  this  last  case,  the  captain  will  also 
pass  around  the  left  of  the  second  platoon  in  order  to 
place  himself  in  front  of  the  first.  Both  the  captain 
and  lieutenant,  without  waiting  for  each  other,  will 
command  guide  left  (or  right)  at  the  instant  their 
respective  platoons  are  formed. 

163.  At  the  command  guide  left  (or  right),  the  guide 
of  each  platoon  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  indicated 
flank  of  the  platoon,  if  not  already  there. 

164.  The  right  guide  of  the  company  will  always 
serve  as  the  guide  of  the  right  or  left  of  the  first 
platoon,  and  the  left  guide  of  the  company  will  serve, 
in  like  manner,  as  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon. 

165.  Thus,  in  a  column  by  platoon,  there  will  be 
but  one  guide  to  each  platoon ;  he  will  always  be 
placed  on  its  left  flank,  if  the  right  be  in  front,  and 
m  the  right  flank,  if  the  left  be  iu  front. 


118       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  V. 


166.  In  these  movements,  the  file  closers  will  fol- 
low the  platoo.ns  to  which  they  are  attached. 

167.  The  instructor  may  cause  the  company, 
marching  by  the  flank,  to  form  by  company,  or  by 
platoon,  into  line,  by  his  own  direct  commands, 
using  those  prescribed  for  the  captain,  No.  163  or 
161. 

168.  The  instructor  will  exercise  the  company  in 
passing,  without  a  halt,  from  the  march  by  the  front, 
to  the  march  by  the  flank,  and  reciprocally.  In  either 
case,  he  will  employ  the  commands  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  soldier.  No.  363,  substituting  company 
for  squad.  The  company  will  face  to  the  right  or 
left,  in  marching,  and  the  captain,  the  guides,  and 
file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed for  each  in  the  march  by  the  flank,  or  in  the 
march  by  the  front  of  a  company  supposed  to  be  a 
subdivision  of  a  column. 

169.  If,  after  facing  to  the  right  or  left,  in  march- 
ing, the  company  find  itself  faced  by  the  rear  rank,«^ 
the  captain  will  place  himself  two  paces  behind  the 
centre  of  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  the  guides 
will  pass  to  the  rear  rank,  now  leading,  and  the  file 
closers  will  march  in  front  of  this  rank. 

170.  The  instructor,  in  order  to  avoid  fatiguing 
the  men,  and  to  prevent  them  from  being  negligent 
in  the  position  of  shoulder  arms,  will  sometimes 
order  support  arms  in  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
arms  on  the  right  shoulder,  when  marching  in  line. 


LESSON  FIFTH. 
Article  First. 

To  break  into  column  by  platoon,  either  at  a  halt  or 
in  march. 

171.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  in  line  of  battle, 


FL  29. 


m 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  Y,  119 


the  instructor,  wishing  to  break  it  into  column,  by 
platoon  to  the  right,  will  command : 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel,    2.  March. 

172.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
will  rapidly  place  themselves  two  paces  before  the 
centres  of  their  respective  platoons,  the  lieutenant 
passing  around  the  left  of  the  company.  They  need 
not  occupy  themselves  with  dressing,  one  upon  the 
otlier.  The  covering  sergeant  will  replace  the  cap- 
tain in  the  front  rank. 

173.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  front  rank 
man  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right,  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  standing  fast ;  the  chief  of  each  platoon 
will  move  quickly  by  the  shortest  line,  a  little  beyon^l 
the  point  at  which  the  marching  flank  will  rest  when 
the  wheel  shall  be  completed,  face  to  the  late  rear, 
and  place  himself  so  that  the  line  which  he  forms 
with  the  man  on  the  right  (who  had  faced)  shall  be 

giperpendicular  to  that  occupied  by  the  company  in 
line  of  battle ;  each  platoon  will  wheel  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed 
pivot,  and  when  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching 
flank  shall  approach  near  to  the  perpendicular,  its 
chief  will  command : 

1.  Platoon.    2.  Halt. 

174.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  given  at 
the  instant  the  man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank 
shall  have  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  perpen- 
dicular, the  platoon  will  halt;  the  covering  sergeant 
will  move  to  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  first  pla- 
toon is  to  rest,  passing  by  the  front  rank ;  the  second 
sergeant  will  place  himself,  in  like  manner,  in  respect 
to  the  second  platoon.  Each  will  take  care  to  leav« 
between  himself  and  the  man  on  the  right  of  his  pla- 
toon, a  space  equal  to  its  front ;  the  captain  and  first 
lieutenant  will  look  to  this,  and  each  take  care  to 


120        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  T. 


align  the  sergeant  between  himself  and  the  man  of 
the  phitoon  wlio  had  faced  to  the  right. 

175.  The  guide  of  each  platoon,  being  thus  esta- 
blished on  the  perpendicular,  each  chief  will  place 
himself  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and,  facing 
towards  him,  will  command : 

3.  Left — Dress. 

176.  The  alignment  being  ended,  each  chief  of 
platoon  will  command,  Front,  and  place  himself  two 
paces  before  its  centre. 

177.  The  file  closers  will  conform  themselves  to 
the  movement  of  their  respective  platoons,  preserving 
always  the  distance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank. 

178.  The  company  will  break  by  platoon  to  the 
left,  according  to  the  same  principles.  The  in- 
structor will  command  : 

1.  By  platoon^  left  wheel,    2.  March. 

179.  The  first  command  will  be  executed  in  the  ' 
same  manner  as  if  breaking  by  platoon  to  the  right. 

180.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  front  rank 
man  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the 
platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left,  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  for  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot ;  the 
chiefs  of  platoon  will  conform  to  the  principles  indi- 
cated Nos.  173  and  174. 

181.  At  the  command  halt,  given  by  the  chief  of 
each  platoon,  the  covering  sergeant  on  the  right  of 
the  front  rank  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  second 
sergeant  near  the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  will 
each  move  to  the  points  where  the  right  of  his  pla- 
toon is  to  rest.  The  chief  of  each  platoon  should  be 
careful  to  align  the  sergeant  between  himself  and 
the  man  of  the  platoon  who  had  faced  to  the  left,  and 
will  then  command  ; 


Right — Dress. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY—LESSON  V.  121 

182.  The  platoons  being  aligned,  each  chief  of  pla-- 
*oon  will  command,  Front,  and  place  himself  oppo- 
Bite  its  centre. 

183.  The  instructor  wishing  to  break  the  com- 
pany by  platoon  to  the  right,  and  to  move  the  column 
forward  after  the  wheel  is  completed,  will  caution 
the  company  to  that  effect,  and  command : 

1.  By  platoon,  right  wheel.    2.  March. 

184.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
will  move  rapidly  in  front  of  their  respective  pla- 
toons, conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No. 
172,  and  will  remain  in  this  position  during  the  con- 
tinuance of  the  wheel.  The  covering  sergeant  will  re- 
place the  chief  of  the  first  platoon  in  the  front  rank. 

185.  At  the  command  march,  the  platoons  will 
wheel  to  the  r^ght,  conforming  to  tbe  principles 
herein  prescribed  ;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  not  face 
to  the  right,  but  will  mark  time,  conforming  himself 
to  the  movement  of  the  marching  flank ;  and  when 
the  man  who  is  on  the  left  of  this  flank  shall  arrive 
near  the  perpendicular,  the  instructor  will  command: 

3.  Forward.    4.  March.    5.  Guide  left. 

186.  At  the  fourth  comman  i,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  wheel  is  completed,  the  platoons 
will  move  straight  to  the  front,  all  the  men  taking 
the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches.  The  covering  ser- 
geant and  the  second  sergeant  will  move  rapidly  to 
the  left  of  their  respective  platoons,  the  former  pass- 
ing before  the  front  rank.  The  leading  guide  will 
immediately  take  points  on  the  ground  in  the  direc- 
tion which  may  be  indicated  to  him  by  the  instructor. 

187.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  men  will  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  lightly  to  the  left. 

188.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platocn  should 
lose  his  distance,  or  the  line  of  direction,  he  will 


122        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  Y. 


conform  to  the  principles  herein  prescribed  Nos.  202 
and  203. 

189.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  line  to  the 
front,  the  instructor  will  cause  it  to  break  by  platoon 
to  the  right  by  the  same  commands.  At  the  com- 
mand march,  the  platoons  will  wheel  in  the  mannei 
already  explained ;  the  man  on  the  pivot  will  take 
care  to  mark  time  in  his  place,  without  advancing  or 
receding;  the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and 
the  guides,  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
Nos.  184  and  following. 

190.  The  compan}^  may  be  broken  by  platoons  to 
the  left,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  in- 
verse means,  the  instructor  giving  the  commands  pre- 
scribed Nos.  183  and  185,  substituting  left  for  right, 
and  reciprocally. 

191.  The  movements  explained  in  Nos.  183  and  189 
will  only  be  executed  after  the  company  has  become 
well  established  in  the  principles  of  the  march  in 
column,  Articles  Second  and  Third. 

Eemarks. 

192.  The  instructor,  placed  in  front  of  the  com- 
pany, will  observe  whether  the  movement  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  principles  prescribed  above ; 
whether  the  platoons,  after  breaking  into  column,  are 
perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle  just  occupied; 
and  whether  the  guide,  who  placed  himself  where 
the  marching  fiank  of  his  platoon  had  to  rest,  has 
left,  between  himself  and  the  front  rank  man  on  the 
right  (or  left),  the  space  necessary  to  contain  the 
front  of  the  platoon. 

193.  After  the  platoons  have  broken,  if  the  rear- 
most guide  should  not  accurately  cover  the  leading 
one,  he  will  not  seek  to  correct  his  position  till  the 
column  be  put  in  march,  unless  the  instructor,  wish- 
ing to  wheel  immediately  into  line,  should  think  it 
necessary  to  rectify  the  direction  of  the  guides, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  V.  123 

wliieh  would  be  executed  as  will  be  hereinafter  ex- 
plained in  Article  Fifth  of  this  Lesson. 

194.  The  instructor  will  observe,  that  the -man  on 
the  right  (or  left)  of  each  platoon,  who,  at  the  com- 
mand warcA,  faces  to  the  right  (or  left),  being  the  true 
pivot  of  the  wheel,  the  front  rank  man  next  to  him 
ought  to  gain  a  little  ground  to  the  front  in  wheeling, 
60  as  to  clear  the  pivot-man. 

Article  Second. 
To  march  in  column. 

195.  The  company  having  broken  by  platoon,  right 
(or  left)  in  front,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  the 
column  to  march,  will  throw  himself  twenty-five  or 
thirty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the  guides,  place  him- 
self correctly,  on  their  direction,  and  caution  the 
leading  guide  to  take  points  on  the  ground. 

196.  The  instructor  being  thus  placed,  the  guide 
of  the  leading  platoon  will  take  two  points  on  the 
ground  in  the  straight  line  passing  between  his  own 
and  the  heels  of  the  instructor. 

197.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  instructor 
will  step  aside,  and  command : 

1.    Column,  forward.     2.  Guide  left  (or  right). 
3.  March. 

198.  At  the  command  march,  promptly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  they,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will 
lead  off,  by  a  decided  step,  their  respective  platoons, 
in  order  that  the  whole  may  move  smartly,  and  at 
the  same  moment. 

199.  The  men  will  each  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of 
his  neighbor  towards  the  guide,  and  conform  himself, 
in  marching,  to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier.  No.  327.  The  man  next  to  the  guide, 
in  each  platoon,  will  take  care  never  to  pass  him,  and 
also  to  march  always  about  six  inches  to  the  right  (or 


124       SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANY — LESSON  V. 


left)  from  him,  in  order  not  to  push  him  out  of  the 
direction. 

200.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the 
greatest  precision,  the  length  and  cadence  of  the 
step,  and  maintain  the  direction  of  his  march  by  the 
means  prescribed  No.  89. 

201.  The  following  guide  will  march  exactly  in 
the  trace  of  the  leading  one,  preserving  between  the 
latter  and  himself  a  distance  precisely  equal  to  the 
front  of  his  platoon,  and  marching  in  the  same  step 
with  the  leading  guide. 

202.  If  the  following  guide  lose  his  distance  from 
the  one  leading  (which  can  only  happen  by  his  own 
fault),  he  will  correct  himself  by  slightly  lengthening 
or  shortening  a  few  steps,  in  order  that  there  may 
not  be  sudden  quickenings  or  slackenings  in  the 
march  of  his  platoon. 

203.  If  the  same  guide,  having  neglected  to  march 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  find  him- 
self sensibly  out  of  the  direction,  he  will  remedy  this 
fault  by  advancing  more  or  less  the  shoulder  opposite 
to  the  true  direction,  and  thiis,  in  a  few  steps,  insensi- 
bly regain  it,  without  the  inconvenience  of  the  oblique 
step,  which  would  cause  a  loss  of  distance.  In  all 
cases,  each  chief  of  platoon  will  cause  it  to  conform 
to  the  movements  of  its  guide. 

Eemarks  on  the  march  in  column. 

204.  If  the  chiefs  and  guides  of  subdivisions  neg- 
lect to  lead  oif,  and  to  decide  the  march  from  the 
first  step,  the  march  will  be  begun  in  uncertainty, 
which  will  cause  waverings,  a  loss  of  step,  and  a  loss 
of  distance. 

205.  If  the  leading  guide  take  unequal  steps,  the 
march  of  his  subdivision,  and  that  which  follows,  will 
be  uncertain ;  there  will  be  undulations,  quickenings, 
and  slackenings  in  the  march. 

206.  If  the  same  guide  be  not  habituated  to  pro- 


To  cliange  direction  hy  wliccling  to  the  7'ir/Jit  (No.  211). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  V. 


125 


long  a  given  direction,  without  deviation,  he  will 
describe  a  crooked  line,  and  the  column  must  wind  to 
conform  itself  to  such  line. 

207.  If  the  following  guide  be  not  habituated  to 
march  in  the  trace  of  the  preceding  one,  he  will  lose 
his  distance  at  every  moment  in  endeavors  to  re- 
gain the  trace,  the  preservation  of  which  is  the  most 
important  principle  in  the  march  in  column. 

208.  The  guide  of  each  subdivision  in  column  will 
be  responsible  for  the  direction,  distance,  and  step; 
the  chief  of  the  subdivision,  for  the  order  and  the 
conformity  of  his  subdivision  with  the  movements  of 
the  guide.  Accordingly,  the  chief  will  frequently 
turn,  in  the  march,  to  observe  his  subdivision. 

209.  The  instructor,  placed  on  the  flank  of  the 
guides,  will  watch  over  the  execution  of  all  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed;  he  will,  also,  sometimes  place  him- 
self in  the  rear,  align  himself  on  the  guides,  and 
halt,  pending  some  thirty  paces  together,  to  verify 
the  accuracy  of  the  guides. 

210.  In  column,  chiefs  of  subdivision  will  always 
repeat,  with  the  greatest  promptitude,  the  commands 
march  and  halty  no  chief  waiting  for  another,  but 
each  repeating  the  command  the  moment  he  catches 
it  from  the  instructor.  They  will  repeat  no  other 
command  given  by  him;  but  will  explain,  if  ne- 
cessary, to  their  subdivisions,  in  an  under-tone  of 
voice,  what  they  will  have  to  execute,  as  indicated  by 
the  commands  of  caution. 

Article  Third. 
To  change  direction. 

211.  ^  The  changes  of  direction  of  a  column  while 
marching,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  princi- 
ples prescribed  for  wheeling  on  the  march.  When- 
ever, therefore,  a  column  is  to  change  direction,  the 
instructor  will  change  the  guide,  if  not  already -there, 


126        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  Y. 

to  the  flank  opposite  the  side  to  which  the  change  is 
to  be  made. 

212.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if 
it  be  the  wish  of  the  instructor  to  change  direction 
to  the  right,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  chief  of  the 
first  platoon,  and  immediately  go  himself,  or  send  a 
marker,  to  the  point  at  which  the  change  of  direction 
is  to  be  made ;  the  instructor,  or  marker,  will  place 
himself  on  the  direction  of  the  guides,  so  as  to  pre- 
sent the  breast  to  that  flank  of  the  column. 

213.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  his  march  on 
that  person,  so  that,  in  passing,  his  left  arm  may  just 
graze  his  breast.  When  the  leading  guide  shall  have 
approached  near  to  the  marker,  the  chief  of  his  pla- 
toon will  command : 

1.  Ri^ht  wheel,    2.  March. 

214.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
platoon  is  at  the  distance  of  four  paces  from  the 
marker. 

215.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pro- 
nounced at  the  instant  the  guide  shall  have  arrived 
opposite  the  marker,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the 
right,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  school 
of  the  soldier.  No.  396. 

216.  The  wheel  being  finished,  the  chief  of  each 
platoon  will  command : 

3.  Forward.    4.  March. 

217.  These  commands  will  be  pronounced  and  exe- 
cuted as  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier, 
Nos.  398  and  399.  The  guide  of  the  first  platoon 
will  take  points  on  the  ground  in  the  new  direction, 
ji  order  the  better  to  regulate  the  march. 

218.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward  till  up  with  the  marker,  when  it  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  and  re- Lake  the  direct  march  b/ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  V.  127 


the  same  commands  and  the  same  means  which  go- 
verned the  first  platoon. 

219.  The  column  being  in  march  right  in  front,  if 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  change  direction  to  the 
left,  he  will  command,  guide  right.  At  this  command, 
the  two  guides  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  theii* 
respective  platoons,  each  passing  in  front  of  his  sub- 
division ;  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  right ;  the  instructor  will  afterwards  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  212. 

220.  The  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  then 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  as  the 
change  of  direction  to  the  right,  but  by  inverse  means. 

221.  When  the  change  of  direction  is  completed, 
the  instructor  will  command,  guide  left. 

222.  The  changes  of  direction  in  a  column,  left  in 
front,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

223.  In  changes  of  direction  in  double  quick  time, 
the  platoons  will  wheel  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  404. 

224.  In  order  to  prepare  the  men  for  those  forma- 
tions in  line  which  can  be  executed  only  by  turning 
to  the  right  or  the  left,  the  instructor  will  sometimes 
cause  the  column  to  change  direction  to  the  side  of 
the  guide.  In  this  case,  the  chief  of  the  leading  pla- 
toon will  command:  Left  (or  right)  turn,  instead  of 
left  (or  right)  wheel.  The  subdivisions  will  each  turn, 
in  succession,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  402.  The  leading  guide, 
as  soon  as  he  has  turned,  will  take  points  on  the 
ground,  the  better  to  regulate  the  direction  of  the 
inarch. 

225.  It  is  highly  important,  in  order  to  preserve 
distances  and  the  direction,  that  all  the  subdivisions 
of  the  column  should  change  direction  precisely  at 
the  point  where  the  leading  subdivision  changed ;  it 
is  for  this  reason  that  that  point  ought  to  be  marked 


128      SCHOOL  or  the  company — lesson  v. 


in  advance,  and  that  it  is  prescribed  that  the  guides 
direct  their  march  on  the  marker,  also  that  each  chief 
of  subdivision  shall  not  cause  the  change  to  commence 
till  the  guide  of  his  subdivision  has  grazed  the  breast 
of  this  marker. 

226.  Each  chief  will  take  care  that  his  subdivision 
arrives  at  the  point  of  change  in  a  square  with  the 
line  of  direction  :  with  this  view,  he  will  face  to  his 
subdivision  when  the  one  which  precedes  has  com- 
menced to  turn  or  to  wheel,  and  he  will  be  watchful 
that  it  continues  to  march  squarely  until  it  arrives  at 
the  point  where  the  change  of  direction  is  to  commence. 

227.  If,  in  changes  of  direction,  the  pivot  of  the 
subdivision  which  wheels  should  not  clear  the  wheel- 
ing point,  the  next  subdivision  would  be  arrested  and 
distances  lost ;  for  the  guide  who  conducts  the  march- 
ing flank  having  to  describe  an  arc,  in  length  about 
a  half  greater  than  the  front  of  the  subdivision,  the 
second  subdivision  would  be  already  up  with  the 
wheeling  point,  whilst  the  first  which  wheels  has  yet 
the  half  of  its  front  to  execute,  and  hence  would  be 
obliged  to  mark  time  until  that  half  be  executed.  It 
is  therefore  prescribed,  that  the  pivot  of  each  sub- 
division should  take  steps  of  nine  or  eleven  inches  in 
length,  according  to  the  swiftness  of  the  gait,  in  order 
not  to  arrest  the  march  of  the  next  subdivision.  The 
chiefs  of  subdivision  will  look  well  to  the  step  of  the 
pivot,  and  cause  his  step  to  be  lengthened  or  short- 
ened as  may  be  judged  necessary.  By  the  nature  of 
this  movement,  the  centre  of  each  subdivision  will 
bend  a  little  to  the  rear. 

228.  The  guides  will  never  alter  the  length  or  the 
cadence  of  the  step,  whether  the  change  of  direction 
be  to  the  side  of  the  guide  or  to  the  opposite  side. 

229.  The  marker,  placed  at  the  wheeling  point, 
will  always  present  his  breast  to  the  flank  of  the 
column.  The  instructor  will  take  the  greatest  paina 
in  causing  the  prescribed  principles  to  be  observed ; 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  V.  129 

he  will  see  that  each  subdivision  only  commences  tne 
change  of  direction  when  the  guide,  grazing  the 
breast  of  the  marker,  has  nearly  passed  him,  and 
that  the  marching  flank  does  not  describe  the  arc  of 
too  large  a  circle,  in  order  that  it  may  not  be  thrown 
beyond  the  new  direction. 

230.  In  change  of  direction  by  wheel,  the  guide  of 
the  wheeling  flank  will  cast  his  eyes  over  the  ground 
at  the  moment  of  commencing  the  wheel,  and  will 
describe  an  arc  of  a  circle  whose  radius  is  equal  to 
the  front  of  the  subdivision. 

Article  Fourth. 
To  halt  the  column. 
281.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command: 

1.  Column,    2.  Halt. 

232.  At  the  second  command,  promptly  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  column  will  halt ;  the 
guides  also  will  stand  fast,  although  they  may  have 
lost  both  distance  and  direction. 

233.  If  the  command  halt,  be  not  repeated  with 
the  greatest  vivacity,  and  executed  at  the  same  in- 
stant, distances  will  be  lost. 

234.  If  a  guide,  having  lost  his  distance,  seek  to 
recover  it  after  that  command,  he  will  only  throw  his 
fault  on  the  following  guide,  who,  if  he  have  marched 
well,  will  no  longer  be  at  his  proper  distance ;  and  if 
the  latter  regain  what  he  has  thus  lost,  the  movement 
will  be  propagated  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to  the  right  oi 
left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt  or  on  the 
march. 

235.  The  instructor  having  halted  the  column 


130         SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  Y, 


right  in  front,  and  wishing  to  form  it  into  line  of 
battle,  will  place  himself  at  platoon  distance  in  front 
of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if 
necessary,  the  position  of  the  guide  beyond;  which 
being  executed,  he  will  command : 

Left — Dress. 

236.  At  this  command,  which  will  not  be  repeated 
by  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  each  of  them  will  place 
himself  briskly  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and 
direct  the  alignment  of  the  platoon  perpendicularly 
to  the  direction  of  the  column. 

237.  Each  chief  having  aligned  his  platoon,  will 
command,  Front,  and  return  quickly  to  his  place  in 
column. 

238.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  instructor 
will  command : 

1.  Left  into  line^  wheel,    2.  March. 

239.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  left 
of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  place  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  arm  of  the  guide  by  his 
side,  who  stands  fast;  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the 
left  on  the  principle  of  wheels  from  a  halt,  and  in 
conformity  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  194.  Each 
chief  will  turn  to  his  platoon  to  observe  its  move- 
ment, and  when  the  marching  flank  has  approached 
near  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  command : 

1.  Platoon.    2.  Halt. 

240.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  the 
marching  flank  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from 
the  line  of  battle. 

241.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  having  halted 
U,  will  return  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer,  passing 
tround  the  left  of  his  subdivision. 

242.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  platoon, 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  Y. 


131 


move  rapidly  to  the  point  at  which  the  right  of 
the  company  will  rest  in  line  of  battle,  and  com 
mand : 

Right — Dress. 

248.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress 
up  on  the  alignment;  the  front  rank  man  on  the 
right  of  the  leading  platoon,  who  finds  himself  oppo- 
site the  instructor  established  on  the  direction  of  the 
guides,  will  place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left 
arm  of  this  officer.  The  captain  will  direct  the 
alignment  from  the  right  on  the  man  on  the  opposite 
flank  of  the  company. 

244.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command : 

Front. 

245.  The  instructor  seeing  the  company  in  line  of 
battle,  will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

246.  At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant  will 
cover  the  captain,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his 
place  as  a  file  closer. 

247.  If  the  column  be  left  in  front,  and  the  in- 
structor should  wish  to  form  it  to  the  right  into  line 
of  battle,  lie  will  place  himself  at  platoon  distance 
in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify, 
if  necessary,  the  position  of  the  guide  beyond; 
which  being  executed,  he  will  command : 

1.  Right  into  line,  tvheel.    2.  March. 

248.  At  the  command  march,  the  front  rank  man  on 
the  right  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right  and 
place  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm  of  the 
guide  by  his  side,  who  stands  fast;  each  platoon  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  and  will  be  hailed  by  its  chief, 
when  the  marching  fiank  has  approached  near  tho 

12 


132        SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON  Y. 


line  of  battle;  for  this  purpose,  the  chief  of  each 
platoon  "will  command : 

1.  Platoon,    2.  Halt. 

249.  The  command  halt,  will  be  given  when  the 
marcliing  fiank  of  the  platoon  is  three  paces  from  the 
line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  hav- 
ing halted  his  platoon,  will  resume  his  place  in  the 
rank  of  file  closers. 

250.  The  captain  having  halted  the  first  p"'atoon, 
will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the  leli  of  the 
company  will  rest,  and  command : 

Left — Dress. 

251.  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  dress 
np  on  the  alignment;  the  man  on  the  left  of  the 
second  platoon,  opposite  the  instructor,  will  place  his 
breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  this  ofiicer, 
and  the  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  from  the  left 
on  the  man  on  the  opposite  flank  of  the  company. 

252.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command: 

Front. 

253.  The  instructor  will  afterwards  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

254.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  to  the 
right  of  his  company,  the  covering  sergeant  will  cover 
him,  and  the  left  guide  will  return  to  his  place  as  a 
file  closer. 

255.  The  instructor  may  omit  the  command  left  or 
right  dress,  previous  to  commanding  left  or  rir/ht  into 
line,  wheel,  unless,  after  rectifying  the  position  of  the 
guides,  it  should  become  necessary  to  dress  the  pla- 
toons, or  one  of  them,  laterally  to  the  right  or  left. 

256.  The  instructor,  before  the  command  left  (or 
right)  into  line,  ivliecl,  will  assure  himself  that  the 
rearmost  platoon  is  at  its  exact  wheeling  distance 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  Y. 


133 


from  the  one  in  front.  This  attention  is  important, 
in  order  to  detect  negligence  on  the  part  of  guides  in 
this  essential  point. 

257.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  give  the  commands  pre- 
scribed No.  238,  and  move  rapidly  to  platoon  distance 
in  front  of  the  leading  guide. 

258.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt  short, 
the  instructor,  the  chiefs  of  platoon,  and  the  platoons, 
will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  289  and  fol- 
lowing. 

259.  If  the  column  be  in  march  left  in  front,  this 
formation  will  be  made  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples, and  by  inverse  means. 

260.  If  the  column  be  marching  right  in  front,  and 
the  instructor  should  wish  to  form  it  into  line  with- 
out halting  the  column,  and  to  march  the  company  in 
line  to  the  front,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  platoons  left  wheel.    2.  Mauch. 

261.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  platoon,  the  left  guides  will  halt:  the 
man  next  to  the  left  guide  in  each  platoon  will  mark 
time:  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left,  conforming 
to  the  principles  of  the  wheel  on  a  fixed  pivot.  When 
the  right  of  the  platoons  shall  arrive  near  the  line  of 
battle,  the  instructor  will  command: 

3.  Forward,    4.  March.    5.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

262.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  completed,  all  the  men  of  the  company 
will  move  off  together  with  the  step  of  twenty-eight 
inches;  the  captain,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon, 
the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  left  guide  will  take 
their  positrons  as  in  line  of  battle. 

268.  At  the  fifth  command,  which  will  be  given 


134       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI. 

immediately  after  the  fourth,  the  captain  and  cover* 
ing  sergeant,  if  not  already  there,  will  move  briskly 
to  the  side  on  which  the  guide  is  designated.  The 
non-commissioned  officer  charged  with  the  direction 
will  move  rapidly  in  front  of  the  guide,  and  will  be 
assured  in  his  line  of  march  by  the  instructor,  as  is 
prescribed  No.  104.  That  non-commissioned  officer 
will  immediately  take  points  on  the  ground  as  in- 
dicated in  the  same  number.  The  men  will  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide,  conforming 
themselves  to  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line. 

264.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column 
left  in  front. 


LESSON  SIXTH. 

Article  Fikst. 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons,  and  to  re-form 
the  company. 

To  break  the  company  into  platoons. 

265.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  step, 
and  supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  in 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
break  by  platoon,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain, 
who  will  command:  1.  Break  into  platoons,  and  im- 
mediately place  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first 
platoon. 

266.  At  the  command  break  into  platoons,  the  first 
lieutenant  will  pass  quickly  around  the  left  to  the  cen- 
tre of  bis  platoon,  and  give  the  caution:  3Iark  time. 

267.  The  captain  will  then  command:  2.  3Iarch. 

268.  The  first  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward;  the  covering  sergeant  will  move 
rapidly  to  the  left  flank  of  this  platoon  (passing  by 
the  front  rank)  as  soon  as  the  flank  shall  be  dis- 
engaged. 


l:]4 


PL 


\  m.  .^^  yyy.  m  <>yy.  i^A 


6 


E3 


!  I   r  I    1   I   (    I   f   I   T  I 

1   1    i    ■   '   i   ■    '    .   ■  i 


■  L.L.l,L,i,.i. 
.L.l.i.Li.J- 


break  the  compani/  into  platooitft,  and  to  re-form 
company  (No.  265). 


.l-i.J..i.L.L.L.L 

E3      E3  □ 


TO 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  Yl  135 


269.  At  the  command  march,  given  by  the  captain, 
the  second  platoon  will  begin  to  mark  time ;  its 
chief  will  immediately  add:  1.  Ei^kt  oblique;  2. 
March.  The  last  command  will  be  given  so  that 
this  platoon  may  commence  obliquing  the  instant  the 
rear  rank  of  the  first  platoon  shall  have  passed.  The 
men  will  shorten  the  step  in  obliquing,  so  that  when 
the  command  foriuard  march  is  given,  the  platoon  may 
have  its  exact  distance. 

270.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon  being  near 
the  direction  of  the  guide  of  the  first,  the  chief  of 
the  second  will  command  Forward,  and  add  March, 
the  instant  that  the  guide  of  his  platoon  shall  cover 
the  guide  of  the  first. 

271.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  company  will 
break  into  platoons  by  inverse  means,  applying  to 
the  first  platoon  all  that  has  been  prescribed  for  the 
second,  and  reciprocally. 

272.  In  this  case,  the  left  guide  of  the  company 
will  shift  to  the  right  flank  of  the  second  platoon, 
and  the  covering  sergeant  will  remain  on  the  right 
of  the  first. 

To  re-form  the  company. 

273.  The  column,  by  platoon,  being  in  march, 
right  in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause 
it  to  form  company,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the 
captain,  who  will  command  :  Form  company. 

274.  Having  given  this  command,  the  captain  will 
immediately  add:  1.  First  platoon ;  2.  Right  oblique. 

275.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  caution 
it  to  continue  to  march  straight  forward. 

276.  The  captain  will  then  command:  3.  March. 

277.  At  this  command,  repeated  by  ihe  chief  of 
the  second,  the  first  platoon  will  oblique  to  the  right, 
in  order  to  unmask  the  second ;  the  covering  ser- 
geant, on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  will  return  to 
the  right  of  the  company,  passing  by  the  front  rank. 


136       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  TI. 


278.  When  the  first  platoon  shall  have  nearly  un« 
masked  the  second,  the  captain  will  command :  1. 
Mark  time,  and  at  the  instant  the  unmasking  shall  be 
complete,  he  will  add  :  2.  March.  The  first  platoon 
will  then  cease  to  oblique,  and  mark  time. 

279.  In  the  mean  time  the  second  platoon  will 
have  continued  to  march  straight  forward,  and  when 
it  shall  be  nearly  up  with  the  first,  the  captain  will 
command  Foriuard,  and  at  the  instant  the  two  pla- 
toons shall  unite,  add  March  ;  the  first  platoon  will 
then  cease  to  mark  time. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  same  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  inverse  means,  the  chief  of 
the  second  platoon  giving  the  command  Forward,  and 
the  captain  adding  the  command  March,  when  the 
platoons  are  united. 

281.  The  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  on  its  right, 
will  pass  to  its  left  flank  the  moment  the  platoon 
begins  to  oblique  ;  the  guide  of  the  first,  on  its  right, 
remaining  on  that  flank  of  the  platoon. 

282.  The  instructor  will  also  sometimes  cause  the 
company  to  break  and  re-form,  by  platoon,  by  his 
own  direct  commands.  In  this  case,  he  will  give  the 
general  commands  prescribed  for  the  captain  above: 
1.  Break  into  platoons ;  2.  March;  and  1.  Jbrm  co7/i- 
pany ;  2.  March. 

283.  If,  in  breaking  the  company  into  platoons, 
the  subdivision  that  breaks  off  should  mark  time  too 
long,  it  might,  in  a  column  of  many  subdivisions, 
arrest  the  march  of  the  following  one,  which  would 
cause  a  lengthening  of  the  column,  and  a  loss  of 
distances. 

284.  In  breaking  into  platoons,  it  is  necessary 
that  the  platoons  which  oblique  should  not  shorten 
the  step  too  much,  in  order  not  to  lose  distance  in 
column,  and  not  to  arrest  the  march  of  the  following 
subdivision. 

285.  If  a  platoon  obliques  too  far  to  a  flank,  ii 


I 


I— li^-t^l  1^'  1-^'  1^1 


<5 


9  9 


9 


PM.i  J..I -    1.1-1  J.  


hreah  flics  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause  them  to  re-enter  the 
line  (Xo.289). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  YI.  137 


would  be  obliged  to  oblique  again  to  the  opposite 
flank,  to  regain  Ine  direction,  and  by  the  double 
movement  arrest,  probably,  the  march  of  the  follow- 
ing subdivision. 

286.  The  chiefs  of  those  platoons  which  oblique 
will  face  to  tlieir  platoons,  in  order  to  enforce  the 
observance  of  the  foregoing  principles. 

287.  When,  in  a  column  of  several  companies,  they 
break  in  succession,  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance 
that  each  company  should  continue  to  march  in  the 
same  step,  without  shortening  or  slackening,  whilst 
that  which  precedes  breaks,  ^^although  the  following 
company  should  close  up  on  the  preceding  one. 
This  attention  is  essential  to  guard  against  an  elon- 
gation of  the  column. 

288.  Faults  of  but  little  moment,  in  a  column  of 
a  few  companies,  would  be  serious  inconveniences 
in  a  general  column  of  many  battalions.  Hence  the 
instructor  will  give  the  greatest  care  in  causing  all 
the  prescribed  principles  to  be  strictly  observed.  To 
this  end,  he  will  hold  himself  on  the  directing  flank, 
the  better  to  observe  all  the  movements. 

Article  Second. 

Being  in  column,  to  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to 
cause  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 

289.  The  company  being  in  march,  and  supposed 
to  constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column,  right  (or  left) 
in  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause 
files  to  break  off"  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  cap- 
tain, who  will  immediately  turn  to  his  company,  and 
command : 

1.  Two  files  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear.    2.  March. 

290.  At  the  command  march,  the  two  files  on  the 
left  (or  right)  of  the  company  will  mark  time,  the 
others  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward ;  th© 


138       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  YI. 

two  rear  rank  men  of  these  files  will,  as  soon  as  tho 
rear  rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  them,  move  to 
the  right  by  advancing  the  outer  shoulder ;  the  odd 
number  will  place  himself  behind  the  third  file  from 
that  flank,  the  even  number  behind  the  fourth, 
passing  for  this  purpose  behind  tlie  odd  number  ; 
the  two  front  rank  men  will,  in  like  manner,  move 
to  the  right  when  the  rear  rank  of  the  company 
shall  clear  them,  the  odd  number  will  place  himself 
behind  the  first  file,  the  even  number  behind  the 
second  file,  passing  for  this  purpose  behind  the  odd 
number.  If  the  files  are  broken  from  the  right,  the 
men  will  move  to  the  left,  advancing  the  outer 
shoulder,  the  even  number  of  the  rear  rank  will 
place  himself  behind  the  third  file,  the  odd  number 
of  the  same  rank  behind  the  fourth ;  the  even  num- 
ber of  the  front  rank  behind  the  first  file,  the  odd 
number  of  the  same  rank  behind  the  second,  the  odd 
numbers  for  this  purpose  passing  behind  the  even 
numbers.  The  men  will  be  careful  not  to  lose  their 
distances,  and  to  keep  aligned. 

291.  If  the  instructor  should  still  wish  to  break 
two  files  from  the  same  side,  he  will  give  the  order 
to  the  captain,  who  will  proceed  as  above  directed. 

292.  At  the  command  viarch,  given  by  the  captain, 
the  files  already  broken,  advancing  a  little  the  outer 
Bhoulder,  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files  to  the  right, 
if  fhe  files  are  broken  from  the  left,  and  to  the  left, 
if  the  files  are  broken  from  the  right,  shortening,  at 
the  same  time,  the  step,  in  order  to  make  room 
between  themselves  and  the  rear  rank  of  the  com- 
pany for  the  files  last  ordered  to  the  rear ;  the  latter 
will  break  by  the  same  commands  and  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  first.  The  men  who  double  should 
increase  the  length  of  the  step  in  order  to  prevent 
distances  from  being  lost. 

293.  The  instructor  may  thus  diminish  the  front 
of  a  company  by  breaking  ofi"  successive  groups  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  YI.  139 

two  files,  but  the  new  files  must  always  be  broken 
flora  the  same  side. 

•294.  The  instructor,  wishing  to  cause  files  brokei? 
off  to  return  into  line,  will  give  the  order  to  the  cap- 
tain, who  will  immediately  command: 

1.  Two  files  into  line.    2.  March. 

295.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  two  files  of 
those  marching  by  the  flank  will  return  briskly  into 
line,  and  the  others  will  gain  the  space  of  two  files 
by  advancing  the  inner  shoulder  towards  the  flank  to 
which  they  belong. 

296.  The  captain  will  turn  to  his  company,  to 
watch  the  observance  of  the  principles  which  have 
just  been  prescribed. 

297.  The  instructor  having  caused  groups  of  two 
files  to  break  one  after  another,  and  to  return  again 
into  line,  will  afterwards  cause  two  or  three  groups 
to  break  together,  and  for  this  purpose  will  com- 
mand: Four  or  six  files  from  left  (or  right)  to  rear; 
March.  The  files  designated  will  mark  time;  each 
rank  will  advance  a  little  the  outer  shoulder  as  soon 
as  the  rear  rank  of  the  company  shall  clear  it,  will 
oblique  at  once,  and  each  group  will  place  itself 
behind  the  four  neighboring  files,  and  in  the  same 
manner,  as  if  the  movement  had  been  executed 
group  by  group,  taking  care  that  the  distances  are 
preserved. 

298.  The  instructor  will  next  order  the  captain  to 
cause  two  or  three  groups  to  be  brought  into  line  at 
once,  who,  turning  to  the  company,  will  command ; 

Four  or  six  files  into  line — March. 

209.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  designated 
will  advance  the  inner  shoulder,  move  up  and  form 
on  the  flank  of  the  company  by  the  shortest  lines. 

300.  As  often  as  files  shall  break  off  to  the  rear,  the 
guide  on  that  flank  will  gradually  close  on  the  near- 


140       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI. 


est  front  rank  man  remaining  in  line,  and  lie  will  also 
open  out  to  make  room  for  files  ordered  into  line. 

801.  The  files  which  march  in  the  rear  are  disposed 
in  the  following  order :  the  left  files  as  if  the  com- 
pany was  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  the  right 
files  as  if  the  company  was  marching  by  the  left  flank. 
Consequently,  whenever  there  is  on  the  right  or  left 
of  a  subdivision,  a  file  which  does  not  belong  to  a 
group,  it  will  be  broken  singly, 

302.  It  is  necessary  to  the  preservation  of  distances 
in  column  that  the  men  should  be  habituated  in  the 
schools  of  detail  to  execute  the  movements  of  this  ar- 
ticle with  precision. 

803.  If  new  files  broken  ofl"  do  not  step  well  to  the 
left  or  right  in  obliquing ;  if,  when  files  are  ordered 
into  line,  they  do  not  move  up  with  promptitude  and 
precision,  in  either  case  the  following  files  will  be 
arrested  in  their  march,  and  thereby  cause  the  column 
to  be  lengthened  out. 

804.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  flank 
from  which  the  files  are  broken,  to  assure  himself  of 
the  exact  observance  of  the  principles. 

305.  Files  will  only  be  broken  ofi^  from  the  side  of 
direction,  in  order  that  the  whole  company  may  easily 
pass  from  the  front  to  the  flank  march. 

Article  Third. 

To  inarch  the  column  in  route,  and  to  execute  the 
movements  incident  thereto. 

306.  The  swiftness  of  the  route  step  will  be  one 
hundred  and  ten  steps  iu  a  minute;  this  swiftuess 
will  be  habitually  maintained  in  columns  in  route, 
when  the  roads  and  ground  may  permit. 

807.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed  to 
constitute  a  subdivision  of  a  column,  when  the  in- 
structor shall  wish  to  ccuse  it  to  march  in  the  rout« 
etep,  he  will  command : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  TI.  141 


1.  Column,  forward.    2.  Guide,  left  (or  righi^, 
3.  Jloute  step.    4.  March. 

*<308.  At  the  commani  march,  repeated  by  tlie  cap* 
tain,  the  two  ranks  will  step  off  together;  the  rear 
rank  will  take,  in  marching,  by  shortening  a  few 
steps,  a  distance  of  one  pace  (twenty-eight  inches) 
from  the  rank  preceding,  which  distance  will  be  com- 
puted from  the  breasts  of  the  men  in  the  rear  rank, 
to  the  knapsacks  of  the  men  in  the  front  rank.  The 
men,  without  further  command,  will  immediately 
carry  their  arms  at  will,  as  indicated  in  the  school  of 
the  soldier.  No.  219.  They  will  no  longer  be  required 
to  march  in  the  cadenced  pace,  or  with  the  same  foot, 
or  to  remain  silent.  The  files  will  march  at  ease ; 
but  care  will  be  taken  to  prevent  the  ranks  from  in- 
termixing, the  front  rank  from  getting  in  advance 
of  the  guide,  and  the  rear  rank  from  opening  to  too 
great  a  distance. 

309.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  the 
instructor  will  cause  it  to  change  direction,  which  will 
be  executed  without  formal  commands,  on  a  simple 
caution  from  the  captain;  the  rear  rank  will  come  up 
to  change  direction  in  the  same  manner  as  the  front 
rank.  Each  rank  will  conform  itself,  although  in  the 
route  step,  to  the  principles  which  have  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  change  in  closed  ranks,  with  this  dif- 
ference only ;  that  the  pivot-man,  instead  of  taking 
steps  of  nine,  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  inches,  in 
order  to  clear  the  wheeling  point. 

310.  The  company  marching  in  the  route  step,  to 
cause  it  to  pass  to  the  cadenced  step,  the  instructor 
will  first  order  pieces  to  be  brought  to  the  right 
shoulder,  and  then  command : 

1.  Quick  time.    2.  March. 

311.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  will  resume 
the  cadenced  step,  and  will  close  so  as  to  leave  a  dis- 
tance of  sixteen  inches  between  each  rank. 

/ 


142       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI. 

312.  The  company  marching  in  the  cadenced  pace, 
the  instructor,  to  cause  it  to  take  the  route  step,  will 
command : 

1.  Route  step,    2.  March. 

313.  At  the  command  march^  the  front  rank  will 
continue  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches,  the  rear 
rank  will  take,  by  gradually  shortening  the  step,  the 
distance  of  twenty-eight  inches  from  the  front  rank; 
the  men  will  carry  their  arms  at  will. 

314.  If  the  company  be  marching  in  the  route  step, 
and  the  instructor  should  suppose  the  necessity  of 
marching  by  the  flank  in  the  same  direction,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Company  hy  the  right  (or  left)  flanh,    2.  By  file  left 
(or  right),    3.  March. 

315.  At  the  command  marchy  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right  (or  left)  in  marching,  the  captain  will  place, 
himself  by  the  side  of  the  guide  who  conducts  the 
leading  flank :  this  guide  will  wheel  immediately  to 
the  left  or  right ;  all  the  files  will  come  in  succession 
to  wheel  on  the  same  spot  as  the  guide;  if  there  be 
files  broken  off  to  the  rear,  they  will,  by  wheeling, 
regain  their  respective  places,  and  follow  the  move- 
ment of  the  company. 

316.  The  instructor  having  caused  the  company  to 
be  again  formed  into  line,  will  exercise  it  in  increas- 
ing and  diminishing  front,  by  platoon,  which  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  the  same  means, 
as  if  the  company  were  marching  in  the  cadenced 
Btep.  When  the  company  breaks  into  platoons,  the 
chief  of  each  will  move  to  the  flank  of  his  platoon, 
and  will  take  the  place  of  the  guide,  who  will  step 
back  into  the  rear  rank. 

317.  The  company  being  in  column,  by  platoon,  and 
supposed  to  march  in  the  route  step,  the  instructor  can 
cause  the  front  to  be  diminished  and  increased,  by 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMrANY- -LESSON  VI.  143 

sectid  n,  if  the  platoons  have  a  front  of  twelve  files  or 
more. 

318.  The  movements  of  diminishing  and  increasing 
front,  by  section,  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  indicated  for  the  same  movements  by  pla- 
toon. The  right  sections  of  platoons  will  be  com- 
manded by  the  captain  and  first  lieutenant,  respect- 
ively ;  the  left  sections,  by  the  two  next  subalterns 
in  rank,  or,  in  their  absence,  by  sergeants. 

319.  The  instructor  wishing  to  diminish  by  section, 
will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will  command: 

1.  Break  into  sections.    2.  March. 

320.  As  soon  as  the  platoons  shall  be  broken,  each 
chief  of  section  will  place  himself  on  its  directing 
flank  in  the  front  rank,  the  guides  who  will  be  thus 
displaced  will  fall  back  into  the  rear  rank ;  the  filo 
closers  will  close  up  to  within  one  pace  of  this  rank. 

321.  Platoons  will  be  broken  into  sections  only  in 
the  column  in  route:  the  movement  will  never  be  ex- 
ecuted in  the  manoeuvres,  whatever  may  be  the  front 
of  the  company. 

322.  When  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  re-form 
platoons,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who 
will  command : 

1.  Form  platoons.    2.  March. 

323.  At  the  first  command,  each  chief  of  section 
will  place  himself  before  its  centre,  and  the  guides 
will  pass  into  the  front  rank.  At  the  command  march^ 
the  movement  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed 
for  forming  company.  The  moment  the  platoons  are 
formed,  the  chiefs  of  the  left  sections  will  return  to 
their  places  as  file  closers. 

324.  The  instructor  will  also  cause  to  be  executed 
the  diminishing  and  increasing  front  by  files,  as  pre- 
Bcribed  in  the  preceding  article,  and  in  the  same 

13 


144       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI. 

manner  as  if  marching  in  the  cadenced  step.  "When 
the  company  is  broken  into  sections,  the  subdivisions 
must  not  be  reduced  to  a  front  of  less  than  six  files, 
not  counting  the  chief  of  the  section. 

825.  The  company  being  broken  by  platoon,  or  by  • 
section,  the  instructor  will  cause  it,  marching  in  the 
route  step,  to  march  by  the  flank  in  the  same  direc- 
tion, by  the  commands  and  the  means  indicated  Nos# 
314  and  315.  The  moment  the  subdivisions  shall  face 
to  the  right  (or  left),  the  first  file  of  each  will  wheel 
to  the  left  (or  right),  in  marching,  to  prolong  the 
direction,  and  to  unite  with  the  rear  file  of  the  sub- 
division immediately  preceding.  The  file  closers  will 
take  their  habitual  places  in  the  march  by  the  flank, 
before  the  union  of  the  subdivisions. 

326.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right  flank, 
and  the  instructor  should  wish  to  undouble  the  files, 
which  might  sometimes  be  found  necessary,  he  will 
inform  the  captain,  who,  after  causing  the  cadenced 
step  to  be  resumed,  and  arms  to  be  shouldered  or 
supported,  will  command : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  undouble  files.    2.  March. 

327.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbers  will 
continue  to  march  straight  forward,  the  even  numbers 
will  shorten  the  step,  and  obliquing  to  the  left  will 
place  themselves  promptly  behind  the  odd  numbers ; 
the  rear  rank  will  gain  a  step  to  the  left  so  as  to  re- 
take the  touch  of  elbows  on  the  side  of  the  front 
rank. 

328.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left 
flank,  it  will  be  the  even  numbers  who  will  continue 
to  march  forward,  and  the  odd  numbers  who  will 
undouble. 

329.  If  the  instructor  should  wish  to  double  the 
filee,  he  will  give  the  order  to  the  captain,  who  will 
ccmjaand: 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  YI.  145 


1.  In  four  ranks,  double  files.    2.  March. 

oJiO.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  will  double 
in  the  manner  as  explained,  when  the  company  faces 
by  the  right  or  the  left  flank.  The  instructor  will 
afterwards  cause  the  route  step  to  be  resumed. 

331.  The  various  movements  prescribed  in  this 
lesson  may  be  executed  in  double  quick  time.  The 
men  will  be  brought,  by  degrees,  to  pass  over  at 
this  gait  about  eleven  hundred  yards  in  seven 
minutes. 

332.  When  the  company  marching  in  the  route  step 
shall  halt,  the  rear  rank  will  close  up  at  the  command 
halU  and  the  whole  will  shoulder  arms. 

333.  Marching  in  the  route  step,  the  men  will  be 
p&rmitted  to  carry  their  pieces  in  the  manner  they 
shall  find  most  convenient,  paying  attention  only  to 
holding  the  muzzles  up,  so  as  to  avoid  accidents. 

Article  Fourth. 
Countermarch. 

334.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  and  supposed 
to  constitute  part  of  a  column,  right  in  front,  when 
the  instructor  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  countermarch, 
he  will  command : 

1.  Countermarch,    2.  Company ^  right — Face. 
3.  By  file  left.    4.  March. 

335.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
face  to  the  right,  the  two  guides  to  the  right  about ; 
the  captain  will  go  to  the  right  of  his  company  and 
cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  the  front  rank  man,  to  con- 
duct him. 

336.  At  the  command  march,  both  guides  will 
stand  fast;  the  company  will  step  off  smartly;  the 
first  file,  conducted  by  the  captain,  will  wheel  around 
the  right  guide,  and  direct  its  march  along  the  front 


146       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANT — LESSON  VI. 


rank  so  as  to  arrive  behind,  and  two  paces  from  the 
left  guide  ;  each  file  will  come  in  succession  to  wheel 
on  the  same  ground  around  the  right  guide ;  the 
leading  file  having  arrived  at  a  point  opposite  to  the 
left  guide,  the  captain  will  command  : 

1.  Company,    2.  Halt.    3.  Front.    4.  Right — 
Dress. 

337.  The  first  command  will  be  given  at  four 
paces  from  the  point  where  the  leading  file  is  to 
rest. 

338.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt. 

339.  At  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front. 

840.  At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  dress  by  the 
right;  the  captain  will  step  two  paces  outside  of  the 
left  guide,  now  on  the  right,  and  direct  the  align- 
ment, so  that  the  front  rank  may  be  enclosed  be- 
tween the  two  guides ;  the  company  being  aligned, 
he  will  command  Front,  and  place  himself  before 
the  centre  of  the  company  as  if  in  column ;  the 
guides,  passing  along  the  front  rank,  will  shift  to 
their  proper  places,  on  the  right  and  left  of  that 
rank. 

341.  Tn  a  column,  by  platoon,  the  countermarch 
will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  ac* 
cording  to  tlie  same  principles ;  the  guide  of  each 
platoon  will  face  about,  and  its  chief  will  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  the  file  on  the  right,  to  con- 
duct it. 

342.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  countermarch 
will  be  executed  by  inverse  commands  and  means, 
but  according  to  the  same  principles.  Thus,  the 
movement  will  be  made  by  the  right  flank  of  subdi- 
visions, if  the  right  be  in  front,  and  by  the  left  flank, 
if  the  left  be  in  front ;  in  both  cases  the  subdivisions 
frill  wheel  by  file  to  the  side  of  the  front  rank. 


rrr 


□ 


123 


Oyt  /7u^  into  line  (Xo."344). 


SCHOOL  or  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI.  147 


Article  Fifth. 

Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on  the  right  (or 
left)  into  line  of  battle. 

343.  The  column  by  platoon,  right  in  front,  being 
in  march,  the  instructor,  wishing  to  form  it  on  the 
right  into  line  of  battle,  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  right  into  line.    2.  Guide  right. 

344.  At  the  second  command,  the  guide  of  each 
platoon  will  shift  quickly  to  its  right  flank,  and  the 
men  will  touch  elbows  to  the  right ;  the  column  will 
continue  to  march  straight  forward. 

345.  The  instructor  having  given  the  second  com- 
mand, will  move  briskly  to  the  point  at  which  the 
right  of  the  company  ought  to  rest  in  line,  and  place 
himself  facing  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left  which 
he  will  choose. 

346.  The  line  of  battle  ought  to  be  so  chosen  that 
the  guide  of  each  platoon,  after  having  turned  to  the 
right,  may  have,  at  least,  ten  paces  to  take  before 
arriving  upon  that  line. 

347.  The  head  of  the  column  being  nearly  oppo- 
site to  the  instructor,  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
will  command:  1.  Right  turn;  and  when  exactly 
opposite  to  that  point,  he  will  add : 

2.  March. 

348.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  platoon  will 
turn  to  the  right,  in  conformity  with  the  principles 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier.  No.  402. 
Its  guide  will  so  direct  bis  march  as  to  bring  the 
front  rank  man,  next  on  his  left,  opposite  to  the  in- 
structor ;  the  chief  of  the  platoon  will  march  before 
Us  centre;  and  when  its  guide  shall  be  near  the  line 
of  battle,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Platoon.    2.  Halt. 


148       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANT  LESSON  VI. 

349.  At  the  command  halt,  which  will  be  givou  at 
the  instant  the  right  of  the  platoon  shall  arrive  at 
the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle, 
the  platoon  will  halt ;  the  files,  not  yet  in  line,  will 
come  up  promptly.  The  guide  will  throw  himself  on 
the  line  of  battle,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files 
of  his  platoon;  he  will  face  to  the  instructor,  who 
will  align  him  on  the  point  of  direction  to  the  left. 
The  chief  of  platoon  having,  at  the  same  time,  gone 
to  the  point  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to 
rest,  will,  as  soon  as  he  sees  all  the  files  of  the  pla- 
toon in  line,  command  ; 

Right — Dress. 

850.  At  this,  the  first  platoon  will  align  itself ;  the 
front  rank  man,  who  finds  himself  opposite  to  the 
guide,  will  rest  his  breast  lightly  against  the  right 
arm  of  this  guide,  and  the  chief  of  the  platoon,  from 
the  right,  will  direct  the  alignment  on  tMs  man, 

851.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward,  until  its  guide  shall  arrive  opposite 
to  the  left  file  of  the  first ;  it  will  then  turn  to  the 
right  at  the  command  of  its  chief,  and  march  towards 
the  line  of  battle,  its  guide  directing  himself  on  the 
left  file  of  the  first  platoon. 

852.  The  guide  having  arrived  at  the  distance  of 
three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  this  platoon  will 
be  halted,  as  prescribed  for  the  first;  at  the  instant 
it  halts,  its  guide  will  spring  on  the  line  of  battle, 
opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  platoon, 
and  will  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  instructor. 

853.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  all  its 
files  in  line,  and  its  guide  established  on  the  direc- 
tion, will  command : 

Right — Dbess. 

854.  Having  given  this  command,  he  will  return  to 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI.  149 


his  place  as  a  file  closer,  passing  around  the  left;  the 
Becond  platoon  will  dress  up  on  the  alignment  of  the 
first,  and,  when  established,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand: 

Front. 

355.  The  movement  ended,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mnnd: 

Guides — Posts. 

856.  At  this  command,  the  two  guides  will  return 
to  their  places  in  line  of  battle. 

357.  A  column,  bj  platoon,  left  in  front,  will  form 
on  the  left  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and,  by  inverse  means,  applying  to  the 
second  platoon  what  is  prescribed  for  the  tirst,  and 
reciprocally.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon  having 
aligned  it,  from  the  point  of  appui  (the  left),  will 
retire  to  his  place  as  a  file  closer.  The  captain  having 
halted  the  first  platoon  three  paces  behind  the  line  of 
battle,  will  go  to  the  same  point  to  align  this  platoon, 
and  then  command :  Front.  At  the  command, 
guides — posts,  given  by  the  instructor,  the  captain  will 
shift  to  his  proper  flank,  and  the  guides  take  their 
places  in  line  of  battle. 

858.  When  the  companies  of  a  regiment  are  to  be 
exercised,  at  the  same  time,  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany, the  colonel  will  indicate  the  lesson  or  lessons 
they  are  severally  to  execute.  The  whole  will  com- 
mence by  a  bugle  signal,  and  terminate  in  liko 
manner. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  single 
rank,  and  reciprocally. 

359.  The  company  being  formed  into  two  ranks  in 
the  manner  indicated  No.  8,  school  of  the  soldier,  and 
supposed  to  make  part  of  a  column,  right  or  left  in 


150       SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI. 


front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
single  rank,  he  will  command  ; 

1.  In  one  rank,  form  company.    2.  March. 

360.  At  the 'first  command,  the  right  guide  will 
face  to  the  right. 

361.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
Btep  off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front 
rank. 

362.  The  first  file  will  step  off  at  the  same  time 
with  the  guide;  the  front  rank  man  will  turn  to  the 
right  at  the  first  step,  follow  the  guide,  and  be  him- 
self followed  by  the  rear  rank  man  of  his  file,  who 
will  come  to  turn  on  the  same  spot  where  he  had 
turned.  The  second  file,  and  successively  all  the 
other  files,  will  step  off  as  has  been  prescribed  for 
the  first,  the  front  rank  man  of  each  file  following 
immediately  the  rear  rank  man  of  the  file  next  on 
his  right.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  move- 
ment, and  when  the  last  man  shall  have  stepped 
oft",  he  will  halt  the  company,  and  face  it  to  the 
front. 

363.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  places  in  line 
of  battle,  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank. 

364.  The  company  being  in  single  rank,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he 
will  command : 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.    2.  Company 
right — Face.     3.  March. 

365.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  wUl 
face  to  the  right:  the  right  guide  and  the  man  on 
(he  right  will  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

366.  At  the  command  march,  the  men  who  have 
faced  lO  the  right,  will  step  off,  and  form  files  in  the 
following  manner:  the  second  man  in  the  rank  will 
place  himself  behind  the  first  to  form  the  first  file ; 
ihe  third  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  first  in 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  YI.  151 

ihe  front  rank;  the  fourth  behind  the  third  in  the 
rear  rank.  All  the  others  will,  in  like  manner,  place 
themselves,  alternately,  in  the  front  and  rear  rank, 
and  will  thus  form  files  of  two  men,  on  the  left  of 
those  already  formed. 

867.  The  formations  above  described  will  be  ha- 
bitually executed  by  the  right  of  companies;  but 
when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  have  them  executed 
by  the  left,  he  will  face  the  company  about^  and  post 
the  guides  in  the  rear  rank. 

368.  The  formation  will  then  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands,  and  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples as  by  the  front  rank  ;  the  movement  commencing 
with  the  left  file,  now  become  the  right,  and  in  each 
file  by  the  rear  rank  man,  now  become  the  front ;  the 
left  guide  will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed 
for  the  right. 

369.  The  formation  ended,  the  instructor  will  face 
the  company  to  its  proper  front. 

370.  When  a  battalion  in  line  has  to  execute  either 
of  the  formations  above  described,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of 
companies,  and  will  then  give  the  commands  just  pre- 
scribed for  the  instructor.  Each  company  will  exe- 
cute the  movement  as  if  acting  singly. 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four,  and 
reciprocally,  at  a  halt,  and  in  march. 

371.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  at  a 
halt,  and  supposed  to  form  part  of  a  column  right  in 
front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into 
four  ranks,  he  will  command : 

In  four  ranks,  form  company,  2.  Company  left — Face. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

372.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will 
remain  faced  to  the  front,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  left :  the  rear  rank  will  gain  the  distance  of  ono 


152     SCHOOL  or  the  company — lesson  Vl. 


pace  from  the  front  rank  by  a  side  step  to  the  left 
and  rear,  and  the  men  will  form  into  four  ranks  aa. 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  soldier. 

373.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four 
men  will  reface  to  the  front  without  undoubling.  All 
the  other  files  of  four  will  step  off,  and  closing  suc- 
cessively to  about  five  inches  of  the  preceding  file, 
will  halt,  and  immediately  face  to  the  front,  the  men 
remaining  doubled. 

374.  The  file  closers  will  take  their  new  places  in 
line  of  battle,  at  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  fourth  rank. 

375.  The  captain  will  superintend  the  movement. 

376.  The  company  being  in  four  ranks,  when  the 
instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  two  ranks,  he 
will  command: 

1.  In  two  ranks,  form  company.  2.  Company  rig] it — Face. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

877.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  will 
stand  fast,  the  company  will  face  to  the  right. 

378.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
step  off  and  march  in  the  prolongation  of  the  front 
rank.  The  leading  file  of  four  men  will  step  off  at 
the  same  time,  the  other  files  standing  fast;  the 
second  file  will  step  off  when  there  shall  be  between 
it  and  the  first  space  sufiicient  to  form  into  two  ranks. 
The  following  files  will  execute  successively  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  second.  As  soon  as  the  last 
file  shall  have  its  distance,  the  instructor  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Company.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 

879.  At  the  command  front,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  front,  and  the  files  will  undouble. 

880.  The  company  being  formed  in  two  ranks,  and 
inarching  to  the  front,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish 
to  form  it  into  four  ranks,  he  will  command ; 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI.  153 


1   In  four  ranhs,  form  company.    2.  By  the  left,  douhU 
files.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

881.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  guide  and  the 
left  file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march  straight 
to  the  front:  the  company  will  make  a  half  face  to 
the  left,  the  odd  numbers  placing  themselves  behind 
the  even  numbers.  The  even  numbers  of  the  rear 
rank  will  shorten  their  steps  a  little,  to  permit  the 
odd  numbers  of  the  front  rank  to  get  between  them 
and  the  even  numbers  of  that  rank.  The  files  thus 
formed  of  fours,  except  the  left  file,  will  continue  to 
march  obliquely,  lengthening  their  steps  slightly,  so 
as  to  keep  constantly  abreast  of  the  guide ;  each  file 
will  close  successively  on  the  file  next  on  its  left,  and 
when  at  the  proper  distance  from  that  file,  will  face 
to  the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the  right,  and  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  left. 

382.  The  company  being  in  march  to  the  front  in 
four  raiiks,  when  the  instructor  shall  wish  to  form  it 
into  two  ranks,  he  will  command : 

1.  In  tivo  ranks,  form  company.    2.  By  the  right,  ?m- 
double  files.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

383.  At  the  command  inarch,  the  left  guide  and  the 
left  file  of  the  company  will  continue  to  march 
straight  to  the  front ;  the  company  will  make  a  half 
face  to  the  right  and  march  obliquely,  lengthening 
the  step  a  little,  in  order  to  keep,  as  near  as  possible, 
abreast  of  the  guide.  As  soon  as  the  second  file 
from  the  left  shall  have  gained  to  the  right  the  interval 
necessary  for  the  left  file  to  form  into  two  ranks,  the 
second  file  will  face  to  the  front  by  a  half  face  to  the 
left,  and  march  straight  forward  ;  the  left  file  will  im- 
mediately form  into  two  ranks,  and  take  the  touch  of 
elbows  to  the  left.  Each  file  will  execute  success- 
ively what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  file  next 
to  the  left,  and  each  file  will  form  into  two  ranks 


154       SCHOOL  OP  THE  COMPANY — LESSON  VI. 

when  the  file  next  on  its  right  has  obliqued  the  re- 
quired distance  and  faced  to  the  front. 

384.  If  the  company  be  supposed  to  make  part  of 
a  column,  left  in  front,  these  different  movements  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by 
inverse  means,  substituting  the  indication  leftfov  right. 


END  Of  THE  SCHOOL  O?  THE  COMPANY- 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  155 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


General  principles  and  division  of  the  instruction. 

1.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  should  be  sub- 
jected to  such  rules  as  will  give  to  the  commander 
the  means  of  moving  them  in  any  direction  with  the 
greatest  promptitude. 

2.  It  is  not  expected  that  these  movements  should 
be  executed  with  the  same  precision  as  in  closed 
ranks,  nor  is  it  desirable,  as  such  exactness  would 
materially  interfere  with  their  prompt  execution. 

3.  When  skirmishers  are  thrown  out  to  clear  the 
way  for,  and  to  protect  the  advance  of,  the  main 
corps,  their  movements  should  be  so  regulated  by 
this  corps,  as  to  keep  it  constantly  covered. 

4.  Every  body  of  skirmishers  should  have  a  re- 
serve, the  strength  and  composition  of  which  will 
vary  according  to  circumstances. 

5.  If  the  body  thrown  out  be  within  sustaining 
distance  of  the  main  corps,  a  very  small  reserve  will 
be  sufficient  for  each  company,  whose  duty  it  shall 
be  to  fill  vacant  places,  furnish  the  line  with  car- 
tridges, relieve  the  fatigued,  and  serve  as  a  rallying 
point  for  the  skirmishers. 

6.  If  the  main  corps  be  at  a  considerable  distance, 
besides  the  company  reserves,  another  reserve  will 
be  required,  composed  of  entire  companies,  which 
will  be  employed  to  sustain  and  reinforce  such  parts 
of  the  line  as  may  be  warmly  attacked  :  this  reserve 
should  be  strong  enough  to  relieve  at  least  half  the 
companies  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

7.  The  reserves  should  be  placed  behind  the  centre 


156 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


of  the  line  of  skirmishers,  the  company  reserves  at 
one  hundred  and  fifty,  and  the  principal  reserve  at 
four  hundred  paces.  This  rule,  however,  is  not  in- 
variable. The  reserves,  while  holding  themselves 
within  sustaining  distance  of  the  line,  should  be, 
as  much  as  possible,  in  position  to  afford  each  other 
mutual  protection,  and  must  carefully  profit  by  any 
accidents  of  the  ground  to  conceal  themselves  from 
the  view  of  the  enemy,  and  to  shelter  themselves 
from  his  fire. 

8.  The  movements  of  skirmishers  will  be  executed 
in  quick,  or  double  quick  time.  The  run  will  be  re- 
sorted to  only  in  cases  of  urgent  necessity. 

9.  Skirmishers  will  be  permitted  to  carry  their 
pieces  in  the  manner  most  convenient  to  them. 

10.  The  movements  will  be  habitually  indicated  by 
the  sounds  of  the  bugle. 

11.  The  officers,  and,  if  necessary,  the  non-com- 
missioned officers,  will  repeat,  and  cause  the  com- 
mands to  be  executed,  as  soon  as  they  are  given ;  but 
to  avoid  mistakes,  when  the  signals  are  employed, 
they  will  wait  until  the  last  bi  2;le  note  is  sounded 
before  commencing  the  movement. 

12.  When  skirmishers  are  ordered  to  move  rapidly, 
the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  see 
that  the  men  economize  their  strength,  keep  cool,  and 
profit  by  all  the  advantages  which  the  ground  may 
offer  for  cover.  It  is  only  by  this  continual  watch- 
fulness on  the  part  of  all  grades,  that  a  line  of  skir- 
mishers can  attain  success. 

13.  This  instruction  will  be  divided  into  five  arti- 
cles, and  subdivided  as  follows : 

Article  First. 

1.  )  To  deploy  forward. 

2.  ^  To  deploy  by  the  flank. 

3.  )  To  extend  intervals. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


15V 


4.  )  To  close  intervitl^. 

5.  )  To  relieve  skirmishers. 

Article  Second. 

(1.)  To  advance  in 
(2.)  To  retreat  in  line. 
(3.)  To  change  direction. 
(4.)  To  march  by  the  flank. 

Article  Third. 

(1.)  To  fire  at  a  halt. 
(2.)  To  fire  marching. 

Article  Fourth. 

(lA  The  rally. 

(2.)  To  form  column  to  march  in  any  direction. 
(3.)  The  assembly. 

Article  Fifth. 

1.  )  To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers. 

2.  )  To  rally  the  battalion  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

14.  In  the  first  four  articles,  it  is  supposed  that 
the  movements  are  executed  by  a  company  deployed 
as  skirmishers,  on  a  front  equal  to  that  of  the  bat- 
talion in  order  of  battle.  In  the  fifth  article,  it  is 
supposed  that  each  company  of  the  battalion,  being 
deployed  as  skirmishers,  occupies  a  front  of  one  hun- 
dred paces.  From  these  two  examples,  rules  may 
be  deduced  for  all  cases,  whatever  may  be  the  nu- 
merical strength  of  the  skirmishers,  and  the  extent 
of  ground  they  ought  to  occupy. 

Article  First. 
Deployments. 

15.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  iu 
I  wo  ways  :  forward,  and  by  the  flank. 

14 


158 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


16.  The  deployment  forward  will  be  adopted  when 
the  company  is  behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  be 
established  as  skirmishers :  it  will  be  deployed  by 
the  flank,  when  it  finds  itself  already  on  that  line. 

17.  Whenever  a  cvsnpany  is  to  be  deployed  as  skir- 
mishers, it  will  be  divided  into  two  platoons,  and 
each  platoon  will  be  subdivided  into  two  sections; 
the  comrades  in  battle,  forming  groups  of  four  men, 
will  be  careful  to  know  and  to  sustain  each  other. 
The  captain  will  assure  himself  that  the  files  in  the 
centre  of  each  platoon  and  section  are  designated. 

18.  A  company  may  be  deployed  as  skirmishers 
en  its  right,  left,  or  centre  file,  or  on  any  other 
named  file  whatsoever.  In  this  manner,  skirmishers 
may  be  thrown  forward  with  the  greatest  possible 
rapidity  on  any  ground  they  may  be  required  to 
occupy. 

19.  A  chain  of  skirmishers  ought  generally  to  pre- 
serve their  alignment,  but  no  advantages  which  the 
ground  may  present  should  be  sacrificed  to  attain 
this  regularity. 

20.  The  interval  between  skirmishers  depends  on 
the  extent  of  ground  to  be  covered ;  but,  in  general, 
it  is  not  proper  that  the  groups  of  four  men  should 
be  removed  more  than  forty  paces  from  each  other. 
The  habitual  distance  between  men  of  the  same  group 
in  open  grounds  will  be  five  paces ;  in  no  case  will 
they  lose  sight  of  each  other. 

21.  The  front  to  be  occupied  to  cover  a  battalioi 
comprehends  its  front  and  the  half  of  each  interval 
which  separates  it  from  the  battalion  on  its  right 
and  left.  If  a  line,  whose  wings  are  not  supported, 
should  be  covered  by  skirmishers,  it  will  be  neces- 
sary either  to  protect  the  flanks  with  skirmishers,  or 
to  extend  them  in  front  of  the  line  so  far  beyond  the 
wings  as  efl'ectually  to  oppose  any  attempt  which 
might  be  made  by  the  enemy's  skirmishers  to  dis- 
turb the  flanks. 


150  PL  34. 


: ; ! 

I  '  ' 
I  I  I 

i  i } 


To  deploy  forward  (No.  22). 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  159 


To  deploy  forward. 

2i!.  A  company  being  at  a  lialt  or  in  march,  -when 
«he  captain  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  forward  on  the 
(eft  file  of  the  first  platoon,  holding  the  second  pla- 
toon in  reserve,  he  will  command : 

(1.)  First  platoon — as  skirmishers, 
(2.)  On  the  left  file — take  intervals, 
(3.)  March  [or  double  quick — March). 

23.  At  the  first  command,  the  second  and  third 
lieutenants  will  place  thenselves  rapidly  two  paces 
behind  the  centres  of  the  right  and  left  sections  of 
the  first  platoon ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  move  one 
pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon,  and 
will  place  himself  between  the  two  sections  in  the 
front  rank  as  soon  as  the  movement  begins ;  the 
fourth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
front  rank  of  the  same  platoon,  as  soon  as  he  can 
pass.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  this  sergeant  the 
point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to  direct  his  march. 
The  first  lieutenant,  placing  himself  before  the  centre 
of  the  second  platoon,  will  command : 

Second  platoon  backward — March. 

24.  At  this  command,  the  second  platoon  will  step 
three  paces  to  the  rear,  so  as  to  unmask  the  flank  of 
the  first  platoon.  It  will  then  be  halted  by  its  chief, 
and  the  second  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the 
left,  and  thf  third  sergeant  on  the  right  flank  of  this 
platoon. 

25.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  of  four 
men,  conducted  by  the  fourth  sergeant,  will  direct 
itself  on  the  point  indicated;  all  the  other  groups  of 
fours,  throwing  forward  briskly  the  left  shoulder, 
will  move  diagonally  to  the  front  in  double  quick 
time,  so  as  to  gain  to  the  right  the  space  of  twenty 
paces,  which  shall  be  the  distance  between  each 


160  INSTRLCTIC^  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


group  and  tliat  immediately  on  its  left.  When  the 
second  group  from  the  left  shall  arrive  on  a  line 
with,  and  twenty  paces  from,  the  first,  it  will  march 
straight  to  the  front,  conforming  to  the  gait  and 
direction  of  the  first,  keeping  constantly  on  the  same 
alignment  and  at  twenty  paces  from  it.  The  third 
group,  and  all  the  others,  will  conform  to  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second;  they  will  arrive 
successively  on  the  line.  The  right  guide  will  arrive 
with  the  last  group. 

26.  The  left  guide  having  reached  the  point  where 
the  left  of  the  line  should  rest,  the  captain  will  com- 
mand the  skirmishers  to  halt ;  the  men  composing 
each  group  of  fours  will  then  immediately  deploy  at 
five  paces  from  each  other,  and  to  the  right  and  left 
of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  file  in  each  group, 
the  rear  rank  men  placing  themselves  on  the  left  of 
their  file  leaders.  If  any  groups  be  not  in  line  at  the 
command  halt,,  they  will  move  up  rapidly,  conform- 
ing to  what  has  just  been  prescribed. 

27.  If,  during  the  deployment,  the  line  should  be 
fired  upon  by  the  enemy,  the  captain  may  cause  the 
groups  of  fours  to  deploy,  as  they  gain  their  proper 
distances. 

28.  The  line  being  formed,  the  non-commissioned 
ofiicers  on  the  right,  left  and  centre  of  the  platoon 
will  place  themselves  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line, 
and  opposite  the  positions  they  respectively  occu- 
pied. The  chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly  rectify 
any  irregularities,  and  then  plactj  themselves  twenty- 
five  or  thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their 
eections,  each  having  with  him  four  men  taken  from 
the  reserve,  and  also  a  bugler,  who  will  repeat,  if 
necessary,  the  signals  sounded  by  the  captain. 

29.  Skirmishers  should  be  particularly  instructed 
to  take  advantage  of  any  cover  which  the  ground 
may  offer,  and  should  lie  flat  on  the  ground  when- 
ever such  a  movement  is  necessary  to  protect  them 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  161 

from  the  fire  of  the  enemy.  Regularity  in  the  align- 
ment should  yield  to  this  important  advantage. 

30.  When  the  movement  begins,  the  first  lieutenant 
will  face  the  second  platoon  about,  and  march  it 
promptly,  and  by  the  shortest  line,  to  about  one 
hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the 
line.  He  will  hold  it  always  at  this  distance,  unless 
ordered  to  the  contrary. 

31.  The  reserve  will  conform  itself  to  all  the  move- 
ments of  the  line.    This  rule  is  general. 

32.  Light  troops  will  carry  their  bayonets  habi- 
tually  in  the  scabbard,  and  this  rule  applies  equally 
to  the  skirmishers  and  the  reserve  ;  whenever  bayo- 
nets are  required  to  be  fixed,  a  particular  signal  will 
be  given.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superin- 
tendence to  the  whole  deployment,  and  then  promptly 
place  himself  about  eighty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre 
of  the  line.  He  will  have  with  him  a  bugler  and  four 
men  taken  from  the  reserve. 

33.  The  deployment  may  be  made  on  the  right  or 
the  centre  of  the  platoon,  by  the  same  commands, 
substituting  the  indication  right  or  centre^  for  that  of 
left  file. 

34.  The  deployment  on  the  right  or  the  centre  will 
be  made  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  above: 
in  this  latter  case,  the  centre  of  the  platoon  will  be 
marked  by  the  right  group  of  fours  in  the  second 
Bection:  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the 
right  of  this  group,  and  serve  as  the  guide  of  the 
platoon  during  the  deployment. 

35.  In  whatever  manner  the  deployment  be  made, 
on  the  right,  left,  or  centre,  the  men  in  each  group  of 
fours  will  always  deploy  at  five  paces  from  each  other, 
and  upon  the  front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered 
file.  The  deployments  will  habitually  be  made  at 
twenty  paces  interval;  but  if  a  greater  interval  be 
required,  it  will  be  indicated  in  the  command. 

36.  If  a  company  be  thrown  out  as  skirmishers,  so 


162 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


near  the  main  body  as  to  render  a  reserve  unnecessary, 
the  entire  company  will  be  extended  in  the  same  man- 
ner, and  according  to  the  same  principles,  as  for  the 
deployment  of  a  platoon.  In  this  case,  the  third 
lieutenant  will  command  the  fourth  section,  and  a 
non-commissioned  officer  designated  for  that  purpose, 
the  second  section ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  act  as 
centre  guide  ;  the  file  closers  will  place  themselves 
ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  opposite  their  places 
in  line  of  battle.  The  first  and  second  lieutenant 
will  each  have  a  bugler  near  him. 

To  deploy  by  the  flank. 

87.  The  company  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  captain 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  by  the  flank,  holding  the  first 
platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command : 

1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  By  the  right 
flank — take  intervals,  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

88.  At  the  first  command,  the  first  and  third  lieu- 
tenants will  place  themselves,  respectively,  two  paces 
behind  the  centres  of  the  first  and  second  sections  of 
the  second  platoon  ;  the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  him- 
self one  pace  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  second 
platoon  ;  the  third  sergeant,  as  soon  as  he  can  pass, 
will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of 
the  same  platoon.  The  captain  will  indicate  to  him 
the  point  on  which  he  wishes  him  to  direct  his  march. 
The  chief  of  the  first  platoon  will  execute  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon, 
Nos.  23  and  24.  The  fourth  sergeant  will  place  him- 
self on  the  left  flank  of  the  reserve,  the  first  sergeant 
will  remain  on  the  right  flank. 

39.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  and  third 
lieutenants  will  place  themselves  two  paces  behind 
the  left  group  of  their  respective  sections 


1G2 


PI. 


To  dc2)'o^  hy  ilc  juuih  (No.  Z:), 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


163 


40.  At  the  command  march,  the  second  platoon  will 
face  t(>  the  right,  and  commence  the  movement;  the 
left  group  of  fours  will  stand  fast,  but  will  deploy  as 
soon  as  there  is  room  on  its  right,  conforming  to  what 
has  been  prescribed  No.  26 ;  the  third  sergeant  will 
place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  right  group,  to  con- 
duct it ;  the  second  group  will  halt  at  twenty  paces 
from  the  one  on  its  left,  the  third  group  at  twenty 
paces  from  the  second,  and  so  on  to  the  right.  As 
the  groups  halt,  they  will  face  to  the  enemy,  and  de- 
ploy as  has  been  explained  for  the  left  group. 

41.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  pay  particular  atten- 
tion to  the  successive  deployments  of  the  groups, 
keeping  near  the  group  about  to  halt,  so  as  to  rectify 
any  errors  which  may  be  commited.  When  the  de- 
ployment is  completed,  they  will  place  themselves 
thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  sections,  as 
has  been  heretofore  prescribed.  The  non-commis- 
sioned officers  will  also  place  themselves  as  previously 
indicated. 

42.  As  soon  as  the  movement  commences,  the  chief 
of  the  first  platoon,  causing  it  to  face  about,  will  move 
it  as  indicated  No.  30. 

43.  The  deployment  may  be  made  by  the  left  flank 
according  to  the  same  principles,  substituting  left 
flank  for  right  flank, 

44.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  deploy  the  com- 
pany upon  the  centre  of  one  of  the  platoons,  he  will 
command : 

1,  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  By  the  right  and 
leftflMnks — take  intervals.  3.  March  (or  double  quick 
— March). 

45.  At  the  first  command,  the  ofiBcers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  will  conform  to  what  has  been 
prescribed  No.  38. 

46.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  lieutenant  will 
place  himself  behind  the  left  group  of  the  right  sec- 


J64  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


tion  of  tlie  second  platoon,  the  third  lieutenant  behind 
the  right  group  of  the  left  section  of  the  same  platoon. 

47.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  section  will 
face  to  the  right,  the  left  section  will  face  to  the  left, 
the  group  on  the  right  of  this  latter  section  will  stand 
fast.  The  two  sections  will  move  off  in  opposite  direc- 
!  ions :  the  third  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  right  file  to  conduct  it,  the  second  sergeant 
on  the  right  of  the  left  file.  The  two  groups  nearest 
that  which  stands  fast,  will  each  halt  at  twenty  paces 
from  this  group,  and  each  of  the  other  groups  will 
halt  at  twenty  paces  from  the  group  which  is  in  rear 
of  it.  Each  group  will  deploy  as  heretofore  pre- 
scribed No.  40. 

48.  The  first  and  third  lieutenants  will  direct  the 
movement,  holding  themselves  always  abreast  of  the 
group  which  is  about  to  halt. 

49.  The  captain  can  cause  the  deployment  to  be 
made  on  any  named  group  whatsoever;  in  this  case, 
the  fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  before  the  group 
indicated,  and  the  deployment  will  be  made  according 
to  the  principles  heretofore  prescribed. 

60.  The  entire  company  may  be  also  deployed  ac- 
cording to  the  same  principles. 

To  extend  intervals. 

51.  This  movement,  which  is  employed  to  extend  a 
line  of  skirmishers,  will  be  executed  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  deployments. 

62.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  line  of  skirmishers  is 
at  a  halt,  and  that  the  captain  wishes  to  extend  it  to 
the  left,  he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  left  flank  (^so  many  paces)  extend  intervals, 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

63.  At  the  command  march^  the  group  on  the  right 
ffill  stand  fast,  all  the  other  groups  will  face  to  th« 


To  extend  intervals  (No.  51). 


^lON  roR  f 


165 


the 

to 
e 
r 


INSTRUCTION  TOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


1G5 


left,  and  each  group  will  extend  its  interval  to  the 
prescribed  distance  by  the  means  indicated  No.  40. 

54.  The.  men  of  the  same  group  will  continue  to 
preserve  between  each  other  the  distance  of  five 
paces,  unless  the  nature  of  the  ground  should  render 
it  necessary  that  they  should  close  nearer,  in  order 
to  keep  in  sight  of  each  other.  The  intervals  refer  to 
the  spaces  between  the  groups,  and  not  to  the  dis- 
tances between  the  men  in  each  group.  The  intervals 
will  be  taken  from  the  right  or  left  man  of  the  neigh- 
boring group. 

55.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  marching  to  the 
front,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  extend  it  to  the 
right,  he  will  command : 

1.  On  the  left  group  [so  many  />«ce5)  extend  i?itervals, 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

56.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will 
continue  to  march  on  the  point  of  direction;  the 
other  groups  throwing  forward  the  left  shoulder,  and 
taking  the  double  quick  step,  will  open  their  inter- 
vals to  the  prescribed  distance,  by  the  means  indi- 
cated No.  25,  conforming  also  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  54. 

57.  Intervals  may  be  extended  on  the  centre  of  the 
line,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

58.  If,  in  extending  intervals,  it  be  intended  that 
one  company  or  platoon  should  occupy  a  line  which 
had  been  previously  occupied  by  two,  the  men  of  the 
company  or  platoon  which  is  to  retire,  will  fall  suc- 
cessively to  the  rear  as  they  are  relieved  by  the  ex- 
tension of  the  intervals. 

To  close  intervals. 

59.  This  movement,  like  that  of  opening  intervals, 
will  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
ocribed  for  the  deployments. 

60.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  halted,  and  the 


166  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

captain  should  wish  to  close  intervals  to  the  left,  he 
will  command ; 

1.  By  the  left  flank  {so  many  paces)  close  intervals, 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

61.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  group  will 
stand  fast,  the  other  groups  will  face  to  the  left  and 
close  to  the  prescribed  distance,  each  group  facing  to 
the  enemy  as  it  attains  its  proper  distance. 

62.  If  the  line  be  marching  to  the  front,  the  cap- 
tain will  command : 

1.  On  the  left  group  (so  many  paces)  close  intervals. 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

63.  The  left  group,  conducted  by  the  guide,  will 
continue  to  move  on  in  the  direction  previously  indi- 
cated ;  the  other  groups,  advancing  the  right  shoulder, 
will  close  to  the  left,  until  the  intervals  are  reduced 
to  the  prescribed  distance. 

64.  Intervals  may  be  closed  on  the  right,  or  on  the 
centre,  according  to  the  same  principles. 

65.  When  intervals  are  to  be  closed  up,  in  order  to 
reinforce  a  line  of  skirmishers,  so  as  to  cause  two 
companies  to  cover  the  ground  which  had  been  pre- 
viously occupied  by  one,  the  new  company  will  de- 
ploy so  as  to  finish  its  movement  at  twenty  paces  in 
rear  of  the  line  it  is  to  occupy,  and  the  men  will 
successively  move  upon  that  line,  as  they  shall  be 
unmasked  by  the  men  of  the  old  company.  The  re- 
serves of  the  two  companies  will  unite  behind  the 
centre  of  the  line. 

To  relieve  a  company  deployed  as  skirmishers. 

66.  When  a  company  of  skirmishers  is  to  be  re 
lieved,  the  captain  will  be  advised  of  the  intention, 
"which  he  will  immediately  communicate  to  his  first 
OJid  second  lieutenants. 

67.  Tho  new  company  will  execute  its  deployment 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


167 


forward,  so  as  to  finish  the  movement  at  about  twenty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  line. 

68.  Arrived  at  this  distance,  the  men  of  the  new 
company,  by  command  of  their  captain,  will  advance 
rapidly  a  few  paces  beyond  the  old  line  and  halt; 
the  new  line  being  established,  the  old  company  will 
assemble  on  its  reserve,  taking  care  not  to  get  into 
groups  of  fours  until  they  are  beyond  the  fire  of  the 
enemy. 

69.  If  the  skirmishers  to  be  relieved  are  marching 
in  retreat,  the  company  thrown  ouf  to  relieve  them 
will  deploy  by  the  flank,  as  prescribed  No.  S8  and 
following.  The  old  skirmishers  will  continue  to  retire 
with  order,  and  having  passed  the  new  line,  they  will 
form  upon  the  reserve. 

Article  Second. 

To  advance. 

To  advance  in  line,  and  to  retreat  in  line» 

70.  When  a  platoon  or  a  company  deployed  as 
skirmishers  is  marching  by  the  front,  the  guide  will 
be  habitually  in  the  centre.  No  particular  indication 
to  this  efi*ect  need  be  given  in  the  commands,  but  if  on 
the  contrary  it  be  intended  that  the  directing  guide 
should  be  on  the  right,  or  left,  the  command  guide 
right,  or  guide  left,  will  be  given  immediately  after 
that  of  forward. 

71.  The  captain,  wishing  the  line  of  skirmishers  to 
advance,  will  command : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March  (or  double  qidck- — March). 

72.  This  command  will  be  repeated  with  the  great< 
eat  rapidity  by  the  chiefs  of  sections,  and,  in  cas« 
of  need,  by  the  sergeants.  This  rule  is  general, 
whether  the  skirmishers  march  by  the  front  or  by 
the  flank. 

73.  At  the  first  command,  three  sergeants  will  move 

15 


168  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


briskly  on  the  line,  the  first  on  the  right,  the  second 
on  the  left,  and  the  third  in  the  centre. 

74.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  move  to 
the  front,  the  guide  charged  with  the  direction  will 
move  on  the  point  indicated  to  him,  the  skirmishers 
will  hold  themselves  aligned  on  this  guide,  a,nd  pre- 
serve their  intervals  towards  him. 

75.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  march  immediately 
behind  their  sections,  so  as  to  direct  their  movements. 

76.  The  captain  will  give  a  general  superintend- 
ence to  the  movement. 

77.  When  he  shall  wish  to  halt  the  skirmishers,  he 
will  command: 

Halt. 

78.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  line 
will  halt.  The  chiefs  of  sections  will  promptly  rectify 
any  irregularity  in  the  alignment  and  intervals,  and 
after  taking  every  possible  advantage  which  the 
ground  may  offer  for  protecting  the  men,  they,  with 
the  three  sergeants  in  the  line,  will  retire  to  their 
proper  places  in  rear. 

79.  The  captain,  wishing  to  march  the  skirmishers 
in  retreat,  will  command : 

1.  In  retreat,    2.  Mk^qb.  [ov  double  quick — March). 

80.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will 
move  on  the  line  as  prescribed  No.  73. 

81.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will 
face  about  individually,  and  march  to  the  rear,  con- 
forming to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  74. 

82.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  use  every  exeiv 
tion  to  preserve  order. 

83.  To  halt  the  skirmishers,  marching  in  retreat, 
the  captain  will  command : 

Halt. 

84.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt, 
and  immediately  face  ♦o  the  front. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


169 


85  The  chiefs  of  sections  and  the  three  guides 
will  each  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  78. 

To  change  direction. 

86.  If  the  commander  of  a  line  of  skirmishers 
shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction  to  the 
right,  he  will  command : 

1.  Right  wheel.    2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

87.  At  the  command  march,  the  right  guide  will 
mark  time  in  his  place ;  the  left  guide  will  move  in  a 
circle  to  the  right,  and,  that  he  may  properly  regulate 
his  movements,  will  occasionally  cast  his  eyes  to  the 
right,  so  as  to  observe  the  direction  of  the  line,  and 
the  nature  of  the  ground  to  be  passed  over.  The 
centre  guide  will  also  march  in  a  circle  to  the  right, 
and  in  order  to  conform  his  movements  to  the  general 
direction,  will  take  care  that  his  steps  are  only  half 
the  length  of  the  steps  of  the  guide  on  the  left. 

88.  The  skirmishers  will  regulate  the  length  of 
their  steps  by  their  distance  from  the  marching  flank, 
being  Jess  as  they  approach  the  pivot,  and  greater  as 
they  are  removed  from  it ;  they  will  often  look  to 
the  marching  flank,  so  as  to  preserve  the  direction 
and  their  intervals. 

89.  When  the  commander  of  the  line  shall  wish  to 
resume  the  direct  march,  he  will  command : 

1.  Forward,    2.  March. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  line  will  cease  to 
wheel,  and  the  skirmishers  will  move  direct  to  the 
front ;  the  centre  guide  will  march  on  the  point  which 
will  be  indicated  to  him. 

91.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  the  line,  in 
place  of  moving  it  to  the  front,  he  will  command: 

Halt. 

92.  At  this  command,  the  line  will  halt. 


170  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


93.  A  change  of  direction  to  the  left  will  be  made 
according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse 
means. 

94.  A  line  of  skirmishers  marching  in  retreat,  wili 
change  direction  by  the  same  means,  and  by  the  same 
commands,  as  a  line  marching  in  advance ;  for  ex- 
ample, if  the  captain  should  wish  to  refuse  his  left, 
now  become  the  right,  he  will  command :  1.  Left 
wheel.  2.  March.  At  the  command  halt,  the  skir- 
mishers will  face  to  the  enemy. 

95.  But  if,  instead  of  halting  the  line,  the  captain 
should  wish  to  continue  to  march  it  in  retreat,  hi 
will,  when  he  judges  the  line  has  wheeled  sufficiently, 
command : 

1.  In  retreat. 
2.  March. 

To  march  by  the  flank. 

96.  The  captain,  wishing  the  skirmishers  to  maroto 
by  the  right  flank,  will  command : 

1.  By  the  right  flanh 

2.  March  [or  double  quick — March). 

97.  At  the  first  command,  the  three  sergeants  will 
place  themselves  on  the  line. 

98.  At  the  command  march,  the  skirmishers  will . 
face  to  the  right  and  move  off;  the  right  guide  will 
place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading  man  on  the 
right  to  conduct  him,  and  will  march  on  the  point  in- 
dicated; each  skirmisher  will  take  care  to  follow 
exactly  in  the  direction  of  the  one  immediately  pre- 
teding  him,  and  to  preserve  his  distance. 

99.  The  skirmishers  may  be  marched  by  the  left 
flank,  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by  the 
same  commands,  substituting  loft  for  right;  the  left 
guide  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  leading 
man  to  conduct  him. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  171 


lOG.  If  the  skirmisliers  be  maiching  by  the  flank, 
and  the  captain  should  wish  to  halt  them,  he  will 
command : 

Halt. 

101.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  halt 
and  face  to  the  enemy.  The  officers  and  sergeants 
will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  No.  78. 

102.  The  reserve  should  execute  all  the  movements 
of  the  line,  and  be  held  always  about  one  hundred 
and  fifty  paces  from  it,  so  as  to  be  in  position  to 
second  its  operations. 

103.  When  the  chief  of  the  reserve  shall  wish  to 
march  it  in  advance,  he  will  command:  1.  Platoon 
forward.  2.  Guide  left.  3.  March.  If  he  should 
wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will  command:  1.  In 
retreat.  2.  March.  3.  Guide  right.  At  the  com- 
mand halt^  it  will  re-face  to  the  enemy. 

104.  The  men  should  be  made  to  understand  that 
the  signals  or  commands,  such  as  forward,  mean  that 
the  skirmishers  shall  march  on  the  enemy ;  in  retreat, 
that  they  shall  retire,  and  to  the  right  or  left  flank,  that 
the  men  must  face  to  the  right  or  left,  whatever  may 
be  their  position. 

105.  If  the  skirmishers  be  marching  by  the  flank, 
and  the  captain  should  wish  to  change  direction  to 
the  right  (or  left),  he  will  command:  1.  By  file  right 
(or  left).  2.  March.  These  movements  will  also  bo 
executed  by  the  signals  Nos.  14  and  15. 

Article  Third. 
The  firings. 

106.  Skirmishers  will  fire  either  at  a  halt  or 
marching. 

To  fire  at  a  halt. 

107.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  th^e  captain 
will  command : 


172  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


Commence — Firing. 

108.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  meu 
of  the  front  rank  will  commence  firing  ;  they  will  re- 
load rapidly,  and  hold  themselves  in  readiness  to  fire 
again.  During  this  time  the  men  of  the  rear  rank 
will  come  to  a  ready,  and  as  soon  as  their  respective 
file  leaders  have  loaded,  they  will  also  fire  and  re-load. 
The  men  of  each  file  will  thus  continue  the  firing, 
conforming  to  this  principle,  that  the  one  or  the  other 
shall  always  have  his  piece  loaded. 

109.  Light  troops  should  be  always  calm,  so  as  to 
aim  with  accuracy;  they  should,  moreover,  endeavor 
to  estimate  correctly  the  distances  between  themselves 
and  the  enemy  to  be  hit,  and  thus  be  enabled  to  de- 
liver their  fire  with  the  greater  certainty  of  success. 

110.  Skirmishers  will  not  remain  in  the  same  place 
whilst  re-loading,  unless  protected  by  accidents  in  the 
ground. 

To  fire  marching. 

111.  This  fire  will  be  executed  by  the  same  com- 
mands as  the  fire  at  a  halt. 

112.  At  the  command  commence  firing^  if  the  line 
be  advancing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  file  will 
halt,  fire,  and  re-load  before  throwing  himself  forward. 
The  rear  rank  man  of  the  same  file  will  continue  to 
inarch,  and  after  passing  ten  or  twelve  paces  beyond 
his  front  rank  man,  will  halt,  come  to  a  ready,  select 
his  object,  and  fire  when  his  front  rank  man  has 
loaded;  the  fire  will  thus  continue  to  be  executed  by 
each  file ;  the  skirmishers  will  keep  united,  and  en- 
deavor, as  much  as  possible,  to  preserve  the  general 
direction  of  the  alignment. 

113.  If  the  line  be  marching  in  retreat,  at  the  com- 
mand commence  firing,  the  front  rank  man  of  every  fil« 
will  halt,  face  to  the  enemj^  fire,  and  then  re-loaa 
whilst  moving  to  the  rear ;  the  rear  rank  man  of  tba 
same  file  will  continue  to  march,  and  halt  ten  oi 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  173 

twelie  paces  beyond  his  front  rank  man,  fiice  about, 
come  to  a  ready,  and  fire,  when  his  front  rank  man 
has  passed  him  in  retreat  and  loaded;  after  which, 
he  will  move  to  the  rear  and  re-load;  the  front  rank 
man  in  his  turn,  after  marching  briskly  to  the  rear, 
will  halt  at  ten  or  twelve  paces  from  the  rear  rank, 
face  to  the  enemy,  load  his  piece  and  fire,  conforming 
to  what  has  just  been  prescribed;  the  firing  will  thua 
be  continued. 

114.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  right 
flank,  at  the  command,  commence  firing^  the  front  rank 
man  of  every  file  will  face  to  the  enemy,  step  one 
pace  forward,  halt,  and  fire ;  the  rear  rank  man  will 
continue  to  move  forward.  As  soon  as  the  front  rank 
man  has  fired,  he  will  place  himself  briskly  behind 
his  rear  rank  man  and  re-load  whilst  marching.  When 
he  has  loaded,  the  rear  rank  man  will,  in  his  turji, 
step  one  pace  forward,  halt,  and  fire,  and,  returning 
to  the  ranks,  will  place  himself  behind  his  front  rank 
man ;  the  latter,  in  his  turn,  will  act  in  the  same 
manner,  observing  the  same  principles.  At  the  com- 
mand, cease  firing,  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  re- 
take their  original  positions,  if  not  already  there. 

115.  If  the  company  be  marching  by  the  left  flank, 
the  fire  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, but  in  this  case  it  will  be  the  rear  rank  men 
who  will  fire  first. 

'         116.  The  following  rules  will  be  observed  in  the 
cases  to  which  they  apply. 

117.  If  the  line  be  firing  at  a  halt,  or  whilst  march- 
ing by  the  flank,  at  the  command,  Forward — March, 
it  will  be  the  men  whose  pieces  are  loaded,  without 
regard  to  the  particular  rank  to  which  they  belong, 
who  will  move  to  the  front.  Those  men  whose  pieces 
have  been  discharged,  will  remain  in  their  places  to 
load  them  before  moving  forward,  and  the  firing  will 
be  continued  agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed 
No.  112. 


174  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


118.  If  the  line  be  firing  either  at  a  halt,  advanc- 
ing,  or  whilst  marching  by  the  flank,  at  the  com* 
mand,  In  retreat — March,  the  men  whose  pieces  ar© 
loaded  will  remain  faced  to  the  enemy,  and  will  fire 
in  this  position  ;  the  men  whose  pieces  are  discharged 
will  retreat  loading  them,  and  the  fire  will  be  con- 
tinued agreeably  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  113. 

119.  If  the  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  either  at 
a  halt,  advancing,  or  in  retreat,  at  the  command.  By 
the  right  (or  left)  flank — March,  the  men  whose  pieces 
are  loaded  will  step  one  pace  out  of  the  general  align- 
ment, face  to  the  enemy,  and  fire  in  this  position;  the 
men  whose  pieces  are  unloaded  will  face  to  the  right 
(or  left)  and  march  in  the  direction  indicated.  The 
men  who  stepped  out  of  the  ranks  will  place  them- 
selves, immediately  after  firing,  upon  the  general  di- 
rection, and  in  rear  of  their  front  or  rear  rank  men, 
as  the  case  may  be.  The  fire  will  be  continued  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  114. 

120.  Skirmishers  will  be  habituated  to  load  their 
pieces  whilst  marching;  but  they  will  be  enjoined 
to  halt  always  an  instant,  when  in  the  act  of  charging 
cartridge,  and  priming. 

121.  They  should  be  practised  to  fire  and  load 
kneeling,  lying  down,  and  sitting,  and  much  liberty 
should  be  allowed  in  these  exercises,  in  order  that 
they  may  be  executed  in  the  manner  found  to  be 
most  convenient.  Skirmishers  should  be  cautioned 
not  to  forget  that,  in  whatever  position  they  may  load, 
it  is  important  that  the  piece  should  be  placed  up- 
right before  ramming,  in  order  that  the  entire  charge 
of  powder  may  reach  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 

122.  In  commencing  the  fire,  the  men  of  the  same 
rank  should  not  all  fire  at  once,  and  the  men  of  the 
game  file  should  be  particular  that  one  or  the  other 
of  them  be  always  loaded. 

123.  In  retreating,  the  officer  commanding  the 
skirmishers  should  seize  on  every  advantage  which 


175 


PL  38. 


H  1  il  1  ILIJ  i  (jj^if^^  fij  fi^i  jit  iliiJl^^^Plf  S  1^ f  HI  I  OJ  |  OJ  f  i 

"  1^    .'li"  ^ 


g  J  El  !»  JiBs-^ffl  I  E  a  0  iiliii.fii.aiiiiL'Iiiii  Si  SEiSE  f  i  !&  a  1 


.am  E  ia. 


\  \  \ 
\   \  \ 


5 


Tac  rally  (No.  127):  hy  sections  (No.  132),  by  platoons 
(No.  137),  on  the  reserve  (No.  139). 


INSTRUCTION  F03C  SKIRMISHERS.  17-5 

the  ground  may  present,  for  arresting  the  enemy  ap 
long  as  possible. 

124.  At  tlie  signal  to  cease  firing^  the  captain  will 
Bee  that  the  order  is  promptly  obeyed ;  but  the  men 
who  may  not  be  loaded,  will  load.  If  the  line  be 
marching,  it  will  continue  the  movement ;  but  the 
man  of  each  file  who  happens  to  be  in  front,  will 
wait  until  the  man  in  rear  shall  be  abreast  with  him. 

125.  If  a  line  of  skirmishers  be  firing  advancing, 
at  the  command  halt^  the  line  will  re-form  upon  the 
Ekirmishers  who  are  in  front;  when  the  line  is  re- 
treating, upon  the  skirmishers  who  are  in  rear. 

12G.  OlFicers  should  watch  with  the  greatest  possi- 
ble vigilance  over  a  line  of  skirmishers ;  in  battle, 
they  should  neither  carry  a  rifle  nor  fowling-piece. 
In  all  the  firings,  they,  as  well  as  the  sergeants, 
should  see  that  order  and  silence  are  preserved,  and 
that  the  skirmishers  do  not  wander  imprudently ; 
they  should  especially  caution  them  to  be  calm  and 
collected ;  not  to  fire  until  they  distinctly  perceive 
the  objects  at  which  they  aim,  and  are  sure  that 
those  objects  are  within  proper  range.  Skirmishers 
should  take  advantage  promptly,  and  with  intelli- 
gence, of  all  shelter,  and  of  all  accidents  of  the 
ground,  to  conceal  themselves  from  the  view  of  the 
enemy,  and  to  protect  themselves  from  his  fire.  It 
may  often  happen,  that  intervals  are  momentarily 
lost  when  several  men  near  each  other  find  a  common 
shelter  ;  but  when  they  quit  this  position,  they  should 
immediately  resume  their  intervals  and  their  places 
in  line,  so  that  they  may  not,  by  crowding,  needlessly 
expose  themselves  to  the  fire  of  the  enemy. 

Article  Fourth, 
the  rally. 
To  form  column. 
127.  A  company  deployed  as  skirn^ishers,  is  rallied 


176  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

in  order  to  oppose  the  enemy  with  better  success; 
the  rallies  are  made  at  a  run,  and  with  bayonets 
fixed;  when  ordered  to  rally,  the  skirmishers  fix 
□ayonets  without  command. 

128.  There  are  several  ways  of  rallying,  which 
the  chief  of  the  line  will  adopt  according  to  circum- 
stances. 

129.  If  the  line,  marching  or  at  a  halt,  be  merely 
disturbed  by  scattered  horsemen,  it  will  not  be  neces- 
sary to  fall  back  on  the  reserve,  but  the  captain  will 
cause  bayonets  to  be  fixed.  If  the  horsemen  should, 
however,  advance  to  charge  the  skirmishers,  the 
captain  will  command,  rally  by  fours.  The  line  will 
halt  if  marching,  and  the  four  men  of  each  group 
will  execute  this  rally  in  the  following  manner :  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  even  numbered  file  will  take 
the  position  of  guard  against  cavalry ;  the  rear  rank 
man  of  the  odd  numbered  file  will  also  take  the 
position  of  guard  against  cavalry,  turning  his  back  to 
him,  his  right  foot  thirteen  inches  from  the  right 
foot  of  the  former,  and  parallel  to  it ;  the  front  rank 
man  of  the  odd  file,  and  the  rear  rank  man  of  the 
even  file,  will  also  place  themselves  back  to  back, 
taking  a  like  position,  and  between  the  two  men 
already  established,  facing  to  the  right  and  left;  the 
right  feet  of  the  four  men  will  be  brought  together, 
forming  a  square,  and  serving  for  mutual  support. 
The  four  men  in  each  group  will  come  to  a  ready, 
fire  as  occasion  may  offer,  and  load  without  moving 
their  feet. 

130.  The  captain  and  chiefs  of  sections  will  each 
cause  the  four  men  who  constitute  his  guard  to  form 
square,  the  men  separating  so  as  to  enable  him  and 
the  bugler  to  place  themselves  in  the  centre.  The 
three  sergeants  will  each  promptly  place  himself  in 
the  group  nearest  him  in  the  line  of  skirmishers. 

131.  Whenever  the  captain  shall  judge  these  squares 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


177 


too  weak,  but  should  wish  to  hold  his  position  by 
strengthening  his  line,  he  will  command : 

Rally  by  sections. 

132.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  sections  will 
move  rapidly  on  the  centre  group  of  their  respective 
sections,  or  on  any  other  interior  group  whose  posi- 
tion might  olfer  a  shelter,  or  other  particular  ad- 
vantage ;  the  skirmishers  will  collect  rapidly  at  a  run 
on  this  group,  and  without  distinction  of  numbers. 
The  men  composing  the  group  on  which  the  forma- 
tion is  made,  will  immediately  form  square,  as  here- 
tofore explained,  and  elevate  their  pieces,  the  bayo- 
nets uppermost,  in  order  to  indicate  the  point  on 
which  the  rally  is  to  be  made.  The  other  skirmish- 
ers, as  they  arrive,  will  occupy  and  fill  the  open 
angular  spaces  between  these  four  men,  and  suc- 
cessively rally  around  this  first  nucleus,  and  in  such 
manner  as  to  form  rapidly  a  compact  circle.  The 
skirmishers  will  take,  as  they  arrive,  the  position  of 
charge  bayonet,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  more  ele- 
vated, and  will  cock  their  pieces  in  this  position. 
The  movement  concluded,  the  two  exterior  ranks  will 
fire  as  occasion  may  offer,  and  load  without  moving 
their  feet. 

133.  The  captain  will  move  rapidly  with  his  guard, 
wherever  he  may  judge  his  presence  most  necessary. 

134.  The  officers  and  sergeants  will  be  particular  to 
observe  that  the  rally  is  made  in  silence,  and  with 
promptitude  and  order ;  that  some  pieces  in  each  of 
their  subdivisions  be  at  all  times  loaded,  and  that  the 
fire  is  directed  on  those  points  only  where  it  will  be 
most  effective. 

135.  If  the  reserve  should  be  threatened,  it  will 
form  into  a  circle  around  its  chief. 

136.  If  the  captain,  or  commander  of  a  line  of  skir- 
mishers formed  of  many  platoons,  should  judge  that 
the  rally  by  section  does  not  offer  sufficient  resistance, 


178  IKSTHUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

he  will  cause  the  rally  by  platoons  to  be  executed,  and 
for  this  purpose  will  command : 

Rally  by  platoons. 

137.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles,  and  by  the  same  means,  as  the 
rally  by  sections.  The  chiefs  of  platoon  will  conform 
to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  chiefs  of  section, 

138.  The  captain  wishing  to  rally  the  skirmishers 
on  the  reserve,  will  command: 

Rally  on  the  reserve. 

189.  At  this  command,  the  captain  will  move  briskly 
on  the  reserve ;  the  officer  who  commands  it  will  take 
immediate  steps  to  form  square ;  for  this  purpose,  he 
will  cause  the  half  sections  on  the  flanks  to  be  thrown 
perpendicularly  to  the  rear ;  he  will  order  the  men  to 
come  to  a  ready. 

140.  The  skirmishers  of  each  section,  taking  the 
run,  will  form  rapidly  into  groups,  and  upon  that  man 
of  each  group  who  is  nearest  the  centre  of  the  sec- 
tion. These  groups  will  direct  themselves  diagonally 
towards  each  other,  and  in  such  manner  as  to  form 
into  sections  with  the  greatest  possible  rapidity  while 
moving  to  the  rear ;  the  officers  and  sergeants  will 
see  that  this  formation  is  made  in  proper  order,  and 
the  chiefs  will  direct  their  sections  upon  the  reserve, 
taking  care  to  unmask  it  to  the  right  and  left.  Aa 
the  skirmishers  arrive,  they  will  continue  and  com- 
plete the  formation  of  the  square  begun  by  the  reserve, 
closing  in  rapidly  upon  the  latter,  without  regard  to 
their  places  in  line ;  they  will  come  to  a  ready  with- 
out command,  and  tire  upon  the  eneraj^ ;  which  will 
also  be  done  by  the  reserve  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked 
by  the  skirmishers. 

141.  If  a  section  should  be  closely  pressed  by 
cavalry  while  retreating,  its  chief  will  command  halt ; 
at  this  command,  the  men  will  form  raj/idly  into  a 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  179 


compact  circle  around  the  officer,  who  will  re-form 
his  section  and  resume  the  march,  the  moment  he  can 
do  so  with  safety. 

142.  The  formation  of  the  square  in  a  prompt  and 
efficient  manner,  requires  coolness  and  activity  on  the 
part  of  both  officers  and  sergeants. 

143.  The  captain  will  also  profit  by  every  moment 
of  respite  which  the  enemy's  cavalry  may  leave  him; 
as  soon  as  he  can,  he  will  endeavor  to  place  himself 
beyond  the  reach  of  their  charges,  either  by  gaining 
a  position  where  he  may  defend  himself  with  advan- 
tage, or  by  returning  to  the  corps  to  which  he  belongs. 
For  this  purpose,  being  in  square,  he  will  cause  the 
company  to  break  into  column  by  platoons  at  half 
distance ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command : 

1.  Form  column.    2.  March. 

144.  At  the  command  marchy  each  platoon  will  dress 
on  its  centre,  and  the  platoon  which  was  facing  to  the 
rear  will  face  about  without  command.  The  guides 
will  place  themselves  on  the  right  and  left  of  their 
respective  platoons,  those  of  the  second  platoon  will 
place  themselves  at  half  distance  from  those  of  the 
first,  counting  fiom  the  rear  rank.  These  disposi- 
tions being  made,  the  captain  can  move  the  column 
in  whatever  direction  he  may  judge  proper. 

145.  If  he  wishes  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will 
command: 

1.  In  retreat    2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

146.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  im- 
mediately face  by  the  rear  rank,  and  move  off  in  the 
opposite  direction.  As  soon  as  the  column  is  in 
motion,  the  captain  will  command; 

8.  Guide  right  (or  left). 

147.  He  will  indicate  the  direction  to  the  leading 


180 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


guide  ;  the  guides  will  march  at  their  proper  distances, 
and  the  men  will  keep  aligned. 

148.  If  again  threatened  by  cayalry,  the  captain 
will  command; 

1.  Form  square,    2.  March. 

149.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  halt ; 
the  first  platoon  will  face  about  briskly,  and  the  outer 
half  sections  of  each  platoon  will  be  thrown  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  rear,  so  as  to  form  the  second  and 
third  fronts  of  the  square.  The  officers  and  sergeants 
will  promptly  rectify  any  irregularities  which  may  be 
committed. 

150.  If  he  should  wish  to  march  the  column  in 
advance,  the  captain  will  command : 

1.  Form  column,    2.  March. 

151.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No. 
144. 

152.  The  column  being  formed,  the  captain  will 
command  ; 

1.  Forward.    2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 
3.  Guide  left  (or  right). 

153.  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  move 
forward,  and  at  the  third  command,  the  men  will  take 
the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  side  of  the  guide. 

154.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  column  to 
gain  ground  to  the  right  or  left,  he  will  do  so  by 
rapid  wheels  to  the  side  opposite  the  guide,  and,  for 
this  purpose,  will  change  the  guide  whenever  it  may 
be  necessary. 

155.  If  a  company  be  in  column  by  platoon,  at 
half  distance,  right  in  front,  the  captain  can  deploy 
the  first  platoon  as  skirmishers  by  the  means  already 
explained  ;  but  if  it  should  be  his  wish  to  deploy  the 
second  platoon  forward  on  the  centre  fire,  leaving  the 
first  platoon  in  reserve,  he  will  command : 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  181 


1.  Second  platoon — as  skirmishers.  2.  On  the  centre 
file — take  intervals.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

156.  At  the  first  command,  the  ch?ef  of  the  first 
platoon  will  caution  his  platoon  to  stand  fast;  the 
chiefs  of  sections  of  the  second  platoon  will  place 
themselves  before  the  centre  of  their  sections ;  the 
fifth  sergeant  will  place  himself  one  paci  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  the  second  platoon. 

157.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the 
right  section,  second  platoon,  will  command;  Section 
right  face ;  the  chief  of  the  left  section :  Section  left 
face. 

158.  At  the  command  march,  these  sections  will 
move  , off  briskly  in  opposite  directions,  and  having 
unmasked  the  first  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  sections 
will  respectively  command  :  By  the  left  flank — March, 
and  By  the  right  flank — March  ;  and  as  soon  as  these 
sections  arrive  on  the  alignment  of  the  first  platoon, 
they  will  command,  As  skirmishers — March.  The 
groups  will  then  deploy  according  to  prescribed 
principles,  on  the  right  group  of  the  left  section, 
which  will  be  directed  by  the  fifth  sergeant  on  the 
point  indicated. 

159.  If  the  captain  should  wish  the  deployment 
made  by  the  flank,  the  second  platoon  will  be  moved 
to  the  front  by  the  means  above  stated,  and  halted 
after  passing  some  steps  beyond  the  alignment  of  the 
first  platoon ;  the  deployment  will  then  be  made  by 
the  flank  according  to  the  principles  prescribed. 

IGO.  When  one  or  more  platoons  are  deployed  as 
skirmishers,  and  the  captain  should  wish  to  rally 
them  on  the  battalion,  he  will  command : 

Rally  on  the  battalion. 

IGl.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  and  th« 
reserve,  n^  matter  what  position  the  company  to 
which  they  belong  may  occupy  in  order  of  battle,  will 
16 


182 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


rapidly  unmask  the  front  of  the  battalion,  directing 
themselves  in  a  run  towards  its  nearest  flank,  and 
then  form  in  its  rear. 

162.  As  soon  as  the  skirmishers  have  passed  be- 
yond the  line  of  file  closers,  the  men  will  take  the 
quick  step,  and  the  chief  of  each  platoon  or  section 
•will  re-form  his  subdivision,  and  place  it  in  column 
behind  the  wing  on  which  it  is  rallied,  and  at  ten 
paces  from  the  rank  of  file  closers.  These  subdivi- 
sions will  not  be  moved  except  by  order  of  the  com- 
mander of  the  battalion,  who  may,  if  he  thinks 
J  roper,  throw  them  into  line  of  battle  at  the  extre- 
mities of  the  line,  or  in  the  intervals  between  the 
battalions. 

163.  If  many  platoons  should  be  united  behind 
the  same  wing  of  a  battalion,  or  behind  any  shelter 
whatsoever,  they  should  be  formed  always  into  close 
column,  or  into  column  at  half  distance. 

164.  When  the  battalion,  covered  by  a  company 
of  skirmishers,  shall  be  formed  into  square,  the 
platoons  and  sections  of  the  covering  company  will 
be  directed  by  their  chiefs  to  the  rear  of  the  square, 
which  will  be  opened  at  the  angles  to  receive  the 
skirmishers,  who  will  be  then  formed  into  close 
column  by  platoons  in  rear  of  the  first  front  of  the 
square. 

165.  If  circumstances  should  prevent  the  angles 
of  the  square  from  being  opened,  the  skirmishers 
will  throw  themselves  at  the  feet  of  the  front  rank 
men,  the  right  knee  on  the  ground,  the  butt  of  the 
piece  resting  on  the  thigh,  the  bayonet  in  a  threaten- 
ing position.  A  part  may  also  place  themselves  about 
the  angles,  where  they  can  render  good  service  by 
defending  the  sectors  without  fire. 

166.  If  the  battalion  on  which  the  skirmishers  are 
rallied  be  in  column  ready  to  form  square,  the  skir- 
mishers will  be  formed  into  close  column  by  platoon, 
in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  third  division,  and  at  the 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  183 

command,  Form  square — March,  they  will  move  for- 
ward and  close  on  the  buglers. 

167.  When  skirmishers  have  been  rallied  by  platoon 
or  section  behind  the  wings  of  a  battalion,  and  it  be 
wished  to  deploy  them  again  to  the  front,  they  will 
be  marched  by  the  flank  towards  the  intervals  on  the 
wings,  and  be  then  deployed  so  as  to  cover  the  front 
of  the  battalion. 

1G8.  When  platoons  or  sections,  placed  in  the 
interior  of  squares  or  columns,  are  to  be  deployed, 
they  will  be  marched  out  by  the  flanks,  and  then 
thrown  forward,  as  is  prescribed  No.  157;  as  soon 
as  they  shall  have  unmasked  the  column  or  square, 
they  will  be  deployed,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  otlief 
on  the  left  file. 

The  assembly. 

169.  A  company  deployed  as  skirmishers  will  be 
assembled  when  there  is  no  longer  danger  of  its  being 
disturbed ;  the  assembly  will  be  made  habitually  in 
quick  time. 

170.  The  captain  wishing  to  assemble  the  skirmish- 
ers on  the  reserve,  will  command : 

Assemble  on  the  reserve. 

171.  At  this  command,  the  skirmishers  will  assem 
ble  by  groups  of  fours  ;  the  front  rank  men  will  place 
themselves  behind  their  rear  rank  men ;  and  each 
group  of  fours  will  direct  itself  on  the  reserve,  where 
each  will  take  its  proper  place  in  the  ranks.  When 
the  company  is  re-formed,  it  will  rejoin  the  battalion 
to  which  it  belongs. 

172.  It  may  be  also  proper  to  assemble  the  skir- 
mishers on  the  centre,  or  on  the  right  or  left  of  the 
line,  either  marching  or  at  a  halt. 

173.  If  the  captain  should  wish  to  assemble  them 
on  the  centre  while  marching,  he  wiU  "jommand  ; 


184  INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


Assemble  on  the  centre. 

174.  At  this  command,  the  centre  guide  will  con- 
tinue to  march  directly  to  the  front  on  the  point  in- 
dicated ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  directing  file  will 
follow  the  guide,  and  be  covered  by  his  rear  rank 
man ;  the  other  two  comrades  of  this  group,  and 
likewise  those  on  their  left,  will  march  diagonally, 
advancing  the  left  shoulder  and  accelerating  the  gait, 
80  as  to  re-form  the  groups  while  drawing  nearer  and 
nearer  the  directing  file ;  the  men  of  the  right  section 
will  unite  in  tlie  same  manner  into  groups,  and  then 
upon  the  directing  file,  throwing  forward  the  right 
shoulder.  As  they  successively  unite  on  the  centre, 
the  men  will  bring  their  pieces  to  the  right  shoulder. 

175.  To  assemble  on  the  right  or  left  file  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles. 

176.  The  assembly  of  a  line  marching  in  retreat 
will  also  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples, the  front  rank  men  marching  behind  their 
rear  rank  men. 

177.  To  assemble  the  line  of  skirmishers  at  a  halt, 
and  on  the  line  they  occupy,  the  captain  will  give  the 
same  commands ;  the  skirmishers  will  face  to  the  right 
or  left,  according  as  they  should  march  by  the  right 
or  left  flank,  re-form  the  groups  while  marching,  and 
thus  arrive  on  the  file  which  served  as  the  point  of 
formation.  As  they  successively  arrive,  the  skirmishers 
will  support  arms. 

Article  Fifth. 

To  deploy  a  battalion  as  skirmishers,  and  to  rally 
this  battalion. 

To  deploy  the  battalion  as  s/cirmishers. 

178.  A  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  if  the  com- 
mander should  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  right  of  the 
sixth  company,  holding  the  three  right  companiee  in 


PI.  39. 


»3 


III 


I 


Deployment  of  a  battalion  of  | 
skirmishers  (iSl  o.  178).  ^  ^| 


188 


PI.  40. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


185 


reserve,  he  will  signify  his  intention  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  adjutant,  and  also  to  the  major,  who  will 
bo  directed  to  take  charge  of  the  reserve.  He  will 
point  out  to  the  lieutenant  colonel  the  direction  he 
wishes  to  give  the  line,  as  well  as  the  point  where  ho 
wishes  the  right  of  the  sixth  company  to  rest,  and  to 
the  commander  of  the  reserve  the  place  he  may  wish 
it  established. 

179.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  move  rapidly  in 
front  of  the  right  of  the  sixth  company,  and  the  ad- 
jutant in  front  of  the  left  of  the  same  company.  The 
commander  of  the  reserve  will  dispose  of  it  in  the 
manner  to  be  hereinafter  indicated. 

180.  The  colonel  will  command  : 

1.  First  (or  second)  platoons — as  skirmishers. 

2.  On  the  right  of  the  sixth  company — take  intervals. 

3.  March  (or  douule  quick — March). 

181.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the 
fifth  and  sixth  companies  will  prepare  to  deploy  the 
first  platoons  of  their  respective  companies,  the  sixth 
on  its  right,  the  fifth  on  its  left  file. 

182.  The  captain  of  the  fourth  company  will  face 
it  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  of  the  seventh  and 
eighth  companies  will  face  their  respective  companies 
to  the  left. 

183.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will 
commence.  The  platoons  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  com- 
panies will  deploy  forward ;  the  right  guide  of  the 
sixth  will  march  on  the  point  which  will  be  indicated 
to  him  by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 

184.  The  company  which  has  faced  to  the  right, 
and  also  the  companies  which  have  faced  to  the  left, 
will  march  straight  forward.  The  fourth  company 
will  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred  paces  counting 
from  the  left  of  the  fifth,  and  its  chief  will  deploy  its 
first  platoon  on  its  left  file.  The  seventh  and  eighth? 
companies  will  each  take  an  interval  of  one  hundred 


186  INSTRUCTICN  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  i 

paces,  Cvwnting  from  the  first  file  of  the  company 
which  is  immediately  on  its  right ;  and  the  chiefs  of 
these  companies  will  afterwards  deploy  their  first 
platoons  on  the  right  file. 

185.  The  guides  who  conduct  the  files  on  which  the  , 
deployment  is  made,  should  be  careful  to  direct  them- 
selves towards  the  outer  man  of  the  neighboring 
company,  already  deployed  as  skirmishers;  or,  if  the 
company  has  not  finished  its  deployment,  they  will 
judge  carefully  the  distance  which  may  still  be  re- 
quired to  place  all  these  files  in  line,  and  will  then 
march  on  the  point  thus  marked  out.  The  com- 
panies, as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  will  align  them- 
selves on  those  already  deployed. 

186.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  adjutant  will  fol- 
low the  deployment,  the  one  on  the  right,  the  other 
on  the  left ;  the  movement  concluded,  they  will  place 
themselves  near  the  colonel. 

187.  The  reserves  of  the  companies  will  be  esta- 
blished in  echellon  in  the  following  manner:  the 
reserve  of  the  sixth  company  will  be  placed  one 
hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  rear  of  the  right  of  this 
company  ;  the  reserves  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  com- 
panies, united,  opposite  the  centre  of  their  line  of 
skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces  in  advance  of  the  re- 
serve of  the  sixth  company ;  the  reserves  of  the  seventh 
and  eighth  companies,  also  united,  opposite  the 
centre  of  their  line  of  skirmishers,  and  thirty  paces 
farther  to  the  rear  than  the  reserve  of  the  sixth 
company. 

188.  The  major  commanding  the  companies  com*  i 
posing  the  reserve,  on  receiving  an  order  from  the 
colonel  to  that  etFect,  will  march  these  companies 
thirty  paces  to  the  rear,  and  will  then  ploy  them 

into  column  by  company,  at  half  distance ;  after 
which,  he  will  conduct  the  column  to  the  point  which 
shall  have  been  indicated  to  him. 

189  The  colonel  will  have  a  general  superintend  ■ 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  187 


ence  of  the  movement;  and,  when  it  is  finished, 
will  move  to  a  point  in  rear  of  the  line,  whence  his 
view  may  best  embrace  all  the  parts,  in  order  to 
direct  their  movements. 

190.  If,  instead  of  deploying  forward,  it  be  de- 
sired to  deploy  by  the  flank,  the  sixth  and  fifth  com- 
panies will  be  moved  to  the  front  ten  or  twelve  paces, 
halted,  and  deployed  by  the  flank,  the  one  on  tho 
right,  the  other  on  the  left  file,  by  the  means  already 
indicated.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be 
marched  by  the  flank ;  and  as  soon  as  the  last  file 
of  the  company,  next  towards  the  direction,  shall 
have  taken  its  interval,  it  will  be  moved  upon  the 
line  established  by  the  fifth  and  sixth  companies, 
halted,  and  deployed. 

191.  In  the  preceding  example,  it  has  been  sup 
posed  that  the  battalion  was  in  order  of  battle ;  but 
if  in  column,  it  would  be  deployed  as  skirmishers  by 
the  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. 

192.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  forward,  the 
directing  company,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  will  be 
moved  ten  or  twelve  paces  in  front  of  the  head  of  the 
column,  and  will  be  then  deployed  on  the  file  indi- 
cated. Each  of  the  other  companies  will  take  its  in- 
terval to  the  right  or  left,  and  deploy  as  soon  as  it  is 
taken. 

193.  If  the  deployment  is  to  be  made  by  the  flank, 
the  directing  company  will  be  moved  in  the  same 
manner  to  the  front,  as  soon  as  it  is  unmasked,  and 
will  then  be  halted  and  deployed  by  the  flank  on  the 
file  indicated.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  be 
marched  by  the  flank,  and,  when  its  interval  is  taken, 
will  be  moved  on  the  line,  halted,  and  deployed  aa 
soon  as  the  company  next  towards  the  direction  shall 
have  finished  its  deployment. 

194.  It  has  been  prescribed  to  place  the  res'^rves  in 
echellon,  in  order  that  they  may,  in  the  event  of  a 


188 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS* 


rally,  be  able  to  proteci.  themselves  without  injuring 
each  other;  and  the  reserves  of  two  contiguous  com- 
panies have  been  united,  in  order  to  diminish  the 
number  of  the  echellons,  and  to  increase  their  capa- 
city for  resisting  cavalry. 

195.  The  echellons,  in  the  example  given,  descend 
from  right  to  left;  but  they  may,  on  an  indication 
from  the  colonel  to  that  effect,  be  posted  on  the  same 
principle,  so  as  to  descend  from  left  to  right. 

196.  When  the  color-company  is  to  be  deployed  aa 
skirmishers,  the  color,  without  its  guard,  will  be  de- 
tached, and  remain  with  the  battalion  reserve. 

The  Rally. 

197.  The  colonel  may  cause  all  the  various  move- 
ments prescribed  for  a  company,  to  be  executed  by 
the  battalion,  and  by  the  same  commands  and  the 
same  signals.  When  he  wishes  to  rally  the  battalion, 
be  will  cause  the  rally  on  the  battalion  to  be  sounded, 
and  will  so  dispose  his  reserve  as  to  protect  this 
movement. 

198.  The  companies  deployed  as  skirmishers  will 
be  rallied  in  squares  on  their  respective  reserves  ; 
each  reserve  of  two  contiguous  companies  will  form 
the  first  front  of  the  square,  throwing  to  the  rear  the 
sections  on  the  flanks ;  the  skirmishers  who  arrive 
first  will  complete  the  lateral  fronts,  and  the  last  the 
fourth  front.  The  ofncers  and  sergeants  will  super- 
intend the  rally,  and  as  fast  as  the  men  arrive,  they 
will  form  them  into  two  ranks,  without  regard  to 
height,  and  cause  them  to  face  outwards. 

199.  The  rally  being  effected,  the  commanders  of 
squares  will  profit  by  any  interval  of  time  the  cavalrjr 
may  allow  for  putting  them  in  safety,  either  by 
marching  upon  the  battalion  reserve,  or  by  seizing 
an  advantageous  position  ;  to  this  end,  each  of  the 
squares  will  be  formed  into  column,  and  march  in 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


189 


this  order ;  and  if  threatened  anew,  it  will  halt,  and 
again  form  itself  into  square. 

200.  As  the  companies  successively  arrive  near  the 
battalion  reserve,  each  will  re-form  as  promptly  as 
possible,  and,  without  regard  to  designation  or  num- 
ber, take  place  in  the  column  next  in  rear  of  the  com- 
panies already  in  it. 

201.  The  battalion  reserve  will  also  form  square,  if 
itself  threatened  by  cavalry.  In  this  case,  the  com- 
panies in  marching  towards  it  will  place  themselves 
promptly  in  the  sectors  without  fire,  and  thus  march 
on  the  squares. 


EBD  OF  INSTRUCTION  FOB  SXIRMIBHEBS. 


190 


SWORD  MANUAL,  ETC. 


MANUAL  OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE,  FOR 
OFFICERS. 

POSITION  OF  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE,   UNDER  ARMS 

The  carry.  The  gripe  is  in  the  right  hand,  which 
will  be  supported  against  the  right  hip,  the  back  of 
the  blade  against  the  shoulder. 

TO  SALUTE  WITH  THE  SWORD  OR  SABRE. 

Three  times  [oy  pauses). 

One.  At  the  distance  of  six  paces  from  the  person 
to  be  saluted,  raise  the  sword  or  sabre  perpendicularly, 
the  point  up,  the  flat  of  the  blade  opposite  to  the 
right  eye,  the  guard  at  the  height  of  the  shoulder, 
the  elbow  supported  on  the  body. 

Two.  Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  or  sabre  by  ex 
tending  the  arm,  so  that  the  right  hand  may  be 
brought  to  the  side  of  the  right  thigh,  and  remain  in 
that  position  until  the  person  to  whom  the  salute  is 
rendered  shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed,  six 
paces. 

Three.  Raise  the  sword  or  sabre  smartly,  and  place 
the  back  of  the  blade  against  the  right  shoulder. 


COLOR-SALUTE. 

In  the  ranks,  the  color-bearer,  whether  at  a  halt 
or  in  march,  will  always  carry  the  heel  of  the  color- 
lance  supported  at  the  right  hip,  the  right  hand 
generally  placed  on  the  lance  at  the  height  of  t]i« 


RELIEVING  SENTINELS. 


191 


shoulder,  to  hold  it  steady.  When  the  color  has  to 
render  honors,  the  color-bearer  will  salute  as  follows; 

At  the  distance  of  six  paces  slip  the  right  hand 
along  the  lance  to  the  height  of  the  eye ;  lower  the 
lance  by  straightening  the  arm  to  its  full  extent,  the 
heel  of  the  lance  remaining  at  the  hip,  and  bring 
back  the  lance  to  the  habitual  position  when  the 
person  saluted  shall  be  passed,  or  shall  have  passed, 
six  paces. 


MANUAL  FOR  RELIEVING  SENTINELS. 

Arms — Port. 

One  time  and  one  motion. 

Throw  the  piece  diagonally  across  the  body,  the 
lock  to  the  front,  seize  it  smartly  at  the  same  instant 
with  both  hands,  the  right  at  the  handle,  the  left  at 
the  lower  band,  the  two  thumbs  pointing  towards  the 
muzzle,  the  barrel  sloping  upwards  and  crossing 
opposite  the  point  of  the  left  shoulder,  the  butt  pro- 
portioDally  lowered.  The  palm  of  the  right  hand 
will  be  above,  and  that  of  the  left  under,  the  piece, 
the  nails  of  both  hands  next  to  the  body,  to  which 
the  elbows  will  be  closed. 

Shoulder — Arms, 
One  time  and  two  motions. 

[First  motion.)  Bring  the  piece  smartly  to  the  right 
shoulder,  placing  the  right  hand  as  in  the  position 
of  shoulder  arms,  slip  the  left  hand  to  the  height  of 
the  shoulder,  the  fingers  extended. 

(Second  motion.)  Drop  the  left  hand  smartly  by  the 
side. 

Being  on  parade  and  at  order  arms,  if  it  be  wished 
to  give  the  men  rest,  the  command  will  be  * 


192        INSTRUCTION  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC. 


Parade — Kest. 

At  the  command  rest,  turn  the  piece  on  the  heel  of 
the  butt,  the  barrel  to  the  left,  the  muzzle  in  front 
of  the  centre  of  the  body  ;  seize  it  at  the  same  time 
with  the  left  hand  just  above,  and  with  the  right  at 
the  upper  band  ;  carry  the  right  foot  six  inches  to 
the  rear,  the  left  knee  slightly  bent. 


INSTRUCTION  FOR  THE  CHIEF  BUGLER 
AND  DRUM  MAJOR. 

The  posts  of  the  field  music  and  band  have  been 
given  Title  I.,  for  the  order  in  battle. 

In  column  in  manoeuvre,  the  field  music  and  band 
will  march  abreast  with  the  left  centre  company,  and 
on  the  side  opposite  the  guide. 

In  column  in  route,  as  well  as  in  the  passage  of 
defiles  to  the  front  or  in  retreat,  they  will  march  at 
the  head  of  their  respective  battalions. 

GENERAL  C  ILLS. 

1.  Attention. 

2.  The  general. 
8.  The  assembly, 

4.  To  the  color. 

5.  Tlce  recall. 

6.  Quick  time. 

7.  Double  quicJc  time. 

8.  The  charge. 

9.  The  reveille. 

10.  Retreat. 

11.  Tattoo. 

12  To  extinguish  lights, 

13  Assembly  of  the  buglers. 


INSTRcCTlON  rOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC. 


14.  Assembly  of  the  guard. 

15.  Orders  for  orderly  sergeants, 

16.  For  officers  to  take  their  place% 

in  line  after  firing, 

17.  The  disperse. 

18.  Officers'  call. 

19.  Breakfast  call. 

20.  Dinner  call. 

21.  Sick  call. 

22.  Fatigue  call, 

23.  Church  call. 

24.  Drill  call. 

25.  School  call. 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

1 .  Fix  bayonet. 

2.  Unfix  bayonet. 

3.  Quick  time. 

4.  Double  quick  time. 

5.  T^e  r?m. 

6.  Deploy  as  skirmishers. 

7.  Forward. 

8.  /n  retreat. 

9.  //aZ^. 

10.  n^A^  flank. 

11.  ^/ie  Z^/^  flank. 

1 2.  Commence  firing. 

13.  Cease  firing. 

14.  Change  direction  to  the  right, 

15.  Change  direction  to  the  left, 

16.  Xze  down. 

17.  (?  wjt?. 

18.  Rally  by  fours. 

19.  Rally  by  sections. 

20.  ^aZZy  %  platoons. 


194        INSTRIjCTlON  FOR  CHIEF  BUGLER,  ETC. 


21.  Rally  on  the  reserve. 

22.  Rally  on  the  battalion, 

23.  Assemble  on  the  battalion. 

Note. — When  the  whole  of  the  troops,  in  the 
same  camp  or  garrison,  are  to  depart,  the  general,  the 
assembly,  and  to  the  color,  will  be  beaten  or  sounded,  at 
the  proper  intervals,  in  the  order  here  mentioned. 
At  the  first,  the  troops  will  prepare  for  the  move- 
ment ;  at  the  second,  they  will  form  by  company,  and 
at  the  third,  unite  by  battalion. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  SIGNS. 


MOVEMENT  OF  THE  METRONOME. 
76  =  J  —       4  —  or  76  steps  to  the  minute. 

80=  J, — ^  —  or  80  steps  to  the  minute. 

=  J* —  or  100  steps  to  the  minute. 


100 


120  =  J  —       2  —  or  120  steps  to  the  minuta 
Silence  .  .  ^  —  Demi-silencQ  •  •  *J 


GENERAL  CALLS. 


120  =:  J  Allegro. 


1.— ATTEIsTTIOI^". 


17 


195 


196 


GENERAL  CALLS. 


2— THE  GENERAIi. 

130  =  Presto. 


ft  - 

^^^^^^ 


3.--THE  ASSEMBLY. 


jL   <-y  0   0  9  0  0 

J.  f 

0  

H  

GENERAL  CALLS. 


197 


4.-TO  THE  COLOR. 

80  =  ^  Andante. 


1  1  

— 

—  

i  1— 

f= 

D.C. 

5.  -THE  RECALL. 

80  =  ^  Andante.  — «_  __ 

6.  -QUICK  TIME. 


— J- 

1^8 


GENERAL  CALLS. 


200 


GENERAL  CALLS. 


g.-THE  EEVEILIiE. 
110  =  J  .  Allegro. 

^^^^^^^ 

10— KETREAT. 

76  =  J  Andante, 


0^  

-* 

202 


GENERAL  CALLS. 


12.-TO  EXTIlSrGUISH  LIGHTS* 


-a 

13.-ASSEMBLY  OF  THE  BUGLERS. 


100  =  J  Presto. 


14.-ASSEMBLY  OF  THE  GUARD. 
112^  J  Allegro. 


GENERAL  CALLS. 


203 


le—FOR    OFFICERS    TO    TAKE  THEIR 
PLACES  IN  LINE  AFTER  FliimG. 
108  =:  ^'  Allegro. 


17.-THE  DISPERSE. 
120-=  J  Allegro, 


EE 


204 


GENERAL  CALLS. 


GENERAL  CALLS.  '  205 

20.~DI]SrNER  CALL. 


— B- 

3 

1  9  — -pr 

21.-SICK  CALL. 


110  =  J  ^ZZe^ro. 


^^^^^ 


22.-FATIGUE  CALL. 
92  =  J  Allegro, 


— 
— 

206 


GENERAL  CALLS. 


.  5. 

—  

 ^_ 

— 

-\  1- 

23.-CHUIIOH  CALL. 
80  =  J  Andante. 


^ — t-F- 

:   

:  4— i3-J  4: 

 ^-i-^  j  

24.— DBILL  CALL. 

76  =  J  Maestoso, 


GENERAL  CALLS. 


207 


— h—ai — ^—^--—  l- ' 
■  ,  ^'g — 1 — 

r         i     r        i  ' 

JL — ^1 — ?_* — 1 —  - 

1 — — 

— ^  1 — ^_  1 — 

25.-SCHOOIi  CALL. 


110  ==  J  Allegro. 


■  ■  1  ■ 

_H*_^  

-f  -r^- 

S08 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


1.— FIX  BAYONET. 


^  4  J 

-f  1 

2.-U]SrFIX  BAYONET. 


=  J  Andante, 

J — ' 

3.-QUICK  TIME. 

[Music  iJie  same  as  in    General  Calls,-') 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


209 


4.-DOUBI1E  QUICK  TIME. 
165  =  J  Allegro, 


 !«- 

5.-THE  KU]Sr. 


160  =  J 


Presto, 


210 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


6.-DEPLOY  AS  SKIRMISHEES. 
IjLO  =  J  Allegro. 


■  f  f  f 

7-FOIlWARD. 


160  =  J  Presto. 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


211 


9.-HALT. 

100  =  J  Presto, 

10 -BY  THE   RIGHT  FLATTK. 
160  =  J  Presto. 

ll.-BY  THE  LEFT  PLALTK. 
160  =  J  Presto, 


-n  N  

-J — J-tC — 

1  . 

12.-COMMENCE  FIRUsTG-. 
160  =  J  Presto,  _ 

18 


212  CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

13.-CEASB  FIRING. 
60  =  J  Maestoso, 


— 

14,— CHANGE  DIRECTION  TO  THE  RIGHT. 

110  =  J  Allegro. 


—  1  ^  

i — r— K- 

 —J  

i5.-CHANGE  DIRECTION  TO  THE  LEFT. 


=  J  Allegro, 

— ff^^rr  ^  ' 

- 

16.-LIE  DOWN. 

60  =  J  Moderato, 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS.  213 
17.-BISB  UP. 

50  ~  J  Moderato, 


18.— RALLY  BY  FOUKS. 

130  =  J  Allegro. 

19.-RALLY  BY  SECTIOIfS. 

132  =  J  Allegro. 


—\ — ^— 1 — 

— & — 

1 — »- 

1^ 

20.-IIALLY  BY  PLATOONS. 

110  =  J  Allegro. 


F*Hr.  - 

#       -  1 

214 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 


21— BAIiLY  ON  THE  RESEHVE. 

76  =  J  Andante. 


» — a. 

1^ 

i 


23.— ASSEMBLE  ON  THE  BATTALIOlSr. 
80  =  J  Andante, 


EE 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  I.  215 


XITIiE  FOURTH. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

Formation  of  the  Battalion. 

1.  Every  colonel  will  labor  to  habituate  his  bat- 
talion to  form  line  of  battle,  by  night  as  well  as  by 
day,  with  the  greatest  possible  promptitude. 

2.  Tlie  color-company  will  generally  be  designated 
as  the  directing  company.  That,  as  soon  as  formed, 
will  be  placed  on  the  direction  the  colonel  may  have 
determined  for  the  line  of  battle.  The  other  com- 
panies will  form  on  it,  to  the  right  and  left,  on  the 
principles  of  successive  formations  which  will  be 
herein  prescribed. 

3.  The  color-bearer  may  have  received  the  color 
from  the  hands  of  the  colonel;  but  if  there  be  day- 
light, and  time,  the  color  will  be  produced  with  due 
solemnity. 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color-escort. 

4.  When  the  battalion  turns  out  under  arms  and 
the  color  is  wanted,  a  company,  other  than  that  of  the 
color,  will  be  put  in  march  to  receive  and  escort  it. 

6.  The  march  will  be  in  the  following  order,  in 
quick  time,  and  without  music :  the  field  music,  fol- 
lowed by  the  band ;  the  escort  in  column  by  platoon, 
right  in  front,  with  arms  on  the  right  shoulder,  and 
the  color-bearer  between  the  platoons. 

6.  Arrived  in  front  of  the  tent  or  quarters  of  the 
colonel,  the  escort  will  form  line,  the  field  music  and 
band  on  the  right,  and  arms  will  be  brought  to  a 
shoulder. 


216        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  I. 

7.  The  moment  the  eecort  is  in  line,  the  colors 
bearer,  preceded  by  the  first  lieutenant,  and  followed 
by  a  sergeant  of  the  escort,  will  go  to  receive  the 
color. 

8.  When  the  color-bearer  shall  come  out,  followed 
by  the  lieutenant  and  sergeant,  he  will  halt  before 
the  entrance ;  the  escort  will  present  arms,  and  the 
field  music  will  sound  to  the  color. 

9.  After  some  twenty  seconds,  the  captain  will 
cause  the  sound  to  cease,  arms  to  be  shouldered,  and 
then  break  by  platoon  into  column ;  the  color-bearer 
will  place  himself  between  the  platoons,  and  the 
lieutenant  and  sergeant  will  resume  their  posts. 

10.  The  escort  will  march  back  to  the  battalion  to 
the  sound  of  music  in  quick  time,  and  in  the  same 
order  as  above,  the  guide  on  the  right.  The  march 
will  be  so  conducted  that  when  the  escort  arrives  at 
one  hundred  and  fifty  paces  in  front  of  the  right  of 
the  betttalicii,  the  direction  of  the  march  will  be 
parallel  to  its  front,  and  when  the  color  arrives 
nearly  opposite  its  place  in  line,  the  column  will 
change  direction  to  the  left,  and  the  right  guide  will 
direct  himself  on  the  centre  of  the  battalion. 

Honors  paid  to  the  color. 

11.  Arrived  at  the  distance  of  twenty  paces  from 
the  battalion,  the  escort  will  halt,  and  the  music 
cease ;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  six  paces  before 
the  centre  of  the  battalion,  the  color-bearer  will  ap- 
proach the  colonel,  by  the  front,  in  quick  time;  when 
at  the  distance  of  ten  paces,  he  will  halt:  the  colonel 
will  cause  arms  to  be  presented,  and  to  the  color  to  be 
sounded,  which  being  executed,  the  color-bearer  will 
take  his  place  in  the  front  rank  of  the  color- guard, 
and  the  battalion,  by  command,  shoulder  arms. 

12.  The  escort,  field  music,  and  band,  will  return 
in  quick  time  to  their  several  places  in  line  of  battle, 
marching  by  the  rear  of  the  battalion. 


"SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  I.  217 

13.  The  color  will  be  escorted  back  to  tbe  colonel's 
tent  or  quarters  in  the  above  order. 

General  Rules  and  Division  of  the  School  of  the 
Battalion. 

14.  This  school  has  for  its  object  the  instruction 
of  battalions  singly,  and  thus  to  prepare  them  for 
manoeuvres  in  line.  The  harmony  so  indispensable 
in  the  movements  of  many  battalions  can  only  be 
attained  by  the  use  of  the  same  commands,  the  same 
principles,  and  the  same  means  of  execution.  Hence, 
all  colonels  and  actual  commanders  of  battalions  will 
conform  themselves,  without  addition  or  curtailment, 
to  what  will  herein  be  prescribed. 

15.  When  a  battalion  instructed  in  this  drill  shall 
manoeuvre  in  line,  the  colonel  will  regulate  its  move- 
ments, as  prescribed  in  the  third  volume  of  the  Tac- 
tics for  heavy  infantry. 

IC  The  school  of  the  battalion  will  be  divided  into 
five  parts. 

17.  The  first  will  comprehend  opening  and  closing 
ranks,  and  the  execution  of  the  different  fires. 

18.  The  second,  the  different  modes  of  passing 
from  the  order  in  battle,  to  the  order  in  column. 

19.  The  third,  the  march  in  column,  and  the  other 
movements  incident  thereto. 

20.  The  fourth,  the  different  modes  of  passing  from 
the  order  in  column  to  the  order  in  battle. 

21.  The  fifth  will  comprehend  the  march  in  line  of 
battle,  in  advance  and  in  retreat;  the  passage  of  de- 
files in  retreat ;  the  march  by  the  flank ;  the  formation 
by  file  into  line  of  battle ;  the  change  of  front ;  the 
column  doubled  on  the  centre ;  dispositions  against 
cavalry ;  the  rally,  and  rules  for  manoeuvring  by  the 
rear  rank. 


218         SCHOOL     F  THE  BATTALION — PART  I. 


PAKT  FIRST. 

Opening  and  closing  ranks,  and  the  execution  of  the 
different  fires. 

Article  First. 

To  open  and  to  close  ranks. 

22.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  ranks  to  be  opened, 
will  command  : 

1 .  Prepare  to  open  ranks, 

23.  At  this  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel  and 
major  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  bat- 
talion, the  first  on  the  flank  of  the  file  closers,  and 
the  second  four  paces  from  the  front  rank  of  the 
battalion. 

24.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command: 

2.  To  the  rear,  open  order,    3.  March. 

25.  At  the  second  command,  the  covering  ser- 
geants, and  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion, 
will  place  themselves  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  front 
rank,  and  opposite  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  in 
order  to  mark  the  new  alignment  of  the  rear  rank ; 
they  will  be  aligned  by  the  major  on  the  left  ser- 
geant of  the  battalion,  who  will  be  careful  to  place 
himself  exactly  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  front  rank, 
and  to  hold  his  piece  between  the  eyes,  erect  and  in- 
verted, the  better  to  indicate  to  the*  major  the  direc- 
tion to  be  given  to  the  covering  sergeants. 

26.  At  the  command  march,  the  rear  rank  and  the 
file  closers  will  step  to  the  rear  without  counting 
steps ;  the  men  will  pass  a  little  in  rear  of  the  line 
traced  for  this  rank,  halt,  and  dress  forward  on  the 
covering  sergeants,  who  will  align  correctly  the  men 
of  their  respective  companies. 

27.  The  file  closers  will  fall  back  and  preserve  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  I.  219 


dialance  of  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  glancing 
eyes  to  the  right ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will,  from 
the  right,  align  them  on  the  file  closer  of  the  left, 
who,  having  placed  himself  accurately  two  paces 
from  the  rear  rank,  will  invert  his  piece,  and  hold  it 
up  erect  between  his  eyes,  the  better  to  be  seen  by 
the  lieutenant  colonel. 

28.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will 
command  : 

4.  Front. 

At  this  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel,  major, 
and  the  left  sergeant,  will  retake  their  places  in  line 
of  battle. 

29.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  ranks  to  be  closed 
by  the  commands  prescribed  for  the  instructor  in  the 
school  of  the  company.  No.  28. 

Article  Second. 
Manual  of  arms. 

30.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  colonel  will  cause 
the  following  times  and  pauses  to  be  executed : 

Present  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Order  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Support  arms.  Shoulder  arms. 

Fix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Charge  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Unfix  bayonet.  Shoulder  arms. 

Article  Third. 
Loading  at  will,  and  the  Firings. 

81.  The  colonel  will  next  cause  to  be  executed 
loading  at  will,  by  the  commands  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company,  No.  45 ;  the  officers  and  ser- 
geants in  the  ranks  will  half  face  to  the  right  with 
the  men  at  tl.e  eighth  time  of  loading,  and  will  fa  Dtp 


220         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  I. 

to  tlie  front  wiien  the  men  next  to  them  come  to  a 
shoulder. 

32.  The  colonel  will  cause  to  be  executed  the  ^re 
by  company,  the  fire  by  wing,  the  fire  by  battalion, 
the  fire  by  file,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  by  the  com- 
mands to  be  herein  indicated. 

33.  The  fire  by  company  and  the  fire  by  file  will 
always  be  direct ;  the  fire  by  battalion,  the  fire  by 
wing,  and  the  fire  by  rank,  may  be  either  direct  or 
oblique. 

34.  When  the  fire  ought  to  be  oblique,  the  colonel 
will  give,  at  every  round,  the  caution  right  (or  left) 
oblique,  between  the  commands  ready  and  airn. 

35.  The  fire  by  company  will  be  executed  alter- 
nately by  the  right  and  left  companies  of  each  divi- 
sion, as  if  the  division  were  alone.  The  right  com- 
pany will  fire  first ;  the  captain  of  the  left  will  not 
give  his  first  command  till  he  shall  see  one  or  two 
pi*»ces  ar  a  ready  in  the  right  company;  the  captain 
of  the  latter,  after  the  first  discharge,  will  observe 
the  same  rule  in  respect  to  the  left  company ;  and 
the  fire  will  thus  be  continued  alternately. 

36.  The  colonel  will  observe  the  same  rule  in  the 
firing  by  wing. 

37.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  in  all  the  com- 
panies at  once,  and  will  be  executed  as  has  been  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  55  and 
following.  The  fire  by  rank  will  be  executed  by 
each  rank  alternately,  as  has  been  prescribed  in  the 
Bchool  of  the  company.  No.  68  and  following. 

38.  The  color-guard  will  not  fire,  but  resei  ve  itself 
{)Y  the  defence  of  the  color. 

The  fire  by  company. 

89.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  fire  by  company  tj 
be  executed,  will  command : 


1.  Fire  by  company.    2.  Commence  firing. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  I.  221 


40.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  and  cover- 
ing sergeants  will  take  the  positions  indicated  in  the 
Bohool  of  the  company  No.  49. 

41.  The  color  and  its  guard  will  step  back  at  the 
game  time,  so  as  to  bring  the  front  rank  of  the  guard 
in  a  line  with  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion.  TMb 
rule  is  general  for  all  the  different  firings, 

42.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  numbered 
companies  will  commence  to  fire  ;  their  captains  will 
each  give  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  company  No.  50,  observing  to  precede  the  com- 
mand company  by  that  of  firsts  third,  fifth,  or  seventh, 
according  to  the  number  of  each. 

43.  The  captains  of  the  even  numbered  companies 
will  give,  in  their  turn,  the  same  commands,  observ- 
ing to  precede  them  by  the  number  of  their  respect- 
ive companies. 

44.  In  order  that  the  odd  numbered  companies 
H'ly  noi  all  f  re  at  mce,  their  cj-ptainn  will  observe, 
but  only  for  the  first  discharge,  to  give  the  command 
fire  one  after  another:  thus,  the  captain  of  the  third 
company  will  not  give  the  command  fire  until  he  has 
heard  the  fire  of  the  first  company;  the  captain  of 
the  fifth  will  observe  the  same  rule  with  respect  to 
the  third,  and  the  captain  of  the  seventh  the  same 
rule  with  respect  to  the  fifth. 

45.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  fire  to  cease  by  the 
sound  to  cease  firing ;  at  this  sound,  the  men  will  exe- 
cute what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company 
No.  G3;  at  the  sound  for  officers  to  take  their  places 
after  firing,  the  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and 
color-guard,  will  promptly  resume  their  places  in 
line  of  battle.    This  rule  is  geneT al  for  all  the  firings. 

The  fire  by  wing. 

46.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  this  fire  to  be  cxe* 
uted,  he  will  coni-Diand  : 


222        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  I. 


1.  Fire  by  wing.    2.  Right  wing.    8.  Ready. 
•  4.  Aim.    5.  Fire.  6.  Load. 

47.  The  co'^onel  will  cause  the  wings  to  fire  alter- 
nately, and  he  will  recommence  the  fire  by  the  com- 
mands:  1.  Right  wing ;  2.  Aim;  3.  Fie.e  ;  4.  Load. 
1.  Left  wing;  2.  Aim;  3.  Fire;  4.  Load;  in  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed  No.  35. 

The  fire  by  battalion. 

48.  The  colonel  will  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed 
by  the  commands  last  prescribed,  substituting  for 
the  first  two,  1.  Fire  by  battalion;  2.  Battalion, 

The  fire  by  file. 

49.  To  cause  this  to  be  executed,  the  colonel  will 
eommand : 

1.  Fire  by  file.    2.  Battalion.    3.  Ready. 
4.  Commence  firing. 

50.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  fire  will  commence 
on  the  right  of  each  company,  as  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company  No.  57.  The  colonel  may, 
if  he  thinks  proper,  cause  the  fire  to  commence  on 
the  right  of  each  platoon. 

The  fire  by  lank. 

51.  To  cause  this  fire  to  be  executed,  the  colonel 
will  command  : 

1.  Fire  by  rank.    2.  Battalion.    3.  Ready. 
4.  Rear  rank.    5.  Aim.    6.  Fire. 
7.  Load. 

52.  This  fire  will  be  executed  as  has  been  ex- 
plained in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  59,  in 
following  the  progression  prescribed  for  the  two 
ranks  which  should  fire  alternately. 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION — PART  I,  223 


To  fire  by  the  rear  rank. 

53.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  battalion  to 
fire  to  the  rear,  he  will  command : 

2 

1.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.    2.  Battalion, 
3.  About — Face. 

54.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains,  covering 
sergeants,  and  file  closers  will  execute  what  has  been 
prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  69 ;  the 
color-bearer  will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  and,  for  this 
purpose,  the  corporal  of  his  file  will  step  before  the 
corporal  next  on  his  right  to  let  the  color-bearer 
pass,  and  will  then  take  his  place  in  the  front  rank ; 
the  lieutenant  colonel,  adjutant,  major,  sergeant 
major,  and  the  music  will  place  themselves  before 
the  front  rank,  and  face  to  the  rear,  each  opposite 
his  place  in  the  line  of  battle — the  first  two  passing 
around  the  right,  and  the  others  around  the  left,  of 
the  battalion. 

65.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
about ;  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants  observing 
what  is  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company- 
No^.  70. 

66.  The  battalion  facing  thus  by  the  rear  rank, 
the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  different  fires 
by  the  same  commands  as  if  it  were  faced  by  the 
front  rank. 

67.  The  right  and  left  wings  will  retain  the  same 
designations,  although  faced  about ;  the  companies 
also  will  preserve  their  former  designations,  as  firsts 
second,  third,  &c. 

68.  The  fire  by  file  will  commence  on  the  left  of 
each  company,  now  become  the  right. 

69.  The  fire  by  rank  will  commence  by  the  front 
rank,  now  become  the  rear  rank.  This  rank  will 
preserve  its  denomination. 

60.  The  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  color* 


224        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  I. 

guard  will,  at  the  first  command  given  by  the  colonel, 
lake  the  places  prescribed  for  them  in  ihe  fires,  with 
the  front  rank  leading. 

Gl.  The  colonel,  after  firing  to  the  rear,  wishing 
to  face  the  battalion  to  its  proper  front,  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Face  by  the  front  rank.    2.  Battalion.    3.  About — 
Face. 

62.  At  these  commands,  the  battalion  will  return 
to  its  proper  front  by  the  means  prescribed  Nos.  64 
and  55. 

63.  The  fire  by  file  being  that  most  used  in  war, 
the  colonel  will  give  it  the  preference  in  the  pre- 
paratory exercises,  in  order  that  the  battalion  may 
be  brought  to  execute  it  with  the  greatest  possible 
regularity. 

64.  When  the  colonel  may  wish  to  give  some  re- 
laxation to  the  battalion,  without  breaking  the  ranks, 
he  will  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company  Nos.  37  and  38  or  Nos.  39 
and  40. 

65.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  arms  to 
be  stacked,  he  will  bring  the  battalion  to  ordered 
arms,  and  then  command : 

1.  Stack — Arms.    2.  Break  ranks.    3.  March. 

66.  The  colonel  wishing  the  men  to  return  to  the 
ranks,  will  cause  attention  to  be  sounded,  at  which 
the  battalion  will  re-form  behind  the  stacks  of  arms. 
The  sound  being  finished,  the  colonel,  aliur  causing 
the  stacks  to  be  broken,  will  command : 

Battalion. 

67.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  fix  their  atten 
tion,  and  remain  immovable 


225 


PL  41. 


'illll!i|lll!nlilll^ililllTj'-"i 


^i'i!l!li'!ili^|l!liJilii]~; 


^illlllllllHlilii|tiiilil!|"j 


iiiiiii;iiiii!iiiiiiiir' 


Bij  comjjani/  rijltt  ichccl,  d:c.  (Xo.  70). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  II. 


225 


PART  SECOND. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  the  order  in  battle  to 
the  order  in  column. 

Article  First. 

To  break  to  the  right  or  the  left  into  column. 

68.  Lines  of  battle  will  habitually  break  into  columo 
by  company ;  they  may  also  break  by  division  or  by 
platoon. 

69.  It  is  here  supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to 
break  by  company  to  the  right;  he  will  command : 

1.  By  company^  right  wheel.     2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March.  ) 

70.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  his  company, 
and  caution  it  that  it  has  to  wheel  to  the  right ;  each 
covering  sergeant  will  replace  his  captain  in  the  front 
rank. 

71.  At  the  command  march,  each  company  will 
break  to  the  right,  according  to  the  principles  pre' 
scribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  173;  each 
captain  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed 
for  the  chiefs  of  platoon ;  the  left  guide,  as  soon  as 
he  can  pass,  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
front  rank  to  conduct  the  marching  flank,  and  when 
he  shall  have  approached  near  to  the  perpendicular, 
the  captain  will  command :  1.  Buch  company.  2. 
Halt. 

72.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  left  guide  shall  be  at  the  distance 
of  three  paces  from  the  perpendicular,  the  company 
will  halt ;  the  guide  will  advance  and  place  his  left 
arm  lightly  against  the  bre*ast  of  the  captain,  who 
will  establish  him  on  the  alignment  of  the  man  who 
has  faced  to  the  right;  the  covering  sergeant  will 

19 


226         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  H. 

place  himself  correctly  on  the  alignment  on  the  right 
of  that  man  ;  which  being  executed,  the  captain  will 
align  his  company  by  the  left,  command  Front,  and 
place  himself  two  paces  before  its  centre. 

73.  The  captains  having  commanded  Front,  the 
guides,  although  some  of  them  may  not  be  in  the 
direction  of  the  preceding  guides,  will  stand  fast,  in 
order  that  the  error  of  a  company  that  has  wheeled 
too  much  or  too  little  may  not  be  propagated ;  the 
guides  not  in  the  direction  will  readily  come  into  it 
when  the  column  is  put  in  march. 

74.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into 
column  by  company  to  the  left,  according  to  the 
same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means ;  the  covering 
sergeant  of  each  company  will  conduct  the  marching 
flank,  and  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  front  rank  at  the  moment  the  company 
halts. 

75.  When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division,  the 
indication  division  will  be  substituted  in  the  com- 
mands for  that  of  company  ;  the  chief  of  each  division 
(the  senior  captain)  will  conform  himself  to  what  is 
prescribed  for  the  chief  of  company,  and  will  place 
hiinself  two  paces  before  the  centre  of  his  division ; 
the  junior  captain,  if  not  already  there,  will  place 
himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies  in 
the  front  rank,  and  be  covered  by  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company  in  the  rear  rank.  The  right 
guide  of  the  right  company  will  be  the  right  guide, 
and  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company  the  left  guide, 
of  the  division. 

76.  When  the  battalion  shall  break  by  platoon  to 
the  right  or  to  the  left,  each  first  lieutenant  will  pasg 
around  the  left  of  his  company  to  place  himself  in 
front  of  the  second  platoon,  and,  for  this  purpose,  each 
covering  sergeant,  excd^t  the  one  of  the  right  com- 
pany, will  step,  for  the  moment,  in  rear  of  the  right 
file  of  his  company. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  II.  227 

77.  When  the  battalion  breaks  by  division  to  the 
light,  and  there  is  an  odd  company,  the  captain  of  this 
company  (the  left),  after  wheeling  into  column,  will 
cause  it  to  oblique  to  the  left,  halt  it  at  company  dis- 
tance from  the  preceding  division,  place  his  left  guide 
on  the  direction  of  the  column,  and  then  align  hia 
company  by  the  left.  When  the  line  breaks  by  divi- 
sion to  the  left,  the  odd  company  will  be  in  front ;  it 3 
captain,  having  wheeled  it  into  column,  will  cause  it 
to  oblique  to  the  right,  halt  it  at  division  distance 
from  the  division  next  in  the  rear,  place  his  right 
guide  on  the  direction  of  the  other  guides,  and  align 
the  company  by  the  right. 

78.  The  battalion  being  in  column,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  major  will  place  themselves  on  the  direct- 
ing flank,  the  first  abreast  with  the  leading  subdivi- 
sion, and  the  other  abreast  with  the  last,  and  both 
six  paces  from  the  flank.  The  adjutant  will  be  near 
the  lieutenant  colonel,  and  the  sergeant  major  near 
the  major. 

79.  The  colonel  will  have  no  fixed  place  as  the 
instructor  of  his  battalion  ;  but  in  columns  composed 
of  many  battalions,  he  will  place  himself  habitually 
on  the  directing  flank  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  from  the 
guides,  and  abreast  with  the  centre  of  his  battalion. 

80.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  move  the  column 
forward  without  halting  it,  he  will  caution  the  bat- 
talion to  that  effect,  and  command : 

1.  By  company,  right  wheel.   2.  March  (or  double  quick 
— March). 

81 .  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  companies 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  for  breaking  into 
column  from  a  halt. 

82.  At  the  second  command,  they  will  remain  in 
front  of  their  companies  to  superintend  the  move- 
ment ;  the  companies  will  wheel  to  the  right  on  fixed 
pivots  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  tae  company  No. 


228         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  11. 

185 ;  the  left  guides  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
above;  when  they  shall  arrive  near  the  perpendicular 
the  colonel  will  command : 

3.  Forward.    4.  March.    6.  Guide  left, 

83.  At  the  third  command,  each  covering  sergeant 
will  place  himself  by  the  right  side  of  the  man  on 
the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  his  company.  At  the 
fourth  command,  which  will  be  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  completed,  the  companies  will  cease  to 
wheel,  and  march  straight  forward.  At  the  fifth,  the 
men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The 
leading  guide  will  march  in  the  direction  indicated  to 
him  by  the  lieutenant  colonel.  The  guides  will  im- 
mediately conform  themselves  to  the  principles  of  the 
march  in  column,  school  of  the  company  No.  200  and 
following. 

84.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  wheel  to  the  right  or  left, 
by  the  same  commands  and  the  same  means  ;  but  he 
should  previously  caution  the  battalion  that  it  is  to 
continue  the  march. 

85.  A  battalion  in  line  of  battle  will  break  into 
column  by  company  to  the  left,  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  by  inverse  means  ;  the  covering 
sergeant  of  each  company  will  conduct  the  marching 
flank,  and  the  left  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the 
left  of  their  respective  companies  at  the  command 
forward. 

86.  When  a  battalion  has  to  prolong  itself  in  column 
towards  the  right  or  left,  or  has  to  direct  its  march 
in  column  perpendicularly  or  diagonally  in  front,  or  in 
rear  of  either  flank,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  break 
by  company  to  the  right  or  left,  as  has  just  been 
prescribed ;  but  when  the  line  breaks  to  the  right,  in 
order  to  march  towards  the  left,  or  the  reverse,  the 
colonel  will  command :  Break  to  the  right  to  march  to 
the  leftf  or  break  to  the  left  to  march  to  the  right^  before 


77" 


2i9 


~H:il!ti'l^illlilllil!l!i«llP 


PL  42. 


i 


■"'Miliil? 


'  ^!!il!il!lilli!iiiii:Hii:|iil|- 


I  '  i 

I  :  f 

I  !  I 

j  }  j 

?7  »^li.|'t|ill,i;ili|:,||i,||j!i;iiP 


By  the  r{(jhf  of  eoiiipanies  to  the  rear  into  coluinn,  d:c. 
(No.  88). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  II.  229 

giving  the  command,  hy  company^  right  (or  left)  wheels 
As  soon  as  the  battalion  is  broken,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  will  place  a  marker  abreast  with  the  right 
guide  of  the  leading  company.  The  instant  the 
column  is  put  in  motion,  this  company  will  wheel  to 
the  left  (or  right),  march  ten  paces  to  the  front  with- 
out changing  the  guide,  and  wheel  again  to  the  left 
(or  right).  The  second  wheel  being  completed,  the 
captain  will  immediately  command  guide  left  [ov  right) . 
The  guide  of  this  company  will  march  in  a  direction 
parallel  to  the  guides  of  the  column.  The  lieutenant 
colonel  will  be  careful  to  place  a  second  marker  at 
the  point  where  the  first  company  is  to  change 
direction  the  second  time. 

Article  Second. 

To  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  into  column, 
and  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  or  left  of  com- 
panies. 

87.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  the  bat- 
talion to  break  to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  into  column 
by  company,  he  will  command  : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into  column. 
2.  Battalion  right — Face.  3.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

88.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company,  and  cau- 
tion it  to  face  to  the  right ;  the  covering  sergeants 
will  step  into  the  front  rank. 

89.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right ;  each  captain  will  hasten  to  the  right  of 
his  company,  and  break  two  files  to  the  rear ;  the 
first  file  will  break  the  whole  depth  of  the  two  ranks  ; 
the  second  file  less ;  which  being  executed,  the  cap- 
tain will  place  himself  so  that  his  breast  may  touch 
lightly  the  left  arm  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the 


230        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  II. 

last  file  in  the  company  next  on  the  right  of  his  o-wn 
The  captain  of  the  right  company  will  place  himself 
fts  if  there  -were  a  company  on  his  right,  and  wil) 
align  himself  on  the  other  captains.  The  covering 
eergeant  of  each  company  will  break  to  the  rear  with 
the  right  files,  and  place  himself  before  the  front 
rank  of  the  first  file,  to  conduct  him. 

90.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  each 
company  will  wheel  to  the  right ;  the  covering  ser- 
geant, placed  before  this  file,  will  conduct  it  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  rear.  The  other  files  will  come  suc- 
cessively to  wheel  on  the  same  spot.  The  captains 
will  stand  fast,  see  their  companies  file  past,  and  at 
the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have  wheeled,  each  cap- 
tain will  command : 

1.  Such  company.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 
4.  Left — Dress. 

91.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  front, 
its  left  guide  will  place  himself  so  that  his  left  arm 
may  touch  lightly  the  breast  of  his  captain. 

92.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  company  will  align 
itself  on  its  left  guide,  the  captain  so  directing  it 
that  the  new  alignment  may  be  perpendicular  to  that 
which  the  company  had  occupied  in  line  of  battle ; 
and,  the  better  to  judge  this,  he  will  step  back  two 
paces  from  the  flank. 

93.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will 
command :  Front,  and  take  his  place  before  its 
centre. 

94.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  break  into  column  by  com- 
pany, to  the  rear,  by  the  right,  he  will  command ; 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  rear  into  column. 
2.  Battalion,  hy  the  right  flank.  3.  March  (or  doubU 
quick — March). 

95.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  step 


SCHOOL  DF  THE  BATTALION— PART  II.  231 

briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company,  and 
caution  it  to  face  by  the  right  flank. 

96.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right;  each  captain  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
right  of  his  company  and  cause  it  to  break  to  the 
right;  the  first  file  of  each  company  will  wheel  to 
the  right,  and  the  covering  sergeant  placed  in  front 
of  this  file  will  conduct  it  perpendicularly  to  the 
rear ;  the  other  files  will  wheel  successively  at  the 
same  place  as  the  first.  The  captains  will  see  their 
companies  file  past  them ;  when  the  last  files  have 
wheeled,  the  colonel  will  command: 

3.  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank — March.    4.  Guide  left, 

97.  At  the  command  march,  the  companies  will  face 
to  •the  left,  and  march  in  column  in  the  new  direction. 
The  captains  will  place  themselves  in  front  of  the 
centres  of  their  respective  companies.  At  the  fourth 
command,  the  guides  Avill  conform  to  the  principles 
of  the  march  in  column;  the  leading  one  will  move 
in  the  direction  indicated  to  him  by  the  lieutenant 
colonel.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  left. 

98.  To  break  to  the  rear  by  the  left,  the  colonel 
will  give  the  same  commands  as  in  the  case  of  break- 
ing to  the  rear  by  the  right,  substituting  the  indi- 
cation left,  for  that  of  right. 

99.  The  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  same  principles.  Each  captain  will  hasten  to 
the  left  of  his  company,  cause  the  first  two  files  to 
break  to  the  rear,  and  then  place  his  breast  against 
the  right  file  of  the  company  next  on  the  left  of  hia 
own,  in  the  manner  prescribed  above. 

100.  As  soon  as  the  two  files  break  to  the  rear,  the 
left  guide  of  each  company  will  place  himself  before 
the  front  rank  man  of  the  headmost  file,  to  conduct 
him. 

101.  The  instant  the  companies  face  to  the  front, 


232        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  II. 

the  riglit  guide  of  each  -will  place  himself  so  thai  u^s 
right  arm  may  lightly  touch  the  breast  of  his  cap- 
tain. 

102.  The  battalion  may  be  broken  by  division  to 
the  rear,  by  the  right  or  left,  in  like  manner ;  in  this 
case,  the  indication  divisions  will  be  substituted,  in 
the  first  command,  for  that  of  companies ;  the  chiefs 
of  division  vrill  conform  themselves  to  vrhat  is  pre- 
scribed for  the  chiefs  of  company.  The  junior  cap- 
tain in  each  division  will  place  himself,  when  the 
division  faces  to  a  flank,  by  the  side  of  the  covering 
sergeant  of  the  left  company,  who  steps  into  the 
front  rank. 

103.  If  there  be  an  odd  number  of  companies,  and 
the  battalion  breaks  by  division  to  the  rear,  whether 
by  the  right  or  left,  the  captain  of  the  left  company 
will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  77. 

104.  This  manner  of  breaking  into  column,  being 
at  once  the  most  prompt  and  regular,  will  be  pre- 
ferred on  actual  service,  unless  there  be  some  par- 
ticular reason  for  breaking  to  the  front. 

105.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line  and  at  a  halt,  and 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the 
right  of  companies,  he  will  command: 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  front  (or  rear). 
2.  Battalion,  right — Face.  3.  March  (or  double 
quick — March).    4.  Guide  right  (left)  or  [centre). 

106.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
rapidly  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  com- 
pany, and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right;  the  cover- 
ing sergeants  will  replace  the  captains  in  the  front 
rank. 

107.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  each  captain  moving  quickly  to 
the  right  of  his  company  will  cause  files  to  break  to 
the  front,  according  to  the  principles  indicated  No.  89. 

108.  At  the  command  march,  each  captain  placing 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  II.  233 

him.«3elf  on  the  left  of  his  leading  guide  will  conduct 
his  company  perpendicularly  to  the  original  line. 
At  the  fourth  command,  the  guide  of  each  companj 
will  dress  to  the  right,  left,  or  centre,  according  to 
the  indication  given,  taking  care  to  preserve  accu- 
rately his  distance. 

109.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  to  the 
front,  or  rear,  by  the  left  of  companies,  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  by  the  same  means  and  the 
same  commands,  substituting  left  for  right. 

110.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  advance  or  retire  by  the  right  of  com- 
panies, he  will  command : 

1.  By  the  right  of  companies  to  the  front  (or  rear), 
2.  Battalion,  hy  the  right  fiank.  3.  March  (or 
double  quick — March).  4.  Guide  right  {left)  or 
(centre). 

111.  Which  will  be  executed  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples and  means  prescribed  Nos.  95  and  following, 
and  106  and  following.  At  the  first  command,  the 
color  and  general  guides  will  take  their  places  as  in 
column. 

112.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  advance  or  retire 
by  the  left  of  companies,  the  movement  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  same  means  and  the  same  commands, 
substituting  left  for  right. 

113.  If  the  battalion  be  advancing  by  the  right  or 
!eft  of  companies,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form 
line  to  the  front,  he  will  command  :• 

1.  By  companies  into   line.     2.  March   (or  double 
quick — March).    3.  Guide  centre. 

114.  At  the  command  ma,rch,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  each  company  will  be  formed  into  line, 
ad  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  154. 

115.  At  the  third  command,  the  color  and  general 


234        SCHOOL  OF  THE  lATTALION — PART  II, 


guides  will  move  rapidly  to  their  places  in  line,  aa 
will  be  hereinafter  prescribed  No.  405. 

116.  If  the  battalion  be  retiring  by  the  right  or 
left  of  companies,  and  the  colonel  should  wish  to 
form  line  facing  the  enemy,  he  will  first  cause  the 
companies  to  face  about  while  marching,  and  im- 
mediately form  in  line  by  the  commands  and  means 
prescribed  Nos.  113  and  following. 

Article  Third. 
To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column. 

117.  This  movement  may  be  executed  by  company 

or  by  division,  on  the  right  or  left  subdivision,  or  on  | 
any  other  subdivision,  right  or  left  in  front.  '1 

118.  The  examples  in  this  school  will  suppose  the  ' 
presence  of  four  divisions,  with  directions  for  an  odd 
company ;  but  what  will  be  prescribed  for  four  will 
serve  equally  for  two,  three  or  five  divisions. 

119.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column  by 
division  in  rear  of  the  first,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Close  column^  by  division.  2.  On  the  first  division, 
right  in  f  ront.  3.  Battalion,  right — Face.  4.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

120.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  chiefs  of  di- 
vision will  place  themselves  before  the  centres  of  their 
divisions;  the  chief  of  the  first  will  caution  it  to 
stand  fast;  the  chiefs  of  the  three  others  will  remind 
them  that  they  will  have  to  face  to  the  right,  and  the 
covering  sergeant  of  the  right  company  of  each  di- 
vision will  replace  his  captain  in  the  front  rank,  as 
soon  as  the  latter  steps  out. 

121.  At  the  third  command,  the  last  three  divisions 
will  face  to  the  right;  the  chief  of  each  division  will 
hasten  to  its  right,  and  cause  files  to  be  broken  to  the 
rear,  as  indicated  No.  89 ;  the  right  guide  will  break 
at  the  same  time,  and  place  himself  before  the  front 


1-3-4                                                   F.  '/'.  ' 

h  

t-i  ~? 

'if 

■ 

-^*a^>  ^                                     \  \ 

\  \ 

_____  ,  „  ^s,  SX   j: 

1         w;— ;>ci|jff^l 

(lose  (Wliami  hy  diy.-.-i:  i:  t  :i  Unyl    .a,\.-  '•titc-,  t!i.<:ii.  .l':'  cn^  4*^''hh'v7siim  144 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION — FART  II.  235 

rank  man  of  the  first  file,  to  conduct  him,  and  each 
chief  of  division  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of 
this  guide. 

122.  The  moment  these  divisions  face  to  the  right, 
the  junior  captain  in  each  will  place  himself  on  the 
left  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company, 
who  will  place  himself  in  the  front  rank.  This  rule 
is  general  for  all  the  ployments  by  division, 

123.  At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  add,  guide  left;  at  this,  its  left  guide  will 
place  himself  on  its  left,  as  soon  as  the  movement  of 
the  second  division  may  permit,  and  the  file  closers 
will  advance  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

124.  All  the  other  divisions,  each  conducted  by  its 
chief,  will  step  off  together,  to  take  their  places  in  the 
column;  the  second  will  gain,  in  wheeling  by  file  to 
the  rear,  the  space  of  six  paces,  which  ought  to  sepa- 
rate its  guide  from  the  guide  of  the  first  division,  and 
so  direct  its  march  as  to  enter  the  column  on  a  line 
parallel  to  this  division  ;  the  third  and  fouriii  divisions 
will  direct  themselves  diagonally  towards,  but  a  little 
in  rear  of,  the  points  at  which  they  ought,  respectively, 
to  enter  the  column ;  at  six  paces  from  the  left  flank 
of  the  column,  the  head  of  each  of  these  divisions 
will  incline  a  little  to  the  left,  in  order  to  enter  the 
column  as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second, 
taking  care  also  to  leave  the  distance  of  six  paces  be- 
tween its  guide  and  the  guide  of  the  preceding  division. 
At  the  moment  the  divisions  put  themselves  in  march 
to  enter  the  column,  the  file  closers  of  each  will  incline 
io  the  left,  so  as  to  bring  themselves  to  the  distance 
of  a  pace  from  the  rear  rank. 

125.  Each  chief  of  these  three  divisions  will  conduct 
his  division  till  he  shall  be  up  with  the  guide  of  the 
directing  one  ;  the  chief  will  then  himself  halt,  see  his 
division  file  past,  and  halt  it  the  instant  the  last  file 
sliall  have  passed,  commanding:  1.  Such  division ;  2. 
Halt  J  3.  Front  j  4.  i^e/lf— Deess. 


236        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  II. 


12G.  At  tiie  second  command,  the  division  will  halt; 
the  left  guide  will  place  himself  promptly  on  the  di- 
rection, six  paces  from  the  guide  which  precedes  him, 
in  order  that,  the  column  being  formed,  the  divisions 
may  be  separated  the  distance  of  four  paces. 

127.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  will  face 
t:)  the  front;  at  the  fourth,  it  will  be  aligned  by  its 
cJiief,  who  will  place  himself  two  paces  outside  of  his 
guide,  and  direct  the  alignment  so  that  his  division 
may  be  parallel  to  that  which  precedes — which  being 
done,  he  will  command,  Front,  and  place  himself  be- 
fore the  centre  of  his  division. 

128.  If  any  division,  after  the  command  front,  be 
not  at  its  proper  distance,  and  this  can  only  happen 
through  the  negligence  of  its  chief,  such  division  will 
remain  in  its  place,  in  order  that  the  fault  may  not 
be  propagated. 

129.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  execution  of 
the  movement,  and  cause  the  prescribed  principles  to 
be  observed. 

130.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placing  himself  in  suc- 
cession in  rear  of  the  left  guides,  will  assure  them  on 
the  direction  as  they  arrive,  and  then  move  to  his 
place  outside  of  the  left  flank  of  the  column,  six  paces 
from,  and  abreast  with,  the  first  division.  In  assuring 
the  guides  on  the  direction,  he  will  be  a  mere  observer, 
unless  one  or  more  should  fail  to  cover  exactly  the 
guide  or  guides  already  established.  This  rule  ia 
general. 

131.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  left  of  the  fourth  division,  and  afterwards 
take  his  position  outside  of  the  left  flank  of  the 
column,  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  this  di- 
vision. 

132.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  front  of  the  first  di- 
vision, the  colonel  will  give  the  same  commands,  sub- 
etituting  the  indication  left  for  that  of  right  in  front. 

ICS.  At  the  second  and  third  commands,  the  chiefs 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION        ART  II.  237 

of  division  and  the  junior  captains  will  conform  them- 
selves to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  120,  121,  122;  but 
the  chiefs  of  the  last  three  divisions,  instead  of  causing 
the  first  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  will  cause  them 
to  break  to  the  front. 

134.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  add  :  Guide  right, 

135.  The  three  other  divisions  will  step  off  together 
to  take  their  places  in  the  column  in  front  of  the  di- 
recting division;  each  will  direct  itself  as  prescribed, 
No.  124,  and  will  enter  in  such  manner  that,  when 
halted,  its  guide  may  find  himself  six  paces  from  the 
guide  of  the  division  next  previously  established  in 
the  column. 

186.  Each  chief  of  these  divisions  will  conduct  his 
division,  till  his  right  guide  shall  be  nearly  up  with 
the  guide  of  the  directing  one ;  he  will  then  halt  his 
division,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front ;  at  the 
instant  it  halts,  its  right  guide  will  face  to  the  rear, 
place  himself  six  paces  from  the  preceding  guide,  and 
cover  him  exactly — which  being  done,  the  chief  will 
align  his  division  by  the  right. 

137.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  in  front  of  the 
right  guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the  guides 
on  the  direction  as  they  successively  arrive,  and  then 
move  outside  of  the  right  flank  of  the  column,  to  a 
point  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with,  the  fourth 
division,  now  in  front. 

188.  The  major  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  181,  and  then  move  outside  of  the  right 
flank  of  the  column,  six  paces  from,  and  abreast  with, 
the  first  division,  now  in  the  rear. 

139.  The  movement  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides,  about — Face. 

140.  At  this,  the  guides,  who  are  faced  to  the  rear, 
will  face  to  the  front. 


238        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  II. 


141.  To  ploy  the  battalion  in  rear,  or  in  front  of  the 
fourth  division,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  the  fourth  division^ 
left  [ov  right)  in  front.  3.  Battalion.,  left — :Face.  4. 
March  {or  double  quick — March). 

142.  These  movements  will  be  executed  according 
to  the  principles  of  those  which  precede,  but  by  in- 
verse means  :  the  fourth  division  on  which  the  bat- 
talion ploys  will  stand  fast ;  the  instant  the  move- 
ment commences,  its  chief  will  command,  guide  right 
(or  left). 

143.  The  foregoing  examples  embrace  all  the  prin- 
ciples :  thus,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  ploy  the 
battalion  on  an  interior  division,  he  will  command : 

1.  Close  column  by  division.  2.  On  such  division,  right 
(or  left)  in  front.  3.  Battalion  inwards — Face.  4. 
March  {or  double  quick  March). 

144.  The  instant  the  movement  commences,  the 
chief  of  the  directing  division  will  command,  guide 
left  (or  right). 

145.  The  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in  battle, 
are  to  the  right  of  the  directing  division,  will  face  to 
the  left;  those  which  are  to  the  left,  will  face  to  the 
right. 

146.  If  the  right,  is  to  be  in  front,  the  right  divi- 
sions will  ploy  in  front  of  the  directing  division,  and 
the  left  in  its  rear ;  the  reverse,  if  the  left  is  to  be  in 
front.  And  in  all  the  foregoing  suppositions,  the 
division  or  divisions  contiguous  to  the  directing  one, 
in  wheeling  by  file  to  the  front  or  rear,  will  gain  the 
space  of  six  paces,  which  ought  to  separate  their 
guides  from  the  guide  of  the  directing  division. 

147.  In  all  the  ployments  on  an  interior  division, 
the  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  positions  of  the 
guides  in  front,  and  the  major  those  in  rear  of  the 
directing  division. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  II.  239 

148.  If  the  'battalion  be  in  marcli,  instead  of  at  a 
halt,  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  combining  the 
two  gaits  of  quick  and  double  quick  time,  and  always 
in  rear  of  one  of  the  flank  divisions. 

149.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  in 
rear  of  the  first  division,  the  colonel  will  command: 

1 .  Close  column  hy  division.  2.  On  the  first  division, 
3.  Battalion — by  the  right  flank.  4.  Double  quick 
— March. 

150.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division 
will  move  rapidly  before  the  centre  of  his  division 
and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right. 

151.  The  chief  of  the  first  division  will  caution  it 
to  C4)ntinue  to  march  to  the  front,  and  he  will  com- 
mand :  Quick  march. 

152.  At  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first, 
division  will  command :  Guide  left.  At  this,  the  left 
guide  will  move  to  the  left  flank  of  the  division  and 
direct  himself  on  the  point  indicated. 

153.  The  three  other  divisions  will  face  to  the  right 
and  move  off  in  double  quick  time,  breaking  to  the 
right  to  take  their  places  in  column ;  each  chief  of 
division  will  move  rapidly  to  the  right  of  his  division 
in  order  to  conduct  it.  The  files  will  be  careful  to 
preserve  their  distances,  and  to  march  with  a  uni- 
form and  decided  step.  The  color-bearer  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places  in  the  ranks. 

154.  The  second  division  will  immediately  enter 
the  column,  marching  parallel  to  the  first  division  ; 
its  chief  will  allow  it  to  file  past  him,  and,  when  tie 
last  file  is  abreast  of  him,  will  command:  1.  Secona 
division,  by  the  left  flank — March.  2.  Guide  left,  and 
place  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division. 

155.  At  the  command  march,  the  division  will  face 
to  the  left ;  at  the  second  command,  the  left  guide 
•will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  left  guide  of  the  first 
division ;  the  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the 

20 


240       SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

left.  When  the  second  division  has  closed  to  itg 
proper  distance,  its  chief  will  command :  Quick  time — 
March.  This  division  will  then  change  its  step  t<. 
quick  time. 

156.  The  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisionj 
will  execute  their  movements  according  to  the  sam« 
principles,  taking  care  to  gain  as  much  ground  at 
possible  towards  the  head  of  the  column. 

157.  If  the  battalion  had  been  previously  marching 
in  line  at  double  quick  time,  when  the  fourth  division 
shall  have  gained  its  distance,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand :  Double  quick — March. 

158.  In  this  movement,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will 
move  rapidly  to  the  side  of  the  leading  guide,  give 
him  a  point  of  direction,  and  then  follow  the  mt)ve- 
ments  of  the  first  division.  The  major  will  follow  the 
.movement  abreast  with  the  left  of  the  fourth  division- 

Eemarks  on  ploying  the  battalion  into  column. 

159.  The  battalion  may  be  ployed  into  column  at 
full,  or  half  distance,  on  the  same  principles,  and  by 
the  same  commands,  substituting  for  the  first  com- 
mand: Column  at  full  (or  half)  distance  by  division. 

160.  In  the  ployments  and  movements  in  column, 
when  the  subdivisions  execute  the  movements  suc- 
cessively, such  as — to  take  or  close  distances ;  to 
change  direction  by  the  flank  of  subdivisions,  each 
chief  of  subdivision  will  cause  his  men  to  support 
arms  after  having  aligned  it  and  commanded,  Front. 


PART  THIRD. 
Article  First. 
To  march  in  column  at  full  distance. 
161.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  put  the  column 
m  march,  he  will  indicate  to  the  leading  guide  two 
distinct  objects  in  front,  on  the  line  wAiich  the  guid© 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  241 

ought  to  follow.  This  guide  will  immediately  put 
his  shoulders  in  a  square  with  that  line,  take  the 
more  distant  object  as  the  point  of  direction,  and  the 
nearer  one  as  the  intermediate  point. 

162.  If  only  a  single  prominent  object  present 
itself  in  the  direction  the  guide  has  to  follow,  he  will 
face  to  it  as  before,  and  immediately  endeavor  to 
catch  on  the  ground  some  intermediate  point,  by 
which  to  give  steadiness  to  his  march  on  the  point 
of  direction. 

163.  There  being  no  prominent  object  to  serve  a3 
the  point  of  direction,  the  colonel  will  despatch  the 
lieutenant  colonel  or  adjutant  to  place  himself  forty 
paces  in  advance,  facing  the  column,  and  by  a  sign 
of  the  sword  establish  him  on  the  direction  he  may 
wish  to  give  to  the  leading  guide ;  that  officer  being 
thus  placed,  this  guide  will  take  him  as  the  point  of 
direction,  conforming  himself  to  what  is  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  87. 

164.  These  dispositions  being  made,  tha  colonel 
will  command  : 

1.  Column  forward.    2.  Guide  left  (or  right). 
8.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

165.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  subdivision,  the  column  will  put  itself 
in  march,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the 
school  of  the  company  No.  200  and  following. 

166.  The  leading  guide  may  always  maintain  him- 
Belf  correctly  on  the  direction  by  keeping  steadily  in 
view  the  two  points  indicated  to  him,  or  chosen  by 
himself ;  if  these  points  have  a  certain  elevation,  he 
may  be  assured  he  is  on  the  true  direction,  when  the 
nearer  masks  the  more  distant  point. 

167.  The  following  guides  will  preserve  with  exact- 
ness both  step  and  distance ;  each  will  march  in  the 
trace  of  the  guide  who  immediately  precedes  him,  with- 
out occupying  himself  with  the  general  direction. 


A2      SCHOOL  OF  THi:  BATTALION — PART  III. 

1G8.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  hold  himself,  habi- 
hially,  abreast  with  the  leading  guide,  to  see  that  he 
does  not  deviate  from  the  direction,  and  will  observe, 
also,  that  the  next  guide  marches  exactly  in  the  trace 
of  the  first. 

169.  The  major  will  generally  be  abreast  with  the 
last  subdivision ;  he  will  see  that  each  guide  marchec 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  one  immediately  preceding : 
if  either  deviate  from  the  direction,  the  major  will 
promptly  rectify  the  error,  and  prevent  its  being  pro- 
pagated ;  but  he  need  not  interfere,  in  this  way,  unless 
the  deviation  has  become  sensible,  or  material. 

170.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
frequently  cause  the  about  to  be  executed  while  march- 
ing ;  to  this  effect,  he  will  command  : 

1  Battalion^  right  about.    2.  March.    3.  Guide  right. 

171.  At  the  second  command,  the  companies  wilV 
face  to  the  right  about,  and  the  column  will  then  march 
forward  in  an  opposite  direction ;  the  chiefs  of  sub- 
division will  remain  behind  the  front  rank,  the  file 
closers  in  front  of  the  rear  rank,  and  the  guides  will 
place  themselves  in  the  same  rank.  The  lieutenant 
colonel  will  remain  abreast  of  the  first  division,  now 
in  rear;  the  major  will  give  a  point  of  direction  to 
the  leading  guide,  and  march  abreast  of  him. 

172.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  habitually  on  the 
directing  flank ;  he  will  look  to  the  step  and  to  the  dis- 
tances, and  see  that  all  the  principles  prescribed  for  the 
march  in  column,  school  of  the  company,  are  observed. 

173.  These  means,  which  the  practice  in  that  school 
ought  to  have  rendered  familiar,  will  give  sufficient 
exactness  to  the  direction  of  the  column,  and  also 
enable  it  to  form  forward  ov  faced  the  rear,  on  the  right, 
or  on  the  left,  into  line  of  battle,  and  to  close  in  mass. 

174.  But  when  a  column,  arriving  in  front,  or  in  rear 
of  the  line  of  battle,  or,  rather,  on  one  of  the  ex- 
tremities of  that  line,  has  to  prolong  itself  on  it,  in 


243 


PL  44. 


Tlie  column  arrivinfj  i.i 
front  of  the  line  of  battle, 
to  'prolony  it  on  this  line 
(Xo.  175). 

rig.2 


The  column  arriving  hehind 
the  line  of  hatile,  to  j^i'olong 
it  on  this  line  (No.  ISi). 


SCirOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  243 

ordci  to  form  to  the  left  or  io  the  right  into  line  of  bat- 
tle, then,  as  it  is  essential,  to  prevent  the  column  from 
cutting  the  line,  or  sensibly  deviating  from  it,  other 
means,  as  follows,  will  be  employed. 

The  column  arriving  in  front  of  the  line  of  battle,  to 
prolong  it  on  this  line. 

175.  If  the  column  right  in  front  arrive  in  front 
of  the  line  of  battle,  as  it  should  cross  it  and  find  it- 
self four  paces  beyond  it  after  having  changed  direc- 
tion, the  colonel  will  cause  to  be  placed,  in  advance, 
a  marker  on  the  line  to  indicate  the  point  at  which 
the  column  ought  to  cross  it,  and  another  marker  to 
indicate  the  point  where  the  first  subdivision  should 
commence  to  wheel ;  he  will  be  so  placed  that  when 
the  wheel  is  executed,  the  left  guide  will  find  himself 
four  paces  within  the  line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  the 
leading  subdivision,  when  the  head  of  the  column  shall 
have  arrived  near  the  line,  will  take  the  guide  to  the 
right,  and  this  guide  will  immediately  direct  himself 
on  the  second  marker.  On  arriving  abreast  of  him, 
this  subdivision  will  be  wheeled  to  the  left,  and  when 
the  wheel  is  completed,  the  guide  will  be  changed  again 
to  the  left ;  this  guide  will  then  march  parallel  to  the 
line  of  battle  by  the  means  to  be  hereinafter  indicated. 

176.  The  instant  the  first  subdivision  Y'heels,  the 
right  general  guide,  who,  by  a  cau.iiun  from  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel,  will  before  have  placed  himself  on  the 
line  of  battle  at  the  point  where  the  column  crossea 
it,  and  who  will  have  faced  to  the  two  points  of  direc- 
tion in  his  front,  indicated  by  the  colonel,  will  march 
forward  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  those  points. 

177.  The  color-bearer  will  place  himself  in  like 
manner  on  the  line  of  battle ;  and,  at  the  instant  the 
color  subdivision  wheels,  he  will  prolong  his  march 
on  that  line,  abreast  with  this  subdivision,  taking 
care  to  carry  the  color-lance  before  the  centre  of  his 
person,  and  to  maintain  himself  exactly  in  the  direc- 


244       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  III, 


tion  of  the  general  guide  who  precedes  him,  and  the 
point  of  direction  in  front  which  will  have  been  in- 
dicated to  him. 

178.  Finally,  the  left  general  guide  will  place  him- 
self in  the  same  manner  on  the  line  of  battle;  and, 
at  the  instant  the  last  subdivision  of  the  battalion 
wheels,  he  will  march  correctly  in  the  direction  of 
the  color-bearer,  and  the  other  general  guide. 

179.  The  guide  of  the  first  subdivision  will  march 
steadily  abreast  with  the  right  general  guide,  and 
about  four  paces  to  his  right ;  each  of  the  guides  of 
the  following  subdivisions  will  march  in  the  trace  of 
the  guide  who  immediately  precedes  him,  as  pre- 
scribed No.  167. 

180.  The  colonel,  placed  outside  of  the  general 
guides,  will  see  that  the  column  marches  nearly  paral- 
lel to,  and  about  four  paces  within,  these  guides. 

181.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  major  will  look  to 
the  direction  of  the  general  guides,  and,  to  this  end, 
place  themselves  sometimes  in  rear  of  the  color-bearer, 
or  the  left  general  guide. 

182.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  bat- 
talions, the  general  guides  of  each  will  successively 
place  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle  to  prolong  their 
march  on  this  line,  as  the  leading  subdivision,  that 
of  the  col^>r,  and  the  one  in  the  rear  of  their  battalion, 
shall  wheel  into  the  new  direction  ;  these  guides  will 
conform  themselves  respectively,  as  will  also  the  colo- 
nel, lieutenant  colonel,  and  major,  to  what  is  pre* 
Bcribed  above  for  those  of  the  leading  battalion. 

183.  In  the  case  of  several  battalions,  the  lieutenant 
colonel  of  each  will  maintain  steadily  the  guide  of  his 
leading  subdivision  about  four  paces  within  the  line 
of  general  guides,  even  should  the  last  subdivisions 
of  the  battalion  immediately  preceding  deviate  from 
the  parallelism,  in  order  that  tiie  false  direction  of 
one  battalion  may  not  influei  :5e  that  of  the  battalions 
which  follow. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  245 


The  column  arriving  behind  the  line  of  Datile,  to 
prolong  it  on  this  line. 

184.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  arrive  behind 
the  line  of  battle,  as  it  ought  to  find  itself  four  paces 
within  this  line,  after  having  changed  direction,  the 
colonel  will  cause  a  marker  to  be  placed  at  the  point 
where,  according  to  that  condition,  the  first  subdivi- 
sion ought  to  commence  wheeling.  Another  marker 
will  be  established  on  the  line  of  battle,  to  indicate 
the  point  at  which  the  general  guides  ought,  in  suc- 
cession, to  begin  to  prolong  themselves  on  that  line ; 
he  will  be  so  placed  that  each  subdivision,  having 
finislied  its  wheel,  may  find  itself  nearly  in  a  line 
with  this  marker. 

185.  At  the  instant  the  first  subdivision,  after 
having  wheeled  to  the  right,  begins  to  prolong  itself, 
parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle,  the  leading  general 
guide,  placed  in  advance  on  that  line,  will  direct 
himself  on  the  two  points  taken  in  his  front ;  the 
color-bearer  and  the  other  general  guide  will  suc- 
cessively place  themselves  on  the  same  line  the 
instant  that  their  respective  subdivisions  shall  have 
finished  their  wheel. 

186.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  batta- 
lions, the  general  guides  of  the  following  battalions 
will  successively  execute  what  has  been  just  pre- 
scribed for  those  of  the  leading  battalion,  and  the 
whole  will  conform  themselves,  as  well  as  the  guides 
of  subdivisions,  and  the  field  ofiicers  of  the  several 
battalions,  to  what  is  indicated,  above,  for  a  column 
arriving  in  front  of  the  line  of  battle. 

187.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  arriving  in  front 
or  in  rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  these  movements  will 
be  executed  on  the  same  p  inciples,  and  by  inverse 
means. 


246       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

The  column  arriving  on  the  right  or  the  left  of  the 
line  of  battle,  to  prolong  it  on  this  line. 

188.  If  the  column,  instead  of  arriving  in  front 
or  in  rear  of  the  line  of  battle,  arrive  on  its  right  or 
left,  and  if  it  have  to  prolong  itself  on  that  line,  in 
order  afterwards  to  form  to  the  left  or  right  into  line 
of  battle,  the  colonel  will  bring  the  color  and  general 
guides  on  the  flank  of  the  column  by  the  command 
color  and  general  guides  on  the  line :  and  these  guide? 
will  prolong  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed  above. 

Manner  of  prolonging  a  line  of  battle  by  markers. 

189.  When  a  column  prolongs  itself  on  the  line  of 
battle,  it  being  all-important  that  the  general  guides 
march  correctly  on  that  line,  it  becomes  necessary 
that  colonels,  lieutenant  colonels,  and  majors,  whose 
duty  it  is  to  maintain  the  true  direction,  should  be 
able  to  see,  as  far  as  practicable,  the  two  objects,  on 
which  the  march  of  the  general  guides  ought  to  be 
directed;  consequently,  when  no  prominent  objectsr 
present  themselves  in  the  desired  direction,  the  chief 
of  the  column  will  supply  the  want  of  them  in  ad- 
vance by  aids-de-camp,  or  other  mounted  officers, 
and  in  such  number  as  may  be  necessary. 

190.  Three  such  officers  may  prolong  a  line  as  far 
as  may  be  desired  in  the  following  manner:  they 
will  place  themselves  in  advance  on  the  line  of  battle, 
the  first  at  the  point  where  the  head  of  the  column 
ought  to  enter;  the  second,  three  or  four  hundred 
paces  behind  the  first,  and  the  third,  a  like  distance 
behind  the  second.  The  first  of  these  officers  will 
remain  in  position  till  the  leading  general  guide  shall 
have  entered  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  then,  at  a 
gallop,  place  himself  at  a  convenient  distance  behind 
the  third.  The  second  will  do  the  like  in  respect  to 
the  first,  when  the  \  ead  of  the  column  shall  be  near 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  247 

him,  and  so  on  in  continuation.  These  officers,  with- 
out dismounting,  will  face  to  the  column,  and  cover 
each  other  accurately  in  file.  It  will  be  on  them 
that  the  general  guides  will  steadily  direct  their 
march,  and  it  will  be  so  much  the  more  easy  for  the 
latter  to  maintain  themselves  on  the  direction,  as 
they  will  always  be  able  to  see  the  mounted  officers 
over  the  heads  of  the  preceding  guides :  thus  the  de- 
viation from  the  direction,  by  one  or  more  general 
guides,  need  not  mislead  those  who  follow. 

191.  A  single  mounted  oAccr  may  suffice  to  assure 
the  direction  of  a  column,  when  the  point  of  direction 
towards  which  it  marches  is  very  distinct.  In  this 
case,  that  officer  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of 
battle  within  that  point,  and  beyond  the  one  at 
which  the  head  of  the  column  will  halt,  and  remain 
in  position  till  the  column  halts ;  serving  thus  as  the 
intermediate  point  for  giving  steadiness  to  the  march 
of  the  general  guides. 

192.  For  a  column  of  one  or  two  battalions,  mark- 
ers on  foot  will  suffice  to  indicate  the  line  to  b<5  fol- 
lowed by  the  general  guides. 

Remarks  on  the  march  in  column. 

193.  Although  the  uncadenced  step  be  that  of 
columns  in  route  marches,  and  also  that  which  ought 
to  be  habitually  emploj^ed  in  the  Evolutions  of  the 
Line^  because  it  leaves  the  men  more  at  ease,  and, 
conseqaently,  is  better  adapted  to  movements  on  a 
large  scale  and  to  difficult  grounds,  nevertheless,  as 
it  is  of  paramount  importance  to  confirm  soldiers  in 
the  measure  and  the  movement  of  the  cadenced  pace, 
the  route  step  will  be  but  little  practised  in  the  exer- 
cises by  battalion,  except  in  going  to,  and  returning 
from,  tlie  ground  of  instruction,  and  for  teaching  the 
mechanism  and  movements  of  columns  in  route. 

194.  It  is  highly  essential  to  the  regularity  of  the 
march  in  column  vhat  each  guide  follow  exactly  in 


248       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 


the  trace  of  the  one  immediately  preceding,  without 
occupying  his  attention  with  the  general  direction  of 
the  guides.  If  this  principle  be  steadily  observed, 
the  guides  will  find  themselves  aligned,  provided  that 
the  leading  one  march'exactly  in  the  direction  indi- 
cated to  him ;  and  even  should  obstacles  in  his  way 
force  him  into  a  momentary  deviation,  the  direction 
of  the  column  would  not  necessarily  be  changed ; 
whereas,  if  the  following  guides  endeavor  to  conform 
themselves  at  once  to  all  the  movements  of  the  lead- 
ing one,  in  order  to  cover  him  in  file,  such  endeavors 
would  necessarily  cause  corresponding  fluctuations 
in  the  column,  from  right  to  left,  and  from  left  to 
right,  and  render  the  preservation  of  distances  ex- 
tremely difiicult. 

195.  As  a  consequence  of  the  principle,  that  each 
guide  shall  exactly  folloio  in  the  trace  of  the  one  who 
immediately  precedes,  if,  pending  the  marun  of  the 
column,  the  colonel  shall  give  a  new  point  of  direc- 
tion, too  near  to  the  first  to  require  a  formal  change 
of  direction,  the  leading  guide,  advancing  the  one 
or  other  shoulder,  will  immediately  direct  himself 
on  this  point ;  the  other  guides  will  only  conform 
themselves  to  this  movement  as  each  arrives  at  the 
point  at  which  the  first  had  executed  it.  Each  sub- 
division will  conform  itself  to  the  movement  of  its 
guide,  the  men  insensibly  lengthening  or  shortening 
the  step,  and  advancing  or  refusing  (throwing  back) 
the  shoulder  opposite  to  the  guide,  but  without  losing 
tlie  touch  of  the  elbow  towards  his  side. 

196.  The  column,  by  company,  being  in  march, 
the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  diminish  front  by  pla- 
toon, from  front  to  rear,  at  once,  and  to  increase 
front  by  platoon  in  like  manner,  which  movements 
will  be  commanded  and  executed  as  prescribed  in 
the  school  of  the  company  Nos.  282  and  273  and 
following,  changing  the  command  form  company  to 
form  companies.    So  may  he  increase  and  diminish. 


1 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  249 

or  diminish  and  increase,  front,  according  to  the 
same  principles  and  at  once,  by  company,  changing 
the  command  form  companies  to  form  divisions,  and 
the  command  break  into  platoons  to  break  into  com- 
panies. In  this  case,  the  companies  and  divisions 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  for  platoons  and  com- 
panies respectively. 

197.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  march  it  to  the  rear,  and  the  distance 
to  be  gained  be  so  inconsiderable  as  to  render  a 
countermarch  a  disproportionate  loss  of  time,  he  will 
cause  the  column  to  face  about,  and  then  put  it 
in  march  by  the  commands  prescribed  No.  164 ;  the 
chiefs  of  the  subdivisions  will  remain  behind  the 
front  rank,  the  file  closers  before  the  rear  rank,  and  the 
guides  will  step  into  the  rear  rank,  now  in  front.  In  a 
column,  by  division,  the  junior  captains,  in  the  intervals 
between  companies,  will  replace  their  covering  ser- 
geants in  the  rear  rank,  and  these  sergeants  will  step 
into  the  line  of  file  closers  in  front  of  their  intervals. 

Article  Second. 
Column  in  route. 

198.  A  column  in  route,  like  a  column  in  man- 
oeuvre, ought  never  to  have  a  depth  greater  than 
about  the  front  it  had  occupied  in  the  line  of  battle, 
less  the  front  of  a  subdivision. 

199.  The  observance  of  this  principle  requires  no 
particular  rule  for  a  column  in  manoeuvre  ;  but,  as 
a  column  in  route  may  have  hourly  to  pass  narrow 
ways,  bridges,  or  other  defiles,  rendering  it  necessary 
to  diminish  the  front  of  subdivisions,  it  becomes  im- 
portant to  give  rules  and  means  by  which  the  column 
may,  for  any  length  of  march,  preserve  the  ease  of 
the  route  step  without  elongation  from  front  to  rear. 

200.  A  column  in  route  will  be  habitually  formed 
.by  company. 


250       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

201.  When  a  column  in  route  shall  arrive  at  a 
pass  too  narrow  to  receive  the  front  of  a  company, 
the  column  will  diminish  front  by  platoon  before 
entering.  This  movement  will  be  executed  suc- 
cessively, or  by  all  the  companies  at  once. 

202.  If,  however,  the  defile  be  very  short,  and  it 
may  be  passed  by  the  diminution  of  a  .few  files,  it 
will  be  preferable  to  break  to  the  rear  the 'limited 
number  of  files. 

203.  The  column  being  by  platoon,  and  the  want 
of  space  rendering  a  further  diminution  of  front 
necessary,  it  will  be  diminished  by  section,  if  the 
platoons  be  of  twelve  or  more  files. 

204.  The  column  being  by  section,  will  continue 
to  march  by  that  front  as  long  as  the  defile  may 
permit. 

205.  If  the  platoons  have  less  than  twelve  files, 
one  or  two  files  will  be  broken  to  the  rear,  accord- 
ing to  the  narrowing  of  the  defile,  and  the  route  step 
continued  as  long  as  six  files  can  march  abreast. 

206.  What  has  just  been  explained  for  breaking 
files  to  the  rear  in  a  column  by  platoon,  is  equally 
applicable  to  a  column  by  section. 

2(;7.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  permit  six 
men  to  march  abreast,  the  subdivisions  will  be 
marched  successively  by  the  flank,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed  Nos.  314  and  315,  school  of  the 
company. 

208.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  will 
be  formed  into  column,  by  section,  by  platoon,  or  by 
company,  as  soon  as  the  breadth  of  the  way  may 
permit ;  the  several  movements  which  these  forma- 
tions include  will  be  executed  by  the  commands  of 
the  captains,  as  their  companies  successively  clear 
^the  defile,  observing  the  following  rules. 

209.  As  soon  as  the  way  is  sufficiently  broad 
to  contain  six  men  abreast,  the  captain  will  codi- 
mand : 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  251 


1.  By  section  (or  by  platoon)  into  line.    2.  Mabch. 

210.  At  the  command  march,  the  subdivisions  in- 
dicated will  form  themselves  into  line ;  the  fileb 
which  have  not  been  able  to  enter  will  follow  (bj 
the  flank)  the  last  four  files  of  their  subdivision 
which  have  entered  into  line.  ' 

211.  The  column  marching  in  this  order,  the  files 
in  rear  will  be  caused  to  enter  into  line  as  the  in- 
creased breadth  of  the  way  may  permit. 

212.  The  column  marching  by  section  or  by  pla- 
toon, platoons  or  companies  will  be  formed  as  soon 
as  the  breadth  of  the  way  may  permit.  * 

213.  The  leading  subdivision  will  follow  the  wind- 
ings of  the  pass  or  defile  ;  the  following  subdivisions 
will  not  occupy  themselves  with  the  direction,  but 
all,  in  succession,  pass  over  the  trace  of  the  subdi- 
visions which  precede  them  respectively.  The  men 
will  not  seek  to  avoid  the  bad  parts  of  the  way,  but 
pass,  as  far  as  practicable,  each  in  the  direction  of 
his  file. 

214.  Changes  of  direction  will  always  be  made 
without  command;  if  the  change  be  important,  a 
caution  merely  from  the  respective  chiefs  to  their 
subdivisions  will  suffice,  and  the  rear  rank,  as  well 
as  the  files  broken  to  the  rear,  will  execute  success- 
ively the  movement  where  the  front  rank  had  exe- 
cuted it. 

215.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of 
the  battalion  ;  he  will  regulate  the  step  of  the  leading 
subdivision,  and  indicate  to  its  chief  the  instant  for 
executing  the  various  movements  which  the  nature 
of  the  route  may  render  necessary. 

216.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  bat- 
talions, each  will  conform  itself,  in  its  turn,  to  what 
fihall  have  been  commanded  for  the  leading  battalion, 
observing  to  execute  each  movement  at  the  sama 
place,  and  in  the  same  manner. 


252       SCHOOL  01   THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 


217.  Finally,  to  render  the  meclianism  of  all  those 
movements  familiar  to  the  troops,  and  to  habituate 
them  to  march  in  the  route  step  without  elongating 
the  column,  commanders  will  generally  cause  their 
battalions  to  march  in  tliis  step,  going  to,  and  re- 
turning from,  fields  of  exercise.  Each  will  occa- 
sibnally  conduct  his  battalion  through  narrow  passes, 
in  order  to  make  it  perceive  the  utility  of  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  above ;  and  he  will  several  times, 
in  every  course  of  instruction,  march  it  in  the  route 
step,  and  cause  to  be  executed,  sometimes  at  once, 
and  sometimes  successively,  the  divers  movements 
which  have  just  been  indicated. 

General  remarks  on  the  column  in  route. 

218.  The  lesson  relative  to  the  column  in  route  is, 
by  its  frequent  application,  one  of  the  most  important 
that  can  be  given  to  troops.  If  it  be  not  well  taught 
and  established  on  right  principles,  it  will  happen 
that  the  rear  of  the  column  in  route  will  be  obliged 
to  run,  to  regain  distances,  or  that  the  front  will  be 
forced  to  halt  till  the  rear  shall  have  accomplished 
that  object;  thus  rendering  the  march  greatly  slower, 
or  greatly  more  fatiguing,  generally  both,  tlian  if  it 
were  executed  according  to  rule. 

219.  The  ordinary  progress  of  a  column  in  route 
ought  to  be,  on  good  roads  or  good  grounds,  at  the 
rate  of  one  hundred  and  ten  paces  in  a  minute.  Thia 
rate  may  be  easily  maintained  by  columns  of  almost 
any  depth;  but  over  bad  roads,  ploughed  fields, 
loose  sands,  or  mountainous  districts,  the  progress 
cannot  be  so  great,  and  must  therefore  be  regulated 
according  to  circumstances. 

220.  The  most  certain  means  of  marching  well  in 
route,  is  to  preserve  always  a  regular  and  equal 
movement,  and,  if  obstacles  oblige  one  or  more  sub- 
divisions to  slacken  or  to  shorten  the  step,  to  cause 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  253 

the  primitive  rate  of  march  to  be  resumed  the  mo- 
ment the  difficulties  are  passed. 

221.  A  subdivision  ought  never  to  take  more  than 
the  prescribed  distance  from  the  subdivision  imme- 
diately preceding ;  but  it  is  sometimes  necessary  to 
lessen  that  distance. 

222.  Thus :  the  head  of  the  column  encounters  an 
obstacle  which  obliges  it  to  relax  its  march ;  all  the 
following  subdivisions  will  preserve  the  habitual 
step,  and  close  up  in  mass,  if  necessary,  on  the  sub- 
division nearest  to  the  obstacle.  Distances  will  after- 
wards naturally  be  recovered  as  each  subdivision 
shall  successively  have  passed  the  obstacle.  Never- 
theless, if  the  difficulty  be  too  great  to  be  overcome 
by  one  subdivision,  while  the  next  is  closing  up,  so 
that  distances  cannot  afterwards  be  recovered  with- 
out running,  the  chief  of  the  column  will  halt  the 
leading  subdivision  beyond  the  obstacle,  at  a  dis- 
tance sufficient  to  contain  the  whole  column  in  mass. 
He  will  then  put  the  column  in  march,  the  subdivi- 
sions taking  distances  by  the  head,  observing  to 
commence  the  movement  in  time,  so  that  the  last 
subdivision  may  not  be  obliged  to  halt,  after  having 
cleared  the  obstacle. 

223.  When  the  chief  of  a  column  'shall  wish  to 
change  the  rate  of  march,  he  will  cause  the  leading 
battalion  to  quicken  or  to  relax  the  step  insensibly, 
and  send  orders  to  the  other  battalions  each  to  regu- 
late itself  by  that  which  precedes  it. 

224.  The  column  being  composed  of  several  bat- 
talions, the  general-in-chief  will  always  leave  an  aid- 
de-camp  with  its  rear  to  bring  him  prompt  informa- 
tion if  it  find  a  difficulty  in  following. 

225.  Subdivisions  ought  always  to  step  out  well 
in  obliquing,  both  in  breaking  and  forming  com- 
panies or  platoons.  When  either  is  done  in  suc- 
cession, it  is  highly  important  that  no  subdivision 
Blacken  or  shorten  the  step  whilst  that  which  pre- 


254       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

cedes  it  is  engaged  in  the  movement.  The  observance 
of  this  principle  can  alone  prevent  an  elongation  of 
the  column. 

226.  If  the  battalion,  marching  by  the  flank,  en- 
counter a  pass  so  narrow  as  to  oblige  it  to  defile  with 
a  front  of  two  men,  the  colonel  will  order  support 
arms,  take  the  cadenced  step,  and  undouble  the  files, 
which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of 
the  company,  No.  326;  the  files  will  double  again 
as  soon  as  the  breadth  of  the  way  will  permit. 

227.  If  the  defile  be  only  sufficient  to  receive  a 
front  of  one  man,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  men  to 
pass  one  at  a  time.  The  men  of  the  same  file  should 
follow  each  other  in  their  order  as  closely  as  possible, 
and  without  loss  of  time.  As  soon  as  the  defile  per- 
mits a  front  of  two  or  four  men,  the  battalion  will  be 
re-formed  into  two  or  four  ranks,  and  will  march  in 
this  order  until  there  be  space  to  form  platoons  or 
sections,  as  indicated  No.  209. 

228.  In  both  cases,  just  supposed,  the  head  of  the 
battalion,  after  having  passed  the  defile,  will  march 
till  sufficient  space  be  left  to  contain  the  whole  of  the 
subdivisions  in  mass ;  afterwards  it  will  be  put  in 
march  by  the  means  indicated  No.  222. 

229.  When  a  command  has  to  move  rapidly  over  a 
given  distance,  the  movements  prescribed  in  this 
article  will  be  executed  in  double  quick  time  ;  if  the 
distance  be  long,  the  chief  of  the  column  will  not 
allow  the  march  at  this  gait  to  be  continued  for  more 
than  fifteen  minutes ;  at  the  end  of  this  time,  he  will 
order  the  ordinary  route  step  to  be  marched  for  five 
minutes,  and  then  again  resume  the  double  quick. 
If  the  ground  be  uneven,  having  considerable  ascents 
and  descents,  he  will  reserve  the  double  quick  for 
those  parts  of  the  ground  most  favorable  to  this 
march. 

230.  A  column  marching  alternately  in  double 
quick  time  and  the  ordinary  route  step,  in  the  man- 


255 


PI  4(j, 


I 


I 


7V>  clmittjc  iu'ncti'oii.     Head  of  column  t<>  (he  rifjlt. 
(Xo.  232). 


BCHOOL  OJT  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  255 


ner  stated,  can  easily  accomplish  very  long  distance? 
in  a  very  sliort  space  of  time  ;  but  wiien  the  distance 
to  be  passed  over  be  not  greater  than  two  miles,  it 
ought  to  be  accomplished,  when  the  ground  is  favor 
able,  without  changing  the  rate  of  march. 

Article  Third. 
To  change  direction  in  column  at  full  distance. 

231.  The  column  being  in  march  in  the  cadenced 
step,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to 
change  direction,  he  Avill  go  to  the  point  at  which  the 
change  ought  to  be  commenced,  and  establish  a 
marker  there,  presenting  the  breast  to  the  flank  of 
the  column ;  this  marker,  no  matter  to  which  side 
the  change  of  direction  is  to  be  made,  will  be  posted 
on  the  opposite  side,  and  he  will  remain  in  position 
till  the  last  subdivision  of  tlie  battalion  shall  have 
passed.  The  leading  subdivision  being  within  a  few 
paces  of  the  marker,  the  colonel  will  command  : 

Head  of  column  to  the  left  (or  right). 

232.  At.  this,  the  chief  of  the  leading  subdivision 
will  immediately  take  the  guide  on  the  side  opposite 
the  change  of  direction,  if  not  already  there.  This 
guide  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  graze  the  breast 
of  the  marker;  arrived  at  this  point,  the  chief  will 
cause  his  subdivision  to  change  direction  by  the 
commands  and  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  company.  When  the  TTheel  is 
completed,  the  chief  of  this  subdivision  will  retake 
the  guide,  if  changed,  on  the  side  of  the  primitive 
direction. 

233.  The  chief  of  each  succeeding  subdivision,  as 
well  as  the  guides,  will  conform  to  what  has  just 
been  explained  for  the  leading  subdivision. 

234.  The  colonel  will  carefully  see  that  the  guide 
of  each  subdivision,  in  wheeling,  does  not  throw 


256       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

himself  without  or  within,  but  passes  over  all  the 
points  of  the  arc  of  the  circle,  which  he  ought  to 
describe. 

235.  As  often  as  no  distinct  object  presents  itselt 
in  the  new  direction,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  place 
himself  upon  it  in  advance,  at  the  distance  of  thirty 
or  forty  paces  from  the  marker,  and  be  assured  in 
this  direction  by  the  colonel;  the  leading  guide  will 
take,  the  moment  he  shall  have  changed  direction, 
two  points  on  the  ground  in  the  straight  line  which, 
drawn  from  himself,  would  pass  between  the  heels 
of  the  lieutenant  colonel,  taking,  afterwards,  new 
points  as  he  advances. 

236.  The  major  will  see  that  the  guides  direct 
themselves  on  the  marker  posted  at  the  point  of 
change,  so  as  to  graze  his  breast. 

237.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  several  bat- 
talions, the  lieutenant  colonel  of  the  second  will 
cause  the  marker  of  the  first  battalion  to  be  re- 
placed as  soon  as  the  last  subdivision  of  this  bat- 
talion shall  have  passed ;  this  disposition  will  be 
observed  by  battalion  after  battalion,  to  the  rear  of 
the  column. 

Eemarks. 

238.  It  has  been  demonstrated,  school  of  the  com- 
pany, how  important  it  is,  first,  that  each  subdivision 
execute  its  change  of  direction  precisely  at  the  point 
where  the  leading  one  had  changed,  and  that  it  arrive 
in  a  square  with  the  direction  ;  second,  that  the  wheel- 
ing point  ought,  always,  to  be  cleared  in  time,  in 
order  that  the  subdivision  engaged  in  the  wheel  may 
not  arrest  the  movement  of  the  following  one.  The 
deeper  the  column,  the  more  rigorously  ought  theso 
principles  to  be  observed ;  because,  a  fault  that 
would  be  but  slight  in  a  column  of  a  single  battalion 
would  cause  much  embarrassment  in  one  of  great 
depth 


school  of  the  battalion — part  iii.  257 

Article  Fourth. 
To  lialt  tlie  column. 

239.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel 
Bhall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  command : 

1.  Column.    2.  Halt. 

240.  At  the  second  command,  briskly  repeated  bj 
the  captains,  the  column  will  halt ;  no  guide  will 
stir,  though  he  may  have  lost  his  distance,  or  be  out 
of  the  direction  of  ihe  preceding  guides. 

241.  The  column  being  in  march,  in  double  quick 
time,  will  be  halted  by  the  same  commands.  At 
the  command  half,  the  nien  will  halt  in  their  places, 
and  will  themselves  rectify  their  positions  in  the 
ranks. 

242.  The  column  being  halted,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  form  it  into  line  of  battle,  he  will  move 
a  little  in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  and  fac<-  to 
him ;  this  guide  and  the  following  one  will  fix  theii? 
eyes  on  the  colonel,  in  order  promptly  to  conform 
themselves  to  his  directions. 

243.  If  the  colonel  judge  it  not  necessary  to  give 
a  general  direction  to  the  guides,  he  will  limit  him- 
self to  rectifying  the  position  of  such  as  may  bo 
without,  or  witliin  the  direction,  by  the  command, 
guide  of  (such)  company,  or  guides  of  (such)  companiesy 
to  the  right  (or  to  the  left) ;  at  this  command,  the 
guides  designated  will  place  themselves  on  the  direc- 
tion ;  the  others  will  stand  fast. 

244.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  colonel  judge  it  ne- 
cessary to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of 
the  column,  he  will  place  the  first  two  on  the  direc- 
tion he  shall  have  chosen,  and  command : 

Guides^  cover, 

245.  At  this,  the  following  guides  will  promptly 
place  themselves  on  the  direction  covering  the  frst 


258       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PA.RT  III. 


two  in  file,  and  each  precisely  at  a  distance  equal  it 
the  front  of  his  company,  from  the  guide  imme- 
diately preceding ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure 
them  in  the  direction,  and  the  colonel  will  command : 

Left  (or  ri^ht) — Dress. 

246.  At  this  command,  each  company  will  incline 
to  the  right  or  left,  and  dress  forward  or  backward, 
so  as  to  bring  the  designated  flank  to  rest  on  its 
guide ;  each  captain  will  place  himself  two  paces 
outside  of  his  guide,  promptly  align  his  company 
parallelly  with  that  which  precedes,  then  command, 
Front,  and  return  to  his  place  in  column. 

247.  Finally,  if  the  general  guides  march  on  the 
flank  of  the  column,  the  colonel,  having  halted  it, 
will  place  himself  in  rear  of  the  color-bearer,  to 
ascertain  whether  the  leading  general  guide  and  the 
color-bearer  be  exactly  on  the  direction  of  the  two 
points  in  advance,  and  establish  them  on  that  direc- 
tion if  they  be  not  already  on  it;  the  major  will  do 
the  like,  in  respect  to  the  general  guide  in  the  rear ; 
which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Guides — On  the  line. 

248.  At  this  command,  the  guide  of  each  company 
of  the  directing  flank  will  step  promptly  into  the 
direction  of  the  general  guides,  and  face  to  the  front. 
The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  in  front  of,  and  facing 
to,  the  leading  general  guide,  and  the  major,  placed 
in  rear  of  the  rearmost  one,  will  promptly  align  the 
company  guides. 

249.  The  colonel,  having  verified  the  direction  ol 
the  guides,  will  command: 

Left  (or  ri(/ht)  —Dress. 


250.  This  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  246. 


I 


\ 


259 


ri.  47. 


iSlilliiiiW 

."iiliiiilip 
RMiilPliiP 
RIiii;itiiiiiiiiiiiiiii!ii?IiP 

ii;!li(ltli|i|l|ll!l!MP 

'iiliiiiiifliiiiiiiiiil^ 


To  chfue  the  cohtmn  to  lutJf  d'Hia)\ee.  on  the  eighth 
comiHxny  (No.  252). 


^  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  259 

Remarks. 

251.  The  means  indicated  No.  244  and  following, 
for  giving  a  general  direction  to  the  guides  of  a 
column,  at  full  distance,  will  apply  only  to  a  column 
composed  of  two  or,  at  most,  three  battalions.  If 
the  number  be  more  numerous,  its  chief  will  cause 
the  colors  and  general  guides  of  all  the  battalions  to 
step  out  and  place  themselves  on  the  direction  which 
he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  column,  as  is  explained  in 
the  evolutions  of  the  line. 

Article  Fifth. 
To  close  the  column  to  half  distance,  or  in  mass. 

252.  A  column  by  company  being  at  full  distance 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance,  on  the  lead- 
ing company,  he  will  command: 

1.   To  half  distance,  close  column,     2.  March  (or 
double  qiiich — March). 

253.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast. 

254.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  re- 
peated by  all  the  captains,  except  the  captain  of  the 
leading  company,  this  company  will  stand  fast,  and 
its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left ;  the  file  closers  will 
close  one  pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

255.  All  the  other  companies  will  continue  to 
march,  and  as  each  in  succession  arrives  at  platoon 
distance  from  the  one  which  precedes,  its  captain  will 
halt  it. 

256.  At  the  instant  that  each  company  halts,  its 
guide  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 
guides  who  precede,  and  the  captain  will  align  the 
company  by  the  left ;  the  file  closers  will  close  one 
pace  upon  the  rear  rank. 

257.  No  particular  attention  need  be  given  to  the 


260       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

general  direction  of  the  guides  before  they  respect* 
ively  halt:  it  will  suffice  if  -^^i  follow  in  the  trace 
of  the  one  who  precedes  him. 

258.  The  colonel,  on  the  side  of  the  guides,  will 
superintend  the  execution  of  the  movement,  observing 
ihfit  the  captains  halt  their  companies  exactly  at 
[ti;i!oon  distance  the  one  from  the  other. 

259.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  a  few  paces  in  front, 
will  face  to  the  leading  guide  and  assure  the  positions 
of  the  following  guides  as  they  successively  place 
themselves  on  the  direction. 

260.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  last  guide. 

261.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
cause  it  to  close  by  the  same  commands. 

262.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  at  the  first  command,  the  ca,ptain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  command  quick  time;  the  chiefs  of 
the  other  companies  will  caution  them  to  continue 
their  march. 

263.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  company 
will  march  in  quick,  and  the  other  companies  in 
double  quick  time ;  and  as  each  arrives  at  platoon 
distance  from  the  preceding  one,  its  chief  will  cause 
it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

264.  When  the  rearmost  company  shall  have  gained 
its  distance,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Double  quick — March. 

265.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  tho 
column  and  to  cause  it  to  close  to  half  distance  at 
the  same  time,  he  will  notify  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  of  his  intention,  who  at  the  command 
march  will  halt  his  company  and  align  it  by  the  left. 

266.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time, 
and  the  colonel  should  not  give  the  command  double 
quick,  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  will  halt 
his  company  at  the  command  march,  and  align  it  by 


55CnOOL  Ci'  THE  BATTALION- — PART  III.  2G1 


the  left.  In  tlie  case,  where  the  colonel  adds  the 
command  double  quick,  the  captains  of  companies 
will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  262,  and  the 
naovemeut  will  be  executed  as  indicated  No.  263. 

To  close  the  column  on  the  eighth,  or  rearmost, 
company. 

267.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if,  instead  of 
causing  it  to  close  to  half  distance  on  the  first  com- 
pany, the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  close  ofc 
the  eighth,  he  will  command : 

1.  On  the  eighth  company,  to  half  distance  close  column, 
2.  Battalion  about — Face.  3.  Column  forioard.  4. 
Guide  right.    5.  March  (or  double  quick — March) 

268.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
except  the  eighth,  will  face  about,  and  their  guides 
will  remain  in  the  front  rank,  now  the  rear. 

269.  At  the  fourth  command,  all  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  two  paces  outside  of  their  compa- 
nies on  the  directing  flank. 

270.  At  the  command  marchy  the  eighth  company 
will  stand  fast,  and  its  captain  will  align  it  by  the 
left :  the  other  companies  will  put  themselves  in 
march,  and,  as  each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from 
the  one  established  before  it,  its  captain  will  halt  it 
and  face  it  to  the  front.  At  the  moment  that  each 
company  halts,  the  left  guide,  remaining  faced  to  the 
rear,  will  place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction  of 
the  guides  already  established.  Immediately  after, 
the  captain  will  align  his  company  by  the  left,  and 
the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  on  the  rear  rank. 
If  this  movement  be  executed  in  double  quick  time, 
each  captain,  in  turn,  will  halt,  and  command;  Such 
company,  right  about — Halt.  At  this  command,  the 
company  designated  will  face  to  the  right  about  and 
halt. 

271.  All  the  companies  being  aligned,  the  colonel 


262       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

will  cause  the  guides,  who  stand  faced  to  the  rear,  to 
face  about. 

272.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placing  himself  behind 
the  rearmost  guide,  will  assure  successively  the  posi- 
tions of  the  other  guides,  as  prescribed  No.  259  ; 
the  major  will  remain  abreast  with  the  rearmost 
company. 

273.  The  column  being  in  march,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  close  it  on  the  eighth  company,  he  will 
command: 

1.  On  the  eighth,  company,  to  half  instance ,  close  column. 
2.  Battalion  right  about.  3.  March  (or  doubh 
quick — March).    4.  Guide  right. 

274.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the 
eighth  company  will  caution  his  company  that  it  will 
remain  faced  to  the  front ;  the  captains  of  the  other 
companies  will  caution  their  companies  that  they  will 
have  to  face  about. 

275.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the 
eighth  company  will  halt  his  company  and  align  it 
by  the  left;  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon 
the  rear  rank. 

276.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies,  at  the 
same  command,  will  place  themselves  on  the  flank  of 
the  column ;  the  subdivisions  will  face  about,  and,  as 
each  arrives  at  platoon  distance  from  the  company 
immediately  preceding  it,  its  chief  will  face  it  to  the 
front  and  halt  it  as  prescribed  No.  270.  The  instant 
each  company  halts,  the  guide  on  the  directing  flank, 
remaining  faced  to  the  rear,  will  quickly  place  him- 
self on  the  direction  of  the  guides  already  established. 
After  which,  the  captain  will  align  the  company  by 
the  left,  and  the  file  closers  will  close  one  pace  upon 
the  rear  rank. 

277.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  follow  the  move- 
ment abreast  of  the  first  company.  The  major  will 
place  himself  a  few  paces  in  rear  of  the  guide  of  the 


33 


2G3 


PI.  48. 


[\  P 


Jiavtjc  iJtrcciion  in  column  at  ItaJf  di'^tcoic.e.  ("Xo.  2S7). 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  263 

Bigfi-th  company,  and  will  assure  successively  the 
position  of  the  other  guides. 

Eemarks. 

278.  A  column  by  division  at  full  distance  will 
close  to  half  distance  by  the  same  means  and  the 
same  commands. 

279.  A  column,  by  company,  or  by  division,  being 
at  full  or  half  distance,  the  colonel  will  ^^cause  it  to 
close  in  mass  by  the  same  means  and  commands,  sub- 
stituting the  indication,  column,  close  in  mass,  for  that 
of  to  half  distance,  close  column.  Each  chief  of  sub- 
division will  conform  himself  to  all  that  has  just 
been  prescribed,  except  that  he  will  not  halt  his 
subdivision  till  its  guide  shall  be  at  a  distance  of  six 
paces  from  the  guide  of  the  subdivision  next  pre- 
ceding. 

280.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  these  various 
movements  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

Article  Sixth. 

To  ^march  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed 
in  mass. 

281.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being 
at  a  halt,  the  colonel  will  put  it  in  march  by.  the 
commands  prescribed  for  a  column  at  full  dis- 
tance. 

282.  The  means  of  direction  will  also  be  the  same 
for  a  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  as  for  a 
column  at  full  distance,  except  that  the  general 
guides  will  not  step  out. 

283.  A  column  at  half  distance  or  in  mass,  being 
in  march,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he 
will  give  the  commands  prescribed  for  halting  a 
column  at  full  distance,  and  if,  afterwards,  he  judge 
it  necessary  to  give  a  general  direction  to  the  guides 


264       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION^ — PART  III, 

of  the  column,  he  will  employ,  to  this  end,  the  com- 
mands and  means  indicated  No.  244  and  following. 

284.  In  columns  at  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass, 
chiefs  of  subdivision  will  repeat  the  commands  march 
and  halt,  as  in  columns  at  full  distance. 

285.  The  colonel  will  often  march  the  column  to 
the  rear,  by  the  means  and  the  commands  prescribed 
Nos.  170  and  171. 

286.  A  column  by  division  or  company,  whether 
at  full  or  half  distance  or  closed  in  mass,  at  a  halt 
or  marching,  can  be  faced  to  the  right  or  left,  and 
marched  off  in  the  new  direction. 

Article  Seyenth. 
To  change  direction  in  column  at  half  distance. 

287.  A  column  at  half  distance,  being  in  march, 
will  change  direction  by  the  same  commands  and 
according  to  the  same  principles  as  a  column  at  full 
distance ;  but,  as  the  distance  between  the  sub- 
divisions is  less,  the  pivot-man  in  each  subdivision 
will  take  steps  of  fourteen  inches  instead  of  nine, 
and  of  seventeen  inches  instead  of  eleven,  according 
to  the  gait,  in  order  to  clear,  in  time,  the  wheeling 
point,  and  the  marching  flank  will  describe  the  arc 
of  a  larger  circle,  the  better  to  facilitate  the  move- 
ment. 

Article  Eighth. 
To  change  direction  in  column  closed  in  mass. 

Ist.  To  change  direction  in  marching, 

288.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  being 
in  march,  will  change  direction  by  the  front  of  sub- 
divisions. 

289.  Whether  the  change  be  made  to  the  reverse, 
or  to  the  pivot  flank,  it  will  always  be  executed  on 
the  principle  of  wheeling  in  marching ;  to  this  end, 


2G4 


PL  49. 


To  change  direction  in  column  doffed  in  mass  while 
marching  (No.  288). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  III.  265 

the  colonel  will  first  cause  the  battalion  to  take  the 
guide  on  the  flank  opposite  to  the  intended  change  of 
direction,  if  it  be  not  already  on  that  flank. 

290.  A  column  by  division,  closed  in  mass,  right  in 
front,  having  to  change  direction  to  the  right,  the 
colonel,  after  having  caused  a  marker  to  be  placed  at 
the  point  where  the  change  ought  to  commence,  will 
command: 

1.  Battalion f  right  wheel.    2.  Mauch. 

291.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  division 
will  wheel  as  if  it  were  part  of  a  column  at  half  dis- 
tance. 

292.  The  instant  that  this  division  commences  the 
wheel,  all  the  others  will,  at  once,  conform  them- 
selves to  its  movement;  to  this  end  the  left  guide  of 
each,  advancing  slightly  the  left  shoulder  and  length- 
ening a  little  the  step,  will  incline  to  the  left,  and  Vyill 
observe,  at  the  same  time,  to  gain  so  much  ground  to 
the  front  that  there  may  constantly  be  an  interval  of 
four  paces  between  his  division  and  that  which  pre- 
cedes it ;  and  as  soon  as  he  shall  cover  the  preceding 
guide,  he  will  cease  to  incline,  and  then  march  exactly 
in  his  trace. 

293.  Each  division  will  conform  itself  to  the  move- 
ment of  its  guide ;  the  men  will  feel  ligLfly  the  elbow 
towards  him  and  advance  a  little  the  left  shoulder  the 
instant  the  movement  commences ;  each  file,  in  in- 
clining, will  gain  so  much  the  less  ground  to  the 
front,  as  the  file  shall  be  nearer  to  the  pivot,  and  the 
right  guide  will  gain  only  so  much  as  may  be  neces- 
sary to  maintain  between  his  own  and  the  preceding 
division  the  same  distance  which  separates  their 
marching  flanks. 

294.  Each  chief  of  division,  turning  to  it,  will 
regulate  its  march,  and  see  that  it  remains  constantly 
included  between  its  guides,  that  its  alignment  con* 


266     SCHOOL  or  the  battalion — part  hi. 


tinues  nearly  parallel  to  that  of  the  preceding  division, 
and  that  the  centre  bends  only  a  little  to  the  rear. 

295.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  movement, 
and  cause  the  pivot  of  the  leading  division  to  lengthen 
or  to  shorten  the  step,  conforming  to  the  principle 
established,  school  of  the  company,  No.  227 — if  either 
be  necessary  to  facilitate  the  movement  of  the  other 
divisions. 

296.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  near  the  left 
guide  of  the  leading  division,  will  regulate  his  march, 
and  take  care,  above  all,  that  he  does  not  throw  him- 
self within  the  arc  he  ought  to  describe. 

297.  The  major,  placed  in  the  rear  of  the  guides, 
will  see  that  the  last  three  conform  themselves,  each 
by  slight  degrees,  to  the  movement  of  the  guide  im- 
mediately preceding,  and  that  neither  inclines  too 
much  in  the  endeavor  to  cover  too  promptly  the  guide 
in  his  front ;  he  will  rectify  any  serious  fault  that 
may  be  committed  in  either  of  those  particulars. 

298.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  wheel  nearly  ended, 
will  command : 

1.  Forward.    2.  March. 

299.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  the  leading  division  completes  its 
wheel,  it  will  resume  the  direct  march ;  the  other 
divisions  will  conform  themselves  to  this  movement; 
and  if  any  guide  find  himself  not  covering  his  imme- 
diate leader,  he  will,  by  slight  degrees,  bring  himself 
on  the  trace  of  that  guide,  by  advancing  the  right 
ehoulder. 

300.  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  has  to  change 
direction  to  the  left,  the  colonel  will  first  cause  it  to 
take  the  guide  to  the  right,  and  then  command : 

1.  Battalion^  left  wheel.    2.  March. 

301.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will 


267 


PL  50. 


To  change  direction  from  a  halt  (No.  30G). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  267 

ctange  direction  to  the  left,  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples just  prescribed,  and  by  inverse  means. 

302.  When  the  battalion  shall  have  resumed  tha 
direct  march,  the  colonel  will  change  the  guide  to  the 
left,  on  seeing  the  last  three  guides  nearly  in  the  di- 
rection of  the  one  in  front. 

303.  The  foregoing  changes  of  direction  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles  in  a  column, 
left  in  front. 

304.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  will 
change  direction  in  marching,  by  the  commands  and 
means  indicated  for  a  column  by  division. 

305.  The  guide  who  is  the  pivot  of  the  particular 
wheel  ought  to  maintain  himself  at  his  usual  distance 
of  six  paces  from  the  guide  who  precedes  him  ;  if 
this  distance  be  not  exactly  preserved,  the  divisions 
would  necessarily  become  confounded,  which  must  be 
carefully  avoided. 

2d.  To  change  direction  from  a  halt. 

306.  A  column  by  company,  or  by  division,  closed 
in  mass,  being  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish 
to  give  it  a  new  direction,  and  in  which  it  is  to  re- 
main, he  will  cause  it  to  execute  this  movement  by 
the  flanks  of  subdivisions,  in  the  following  manner : 

307.  The  battalion  having  the  right  in  front,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  change  direction 
by  the  right  flank,  he  will  indicate  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel  the  point  of  direction  to  the  right ;  this  ofiicer 
will  immediately  establish,  on  the  new  direction,  two 
markers,  distant  from  each  other  a  little  less  than  the 
front  of  the  first  subdivision,  the  first  marker  in  front 
of  the  right  file  of  this  subdivision ;  which  being  exe- 
cuted, he  will  command : 

I.  Change  direction  by  the  right  flanh.    2.  Battalion^ 
right — Face.    8.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

808  At  the  second  command,  the  column  will  faca 


268     SCHOOL  or  the  battalion — part  hi. 

to  the  right,  and  each  chief  of  subdivision  will  plaoe 
himself  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

309.  At  the  command  march,  ail  the  subdivisions 
will  step  off  together;  the  right  guide  of  the  leading 
one  will  direct  himself  from  the  first  step,  parallelly 
to  the  markers  placed  in  advance  on  the  new  direc- 
tion ;  the  chief  of  the  subdivision  will  not  follow  the 
movement,  but  see  it  file  past,  and  as  soon  as  the  left 
guide  shall  have  passed,  he  will  command : 

1.  First  company  (or  first  division).  2.  Halt.  3.  Feont. 
4.  Left — Dress. 

310.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  subdivision  will 
place  itself  against  the  two  markers,  and  be  promptly 
aligned  by  its  chief. 

311.  The  right  guide  of  each  of  the  following  sub- 
divisions will  conform  himself  to  the  direction  of  the 
right  guide  of  the  subdivision  preceding  his  own  in 
the  column,  so  as  to  enter  on  the  new  direction  paral- 
lelly  to  that  subdivision,  and  at  the  distance  of  four 
paces  from  its  rear  rank. 

312.  Each  chief  of  subdivision  will  halt  in  his  own 
person,  on  arriving  opposite  to  the  left  guides  already 
placed  on  the  new  direction,  see  his  subdivision  file 
past,  and  conform  himself,  in  halting  and  aligning  it, 
to  what  is  prescribed  No.  309. 

313.  If  the  change  of  direction  be  by  the  left  flank, 
fhe  colonel  will  cause  markers  to  be  established  as 
before,  the  first  in  front  of  the  left  file  of  the  leading 
subdivision,  and  then  give  the  same  commands,  sub- 
Btituting  the  indication  left  for  right. 

314.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  subdivisions 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  each  chief  will  place  himself 
by  the  side  of  his  left  guide. 

315.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  subdivisions 
will  step  off  together,  each  conducted  by  its  chief. 

316.  The  guide  of  the  leading  subdivision  will 
direct  himself,  from  the  first  step,  parallelly  to  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  269 

markers;  the  subdivision  will  be  conducted  by  its 
chief  j  and  as  soon  as  its  left  guide  shall  have  passed 
the  second  marker,  it  will  be  halted  and  aligned  as 
prescribed  above;  and  so  of  each  of  the  following 
subdivisions. 

317.  The  colonel  will  hold  himself  on  the  desig- 
nated flank,  to  see  that  each  subdivision  enters  the 
new  direction  parallelly  to  the  leading  one,  and  at 
the  prescribed  distance  from  that  which  precedes. 

318.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  in 
front  of,  and  facing  to,  the  guide  of  the  leading  sub- 
division, and  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  follow- 
ing guides,  as  they  successively  arrive  on  the  new 
direction. 

319.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  last  subdivision. 

320.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  executed 
with  facility  and  precision,  it  is  necessary  that 
the  leading  subdivision  should  entirely  unmask  the 
column;  for  example,  the  movement  being  made  by 
the  right  flank,  it  is  necessary,  before  halting  the 
leading  subdivision,  that  its  left  guide  shall,  at  least, 
have  arrived  at  the  place  previously  occupied  by  its 
right  guide,  in  order  that  each  following  subdivision 
which  has  to  pass  over  a  space  at  least  equal  to  its 
front  to  put  itself  in  the  new  direction,  and  whose 
left  ought  to  pass  the  point  at  which  the  right  had 
rested,  may,  at  the  command  halty  find  itself,  in  its 
whole  front,  parallel  to  the  leading  subdivision. 

321.  By  this  method  there  is  no  direction  that  may 
not  be  given  to  a  column  in  mass. 

Article  Ninth. 

Being  in  column  at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass, 
to  take  distances. 

822.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  take  full  dis- 
tances  by  the  head  of  the  column  when  it  has  to  pro* 


270       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

long  itself  on  the  line  of  battle.  If,  on  the  contrary, 
it  has  to  form  itself  in  line  of  battle  on  the  ground  it 
occupies,  it  will  take  distances  on  the  leading  or  on 
the  rearmost  subdivision,  according  as  the  one  or  the 
other  may  find  itself  at  the  point  where  the  right  or 
left  of  the  battalion  ought  to  rest  in  line  of  battle. 

\8t.  To  take  distances  hy  the  head  of  the  column, 

823.  The  column  being  by  company  at  half  dis- 
tance and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
cause  it  to  take  full  distances  by  the  head,  he  will 
command ; 

jBy  the  head  of  column,  take  wheeling  distance, 

324.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
company  will  put  it  in  march ;  to  this  end,  he  will 
command : 

1.  First  company,  forioard.    2.  Guide  left.    3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

325.  When  the  second  shall  have  nearly  its  wheel- 
ing distance,  its  captain  will  command: 

1.  Second  company,  forioard.   2.  Guide  left.   3.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

326.  At  the  command  march,  which  will  be  pro- 
nounced at  the  instant  that  this  company  shall  have 
its  wheeling  distance,  it  will  step  off  smartly,  taking 
the  step  from  the  preceding  company.  Each  of  the 
other  companies  will  successively  execute  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

327.  The  colonel  will  see  that  each  company  puts 
itself  in  march  at  the  instant  it  has  its  distance. 

328.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  liold  himself  at 
the  head  of  the  column,  and  direct  the  march  of  the 
leading  guide. 

329.  The  major  will  hold  himself  abreast  with  the 
rearmost  guide. 


Z71 


PL  51. 


'  iolc  v)]tcclui(j  distanc-r  on  ciijhtli  coiJirxtiir/  (^<u.  CM). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  III.  271 

330.  If  the  column,  instead  of  being  at  a  halt,  be 
in  march,  the  colonel  will  give  the  same  commands, 
and  add : 

March  (or  double  quick — March). 

331.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time, 
at  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the  leading 
company  will  cause  double  quick  time  to  be  taken ; 
which  will  also  be  done  by  the  other  captains  as  the 
companies  successively  attain  their  proper  wheeling 
distance. 

832.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  the  leading  company  will  continue  to  march  at 
the  same  gait.  The  captains  of  the  other  companies 
will  cause  quick  time  to  be  taken,  and  as  each  com- 
pany gains  its  proper  distance,  its  captain  will  cause 
it  to  retake  the  double  quick  step. 

2d.  To  take  distances  on  the  rear  of  the  column, 

333.  If  the  colonel  wish  to  take  distances  on  the 
rearmost  company,  he  will  establish  two  markers  on 
the  direction  he  shall  wish  to  give  to  the  line  of 
battle,  the  first  opposite  to  the  rearmost  company, 
the  second  marker  towards  the  head  of  the  column, 
at  company  distance  from  the  first,  and  both  facing 
to  the  rear;  at  the  same  time,  the  right  general 
guide,  on  an  intimation  from  the  lieutenant  colonel, 
will  move  rapidly  a  little  beyond  the  point  to  which 
the  head  of  the  column  will  extend,  and  place  him- 
self correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  mark- 
ers. These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

1,  On  the  eighth  company,  take  wheeling  distance.  2. 
Column,  forward.  3.  Guide  left,  4,  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

334.  At  the  third  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  outside  of  the  directing  flank ; 

23 


272     scnocL  of  the  battalion — part  hi. 

the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  caution  it 
to  stand  fast. 

335.  At  the  command  march,  repeated  by  all  the 
captains,  except  the  captain  of  the  eighth  company 
this  latter  company  "will  stand  fast;  its  chief  wiU 
align  it  by  the  left  on  the  first  marker,  who  is  oppo- 
site to  this  company,  and  place  himself  before  its 
centre,  after  commanding :  Front.  At  this  com- 
mand, the  marker  will  retire,  and  the  left  guide  will 
take  his  place. 

336.  All  the  other  companies  will  put  themselves 
in  march,  the  guide  of  the  leading  one  directing  him- 
self a  little  within  the  right  general  guide ;  when 
the  seventh  company  has  arrived  opposite  the  second 
marker,  its  captain  will  halt,  and  align  it  on  this 
marker,  in  the  manner  prescribed  for  the  eighth 
company. 

337.  When  the  captain  of  the  sixth  company  shall 
see  that  there  is,  between  his  company  and  the  sev- 
enth, the  necessary  space  for  wheeling  into  line,  he 
will  halt  his  company  ;  the  guide  facing  to  the  rear 
will  place  himself  promptly  on  the  direction,  and  the 
moment  he  shall  be  assured  in  his  position,  the  cap- 
tain will  align  the  company  by  the  left,  and  then 
place  himself  two  paces  before  the  centre ;  the  other 
companies  will  successively  conform  themselves  to 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  sixth  com- 
pany. 

338.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  and 
see  that  each  company  halts  at  the  prescribed  dis- 
tance ;  he  will  promptly  remedy  any  fault  that  may 
be  committed,  and,  as  soon  as  all  the  companies  shall 
be  aligned,  he  will  cause  the  guides,  who  are  faced 
to  the  rear,  to  face  about. 

339.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  successively  assure 
the  left  guides  on  the  direction,  placirg  himself  in 
their  rear,  as  they  arrive. 

840.  The  major  will  hold  himself  at  the  head  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  273 

the  column,  and  will  direct  the  march  of  the  leading 
guide. 

Zd.  To  take  distances  on  the  head  of  the  column. 

341.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  take  distances  on  the 
leading  company,  will  establish  two  markers  in  the 
manner  just  prescribed,  one  abreast  with  this  com- 
pany, and  the  other  at  company  distance  in  rear  of 
the  first,  but  both  facing  to  the  front :  the  left  genera'k 
guide,  on  an  intimation  from  the  lieutenant  colonel, 
will  move  rapidly  to  the  rear  and  place  himself  cor 
rectly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  markers,  ? 
little  beyond  the  point  to  which  the  rear  of  tht 
column  will  extend :  these  dispositions  being  made, 
the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  On  the  first  company ,  take  wheeling  distance,  2. 
Battalion^  about — Face.  3.  Column,  forward,  4. 
Guide  right.    5.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

342.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
except  the  one  designated,  will  face  about,  the  guides 
remaining  in  the  front  rank,  now  become  the  rear. 

343.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  outside  of  their  guides. 

344.  At  the  command  march,  the  captain  of  the 
designated  company  will  align  it,  as  prescribed  No. 
335,  on  the  marker  placed  by  its  side. 

345.  The  remaining  companies  will  put  themselves 
in  march :  the  guide  of  the  rearmost  one  will  direct 
himself  a  little  within  the  left  general  guide ;  when 
the  second  company  shall  have  arrived  opposite  the 
second  marker,  its  captain  will  face  it  about,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed  No.  270,  and  align  it, 
as  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  first  company. 

346.  The  instant  that  the  third  company  shall 
have  its  wheeling  distance,  its  captain  will  halt  it, 
facing  it  about,  as  prescribed  No.  270,  and  align 
it  by  the  left ;  the  captains  of  the  remaining  cum- 


274       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

panies  will  eacli,  in  succession,  conform  himself  to 
what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  captain  of  the 
third. 

847.  The  colonel  will  follow  the  movement,  as 
indicated  No.  338;  the  lieutenant  colonel  and  major 
will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  Nos. 
839  and  340. 

848.  These  various  movements  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  in  a  column  with 
the  left  in  front. 

349.  They  will  be  executed  in  like  manner  in  a 
column  closed  in  mass ;  but,  if  it  be  the  wish  of 
the  colonel  to  open  out  the  column  to  half,  instead 
of  full  distance,  he  will  substitute,  in  the  commands, 
the  indication  half,  for  that  of  wheeling  distance. 

850.  In  a  column  by  division,  distances  will  be 
taken  according  to  the  same  principles. 

Article  Tenth. 

Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance. 

851.  In  a  column  at  full  or  half  distance,  the  coun- 
termarch will  be  executed  by  the  means  indicated, 
school  of  the  company ;  to  this  end,  the  colonel  will 
command ; 

1.  Countermarch.  2.  Battalion,  right  (or  left) — Face. 
3.  By  file  left  (or  right).  4.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

To  countermarch  a  column  closed  in  mass. 

852.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  the  counter- 
march will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means 
subjoined. 

353.  The  column  being  supposed  formed  by  divi- 
Bion,  right  in  front,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Countermarcn.  2.  Battalion^  right  and  left — Face, 
3.  By  file  left  and  right,  4.  March  (or  doubU 
quick — March). 


274 


PL  52. 


r'n''lll'i^:i|!!iliH|'||;i|l':!|i|lil||l|l||!|.ii|li!|'i|'!f-, 


T^o  countermarch  a  coluvm  closed  in  mass  (Ivo.  1x52). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  275 

354.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd 
numbered  divisions  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the 
right,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  others  to  face  to  the  left. 

355.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  divisions  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  the  even  to  the  left ;  the  right 
and  left  guides  of  all  the  divisions  will  face  about ; 
the  chiefs  of  odd  divisions  will  hasten  to  their  right 
and  cause  two  files  to  break  to  the  rear,  and  each 
chief  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  leading  front 
rank  man  of  his  division ;  the  chiefs  of  even  divisions 
will  hasten  to  their  left,  and  cause  two  files  to  break 
to  the  rear,  and  each  chief  place  himself  on  the  right 
of  his  leading  front  rank  man. 

856.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  divisions,  each 
conducted  by  its  chief,  will  step  off  smartly,  the 
guides  standing  fast ;  each  odd  division  will  wheel  by 
file  to  the  left  around  its  right  guide ;  each  even 
division  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  right  around  its  left 
guide,  each  division  so  directing  its  march  as  to  ar- 
rive behind  its  opposite  guide,  and  when  its  head 
shall  be  up  with  this  guide,  the  chief  will  halt  the 
division,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front. 

357.  Each  division,  on  facing  to  the  front,  will  be 
aligned  by  its  chief  by  the  right:  to  this  end,  the 
chiefs  of  the  even  divisions  will  move  rapidly  to  the 
right  of  their  respective  divisions. 

358.  The  divisions  being  aligaed,  each  chief  will 
command,  Front  ;  at  this,  the  guides  will  shift  to 
their  proper  flanks. 

359.  In  a  column  with  the  left  in  front,  the  coun- 
termarch will  be  executed  by  the  same  commands  and 
means ;  but  all  the  divisions  will  be  aligned  by  the 
left ;  to  this  end,  the  chiefs  of  the  odd  divisions  will 
hasten  to  the  left  of  their  respective  divisions  as  soon 
as  the  latter  shall  have  been  faced  to  the  front. 

360.  The  colonel,  placed  on  the  directing  flank,  will 
superintend  the  general  movement. 

361.  The  countermarch  being  ended,  the  lieutenant 


276      SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 

colonel  -will  always  place  himself  abreast  with  the 
leading,  and  the  major  abreast  with  the  rearmost 
division. 

362.  In  a  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  the 
countermarch  will  be  executed  by  the  same  means 
and  commands,  applying  to  companies  what  is  pre- 
scribed for  divisions. 

3G3.  The  countermarch  will  always  take  place  from 
a  halt,  whether  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  or  at 
full,  or  half  distance. 

Article  Eletenth. 

Being  in  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  to  form 
divisions. 

364.  The  column  being  closed  in  mass,  right  in 
front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
form  divisions,  he  will  command : 

1.  Form  divisions,    2.  Left  companies,  left — Face.  3. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

365.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  left 
companies  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the  left. 

366.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  companies 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  their  captains  will  place 
themselves  by  the  side  of  their  respective  left  guides. 

367.  The  right  companies,  and  their  captains,  will 
stand  fast ;  but  the  right  and  left  guides  of  each  of 
these  companies  will  place  themselves  respectively 
before  the  right  and  left  files  of  the  company,  both 
guides  facing  to  the  right,  and  each  resting  his  right 
arm  gently  against  the  breast  of  the  front  rank  man 
of  the  file,  in  order  to  mark  the  direction. 

868.  At  the  command  march,  the  left  companies 
only  will  put  themselves  in  march,  their  captains 
standing  fast ;  as  each  shall  see  that  his  company, 
filing  past,  has  nearly  cleared  the  column,  he  will 
command : 


276 


Pi  53. 

r 


rl!iiliKill1^a^iP!;i?Bisi.^!iti!ii^ 

rffiSli!!lllSliliilii;i:!tiI^illltitfi%llliflS 


rl  W 


Beiny  in  column  hy  comjyani/,  closed  in  7nasSf  to  form 
divisions  (No.  36-t). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PAFT  III.  277 


1.  Such  company.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 

369.  The  first  command  will  be  given  wlien  the 
company  shall  yet  have  four  paces  to  march ;  the 
second  at  the  instant  it  shall  have  cleared  its  right 
company ;  and  the  third  immediately  after  the  second. 

370.  The  company  having  faced  to  the  front,  the 
files,  if  there  be  intervals  between  them,  will  promptly 
incline  to  the  right;  the  captain  will  place  himself  on 
the  left  of  the  right  company  of  the  division,  and 
align  himself  correctly  on  the  front  rank  of  that 
company. 

371.  The  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the  same 
time  before  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company, 
face  to  the  right,  and  cover  correctly  the  guides  of 
the  right  company ;  the  moment  his  captain  sees  him 
established  on  the  direction,  he  will  command : 

Right — Dress. 

372.  At  this,  the  left  company  will  dress  forward 
on  the  alignment  of  the  right  company ;  the  front 
rank  man,  who  may  find  himself  opposite  to  the  left 
guide,  will,  without  preceding  his  rank,  rest  lightly 
his  breast  against  the  right  arm  of  this  guide ;  the 
captain  of  the  left  company  will  direct  its  alignment 
on  this  man,  and,  the  alignment  being  assured,  he 
will  command.  Front  ;  but  not  quit  his  position. 

373.  The  colonel  seeing  the  divisions  formed,  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

374.  At  this,  the  guides  who  have  marked  the 
fronts  of  divisions  will  return  to  their  places  in 
column,  the  left  guide  of  each  right  company  passing 
through  the  interval  of  the  centre  of  the  division, 
and  the  captains  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed 
No.  75. 

375.  The  colonel,  from  the  directing  fiank  of  the 


278       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III. 


column,  will  superintend  the  general  execution  of 
the  movement. 

376.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  instead  of  at  a 
bait,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  divisions, 
he  will  command ; 

1.  Form  divisions.    2.  Left  companies  ^  by  the  left  flank. 
8.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

377.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the 
right  companies  will  command,  3Iark  timcy  the  cap- 
tains of  the  left  companies  will  caution  their  com- 
panies to  face  by  the  left  flank. 

378.  At  the  third  command,  the  right  companies 
will  mark  time,  the  left  companies  will  face  to  the 
left ;  the  captains  of  the  left  companies  will  each 
see  his  company  file  past  him,  and  when  it  has 
cleared  the  column,  will  command : 

Such  company  by  the  right  flank — March. 

As  soon  as  the  divisions  are  formed,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

4.  Forward.    6.  March. 

379.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  column  will  resume 
the  gait  at  which  it  was  marching  previous  to  the 
commencement  of  the  movement.  The  guides  of 
each  division  will  remain  on  the  right  and  left  of 
their  respective  companies  ;  the  left  guide  of  the 
right  company  will  pass  into  the  line  of  file  closers, 
before  the  two  companies  are  united ;  the  right 
guide  of  the  left  company  will  step  into  the  rear 
rank.  The  captains  will  place  themselves  as  pre- 
Bcribed  No.  75. 

Bein^  in  column  at  full  or  half  distance,  to  form 
divisions. 

380.  If  the  column  be  at  a  halt,  and,  instead  of 
being  closed  in  mass,  is  at  full  or  half  distance, 


278 


PL  54. 


^li!lp:i!ljnilllHli[i!'!':il:ii""!h'i:li'rn^  ^ 


"11111115 


7 


Being  in  column  at  full  or  Imlf  distance,  to  form  ilivib-ivns 
(No.  380). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  III.  279 

divisions  will  be  formed  in  the  same  manner ;  but 
the  captains  of  the  left  companies,  if  the  movement 
be  made  in  quick  time,  after  commanding  Front, 
will  each  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  com- 
pany, and  command,  1.  Such  company,  forward. 
2.  Guide  right.  3.  March.  If  the  movement  be  made 
iu  double  quick  time,  each  will  command,  as  soon  ar 
his  company  has  cleared  the  column : 

1.  Such  company  by  the  right  flank,    2.  March. 

381.  The  right  guide  of  each  left  company  will  so 
direct  his  march  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  right  company.  The  left  company 
being  nearly  up  with  the  rear  rank  of  the  right  com- 
pany, its  captain  will  halt  it,  and  the  movement  will 
be  finished  as  prescribed  No.  371  and  following. 

382.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  movement  will  be 
executed  by  inverse  means  :  the  right  companies  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  above. for 
the  left  companies :  and  the  two  guides,  placed  re- 
spectively before  the  right  and  left  files  of  each  left 
company,  will  face  to  the  left.  At  the  command, 
Guides  posts,  given  by  the  colonel,  the  guides,  who 
have  marked  the  front  of  divisions,  and  the  captains, 
will  quickly  ret<ake  their  places  in  the  column. 

383.  If  the  column  be  marching  at  full  distance, 
the  divisions  will  be  formed  as  prescribed  No.  196. 
If  it  be  marching  at  half  distance,  the  formation  will 
take  place  by  the  commands  and  according  to  the 
principles  indicated  No.  376  ;  if  the  column  be  march- 
ing in  double  quick  time,  the  companies  which  should 
mark  time  will  march  in  quick  time  by  the  command 
of  their  captains. 

Eemarks  on  the  formation  of  divisions  from  a  halt. 

384.  As  this  movement  may  be  considered  as  the 
element  of  deployments,  it  ought  to  be  executed  with 
the  utmost  accuracy. 


230       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  lY, 

385.  If  companies  marching  by  the  flank  do  not 
preserve  exactly  their  distances,  there  will  be  open- 
ings between  the  files  at  the  instant  of  facing  to  the 
front. 

386.  If  captains  halt  their  companies  too  early, 
they  will  want  space,  and  the  files  which  have  not 
cleared  the  flanks  of  the  standing  companies  will  not 
be  able  to  dress  into  line  without  pushing  their  ranks 
laterally. 

387.  If  on  the  contrary  the  companies  be  halted 
too  late,  it  will  be  necessary  for  them  to  incline  to 
the  right  or  left  in  dressing;  and  in  deployments, 
either  of  these  faults  would  lead  to  error  in  the  fol- 
lowing companies. 

388.  As  often  as  a  guide  shall  have  to  step  out  to 
place  himself  before  his  subdivision  in  order  to  mark 
the  direction,  he  will  be  particularly  careful  to  place 
himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  outer 
files  of  the  subdivision  when  they  shall  be  aligned : 
if  he  take  too  much  distance,  and  neither  of  those 
files  finds  itself  against  him,  the  chiefs  of  the  sub- 
division will  have  no  assured  point  on  which  to  direct 
the  alignment. 

PART  FOUKTII. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  tlie  order  in  column 
to  the  order  in  battle. 

Article  First. 
Manner  of  determining  the  lino  of  battle. 

889.  The  line  of  battle  may  be  marked  or  defer- 
niined  in  three  different  manners  :  1st,  by  placing  two 
markers  eighty  or  a  hundred  paces  apart,  on  the  di- 
rection it  is  wished  to  give  to  the  line;  2d,  by  placing 
a  marker  at  the  point  at  which  it  may  be  intended  to 
jrest  a  flank,  and  then  choosing  a  second  point  towards, 


PL  55. 


/ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IV.  281 


or  beyond  the  opposite  flank,  and  there  posting  a  second 
marker  distant  from  each  other  a  little  less  than  the 
leading  subdivision  ;  Sd,  by  choosing  at  first  the  pointa 
of  direction  for  the  flanks,  and  then  determining,  by 
intermediate  points,  the  straight  line  between  thosa 
selected  points,  both  of  which  may  sometimes  be 
beyond  reach. 

Article  Second. 

Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  full 
distance  into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)  ] 

2.  On  the  right  (or  left)    .  ,  ^ 

3.  Forward,^    ^         U  mto  line  of  battle. 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear,  J 

XeL  Column  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  to  the  left  into 
line  of  battle. 

890.  A  column,  right  in  front,  being  at  a  halt, 
when  tJie  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  to  the  left  into 
line,  he  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  guides  by  the 
means  previously  indicated,  and  then  command : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.    2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 

391.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  guide  of  the 
leadinj^  company  will  hasten  to  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  left  guides  of  the  column,  face  to 
them,  and  place  himself  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one 
of  the  three  right  files  of  his  company,  when  they 
shall  be  in  line :  he  will  be  assured  in  this  position 
by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 

392.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  left  front  rank  man  of  each  company 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  rest  his  breast  lightly  against 
the  right  arm  of  his  guide ;  the  companies  will  wheel 
to  the  le^t  on  the  principle  of  wheeling  from  a  halt, 


282       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IT. 

conforming  themselves  to  what  is  prescribed,  school 
of  the  company  No.  239 :  each  captain  will  turn  to 
his  company,  to  observe  the  execution  of  the  move- 
ment, and  when  the  right  of  the  company  shall  arrive 
at  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  com- 
Biand : 

1.  Such  company,    2.  Halt. 

393.  The  company  being  halted,  the  captain  will 
place  himself  on  the  line  by  the  side  of  the  left  front 
rank  man  of  the  company  next  on  the  right,  align 
himself  correctly,  and  command: 

3.  Right — Dress. 

894.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  dress  up 
between  the  captain  and  the  front  rank  man  on  its 
left,  the  captain  directing  the  alignment  on  that  man ; 
the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  of  the  right  company, 
who  finds  himself  opposite  to  its  right  guide,  will 
lightly  rest  his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  this 
guide. 

395.  Each  captain,  having  aligned  his  company, 
will  command.  Front,  and  the  colonel  will  add : 

Guides — Posts. 

398.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  return  to 
their  places  in  line  of  battle,  each  passing  through 
the  nearest  captain's  interval;  to  permit  him  to  pass, 
the  captain  will  momentarily  step  before  the  first  file 
of  his  company,  and  the  covering  sergeant  behind  the 
Bame  file.  Tlds  rule  is  general  for  all  the  formatiom 
into  line  of  battle. 

397.  When  companies  form  line  of  battle,  file  closers 
will  always  place  themselves  exactly  two  paces  from 
the  rear  rank,  which  will  sufiiciently  assure  their 
alignment. 

398.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  the 
colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  and  major,  as  weh  as  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  17.  283 


adjutant  and  sergeant  major,  will  return  to  tlieir  re* 
ftpective  places  in  line  of  battle.  Tkis  rule  is  generab 
for  all  the  formations  into  line  of  battle  ;  nevertheless^ 
the  battalion  being  in  the  school  of  elementary  in- 
struction, the  colonel  will  go  to  any  point  he  may  deem 
necessary. 

399.  A  column,  with  the  left  in  front,  will  form  it- 
self to  the  right  into  line  of  battle,  according  to  the  same 
principles ;  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company  will 
place  himself,  at  the  first  command,  on  the  direction 
of  the  right  guides,  in  a  manner  corresponding  to  what 
is  prescribed,  No.  391,  for  the  right  guide  of  the  right 
company. 

400.  At  the  command  guides  posts,  the  captains  will 
take  their  places  in  line  of  battle  as  well  as  the  guides 
This  rule  is  general  for  all  formations  into  line  of  battle 
in  which  the  companies  are  aligned  by  the  left. 

401.  A  column  by  division  may  form  itself  into  line 
of  battle  by  the  same  commands  and  means,  but  ob- 
serving what  follows:  if  the  right  be  in  front,  at  the 
command  halt,  given  by  the  chiefs  of  division,  the  left 
guide  of  each  right  company  will  place  himself  on  the 
alignment  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left 
of  his  company ;  the  left  guide  of  the  first  company 
will  be  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant 
colonel;  the  left  guides  of  the  other  right  companies 
will  align  themselves  correctly  on  the  division  guides; 
to  this  end,  the  division  guides  (on  the  alignment) 
will  invert,  and  hold  their  pieces  up  perpendicularly 
before  the  centre  of  their  bodies,  at  the  command  left 
into  line,  wheel.  If  the  column  by  division  be  with  the 
left  in  front,  the  right  guides  of  left  companies  will 
conform  themselves  to  what  has  just  been  prescribed 
for  the  left  guides  of  right  companies,  and  place  them- 
selves on  the  line  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  right 
files  of  their  respective  companies. 

402.  A  column  in  march  will  be  formed  into  line, 
wiUiout  halting,  by  the  same  commands  and  means. 


284     SCHOOL  or  the  battalion — part  it. 


At  the  command  marchy  the  guides  will  halt  in  their 
places,  and  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  promptly  rec- 
tify their  positions. 

403.  If,  in  forming  the  column  into  line,  the  colonel 
ghould  wish  to  move  forward,  without  halting,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Jj^  companies  left  wheel.    2.  March  (or  double 
quick — Mabch). 

404.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  each  company  will  wheel  to  the  left  on 
a  fixed  pivot,  as  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany. No.  201;  the  left  guides  will  step  back  into  the 
rank  of  file  closers  before  the  wheel  is  completed ; 
and,  when  the  right  of  the  companies  shall  arrive  near 
the  line,  the  colonel  will  command : 

3.  Forward,    4.  March.    5.  Guide  centre. 

405.  At  the  fourth  command,  given  at  the  instant 
the  wheel  is  completed,  the  companies  will  march 
directly  to  the  front.  At  the  fifth  command,  the 
color  and  the  general  guides  will  move  rapidly  six 
paces  to  the  front.  The  colonel  will  assure  the  direc- 
tion of  the  color;  the  captains  of  companies  and  the 
men  will,  at  once,  conform  themselves  to  the  princi- 
ples of  the  march  in  line  of  battle,  to  be  hereinafter 
indicated,  No.  587  and  following. 

406.  The  same  principles  are  applicable  to  a  column 
left  in  front. 

By  inversion  to  the  right  (or  left)  into  line  cf  battle. 

407.  When  a  column,  right  in  front,  shall  be  under 
the  necessity  of  forming  itself  into  line  faced  to  the 
reverse  flank,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  execute 
this  formation  by  the  shortest  movement,  he  will 
command : 

1.  By  inversion^  right  into  linCy  wheel.    2.  Battalion, 
guide  right. 


SCUOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION"— PART  lY.  285 

408.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant  colonei 
will  place  himself  in  front,  and  facing  to  the  right 
guide  of  the  leading  subdivision;  at  the  second  com- 
mand, he  will  rectify,  as  promptly  as  possible,  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides  of  the  column ;  the  cap- 
tain of  the  odd  company,  if  there  be  one,  and  the 
column  be  by  division,  will  promptly  bring  the  right 
of  his  company  on  the  direction,  and  at  company  dis- 
tance from  the  division  next  in  front;  the  left  guide 
of  the  leading  subdivision  will  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides,  and  will  be  assured 
in  his  position  by  the  lieutenant  colonel ;  which  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

409.  At  this,  the  right  front  rank  man  of  each  sub- 
division will  face  to  the  right,  rest  his  breast  lightly 
agfctinst  the  left  arm  of  his  gulda,  and  the  pattalicn 
■^111  foim  itsolf  to  the  right  into  liitC  of  battle,  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  prescribed;  which  being  exe- 
cuted, the  colonel  will  command: 

Guides — Posts. 

410.  If  the  column  be  with  the  left  in  front,  it  will 
form  itself,  by  inversion,  to  the  left  into  line,  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles. 

411.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion,  when 
formed  into  line  of  battle,  to  be  moved  forward,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  by  the  commands,  and 
according  to  the  principles,  indicated  in  No.  403 ; 
always  preceding  the  command,  hy  companies  right  (or 
left)  wheel,  by  the  command,  by  inversion. 

Successive  Formations. 

412.  Under  the  denomination  of  successive  form- 
ations are  included  all  those  formations  where  the 

.  (several  subdivisions  of  a  column  arrive  one  after 
another  on  the  line  of  battle ;  such  are  formations 


286       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  17. 

on  the  right,  or  left,  forward  and  faced  to  the  rear 
into  line  of  battle,  as  well  as  deployments  of  columns 
in  mass. 

413.  The  successive  formations  which  may  be  or- 
dered when  the  column  is  marching,  and  is  to  con- 
tinue marching,  will  be  executed  by  a  combination 
of  the  two  gaits,  quick  and  double  quick  time. 

2d.  Column  at  full  distance,  on  the  right  (or  on  the  left\ 
into  line  of  battle, 

414.  A  column  by  company,  at  full  distance  and 
right  in  front,  having  to  form  itself  on  the  right  into 
line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  indicate  to  the  lieu- 
tenant colonel,  a  little  in  advance,  the  point  of  appui^ 
or  rest,  for  the  right,  as  well  as  the  point  of  direction 
to  the  left;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  hasten  with 
two  markers,  and  establish  them  in  the  following 
manner  on  the  direction  indicated. 

415.  The  first  marker  will  be  placed  at  the  point 
of  apjyui  for  the  right  front  rank  man  of  the  leading 
company;  the  second  will  indicate  the  point  where 
one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  same  company  will 
rest  when  in  line ;  they  will  be  placed  so  as  to  pre- 
sent the  right  shoulder  to  the  battalion  when  formed. 

416.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  On  the  right,  into  line.    2.  Battaliony  guide  right. 

417.  At  the  second  command,  the  right  will  become 
the  directing  flank,  and  the  touch  of  the  elbow  will 
be  to  that  side;  the  right  guide  of  the  leading  com- 
pany will  march  straight  forward  until  up  with  the 
turning  point,  and  each  following  guide  will  march 
in  the  trace  of  the  one  immediately  preceding. 

418.  The  leading  company  being  nearly  up  with 
the  fii^t  marker,  its  captain  will  command;  1.  Right 
turn,  and  when  the  company  is  precisely  up  with  thig 
marker,  he  will  add ;  2.  March. 


To  form  on  the  right  into  line  (No.  417). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  lY.  287 


419.  At  the  command  march,  the  companywill  turn 
to  the  right;  the  right  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as 
to  bring  the  man  next  to  him  opposite  to  the  right 
marker,  and  when  at  three  paces  from  him,  the  cap- 
tain will  command : 

1.  First  company ;  2.  Halt. 

420.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt;  the  files,  not  yet  in  line,  will  form  promptly; 
the  left  guide  will  retire  as  a  file  closer ;  and  the 
captain  will  then  command  : 

3.  Right — Dress. 

421.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  align 
itself;  the  two  men  who  find  themselves  opposite  to 
the  two  markers  will  each  lightly  rest  his  breast 
against  the  right  arm  of  his  marker;  the  captain, 
passing  to  the  right  of  the  front  rank,  will  direct  the 
alignment  on  these  two  men.  These  rules  are  general 
for  all  successive  formations. 

422.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march 
straight  forward ;  when  arrived  opposite  to  the  left 
flank  of  the  preceding  company,  it  will  turn  to  the 
right,  and  be  formed  on  the  line  of  battle,  as  has  just 
been  prescribed ;  the  right  guide  will  direct  himself 
so  as  to  come  upon  that  line  by  the  side  of  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  first  company. 

423.  At  the  distance  of  three  paces  from  the  line 
of  battle,  the  company  will  be  halted  by  its  captain, 
who  will  place  himself  briskly  by  the  side  of  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align  him- 
self correctly  on  its  front  rank. 

424.  The  left  guide  will,  at  the  same  time,  place 
himself  before  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  com- 
pany, and,  facing  to  the  right,  he  will  place  himself 
accurately  on  the  direction  of  the  two  markers  of  thfl 
preceding  compan^^ 

425.  The  captain  will  then  command: 


288        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IV. 


Right — Dress. 

426.  At  this  command,  the  second  company  will 
dress  forward  on  the  line ;  the  captain  will  direct  its 
alignment  on  the  front  rank  man  who  has  rested  his 
breast  against  the  left  guide  of  the  company. 

427.  The  following  companies  will  thus  come  suc- 
cessively to  form  themselves  on  the  line  of  battle, 
each  conforming  itself  to  what  has  just  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  one  next  to  the  right;  and  when  they 
shall  all  be  established,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Guides — Posts. 

428.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  take  thcfr 
places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  placed  before 
the  right  company  will  retire. 

429.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  quick  time,  and 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  the  movement  to  be 
executed  in  double  quick  time,  he  will  add  the  com- 
mand; Double  quick — March.  At  the  command 
march,  all  the  companies  will  take  the  double  quick 
step,  and  the  movement  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed No.  417  and  following. 

430.  The  colonel  will  follow  up  the  formation, 
passing  along  the  front,  and  being  always  opposite  to 
the  company  about  to  turn :  it  is  thus  that  he  will  be 
the  better  able  to  see  and  to  correct  the  error  that 
would  result  from  a  command  given  too  soon  or  too 
late  to  the  preceding  company. 

431.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will,  with  the  greatest 
care,  assure  the  direction  of  the  guides:  to  this  end, 
the  instant  that  the  markers  are  estabiislicd  for  the 
leading  company,  he  will  move  a  little  beyond  the 
point  at  which  the  left  of  the  next  company  will  rest, 
establish  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
two  markers,  and  assure  the  guide  of  the  second  com- 
pany on  this  direction ;  this  guide  being  assured,  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  farther  to  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IV.  289 

rear,  in  order  to  assure,  in  like  manner,  the  guide  of 
the  third  company,  and  so  on,  successively,  to  the  left 
of  the  battalion.  In  assuring  the  guides  in  their  posi- 
lions  on  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  take  care  to  let 
them  first  place  themselves,  and  confine  himself  to 
rectifying  their  positions  if  they  do  not  cover  accu- 
rately, and  at  the  proper  distance,  the  preceding 
guides  or  markers.  This  rule  is  general^  for  all  suc- 
cessive formations. 

432.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  on  the 
left  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples :  the  captains  will  go  to  the  left  of  their  respective 
companies  to  align  them,  and  shift  afterwards  to  their 
proper  flanks,  as  prescribed  No.  400. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  on  the  right,  or  left,  into 
line  of  battle. 

433.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  executed 
with  regularity,  it  is  necessary  to  establish  the  line 
of  battle  so  that  the  guide  of  each  company,  after 
turning,  may  have  at  least  ten  steps  to  take,  in  order 
to  come  upon  that  line. 

434.  In  the  first  exercises,  the  line  of  battle  will 
be  established  on  a  direction  parallel  to  that  of  the 
column ;  but,  when  the  captains  and  guides  shall 
comprehend  the  mechanism  of  the  movement,  the 
colonel  will  generally  choose  oblique  directions,  in 
order  to  habituate  the  battalion  to  form  itself  in  any 
direction. 

435.  When  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  forms 
a  sensible  angle  with  rhat  of  the  march  of  the  column, 
the  colonel,  before  beginning  the  movement,  will  give 
the  head  of  the  column  a  new  direction  parallel  to 
that  line :  to  this  end,  he  will  indicate  to  the  guide 
of  the  leading  company  a  point  in  advance,  on  which 
this  guide  will  immediately  direct  himself,  and  the 
company  will  conform  itself  to  the  direction  of  its 
guide,  at  the  command,  or  on  a  mere  caution,  of  the 


290        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IT. 

captain,  according  as  the  change  of  direction  may  re- 
quire; each  following  company  will  make  the  same 
movement,  on  the  same  ground,  as  it  shall  successively 
arrive  By  this  means  the  guides  of  all  the  companies 
in.  the  column  will  have,  after  turning,  nearly  the 
Bame  number  of  paces  to  take  in  order  to  come  upon 
ihe  line  of  battle. 

436.  Every  captain  will  always  observe,  in  placing 
himself  on  that  line,  not  to  give  the  command  dress^ 
until  after  the  guide  of  his  company  shall  have  been 
assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant  colonel. 
This  rule  is  general  for  all  successive  formations. 

437.  Each  captain  will  cause  his  company  to  sup 
port  arms,  the  instant  that  the  captain,  who  follows 
him,  shall  have  commanded  front.    This  rule  is  general 
for  all  successive  formations, 

438.  When,  in  the  execution  of  this  movement,  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  commence  firing,  he  will  give  the 
order  to  that  effect  to  the  captain  whose  company  is 
the  first  in  line  of  battle;  this  captain  will  immedi- 
ately place  himself  behind  the  centre  of  his  company, 
and  as  soon  as  the  next  captain  shall  have  commanded 
front,  he  will  commence  the  fire  by  file,  by  the  com- 
mands prescribed,  school  of  the  company.  At  the 
command  fire  by  file,  the  marker  at  the  outer  file  of 
this  first  company  will  retire,  and  the  other  will  place 
himsftlf  against  the  nearest  man  of  the  next  company. 
The  captain  of  the  latter  will  commence  firing  as 
soon  as  the  captain  of  the  third  company,  in  line, 
shall  have  commanded  front;  the  marker  before  the 
nearest  file  of  the  second  company,  in  line,  will  now 
retire,  and  the  guide  before  the  opposite  flank  will 
place  himself  before  the  nearest  file  of  the  third  com- 
pany, in  line,  and  so  on,  in  continuation,  to  the  last 
company  on  the  left  or  right  of  the  battalion,  accord- 
ing as  the  formation  may  have  commenced  with  the 
right  or  left  in  front. 

439.  In  all  the  successive  formations,  the  same 


291 


PL  57. 


Forward  into  line,  d'c,  (i^o.  441). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IT.  291 


principles  will  be  observed  for  the  execution  of  tha 
fire  by  file.  This  fire  will  always  be  executed  by  th^r 
command  of  each  captain  of  company. 

Zd.  Column  at  full  distance,  forward  into  line  of  tattle. 

440.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  form  it  forward  into  line,  he  will  conform 
to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415,  and  then 
command : 

1.  Forward  into  line.    2.  By  company,  left  half  wheel. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

441.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  add— yuide  right,  put  the  company 
in  march,  halt  it  three  paces  from  the  markers,  and 
align  it  against  the  latter  by  the  right. 

442.  At  the  command  march,  all  the  other  com- 
panies will  wheel  to  the  left  on  fixed  pivots ;  and,  at 
the  instant  the  colonel  shall  judge,  according  to  the 
direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  that  the  companies 
have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will  command : 

4.  Forward.    6.  March.    6.  Guide  right. 

443.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies,  ceasing 
to  wheel,  will  march  straight  forward ;  and  at  the 
sixth,  the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right. 
The  right  guide  of  the  second  company,  who  is 
nearest  to  the  line  of  battle,  will  march  straight 
forward  ;  each  succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the 
file  immediately  before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the 
wheel. 

444.  The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite 
to  the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to 
turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to  approach  the  line  of 
battle ;  and  when  its  right  guide  shall  be  at  three 
paces  from  that  line,  the  captain  will  command  ; 

25 


292        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — FART  IV. 


1.  Second  company.    2.  Halt. 

445.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt ;  the  files  not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  will  come 
into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  on 
the  line  of  battle,  so  as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the 
three  files  on  the  left  of  the  company;  and,  as  soon 
as  he  is  assured  on  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant 
colonel,  the  captain,  having  placed  himself  accurately 
on  the  line  of  battle,  will  command : 

3.  Right — Dress. 

446.  At  the  instant  that  the  guide  of  the  second 
company  begins  to  turn  to  the  right,  the  guide  of  the 
third,  ceasing  to  follow  the  file  immediately  before 
him,  will  march  straight  forward ;  and,  when  he  shall 
arrive  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  second,  his  captain 
will  cause  the  company  to  turn  to  the  right,  in  order 
to  approach  the  line  of  battle,  halt  it  at  three  paces 
from  that  line,  and  align  it  by  the  right,  as  prescribed 
for  the  second  company. 

447.  Each. following  company  will  execute  what 
has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  third,  as  the  pre-' 
ceding  company  shall  turn  to  the  right,  in  order  to 
approach  the  line  of  battle. 

448.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — Posts. 

449.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  ob- 
serve, in  this  formation,  what  is  prescribed  for  them 
on  the  right  into  line. 

450.  A  column  left  in  front  will  form  itself  forward 
into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  principles 
and  by  inverse  means. 

451.  When  a  column  by  company  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  in  march,  shall  arrive  behind  the 
right  of  Jthe  line  on  which  it  is  to  form  into  battle,  the 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATi'ALION — PART  lY.  293 


colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  conform  themselves 
to  wliat  is  prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415. 

452.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  at 
company  distance  from  the  two  markers  established 
on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Forward  into  line.    2.  By  company,  left  half  wheel. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

453.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first 
company  will  command,  Guide  right,  and  caution  it  to 
march  directly  to  the  front;  the  captains  of  the  other 
companies  will  caution  them  to  wheel  to  the  left. 

454.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  first  company  will  continue  to  march 
to  the  front,  taking  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right. 
Its  chief  will  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the  markers, 
and  align  it  by  the  right.  The  other  companies  will 
wheel  to  the  left  on  fixed  pivots,  and  at  the  instant 
the  colonel  shall  judge  that  they  have  wheeled  suffi- 
ciently, he  will  command : 

4.  Forward.    5.  March.    6.  Guide  right. 

455.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  will 
cease  to  wheel,  and  move  forward.  At  the  sixth,  they 
will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right.  The 
movement  will  be  executed  as  previously  explained. 

456.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  the  column 
forward  into  line,  and  to  continue  to  march  in  this 
order,  he  will  not  cause  markers  to  be  established; 
the  movement  will  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  by 
the  same  commands  and  means,  but  with  the  following 
modifications. 

457.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first 
company  will  add  quick  time  after  the  command  guid4 
right.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  company  will 
continue  to  march  in  quick  time,  and  will  take  the 
touch  of  elbows  to  the  right ;  its  chief  will  imme- 
diately place  himself  on  its  right,  and,  to  assure  tim 


294       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  IT. 


march,  will  take  points  of  direction  to  the  front.  The 
captain  of  the  second  company  will  cause  his  company 
to  take  the  same  gait  as  soon  as  it  shall  arrive  on  a 
line  with  the  first,  and  will  also  move  to  the  right  of 
his  company;  the  captains  of  the  third  and  fourth 
companies  Avill  execute  successively  what  has  jusi 
been  prescribed  for  the  second.  The  companies  will 
preserve  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right  until  the 
command,  ffuide  centre. 

458.  When  the  color-company  shall  have  entered 
the  line,  the  colonel  will  command,  guide  centre.  At 
this  command,  the  color-bearer  and  the  right  general 
guide  will  move  rapidly  six  paces  in  advance  of  the 
line.  The  colonel  will  assure  the  direction  of  the 
color-bearer.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  right 
companies  will  immediately  conform  themselves,  to 
the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  of  battle.  The 
left  companies  and  the  left  general  guide,  as  they 
arrive  on  the  line,  will  also  conform  to  the  same 
principles.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  double 
quick  time,  when  the  last  company  shall  have  arrived 
on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  double  quick  to 
be  resumed. 

459.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  movement  be 
entirely  completed  before  halting  the  battalion.  As 
soon  as  the  part  of  the  battalion  already  formed  shall 
have  arrived  on  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will 
halt  the  battalion;  the  companies  not  in  line  will  each 
complete  the  movement. 

Remarks  on  the  formation  forward,  into  line  of  "battle, 

460.  The  precision  of  this  movement  depends  on 
the  direction  the  companies  have  at  the  moment  the 
colonel  commands,  Foricard — March.  The  colonel 
will  judge  nicely  the  point  of  time  for  giving  this 
command,  observing  that,  if  the  direction  of  the  line 
of  battle  form  with  that  of  the  column  a  right  or 
nearly  a  right  angle,  the  companies  ought  to  wheel 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  IV.  295 

ftbout  the  eightii  of  the  circle,  and  that  the  more  acute 
the  angle  formed  by  the  two  directions,  so  much  the 
more  the  companies  ought  to  wheel  before  marching 
straight  forward. 

461.  It  is  important  that  each  company  in  march- 
ing towards  the  line  of  battle  should  turn  exactly 
opposite  the  point  where  its  captain  ought  to  place 
himself  on  that  line ;  if  a  company  turn  too  soon,  it 
will  find  itself  masked,  in  part,  by  that  which  pre- 
ceded it  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  be  obliged  to  un- 
mask itself  by  the  oblique  step  ;  if  it  turn  too  late,  it 
will  leave  an  interval  between  itself  and  the  preced- 
ing company  to  be  regained  in  like  manner.  In 
either  case,  the  next  company  will  be  led  into  error, 
and  the  fault  propagated  to  the  opposite  flank  of  the 
battalion. 

462.  The  guide  of  each  company  ought  so  to  regu- 
late himself  in  turning,  as  to  bring  his  company  to 
the  halting  point  parallelly  with  the  line  of  battle. 

4  )3.  If  the  angle  formed  by  the  line  of  battle  and 
the  primitive  direction  of  the  column  be  so  acute,  that 
the  sompanies,  on  arriving  opposite  to  their  respective 
places  on  the  line  of  battle,  find  themselves  nearly 
paiallel  to  it,  the  captains  will  not  give  the  command, 
ri^giit  (or  left)  turn,  but  each  halt  his  company,  place 
himself  on  the  line,  and  command : 

Right  (or  left) — Dress. 

464.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  angle  formed  by  the 
line  of  battle  and  the  primitive  direction  of  the 
column  be  much  greater  than  a  right  angle,  the  form- 
ation should  be  executed,  not  by  the  movement  for- 
ward  into  line  of  battle^  but  by  that  of  on  the  right  (or 
left)  into  li?ie  of  battle,  and  according  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  this  formation. 

4Ge5.  If  a  company  encounter  an  obstacle  sufficient 
to  prevent  it  from  marching  by  the  front,  it  will  right 
(or  left)  face  in  marching,  by  the  commands  and  means 


296       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IT, 

irdicated  in  the  school  of  the  company,  Nos  314  and  315. 
Tlie  guide  will  continue  to  follow  the  same  file  behind 
which  he  was  marching,  and  will  maintain  exactly 
the  same  distance  from  the  company  immediately 
preceding  his  own.  The  obstacle  being  passed,  the 
company  will  be  formed  into  line  by  the  command  of 
its  captain. 

A.th.  Column  at  full  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line  of 
battle. 

466.  A  column  being  by  company,  at  full  distance, 
right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the  colonel  shall 
wish  to  form  it  into  line  faced  to  the  rear,  he  and  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is 
prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415,  and  the  colonel  will  then 
command : 

1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.    2.  Battalion,  right-^ 
Face.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March), 

467.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  lead- 
ing company  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
put  it  in  march,  causing  it  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  left, 
and  direct  its  march  towards  the  line  of  battle,  which 
it  will  pass  in  rear  of  the  left  marker ;  the  first  file 
having  passed  three  paces  beyond  the  line,  the  com- 
pany will  wheel  again  by  file  to  the  left,  in  order  to 
place  itself  in  rear  of  the  two  markers ;  being  in  this 
position,  its  captain  will  halt  it,  face  it  to  the  front, 
and  align  it  by  the  right  against  the  markers. 

468.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  other  com- 
^          panics  will  face  to  the  right,  each  captain  placing 

himself  by  the  side  of  his  right  guide. 

469.  At  the  command  march,  the  companies  will  put 
themselves  in  movement ;  the  left  guide  of  the  second, 
who  is  nearest  to  the  line  of  battle,  will  hasten  in 
advance  to  mark  that  line  ;  he  will  place  himself  on 
it  as  prescribed  above  for  successive  formations,  and 
thus  indicate  to  his  captain  the  point  at  whi<;h  he 


IiLto  hue  frnvtl 


2' 

ii 

T 
IB 
t 

r 

c 
i 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  lY,  207 

ouglit  to  pass  the  line  of  battle,  by  tliree  paces,  iu 
order  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  and  then  to  dii  ect 
his  company  parallelly  to  that  line. 

470.  As  soon  as  the  first  file  of  this  company  shall 
have  arrived  near  the  left  file  of  the  preceding  one 
already  on  the  line  of  battle,  its  captain  will  coEi- 
mand : 

1.  Second  comp am/.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 
4.  Ei(/ht — Dress. 

471.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
company  shall  yet  have  fonr  paces  to  take  to  reach 
the  halting  point. 

472.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt. 

473.  At  the  third,  the  company  will  face  to  the 
front,  and,  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  the 
latter  will  promptly  close  to  the  right ;  the  captain 
will  immediately  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  preceding  company,  and  align  him- 
self on  its  front  rank. 

474.  The  fourth  command  will  be  executed  as  pre^ 
scribed  No.  426. 

475.  The  following  companies  will  be  conducted  and 
established  on  the  line  of  battle  as  just  prescribed 
for  the  second,  each  regulating  itself  by  the  one  that 
precedes  it ;  the  left  guides  will  detach  themselves  in 
time  to  precede  their  respective  companies  on  the  line 
by  twelve  or  fifteen  paces,  and  each  place  himself  so 
as  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his 
company,  when  in  line.  If  the  movement  be  executed 
in  double  quick  time,  the  moment  it  is  commenced, 
all  the  left  guides  will  detach  themselves  at  the  same 
time  from  the  column,  and  will  move  at  a  run  to  esta- 
blish themselves  on  the  line  of  battle. 

476.  The  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  com' 
maud : 


^98        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IT, 


Guides — Posts. 

477.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel,  in  this  form- 
ation, will  each  observe  what  is  prescribed  for  Mm 
in  that  of  on  the  rights  into  line  of  battle. 

478.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  itself  faced 
to  the  rear  into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

479.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  should  arrive 
in  front  of  the  right  of  the  line  on  which  it  is  to  form 
into  battle,  the  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  414  and  415. 

480.  When  the  head  of  the  column  shall  be  nearly 
at  company  distance  from  the  two  markers  established 
on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Into  line,  faced  to  the  rear.    2.  Battalion,  hy  the 
right  flank,    3.  March  (or  double  quick — Mae,ch). 

481.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  cau- 
tion their  companies  to  face  by  the  right  flank. 

482.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains  of  companies,  all  the  companies  will 
face  to  the  right;  the  first  company  will  then  wheel 
by  file  to  the  left,  and  be  directed  by  its  captain  a 
little  to  the  rear  of  the  left  marker  ;  then  pass  three 
paces  beyond  the  line,  and  wheel  again  by  file  to  the 
left;  having  arrived  on  the  line,  the  captain  will 
halt  the  company,  and  align  it  by  the  right.  The 
remaining  part  of  the  movement  will  be  executed  aa 
heretofore  explained. 

483.  The  foregoing  principles  are  applicable  to  a 
column,  left  in  front. 

484.  As  the  companies  approach  the  line  of  battle, 
it  is  necessary  that  their  captains  should  so  direct 
the  march  as  to  cross  that  line  a  little  in  rear  of  their 
respective  guides,  who  are  faced  to  the  basis  of  the 
formation ;  hence  each  guide  ought  to  detach  him- 
self in  time  to  find  himself  correctly  established 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IV.  299 


on  the  direction  before  Ms  company  shall  come  up 
with  him. 

Article  Third. 
Formation  in  line  of  battle  by  two  movements. 

485.  If  a  column  by  company,  right  in  front,  and 
at  a  halt,  find  itself  in  part  on  the  line  of  battle,  and 
the  colonel  should  think  proper  to  form  line  of  battle 
before  all  the  companies  enter  the  new  direction, 
the  formation  will  be  executed  in  the  following 
manner : 

486.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  jrolumn  has  ar- 
rived behind  the  line  of  battle,  and  that  five  com- 
panies have  entered  the  new  direction.  The  colonel 
having  assured  the  guides  of  the  first  five  companies 
on  the  direction,  will  command : 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.    2.  Three  rear  companieSy 
forward  into  Ime. 

487.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  each  of 
the  rear  companies  will  command :  By  company,  left 
half  wheel ;  and  the  colonel  will  add  ; 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

488.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first 
five  companies  will  form  themselves  to  the  lefty  into 
line  of  battle,  and  the  three  last  forward,  into  line  of 
battle,  by  the  means  prescribed  for  these  respective 
formations ;  each  captain  of  the  three  rear  com- 
panies will,  when  his  company  shall  have  sufficiently 
wheeled,  command: 

1.  Forward.    2.  March.    3.  Guide  right. 

489.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command : 


300       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  IV. 


1.  To  the  left,  and  forward  into  tine.    2.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

490.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  those 
companies  which  have  not  entered  on  the  new  direc- 
tion will  command:  Bi/  company^  left  half  wheel.  At 
the  command  march,  briskly  repeated,  the  first  five 
companies  will  form  left  into  line,  and  the  last  three 
forward  into  line,  as  prescribed  for  these  respective 
formations.  Those  captains  who  form  their  compa- 
nies forward  into  line  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  488. 

491.  If  the  colonel  should  wish,  in  forming  the 
battalion  into  line,  to  march  it  immediately  forward, 
lie  will  command : 

1,  By  company  to  the  left,  and  forward  into  line. 
2.  March. 

492.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain,  whose 
company  is  not  yet  in  the  new  direction,  will  com- 
mand: 1.  By  company,  left  half  wheel;  2.  Double 
quick.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  companies  not  in  the  new  direction 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  above  for  forming 
forward  into  line  while  marching ;  each  of  the  other 
companies  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  a  fixed  pivot,  and 
when  the  right  of  these  companies  shall  arrive  on  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  command : 

3.  Forward.    4.  March.    6.  Guide  zentre. 

493.  The  fifth  command  will  be  given  when  the 
color-bearer  arrives  on  the  line,  if  not  already  there. 

494.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  double  quick 
time,  the  colonel  will  cause  quick  time  to  be  taken 
before  commencing  the  movement. 

495.  If,  instead  of  arriving  behind,  the  column 
should  arrive  before  the  line  of  battle,  the  colonel 
will  command : 


SCHOOL  0£  THE  BATTALION- -PART  lY.  301 


1.  Left  into  Ime,  wheel.    2.  Three  rear  companies 
into  line,  faced  to  the  rear. 

496.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  of  each 
of  the  three  rear  companies  will  command :  1.  Such 
company.  2.  Ei^ht — Face.  The  colonel  will  then 
add: 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

497.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first 
five  companies  will  form  themselves  to  the  left,  into 
line  of  battle,  and  the  three  last  faced  to  the  rear,  into 
line  of  battle,  by  the  means  prescribed  for  these  re- 
spective formations. 

498.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command  ; 

1.  To  the  left,  and  into  line  faced  to  the  rear.  2.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

499.  The  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
Nos.  391,  480,  and  following. 

500.  These  several  movements  in  a  column,  left  in 
front,  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  princi- 
ples, and  by  inverse  means. 


Different  modes  of  passing  from  column  at  half  dis- 
tance, into  line  of  battle. 

1.  To  the  left  (or  right)  I 


let.  Column  at  half  distance,  to  the  left  (or  right)  into 


501.  A  column  at  half  distance  having  to  form 
itself  to  the  left  (or  right)  into  line  of  battle,  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  take  distances  by  one  of  the 


Article  Fourth. 


2.  On  the  right  (or  left) 

3.  Forward,  by  deployment, 

4.  Faced  to  the  rear, 


line  of  battle. 


302       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-  PART  lY, 

means  prescribed  Article  IX.,  Part  Third,  of  this 
school ;  which  being  executed,  he  will  form  the 
column  into  line  of  battle,  as  has  been  indicated  No. 
890  and  following. 

502.  If  a  column  by  company,  at  half  distance,  be 
in  march,  and  it  be  necessar.y  to  form  rapidly  into 
line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  By  the  rear  of  column  left  (or  ri(/ht)  into  line,  wheel* 
2.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

603.  At  the  first  command,  the  right  general  guide 
will  move  rapidly  to  the  front,  and  place  himself  a 
little  beyond  the  point  where  the  head  of  the  column 
will  rest,  and  on  the  prolongation  of  the  guides. 
The  captain  of  the  eighth  company  will  command  ; 
Left  into  line,  wheel;  the  other  captains  will  caution 
their  companies  to  continue  to  march  to  the  front. 

504.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company,  the  guide  of  this 
company  will  halt  short,  and  the  company  will  wheel 
to  the  left,  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed 
for  wheeling  from  a  halt ;  when  its  right  shall  arrive 
near  the  line,  the  captain  will  halt  the  company,  and 
align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  captains  will  place 
themselves  briskly  on  the  flank  of  the  column  ;  when 
the  captain  of  the  seventh  sees  there  is  sufficient  dis- 
tance between  his  company  and  the  eighth  to  form 
the  latter  into  line,  he  will  command :  Left  into  line, 
wheel — March  ;  the  left  guide  will  halt  short,  and, 
facing  to  the  rear,  will  place  himself  on  the  line ; 
the  company  will  wheel  to  the  left,  the  man  on  the 
left  of  the  front  rank  will  face  to  the  left,  and  place 
his  breast  against  the  left  arm  of  the  guide ;  the 
captain  will  halt  the  company  when  its  right  shall 
arrive  near  the  line,  and  will  align  it  by  the  left. 
The  other  companies  will  conform  successively  to 
Ifhat  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  seventh. 

505.  Each  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  of  his 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IT.  30.^ 


company  on  the  left  man  in  the  front  rank  of  th« 
company  next  on  his  right. 

506.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  be  watchful  that 
the  leading  guide  marches  accurately  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  line  of  battle,  and  directs  himself 
on  the  right  general  guide.  The  major,  placed  in 
rear  of  the  left  guide  of  the  eighth  company,  will,  as 
soon  as  the  guide  of  the  seventh  company  is  esta- 
blished on  the  direction,  hasten  in  rear  of  the  guides 
of  the  other  companies,  so  as  to  assure  each  of  them 
in  succession  on  the  line. 

2c?.  Column  at  half  distance,  on  the  right  (or  left),  into  lin€ 
of  battle. 

507.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  form  itself  on 
the  right  (or  left)  into  line  of  battle,  as  prescribed 
for  a  column  at  full  distance. 

Zd.  Column  at  half  distance,  forward,  into  line  of  battle, 

508.  If  it  be  wished  to  form  a  column  at  half  dis- 
tance, forward  into  line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will 
first  cause  it  to  close  in  mass  and  then  deploy  it  on 
the  leading  company. 

4Lth.  Column  at  half  distance,  faced  to  the  rear,  into  line 
of  battle, 

509.  A  column  at  half  distance  will  be  formed  intjb 
line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  rear,  as  prescribed  for  a 
column  at  full  distance. 

Article  Fifth. 
Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  mass. 

510.  A  column  in  mass  may  be  formed  into  line  of 
battle : 

1.  Faced  to  the  front,  by  the  deployment. 

2.  Faced  to  the  rear,  by  the  countermarch  and 

the  deployment. 


304        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  lY. 

3.  Faced  to  the  right  and  faced  to  the  left,  by  a 
change  of  direction  bj  the  fiauk,  and  the 
deployment. 

611.  When  a  column  in  mass,  by  division,  arrives 
behind  the  line  on  which  it  is  intended  to  deploy  it, 
the  colonel  vrill  indicate,  in  advance,  to  the  lieutenant 
colonel,  the  direction  of  the  line  of  battle,  as  well  as 
the  point  on  which  he  may  wish  to  direct  the  column. 
The  lieutenant  colonel  will  immediately  detach  him- 
self with  two  markers,  and  establish  them  on  that 
line,  the  first  at  the  point  indicated,  the  second  a  little 
less  than  the  front  of  a  division  from  the  first. 

612.  Deployments  will  always  be  made  upon  lines 
parallel  and  lines  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle ; 
consequently,  if  the  head  of  the  column  be  near  the 
line  of  battle,  the  colonel  will  commence  by  establish- 
ing the  direction  of  the  column  perpendicularly  to 
that  line,  if  it  be  not  already  so,  by  one  of  the  means 
indicated  Is'o.  244  and  following,  or  No.  307  and 
following.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  he  will  so 
direct  it  that  it  may  arrive  exactly  behind  the 
markers,  perpendicularly  to  the  line  of  battle,  and 
halt  it  at  three  paces  from  that  line. 

613.  The  column,  right  in  front,  being  halted,  it  is 
supposed  that  the  colonel  wishes  to  deploy  it  on  the 
first  division ;  he  will  order  the  left  general  guide  to 
go  to  a  point  on  the  line  of  battle  a  little  beyond  that 
at  which  the  left  of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  de- 
ployed, and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolonga- 
tion of  the  markers  established  before  the  fiisi 
division. 

614.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command ; 

I.  On  the  first  division,  deploy  column.    2.  Battalion, 
le/t~FACB. 

616.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  staiid  fast ;  the  chiefs  oi 


SCnOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IT.  305 

the  ih^^e  other  divisions  will  remind  them  that  they 
will  have  to  face  to  the  left. 

516.  At  the  second  command,  the  three  last  divi- 
sions will  face  to  the  left ;  the  chief  of  each  division 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  left  guide,  and 
the  junior  captain  by  the  side  of  the  covering  ser- 
geant of  the  left  company,  who  will  have  steppe4 
into  the  front  rank. 

617.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  place  a  third  marker  on  the  alignment  of  the 
two  first,  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  tho 
right  company,  first  division,  and  then  place  himself 
on  the  line  of  battle  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at 
which  the  left  of  the  second  division  will  rest. 

618.  The  colonel  will  then  command : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 
519.  At  this  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  divi 
Bion  will  go  to  its  right,  and  command : 

Bight — Dress. 

620.  At  this,  the  division  will  dress  up  against  the 
markers ;  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  its  junior 
captain,  will  each  align  the  company  on  his  left,  and 
then  command: 

Front. 

521.  The  three  divisions,  faced  to  the  left,  will,  put 
themselves  in  march ;  the  left  guide  of  the  second 
will  direct  himself  parallelly  to  the  line  of  battle  ;  the 
left  guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  will 
march  abreast  with  the  guide  of  the  second ;  the 
guides  of  the  third  and  fourth  each  preserving  the 
prescribed  distance  between  himself  and  the  guide  of 
the  division  which  preceded  his  own  in  the  column. 

622.  The  chief  of  the  second  division  will  not  fol- 
low its  movement ;  he  will  see  it  file  by  him,  and 
when  its  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with  him,  he 
will  command : 


306        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PAkT  lY. 


1.  Second  division.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 

623.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the 
division  shall  yet  have  seven  or  eight  paces  to 
march;  the  second,  when  the  right  guide  shall  be 
abreast  with  the  chief  of  the  division,  and  the  ihivd 
immediately  after  the  second. 

524.  At  the  second  command,  the  division  will 
halt;  at  the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front,  and  if 
there  be  openings  between  the  files,  the  chief  of  th€ 
division  will  cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the 
right;  the  left  guides  of  both  companies  will  step 
upon  the  line  of  battle,  face  to  the  right,  and  place 
themselves  on  the  direction  of  the  markers  esta- 
blished before  the  first  division,  each  guide  opposite 
to  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  his  company. 

525.  The  division  having  faced  to  the  front,  its 
chief  will  place  himself  accurately  on  the  line  of 
battle,  on  the  left  of  the  first  division;  and  when  he 
shall  see  the  guides  assured  on  the  direction,  he  will 
command,  Ri^ht — Dress.  At  this,  the  division  will 
be  aligned  by  the  right  in  the  manner  indicated  for 
the  first. 

526.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will  continue 
to  march ;  at  the  command  halt,  given  to  the  second, 
tiie  chief  of  the  third  will  halt  in  his  own  person, 
place  himself  exactly  opposite  to  the  guide  of  the 
second,  after  this  division  shall  have  faced  to  the 
front  and  closed  its  files ;  he  will  see  his  division  file 

East,  and  when  his  right  guide  shall  be  abreast  with 
im,  he  will  command : 

1.  Third  division.    2.  Halt.    8.  Front. 

527.  As  soon  as  the  division  faces  to  the  front, 
its  chief  will  place  himself  two  paces  before  its 
centre,  and  command: 

1.  Third  division,  forward,  2.  Guide  right.  3.  Mabch, 


SCHOOL  OF  TLE  BATTALION — PART  lY.  307 


528.  At  the  third  command,  the  division  "will  march 
towards  the  line  of  battle;  the  right  guide  will  so 
direct  himself  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of  the  man  on 
the  left  of  the  second  division,  and  when  the  division 
is  at  three  paces  from  the  line  of  battle,  its  chief  wiU 
halt  it  and  align  it  by  the  right. 

529.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  conform 
himself  (and  the  chief  of  the  fifth,  if  there  be  a  fifth) 
to  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  third. 

630.  The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command  : 

Guides — Posts. 

531.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  resume 
their  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the  markers  will 
retire. 

532.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  first  division  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  make  the  dispositions 
indicated  Nos.  512  and  513,  and  when  the  first  divi- 
sion shall  have  arrived  at  three  paces  from  the  line, 
he  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  first  division^  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion  hy 
the  left  flank.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

533.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  halt,  and  will  command, 
First  division ;  the  other  chiefs  will  caution  their  divi- 
sions to  face  by  the  left  flank. 

534.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  the  rear  divisions,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  command,  Halt,  and  will  align  his  divi- 
sion by  the  right  against  the  markers  ;  the  other  divi- 
eions  will  face  to  the  left,  their  chiefs  hastening  to 
the  left  of  their  divisions.  The  second  division  will 
conform  its  movements  to  what  is  prescribed  Nos. 
522  and  following.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions 
will  execute  what  is  prescribed  Nos.  526  and  follow- 

26 


308       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IV. 

ing;  but  the  chief  of  each  division  will  halt  in  his 
own  person  at  the  command  march  given  by  the  chief 
of  the  division  which  precedes  him,  and  when  the 
right  of  his  division  arrives  abreast  of  him,  he  will 
eommand : 

Such  division^  hy  the  right  flanlc — March 

635.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  position 
of  the  guides,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  No. 
431.  The  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast 
with  the  fourth  division. 

536.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  the  column 
without  halting  it,  and  to  continue  the  march,  the 
markers  will  not  be  posted;  the  movement  will  be 
executed  by  the  same  commands  and  the  same  means 
as  the  foregoing,  but  with  the  following  modifications: 

537.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  command,  1.  Guide  right.  2.  Quick  time. 
At  the  command.  Double  quick — March,  given  by  the 
colonel,  the  first  division  will  march  in  quick  time 
and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  right;  the 
captains  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  their 
respective  companies  ;  the  captain  on  the  right  of  the 
battalion  will  take  points  on  the  ground  to  assure  the 
direction  of  the  march.  The  chief  of  the  second  di- 
vision will  allow  his  division  to  file  past  him,  and 
when  he  sees  its  right  abreast  of  him,  he  will  com- 
mand: 1.  Second  dividon  by  the  right  flank.  2.  March. 
8.  Guide  right ;  and  when  this  division  shall  arrive  on 
the  alignment  of  the  first,  he  will  cause  it  to  march 
in  quick  time.  The  third  and  fourth  divisions  will 
deploy  according  to  the  same  principles  as  the  second. 

538.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  major,  and 
color-bearer  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed No.  458. 

539.  The  colonel  will  see,  pending  the  movement, 
that  the  principles  just  prescribed  are  duly  observed, 
and  particularly  that  the  divisions,  in  deploying,  b« 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IV.  309 


Dot  halted  too  soon  nor  too  late.  He  will  correct 
pi'omptly  and  quickly  the  faults  that  may  be  com- 
mitted, and  prevent  their  propagation.  This  rvle  is 
general  for  all  deployments. 

640.  The  column  being  at  a  halt,  if,  instead  of  de- 
ploying it  on  the  first,  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy 
it  on  the  rearmost  division,  he  will  cause  the  disposi- 
tions to  be  made  indicated  No.  511  and  following; 
Uut  it  will  be  the  right  general  guide  whom  he  will 
send  to  place  himself  beyond  the  point  at  which  the 
right  of  the  battalion  will  rest  when  deployed. 

541.  The  colonel  will  then  command: 

1.  Ori  '*he,  fourth  (or  such)  division,  deploy  column. 
2.  Battalion,  right — ^Face. 

542.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  chiefs  of 
the  other  divisions  will  caution  them  that  they  will 
have  to  face  to  the  right. 

543.  At  the  second  command,  the  first  three  divi- 
sions will  face  to  the  right ;  and  the  chief  of  each 
will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  right  guide. 

544.  At  the  same  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  place  a  third  marker  between  the  first  two,  so 
that  this  marker  may  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three 
right  files  of  the  left  company  of  the  division ;  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  then  place  himself  on  the  line 
of  battle  a  few  paces  beyond  the  point  at  which  the 
right  of  the  third  division  will  rest  when  deployed. 

545.  The  colonel  will  then  command  : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

546.  At  this  command,  the  three  right  divisions 
will  put  themselves  in  march,  the  guide  of  the  first  so 
directing  himself  as  to  pass  three  paces  within  the 
line  marked  by  the  right  general  guide.  The  chief 
of  the  third  division  will  not  follow  its  movement; 
he  will  see  it  file  past,  halt  it  when  its  leA  guide  shall 


310       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IT. 

be  abreast  with  him,  and  cause  it  to  face  to  the  front; 
and,  if  there  be  openings  between  the  files,  he  will 
cause  them  to  be  promptly  closed  to  the  left. 

547.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he  sees 
it  nearly  unmasked  by  the  three  others,  will  com 
iiiand : 

1 .  Fourth  division,  forward.    2.  Guide  left,    3.  March 

548.  At  the  command  march^  which  will  be  giver 
the  instant  the  fourth  is  unmasked,  this  division  will 
approach  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at  three  paces 
from  the  markers  on  that  line,  its  chief  will  halt  it, 
and  command : 

Left — Dress. 

549.  At  this  command,  the  division  will  dress  for- 
ward against  the  markers ;  the  chief  of  the  division 
and  the  junior  captain  will  each  align  the  company 
on  his  right,  and  then  command : 

Front. 

550.  The  instant  that  the  third  division  is  un- 
masked, its  chief  will  cause  it  to  approach  the  line 
of  battle,  and  halt  it  in  the  manner  just  prescribed 
for  the  fourth. 

551.  The  moment  the  division  halts,  its  right  guide 
and  the  covering  sergeant  of  its  left  company  will 
step  on  the  line  of  battle,  plaoing  themselves  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  markers  established  in  front  of 
the  fourth  division;  as  soon  as  they  shall  be  assured 
in  their  positions,  the  division  will  be  aligned  as  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  fourth. 

552.  The  second  and  first  divisions  which  will 
have  continued  to  march,  will,  in  succession,  be 
halted  and  aligned  by  tlie  left,  in  the  sam-e  manner 
as  the  third  ;  the  chiefs  of  these  divisions  will  con- 
form themselves  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  526.  The 
Becond  being  near  the  line  of  battle,  the  command 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IT.  311 

will  not  be  given  for  it  to  move  on  this  line,  but  it 
will  be  dressed  up  to  it. 

553.  The  deployment  ended,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

Guides — Posts. 

554.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  division  and 
the  guides  will  resume  their  places  in  line  of  ^battle, 
and  the  markers  will  retire. 

555.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  posi- 
tions of  the  guides  by  the  means  indicated  No.  431, 
and  the  major  will  follow  the  movement  abreast  with 
the  fourth  division. 

556.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  deploy  it  on  the  fourth  division,  ha 
will  make  the  dispositions  indicated  No.  511  and 
following ;  and  when  the  head  of  the  column  shall 
arrive  within  three  paces  of  the  line,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1  071  the  fourth  division,  deploy  column.  2.  Battalion, 
by  the  right  flank.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — • 
March). 

557.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  caution  it  to  halt,  and  will  command, 
Fourth  division;  the  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will 
caution  their  divisions  to  face  to  the  right. 

558.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
the  chiefs  of  the  first  three  divisions,  the  chief  of  the 
fourth  will  command ;  Halt.  The  first  three  di» 
visions  will  face  to  the  right,  and  be  directed  paral- 
lelly  to  the  line  of  battle.  The  chief  of  each  of  these 
divisions  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  its  right 
guide.  The  chief  of  the  third  division  will  see  his 
division  file  past  him,  and  when  his  left  guide  is 
abreast  of  him,  he  will  halt  it,  and  face  it  to  the 
front.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division,  when  he 
shall  see  it  nearly  unmasked,  will  command:  1. 


312       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  IV. 

Fourth  division,  forward;  2.  Guide  left;  3.  M IRCH 
(or  double  quick — March).  This  division  will  move 
towards  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  at  three  pacea 
from  this  line,  it  will  be  halted  by  its  chief,  and 
aligned  by  the  left. 

559.  The  chief  of  the  third  division  will  more  his 
division  forward,  conforming  to  what  has  just  been 
prescri))ed  for  the  fourth. 

560.  The  chiefs  of  the  second  and  first  divisions, 
after  halting  their  divisions,  will  conform  to  what 
is  prescribed  No.  552. 

561.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  deploy  on  the 
fourth  division  without  halting  the  column,  and  to 
continue  to  march  forward,  he  will  not  have  markers 
posted,  and  the  movement  will  be  executed  by  the 
same  commands  and  the  same  means,  with  the  fol- 
lowing modifications :  the  fourth  division,  wjien  un- 
masked, will  be  moved  forward  in  quick  time,  and 
will  continue  to  march,  instead  of  being  halted, 
and  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  left.  The 
third  division,  on  being  unmasked,  will  be  moved  to 
the  front  in  double  quick  time,  but  when  it  arrives 
on  the  alignment  of  the  fourth  it  will  take  the  quick 
step,  and  dress  to  the  left  until  the  command  Guide 
centre,  is  given  by  the  colonel.  The  chiefs  of  the 
second  and  first  divisions  will  conform  to  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  third.  When  the  first  di- 
vision shall  arrive  on  the  line,  the  colonel  may  cause 
the  battalion  to  take  the  double  quick-  step. 

562.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  con- 
form to  what  has  been  prescribed  Nos.  458  and  459. 

563.  To  deploy  the  column  on  an  interior  division, 
the  colonel  will  cause  the  line  to  be  traced  by  the 
means  above  indicated,  and  the  general  guides  will 
nove  briskly  on  the  line,  as  prescribed  Nos.  513 
and  540.  This  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand: 


SCHOOL  OF  IHE  BATTALION — PART  lY.  313 


I   071  such  division^  deploy  column.    2.  Battalion  out-' 
wards  —  Face.     3.  Maech    (or  double  quick 
March). 

564.  Whether  the  column  be  with  the  right,  or 
left  in  front,  the  divisions  which,  in  the  order  in 
battle,  belong  to  the  right  of  the  directing  one,  will 
face  to  the  right;  the  others,  excepting  the  directing 
division,  will  face  to  the  left ;  the  divisions  in  front 
of  the  latter  will  deploy  by  the  means  indicated  No. 
642  and  following ;  those  in  its  rear  will  deploy  as 
is  prescribed  No.  513  and  following. 

565.  The  directing  division,  the  instant  it  finds 
itself  unmasked,  will  approach  the  line  of  battle, 
taking  the  guide  left  or  right,  according  as  the  right 
or  left  of  the  column  may  be  in  front.  The  chief  of 
this  division  will  align  it  by  the  directing  flank,  and 
then  step  back  into  the  rear,  in  order  momentarily 
to  give  place  to  the  chief  of  the  next  for  aligning  the 
next  division. 

566.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  posi- 
tions of  the  guides  of  divisions,  which,  in  the  line 
of  battle,  take  the  right  of  the  directing  division, 
and  the  major  will  assure  the  positions  of  the  other 
guides. 

567.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command ; 

1  On  such  division,  deploy  column,  2.  Battalion^ 
by  the  right  and  left  flanks,  3.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

568.  The  divisions  which  are  in  front  of  the  di 
recting  one  will  deploy  by  the  means  indicated  Nos 
557  and  following ;  those  in  rear,  as  prescribed  No. 
533  and  following. 

569.  The  directing  division,  when  unmasked,  wil! 
conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  fourth  divi- 
Bion,  No-  558. 


314       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — lART  IT, 

570.  The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel  and  major 
will  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed  Nos.  458 
and  459. 

571.  In  a  colun.n,  left  in  front,  deployments  will 
be  executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and 
hy  inverse  means. 

Bemarks  on  the  deployment  of  columns,  closed  in 
mass. 

572.  All  the  divisions  ought  to  deploy  rectan- 
gularly, to  march  ofi*  abreast,  and  to  preserve  their 
distances  towards  the  line  of  battle. 

573.  Each  division,  the  instant  that  it  is  unmasked, 
ought  to  be  marched  towards  the  line  of  battle,  and 
to  be  aligned  upon  it  by  the  flank  next  to  the  direct- 
ing division  ;  the  latter,  whether  the  right  or  left  be 
in  front,  will  always  be  aligned  by  the  flank  next  to 
the  point  of  appui,  when  the  deployment  is  made  on 
the  first  or  last  division ;  but  if  the  column  be  de- 
ployed on  an  interior  division,  this  division  will  be 
aligned  by  the  flank  which  was  that  of  direction. 

574.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  see  that,  in  de- 
ploying, the  principles  prescribed  for  marching  by 
the  flank  are  well  observed,  and  if  openings  between 
the  files  occur,  which  ought  not  to  happen  except  o 
broken  or  difficult  grounds,  the  openings  ought  to  be 
promptly  closed  towards  the  directing  flank  as  soon 
as  the  divisions  face  to  the  front. 

575.  If  a  chief  of  division  give  the  command 
halty  or  the  command  bi/  the  right  or  left  flank,  too 
soon  or  too  late,  his  division  will  be  obliged  to  ob- 
lique to  the  right  or  left  in  approaching  the  line  of 
battle,  and  his  fault  may  lead  the  following  subdivi- 
sion  into  error. 

576.  In  the  divisions  which  deploy  by  the  left 
flank,  it  is  always  the  left  guide  of  each  company 
who  ou2;ht  to  place  himself  on  the  line  of  battle,  to 


SCHOOL  or  the  batialion — part  iv.  315 

mark  tlie  direction;  in  divisions  which  deploy  by 
the  right  fiank,  it  is  the  right  guide. 

677.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  may 
be  formed  to  the  left  or  to  the  right  into  line,  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  column  at  half  distance,  and  by 
the  means  indicated  No.  502  and  following. 

578.  A  column  by  company,  closed  in  mass,  may 
be  formed  on  the  right  or  on  the  left  into  line  of 
battle,  as  a  column  at  half  distance ;  but  in  order  to 
execute  this  movement,  without  arresting  the  march 
of  the  column,  it  is  necessary  that  the  guides  avoid, 
with  the  greatest  care,  shortening  the  step  in  turn- 
ing, and  that  the  men  near  them,  respectively,  con- 
form themselves  rapidly  to  the  movements  of  their 
guides. 

Remarks  on  inversions. 

579.  Inversions  giving  frequently  the  means  of 
forming  line  of  battle,  in  the  promptest  manner,  are 
of  great  utility  in  the  movements  of  an  army. 

580.  The  application  that  may  be  made  of  inver- 
sions in  the  formations  to  the  right  and  to  the  left  in 
line  of  battle,  has  been  indicated  No.  407  and  fol- 
lowing. They  may  also  be  advantageously  employed 
in  the  successive  formations,  except  in  that  of  faced 
to  the  rear,  into  line  of  battle. 

581.  Formations,  by  inversion,  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  same  principles  as  formations  in  the 
direct  order ;  but  the  colonel's  first  command  will 
always  begin  by  inversion. 

582.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle  by  in- 
version, when  the  colonel  shall  wish,  by  forming  it 
into  column,  to  bring  it  back  to  the  direct  order,  he 
will  cause  it  either  to  break  or  to  ploy  by  company, 
or  by  division,  accordingly  as  the  column  may  have 
been  by  company  or  by  division  before  it  had  been 
formed  into  line  of  battle  by  inversion. 

583.  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  formed  by 


31G        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

inversion,  lias  to  be  ployed  into  column,  the  move* 
ment  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  if  the  line  were  in  the  direct  order,  but 
observing  what  follows. 

584.  If  it  be  intended  that  the  column  shall  be  by 
division,  with  the  first  in  front,  or  by  company,  with 
the  first  company  in  front,  the  colonel  will  announce 
in  the  second  command — left  in  front,  because  the  bat- 
talion being  in  line  of  battle  by  inversion,  that  sub- 
division is  on  the  left. 

685.  Each  chief  whose  subdivision  takes  position 
in  the  column  in  front  of  the  directing  one,  will  con- 
duct his  subdivision  till  it  halts ;  and  each  chief 
whose  suodivision  takes  position  in  rear  of  the  direct- 
ing one,  will  halt  in  his  own  person  when  up  with  the 
preceding  right  guide,  and  see  his  subdivision  file 
past ;  and  each  chief  will  align  his  subdivision  by  the 
right.  When  the  column  is  to  be  put  in  march,  the 
second  command  will  be,  ^uide  left,  because  the  proper 
right  is  in  front. 

586.  For  the  same  reason,  if  it  be  intended  that  the 
{ast  subdivision  shall  be  in  front,  ri(/ht  in  front,  will 
be  announced  in  the  second  command ;  the  subdivi- 
sions will  be  aligned  by  the  left,  and  to  put  the  column 
in  march,  the  second  command  will  be,  guide  rights 
because  the  proper  left  is  in  front. 

PAllT  FIFTH. 
Article  First, 
To  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

587.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  and 
supposed  to  be  the  directing  one,  when  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  march  in  line  of  battle,  he  will  give  the 
lieutenant  colonel  an  intimation  of  his  purpose,  place 
himself  about  forty  paces  in  rear  of  the  color-file, 
and  face  to  the  front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  317 

1588.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  a 
like  distance  in  front  of  the  same  file,  and  face  to  the 
colonel,  who  will  establish  him  as  correctly  as  pos- 
sible, by  signal  of  the  sword,  perpendicularly  to  the 
line  of  battle  opposite  to  the  color-bearer.  The 
colonel  will  next,  above  the  heads  of  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  color-bearer,  take  a  point  of  direction  in 
the  field  beyond,  if  a  distinct  one  present  itself, 
exactly  in  the  prolongation  of  those  first  two  points. 

689.  The  colonel  will  then  move  twenty  paces  far- 
ther to  the  rear,  and  establish  two  markers  on  the 
prolongation  of  the  straight  line  passing  through  the 
color-bearer  and  the  lieutenant  colonel ;  these  mark- 
ers will  face  to  the  rear,  the  first  placed  about  tvrenty- 
five  paces  behind  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion,  and 
the  second  at  the  same  distance  from  the  first. 

590.  The  color-bearer  will  be  instructed  to  take, 
the  moment  the  lieutenant  colonel  shall  be  esta- 
blished on  the  perpendicular,  two  points  on  the 
ground  in  the  straight  line  which,  drawn  from  him- 
self, would  pass  between  the  heels  of  that  ofiicer; 
the  first  of  these  points  will  be  taken  at  fifteen  or 
twenty  paces  from  the  color-bearer. 

591.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  Battalioriy  forward. 

592.  At  this,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard 
will  advance  six  paces  to  the  front ;  the  corporals  in 
the  rear  rank  will  place  themselves  in  the  front  rank, 
and  these  will  be  replaced  by  those  in  the  rank  of 
file  closers  ;  at  the  same  time  the  two  general  guides 
will  move  in  advance,  abreast  with  the  color-bearer, 
the  one  on  the  right,  opposite  to  the  captain  of  the 
right  company,  the  other  opposite  to  'the  sergeant 
who  closes  the  left  of  the  battalion. 

593.  The  captains  of  the  left  wing  will  shift,  pass- 
ing before  the  front  rank,  to  the  left  of  their  re- 


318        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y. 


spective  companies  ;  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the 
battalion  will  step  back  into  the  rear  rank.  The 
covering  sergeant  of  the  company  next  on  the  left 
of  the  color-company  will  step  into  the  front  rank. 

594.  The  lieutenant  colonel  having  assured  the 
color-bearer  on  the  line  between  himself  and  the 
corporal  of  the  color-file,  now  in  the  front  rank, 
will  go  to  the  position  which  will  be  hereinafter  in- 
dicated, No.  602. 

695.  The  major  will  place  himself  six  or  eight 
paces  on  either  flank  of  the  color-rank. 

596.  The  colonel  will  then  command: 

2.  March  (or  double  quick — Maech). 

597.  At  this  command,  the  battalion  will  step  off 
with  life ;  the  color-bearer,  charged  with  the  step  and 
direction,  will  scrupulously  observe  the  length  and 
cadence  of  the  pace,  marching  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  two  points  previously  taken,  and  successively 
taking  others  in  advance  by  the  means  indicated  in 
the  school  of  the  company ;  the  corporal  on  his  right, 
and  the  one  on  his  left,  will  march  in  the  same  stej), 
taking  care  not  to  turn  the  head  or  shoulders,  the 
color-bearer  supporting  the  color-lance  against  the 
hip. 

598.  The  two  general  guides  will  march  in  the 
same  step  with  the  color-rank,  each  maintaining 
himself  abreast,  or  nearly  so,  with  that  rank,  and 
neither  occupying  himself  with  the  movement  of  the 
other. 

599.  The  three  corporals  of  the  color-guard,  now 
in  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion,  will  march  well 
aligned,  elbow  to  elbow,  heads  direct  to  tlie  front, 
and  without  deranging  the  line  of  their  shoulders ; 
the  centre  oiae  will  follow  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the 
color-bearer,  and  maintain  the  same  step,  without 
lengthening  or  shortening  it,  except  on  an  intimation 
fro'n  the  colonel  or  lieutenant  colonel,  although  he 


SCnOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  319 

should  find  himself  more  or  less  than  six  paces  from 
the  color-rank. 

600.  The  coYering  sergeant  in  the  front  rank  be- 
tween the  color-company  and  the  next  on  the  left 
will  march  elbow  to  elbow,  and  on  the  same  line, 
with  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre,  his  head  well 
to  the  front. 

601.  The  captains  of  the  color-company,  and  the 
company  next  to  the  left,  will  constitute,  with  the 
three  corporals  in  the  centre  of  the  front  rank,  the 
basis  of  alignment  for  both  wings  of  the  battalion  ; 
they  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  color- 
bearer,  and  exert  themselves  to  maintain  their 
shoulders  exactly  in  the  square  with  the  direction. 
To  this  end,  they  will  keep  their  heads  direct  to  the 
front,  only  occasionally  casting  an  eye  on  the  three 
centre  corporals,  with  the  slightest  possible  turn  of 
the  neck,  and,  if  they  perceive  themselves  in  advance 
or  in  rear  of  these  corporals,  the  captain,  or  two 
captains,  will  almost  insensibly  shorten  or  lengthen 
the  step,  so  as,  at  the  end  of  several  paces,  to  regain 
the  true  alignment,  without  giving  sudden  checks  or 
impulsions  to  the  wings  beyond  them  respectively. 

602.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  twelve  or  fifteen 
paces  on  the  right  of  the  captain  of  the  color-com- 
pany, will  maintain  this  captain  and  the  next  one 
beyond,  abreast  with  the  three  centre  corporals  ;  to 
this  end,  he  will  caution  either  to  lengthen  or  to 
shorten  the  step,  as  may  be  necessary,  which  the 
captain,  or  two  captains,  will  execute  as  has  just  been 
explained. 

603.  All  the  other  captains  will  maintain  them- 
selves on  the  prolongation  of  this  basis ;  and,  to  thig 
end,  they  will  cast  their  eyes  towards  the  centre, 
taking  care  to  turn  the  neck  but  slightly,  and  not  to 
derange  the  direction  of  their  shoulders. 

604.  The  captains  will  observe  the  march  of  their 
eompanies,  and  prevent  the  men  from  getting  in 


320        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  V. 

advance  of  the  line  of  captains ;  they  will  not 
lengthen  or  shorten  step  except  when  evidently  ne- 
cessary ;  because,  to  correct,  with  too  scrupulous 
attention,  small  faults,  is  apt  to  cause  the  produc- 
tion of  greater — loss  of  calmness,  silence,  and  equal- 
ity of  step,  each  of  which  it  is  so  important  to  main- 
tain- 

605.  The  men  will  constantly  keep  their  heads  well 
directed  to  the  front,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  towards 
the  centre,  resist  pressure  coming  from  the  flank, 
give  the  greatest  attention  to  the  squareness  of 
shoulders,  and  hold  themselves  always  very  slightly 
behind  the  line  of  the  captains,  in  order  never  to 
shut  out  from  the  view  of  the  latter  the  basis  of 
alignment ;  they  will,  from  time  to  time,  cast  an  eye 
on  the  color-rank,  or  on  the  general  guide  of  the 
wing,  in  order  to  march  constantly  in  the  same  step 
with  those  advanced  persons. 

606.  Pending  the  march,  the  line  determined  by 
the  two  markers  (h  and  d)  will  be  prolonged  by 
placing,  in  proportion  as  the  battalion  advances,  a 
third  marker  (z)  in  the  rear  of  the  first  (A),  then 
the  marker  [d)  will  quit  his  place  and  go  a  like  dis- 
tance in  rear  of  [i) ;  the  marker  [h)  will,  in  his  turn, 
do  the  like  in  respect  to  [d),  and  so  on,  in  succession, 
as  long  as  the  battalion  continues  to  advance;  each 
marker,  on  shifting  position,  taking  care  to  face  to 
the  rear,  and  to  cover  accurately  the  two  markers 
already  established  on  the  direction.  A  staff  of&cer, 
or  the  quartermaster  sergeant,  designated  for  the 
purpose,  and  who  will  hold  himself  constantly  .fifteen 
or  twenty  paces  facing  the  marker  farthest  from  the 
battalion,  will  caution  each  marker  when  to  shift 
place,  and  assure  him  on  the  direction  behind  the 
other  two. 

607.  The  colonel  will  habitually  hold  himself  about 
thirty  paces  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  his  battalion, 
taking  care  not  to  put  himself  on  the  line  of  markers; 


321 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y.  321 


If,  for  example,  by  the  slanting  of  the  battalion,  or 
the  indications  which  will  be  given  Nos.  617  and 
following,  he  find  that  the  march  of  the  color-bear cr 
IS  not  perpendicular,  he  will  promptly  command- 

Point  of  direction  to  the  right  (or  left). 

608.  At  this  command,  the  major  will  hasten  thirty 
or  forty  paces  in  advance  of  the  color-rank,  halt,  face 
to  the  colonel,  and  place  himself  on  the  direction 
which  the  latter  will  indicate  by  signal  of  the  sword ; 
the  corporal  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion  will  then 
direct  himself  upon  the  major,  on  a  caution  from  the 
colonel,  advancing,  to  that  end,  the  opposite  shoul- 
der ;  the  corporals  on  his  right  and  left  will  conform 
themselves  to  his  direction. 

609.  The  color-bearer  will  also  direct  himself  upon 
the  major,  advancing  the  opposite  shoulder,  the  major 
causing  him,  at  the  same  time,  to  incline  to  the  right 
or  left,  until  he  shall  exactly  cover  the  corporal  of 
his  file  ;  the  color-bearer  will  then  take  points  on  the 
ground  in  this  new  direction. 

610.  The  two  general  guides  will  conform  them- 
selves to  the  new  direction  of  the  color-rank. 

611.  The  officer  charged  with  observing  the  suc- 
cessive replacing  of  the  markers  in  the  rear  of  the 
centre,  will  establish  them  promptly  on  the  new  di- 
rection, taking  for  basis  the  color-bearer  and  the  cor- 
poral of  his  file  in  the  centre  of  the  buttalion ;  the 
colonel  will  verify  the  new  direction  of  the  markers. 

612.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  from  the  position  given 
No.  602,  will  see  that  the  two  centre  companies,  and 
successively  all  the  others,  conform  themselves  to  the 
new  direction  of  the  centre,  but  without  precipi- 
tancy or  disorder ;  he  will  then  endeavor  to  maintain 
that  basis  of  alignment  for  the  battalion,  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  direction  pursued  by  the  color- 
bearer. 

613.  lie  will  often  observe  the  march  of  the  two 


322        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  Y. 


wings ;  and,  if  he  discover  that  the  captains  neglect 
to  conform  themselves  to  the  basis  of  alignment,  he 
will  recall  their  attention  by  the  command — captain 
of  (such)  compaf}}/,  or  captains  of  (such)  companieSj 
on  the  line — without,  however,  endeavoring  too  scru- 
pulously to  correct  small  faults. 

614.  The  major  on  the  flank  of  the  color-rank  will, 
during  the  march,  place  himself,  from  time  to  time, 
twenty  paces  in  front  of  that  rank,  face  to  the  rear,  and 
place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
markers  established  behind  the  centre,  in  order  to 
verify  the  exact  march  of  the  color-bearer  on  that 
line;  he  will  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  direction  of 
the  color-bearer,  who  will  immediately  take  two  new 
points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the  major. 

615.  All  the  principles  applicable  to  the  advance  in 
line  are  the  same  for  a  subordinate  as  for  the  direct- 
ing battalion  ;  but  when  the  battalion  under  instruc- 
tion is  supposed  to  be  subordinate,  no  markers  will  be 
placed  behind  its  centre. 

Remarks  on  the  advance  in  line  of  battle. 

616.  If,  in  the  exercises  of  detail,  or  courses  of  ele- 
mentary instruction,  the  officers,  sergeants,  corporals, 
and  men,  have  not  been  well  confirmed  in  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  position  under  arms,  as  well  as  in  the 
length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  the  march  of  the  bat- 
talion in  line  will  be  floating,  unsteady,  and  dis- 
united. 

617.  If  the  color-bearer,  instead  of  marching  per- 
pendicularly forward,  pursue  an  oblique  direction, 
the  battalion  will  slant;  crowdings  in  one  wing,  and 
openings  in  the  other,  will  follow,  and  these  defects 
in  the  march,  becoming  more  and  more  embarrassing 
in  proportion  to  the  deviation  from  the  perpendicular, 
will  commence  near  the  centre. 

618.  It  is  then  of  the  greatest  importance  that  the 
color-bearer  should  direct  himself  perpendicularly 


J^nonn  DP  THE  BATTALION— PA jrr  Y.        O  ©oc 


f 


iailiililia^^ 


?4!lllni^?'il:lllli;l!^;!!d!l!l^ii;l!h^l|^ll!lll^l!^i;'^M 


t 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y.  b. 

forward,  and  that  the  basis  of  alignment  should  al- 
ways be  perpendicular  to  the  line  pursued  by  him. 

G29.  If  openings  be  formed,  if  the  files  crowd  eacii 
other,  if,  in  sho^:,  disorder  ensue,  the  remedy  ought 
'*  to  be  applied  as  promptly  as  possible,  but  calmly,, 
with  few  words,  and  as  little  noise  as  practicable. 

620.  The  object  of  the  general  guides,  in  the  march 
in  line  of  battle,  is  to  indicate^to  the  companies  near 
the  flanks  the  step  of  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  and 
to  afford  more  facility  in  establishing  the  wings  on 
the  direction  of  the  centre  if  they  should  be  too 
much  in  the  rear;  hence  the  necessity  that  these 
guides  should  maintain  the  same  step,  and  march 
abreast,  or  very  nearly  so,  with  the  color-rank,  which 
it  will  be  easy  for  them  to  do  by  casting  from  time  to 
time  an  eye  on  that  rank. 

621.  If  the  battalion  happen  to  lose  the  step,  the 
colonel  will  recall  its  attention  by  the  command,  to 
the — Step  ;  captains  and  their  companies  will  imme- 
diately cast  an  eye  on  the  color-rank,  or  one  of  the 
general  guides,  and  promptly  conform  themselves  to 
the  step. 

622.  Finally,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  to  the 
attainment  of  regularity  in  the  march  in  line  of 
battle,  to  habituate  the  battalion  to  execute  with  as 
much  order  as  promptness  the  movements  prescribed 
No.  607  and  following,  for  rectifying  the  direction ; 
it  is  not  less  essential  that  commanders  of  battalions 
should  exercise  themselves,  with  the  greatest  care, 
in  forming  their  own  coup  d'oeil,  in  order  to  be  able 
to  judge  with  precision  the  direction  to  be  given  to 
their  battalions. 

Article  Second. 
Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle 

**23.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when 
27 


4       SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 


the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  oblique,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.    2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

624.  At  the  first  command,  the  major  will  placo 
himself  in  front  of,  and  faced  to,  the  color-bearer. 

625.  At  the  command  march,  the  whole  battalion 
will  take  the  oblique  step.  The  companies  and  cap- 
tains will  strictly  observe  the  principles  established 
in  the  school  of  the  company. 

626.  The  major  in  front  of  the  color-bearer  ought 
to  maintain  the  latter  in  a  line  with  the  centre  cor- 
poral, so  that  the  color-bearer  may  oblique  neither 
more  nor  less  than  that  corporal.  He  will  carefully 
observe  also  that  they  follow  parallel  directions  and 
preserve  the  same  length  of  step. 

627.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  take  care  that  the 
captains  and  the  three  corporals  in  the  centre  keep 
exactly  on  a  line  and  follow  parallel  directions. 

628.  The  colonel  will  see  that  the  battalion  pre- 
serves its  parallelism ;  he  will  exert  himself  to  pre- 
vent the  files  from  opening  or  crowding.  If  he  per- 
ceive the  latter  fauii,  he  will  cause  the  files  on  the 
flank,  to  which  the  battalion  obliques,  to  open  out. 

629.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  direct  march  to  be 
resumed,  will  command ; 

1.  Forward,    2.  March. 

630.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will 
resume  the  direct  march.  The  major  will  place  him- 
self thirty  paces  in  front  of  the  color-bearer,  and  face 
to  the  colonel,  who  will  establish  him,  by  a  signal  of 
the  sword,  on  the  direction  which  the  color-bearer 
ought  to  pursue.  The  latter  will  immediately  take 
two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the 
major. 

6S1.  In  resuming  the  direct  march,  care  will  be 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y.  325 

taken  that  the  men  do  not  close  the  intervals  which 
may  exist  between  the  files  at  once ;  it  should  be 
done  almost  insensibly. 

Kemarks  on  the  oblique  march. 

632.  The  object  of  the  oblique  step  is  to  gain 
ground  to  the  right  or  left,  preserving  all  the  while 
the  primitive  direction  of  the  line  of  battle ;  as  thus, 
for  example :  the  battalion,  departing  from  the  line 
(5z),  arrives  on  the  line  (xz)  parallel  to  (sz). 

633.  It  is  then  essential  that  the  corporals  in  the 
centre  of  the  battalion,  and  the  captains  of  com 
panics,  should  follow  parallel  directions,  and  maintain 
themselves  at  the  same  height ;  without  which  they 
will  give  a  false  direction  to  the  battalion.  ^, 

634.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant  colonel  will  exert 
themselves  to  prevent  the  files  from  crowding  ;  for, 
without  such  precaution,  the  oblique  march  cannot 
be  executed  with  facility. 

Article  Third. 

To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  line  of  battle,  and 
to  align  it. 

635.  The  battalion  marching  in  the  line  of  battle, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  halt  it,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  Battalion.    2.  Halt. 

636.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
halt ;  the  color-rank  and  the  general  guides  will 
remain  in  front ;  but  if  the  colonel  should  not  wish 
immediately  to  resume  the  advance  in  line,  nor  to 
give  a  general  alignment,  he  will  command : 

Color  and  general  guides — Posts. 

637.  At  this  command,  the  color-rank  and  general 
guides  will  retake  their  places  in  line  of  battle,  the 


S26        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  T. 


captains  in  the  left  wing  -will  sliift  to  the  right  of 
their  companies. 

638.  If  the  colonel  should  then  judge  it  necessary 
to  rectify  the  alignment,  he  will  command: 

Captains,  rectify  the  alignment. 

639.  The  captains  will  immediately  cast  an  eye 
towards  the  centre,  align  themselves  accurately,  on 
the  basis  of  the  alignment,  which  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel will  see  well  directed,  and  then  promptly  dress 
their  respective  companies.  The  lieutenant  colonel 
will  admonish  such  captains  as  may  not  be  accurately 
on  the  alignment  by  the  command:  Captain  of  (such^ 
company,  or  captains  of  (such)  companies,  move  up  or 
fall  back. 

640.  Biat  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  tht 
battalion  a  general  alignment,  either  parallel  oi 
oblique,  instead  of  rectifying  it  as  above,  he  will 
move  some  paces  outside  of  one  of  the  general  guides 
(the  right  will  here  be  supposed),  and  caution  the 
right  general  guide  and  the  color-bearer  to  face  him, 
and  then  establish  them,  by  signal  of  the  sword,  on 
the  direction  which  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the  bat- 
talion. As  soon  as  they  shall  be  correctly  established, 
the  left  general  guide  will  place  himself  on  their 
direction,  and  be  assured  in  his  position  by  the  major. 
The  color-bearer  will  carry  the  color-lance  perpen- 
dicularly between  his  eyes,  and  the  two  corporals  of 
his  rank  will  return  to  their  places  in  the  front  rank 
the  moment  he  shall  face  to  the  colonel. 

641.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1.  Guides — On  the  Line. 

642.  At  this  command,  the  right  guide  of  each 
company  in  the  right  wing,  and  the  left  guide  of  each 
eompany  in  the  left,  will  each  place  himself  on  the 
direction  of  the  color-bearer  and  the  two  general 


32G 


PL  G3. 


I — ~- 


T-o  rec.,/^,  or  .lightly  „;,^„,„,„,  .^^^ 

//'If)  (Xo.  6J2}. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-  PART  Y,  327 


guides,  face  to  the  color-bearer,  place  himself  in 
rear  of  the  guide  who  is  next  before  him  at  a  dis- 
tance equal  to  the  front  of  his  company,  and  align 
himself  upon  the  color-bearer  and  the  general  guide 
beyond. 

643.  The  captains  in  the  right  wing  will  shift  to  the 
left  of  their  companies,  except  the  captain  of  the  color- 
company,  who  will  remain  on  its  right,  but  step  into 
the  rear  rank ;  the  captains  in  the  left  wing  will  shift 
to  the  right  of  their  companies. 

644.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  promptly  rectify, 
if  necessary,  the  positions  of  the  guides  of  the  right 
wing,  and  the  major  those  of  the  other;  which  being 
executed,  the  colonel  will  command : 

2.  On  the  centre — Dress. 

645.  At  this  command,  the  companies  will  move  up 
in  quick  time  against  the  guides,  where,  having  arrived, 
each  captain  will  align  his  company  according  to  pre- 
scribed principles,  the  lieutenant  colonel  aligning  the 
color-company. 

646.  If  the  alignment  be  oblique,  the  captains  will 
take  care  to  conform  their  companies  to  it  in  conduct- 
ing them  towards  the  line. 

647.  The  battalion  being  aligned,  the  colonel  wiU 
command : 

3.  Color  and  guides — Posts. 

648.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer,  the  general 
and  company  guides,  and  the  captains  in  the  right 
wing,  will  take  their  places  in  the  line  of  battle,  and 
the  color-bearer  will  replace  the  heel  of  the  color-lance 
against  the  right  hip. 

649.  If  the  new  direction  of  the  line  of  battle  be 
such  that  one  or  more  companies  find  themselves  in 
advance  of  that  line,  the  colonel,  before  establishing 
the  general  guides  on  the  line,  will  cause  such  com- 
panies to  be  moved  to  the  rear,  either  by  the  hack 


ftCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y. 


step,  or  by  first  facing  about,  according  as  tlere  may 
be  less  or  more  ground  to  be  repassed  to  bring  the 
companies  in  rear  of  the  new  direction. 

660.  Yv^ben  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  give  a  general 
alignment,  and  the  color  and  general  guides  are  not 
on  the  line,  he  will  cause  them  to  move  out  by  the 
command : 

1.  Color  and  general  guides — On  the  Line. 

651.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  and  the 
general  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  line,  con* 
forming  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  640. 

Article  Fourth. 
Change  of  direction  in  marching  in  line  of  battle. 

652.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  it  to  change  direction  to  the 
right,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Change  direction  to  the  right.    2.  March  (or  double 
quick — M  arc  h)  . 

653.  At  the  command  march,  the  movement  will 
commence ;  the  color-rank  will  shorten  the  step  to 
fourteen  or  seventeen  inches,  and  direct  itself  circu- 
larly to  the  right,  taking  care  to  advance  the  left 
shoulder,  but  only  insensibly;  the  major  will  place 
himself  before  the  color-bearer,  facing  hira,  and  so 
direct  his  march  that  he  may  describe  an  arc  of  a 
circle  neither  too  large  nor  too  small;  he  will  also  see 
that  the  color-bearer  takes  steps  of  fourteen  or  seven- 
teen inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

654.  The  right  general  guide  will  wheel  on  the  right 
captain  of  the  battalion  as  his  pivot;  the  left  general 
guide  will  circularly  march  in  the  step  of  twenty-eight 
inches  or  thirty-three  inches,  according  to  the  gait, 
and  will  align  himself  upon  the  color-bearer  and  th« 
right  general  guide. 


j 

r  i 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y.  329 

655.  Tlie  corporal  placed  in  tlie  centre  of  the  bat- 
talion, will  take  steps  of  fourteen  or  seventeen  inches, 
and  will  wheel  to  the  right  by  advancing  insensibly 
the  left  shoulder  ;  the  battalion  will  conform  itself  to 
the  movement  of  the  centre  ;  to  this  end,  the  captain 
of  the  color-company,  and  the  captain  of  the  next  to 
the  left,  will  attentively  regulate  their  march,  as  well 
as  the  direction  of  their  shoulders,  on  the  three  centre 
corporals.  All  the  other  captains  will  regulate  the 
direction  of  their  shoulders  and  the  length  of  their 
step  on  this  basis. 

656.  The  men  will  redouble  their  attention  in  order 
not  to  pass  the  line  of  captains. 

657.  In  the  left  wing,  the  pace  will  be  lengthened 
in  proportion  as  the  file  is  distant  from  the  centre ; 
the  captain  of  the  eighth  company  who  closes  the  left 
flank  of  the  battalion  will  take  steps  of  twenty-eight 
or  thirty-three  inches,  according  to  the  gait. 

658.  In  the  right  wing  the  pace  will  be  shortened 
in  proportion  as  the  file  is  distant  from  the  centre ; 
the  captain  who  closes  the  right  flank  will  only  slowly 
turn  in  his  person,  observing  to  yield  ground  a  little 
if  pushed. 

659.  The  colonel  will  take  great  care  to  prevent 
the  centre  of  the  battalion  from  describing  an  arc  of 
a  circle  either  too  great  or  too  small,  in  order  that 
the  wings  may  conform  themselves  to  its  movement, 
lie  will  see  also  that  the  captains  keep  their  companies 
constantly  aligned  upon  the  centre,  so  that  there  may 
be  no  opening  and  no  crowding  of  files.  He  will  en- 
deavor to  prevent  faults,  and,  should  they  occur,  cor- 
rect them  without  noise. 

660.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  before  the  bat- 
talion, will  give  his  attention  to  the  same  objects. 

661.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  direct  march 
to  be  resumed,  he  will  command; 


1.  Forward.    2.  March. 


330        SCHOOL  OP  £HE  BATTALION  PART  V. 


662  At  the  command  march^  the  color-rank,  the 
general  guides,  and  the  battalion  will  resume  the 
direct  march ;  the  major  will  immediately  place  him- 
self thirty  or  forty  paces  in  front,  face  to  the  colonel, 
placed  in  rear  of  the  centre,  who  will  establish  him 
by  signal  of  the  sword  on  the  perpendicular  direction 
which  the  corporal  in  the  centre  of  the  battalion  ought 
to  pursue  ;  the  major  will  immediately  cause  the  color- 
bearer,  if  necessary,  to  incline  to  the  right  or  left,  so 
as  to  be  exactly  opposite  to  his  file;  the  color-bearer 
will  then  take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  him- 
self and  the  major. 

663.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  endeavor  to  give 
to  the  color-company  and  the  next  on  the  left  a  direc- 
tion perpendicular  to  that  pursued  by  the  centre  cor- 
poral; and  all  the  other  companies,  without  preci- 
pitancy, will  conform  themselves  to  that  basis. 

Article  Fifth. 
To  march  in  retreat,  in  line  of  battle. 

664.  The  battalion  being  halted,  if  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  colonel  to  cause  it  to  march  in  retreat,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Face  to  the  rear.    2.  Battalion^  about — Face. 

665.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
face  about;  the  color-rank,  and  the  general  guides, 
if  in  advance,  will  take  their  places  in  line;  the  color- 
bearer  will,  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  leading;  the 
corporal  of  his  file  will  step  behind  the  corporal  next 
on  his  own  right,  to  let  the  color-bearer  pass,  and 
then  step  into  the  front  rank,  now  rear,  to  re-form 
the  color-file ;  the  colonel  will  place  himself  behind 
the  front  rank,  become  the  rear;  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel and  major  will  place  themselves  before  the  rear 
rank,  now  leading. 

666.  The  colonel  will  take  post  forty  paces  behind 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  ii31 


the  color-file,  in  order  to  assure  the  lieutenant  (rolo- 
nel  on  the  perpendicular,  who  will  place  himself  at  a 
like  distance  in  front,  as  prescribed  for  the  advance 
in  line  of  battle. 

667.  If  the  battalion  be  the  one  charged  with  the 
direction,  the  colonel  will  establish  markers  in  the 
manner  indicated  No.  589,  except  that  they  will  face 
to  the  battalion,  and  that  the  first  will  be  placed 
twenty-five  paces  from  the  lieutenant  colonel.  If  the 
markers  be  already  established,  the  officer  charged 
with  replacing  them  in  succession  will  cause  them  to 
face  about,  the  moment  that  the  battalion  executes 
this  movement,  and  then  the  marker  nearest  to  the 
Dattalion  will  hasten  to  the  rear  of  the  two  others. 

668.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

3.  Battalion,  forward. 

669.  At  this  command,  the  color-bearer  will  ad- 
vance six  paces  beyond  the  rank  of  file  closers,  ac- 
companied by  the  two  corporals  of  his  guard  of  that 
rank,  the  centre  corporal  stepping  back  to  let  the 
color-bearer  pass;  the  two  file  closers  nearest  this 
centre  corporal  will  unite  on  him  behind  the  color- 
guard  to  serve  as  a  basis  of  alignment  for  the  line  of 
file  closers ;  the  two  general  guides  will  place  them- 
selves abreast  with  the  color-rank,  the  covering,  ser- 
geants will  place  themselves  in  the  line  of  file  closers, 
Rnd  the  captains  in  the  rear  rank,  now  leading;  the 
captains  in  the  left  wing,  now  right,  will,  if  not 
already  there,  shift  to  the  left  of  their  companies, 
aow  become  the  right. 

670.  The  colonel  will  then  command ; 

4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

671.  The  battalion  will  march  in  retreat  on  the 
Eame  principles  which  govern  the  advance  in  line: 


832      scuooL  or  the  battalion — part  v. 


the  contre  corporal  behind  the  color-bearer  will  march 
exactly  in  his  trace. 

672.  If  it  be  the  directing  battalion,  the  color- 
bearer  will  direct  himself  on  the  markers,  who  will, 
of  their  own  accord,  each  place  himself  in  succession 
behind  the  marker  most  distant,  on  being  approached 
by  the  battalion;  the  officer  charged  with  the  super- 
intendence of  the  markers  will  carefully  assure  them 
on  the  direction. 

673.  In  the  case  of  a  subordinate  battalion,  the 
color-bearer  will  maintain  himself  on  the  perpendicu- 
lar by  means  of  points  taken  on  the  ground. 

674.  The  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and  major 
will  each  discharge  the  same  functions  as  in  the 
advance  in  line. 

675.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  placed  on  the  outside 
of  the  file  closers  of  the  color-company,  will  also 
maintain  the  three  file  closers  of  the  basis  of  align- 
ment in  a  square  with  the  line  of  direction :  the  other 
file  closers  will  keep  themselves  aligned  on  this  basis. 

Article  Sixth. 

To  halt  the  battalion  inarching  in  retreat,  and  to  face 
it  to  the  front. 

676.  The  colonel  having  halted  the  battalion,  and 
wishing  to  face  it  to  the  front,  will  command : 

1.  Face  to  the  front.    2.  Battalion,  about — Face. 

677.  At  the  second  command,  the  color-rank,  gene- 
ral guides,  captains,  and  covering  sergeants,  will  all 
retake  their  habitual  places  in  line  of  battle,  and  the 
color-bearer  will  repass  into  the  front  rank. 

678.  The  battalion  marching  in  line  of  battle  by 
the  front  rank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  mM'ch 
it  in  retreat,  he  will  command : 

1.  Battalion^  right  about,    2.  March. 


.  fl.^^,  battalion  will  face 


1  to 
iame 


lirec- 
).  652 

nove- 
ce  file 
en  or 
keep 
color- 
theiQ- 
e  lieu 


ing. 

be  snp- 
5  one  OT 
to  ploy 
,xt  corn- 
el in  the 
the  ob- 
colonel 


the  third 
Lrn  to  it, 
ink,  to  thi 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION^ — PART  V.  333 

679.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  rear  and  move  off  at  the  same  gait  by  the  reat 
rank.  The  principles  prescribed  Nos.  6G9  and  follow- 
ing will  be  carefully  observed. 

680.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  the  battalion  to 
march  again  by  the  front,  he  will  give  the  same 
commands. 

Article  Seyenth. 
Change  of  direction,  in  marching  in  retreat. 

681.  A  battalion  retiring  in  line  will  change  direc- 
tion by  the  commands  and  means  indicated  No.  652 
and  following;  the  three  file  closers,  united  behind 
the  color-rank,  will  conform  themselves  to  the  move- 
ment of  this  rank,  and  wheel  like  it;  the  centre  file 
closer  of  the  three  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  or 
seventeen  inches,  according  to  the  gait,  and  keep 
himself  steadily  at  the  same  distance  from  the  color- 
bearer;  the  line  of  file  closers  will  conform  them- 
selves to  the  movement  of  its  centre,  and  the  lieu 
tenant  colonel  will  maintain  it  on  that  basis. 

Article  Eighth. 
Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and  retreating. 

682.  The  battalion  advancing  in  line  will  be  sup- 
posed to  encounter  an  obstacle  which  covers  one  or 
more  companies;  the  colonel  will  cause  them  to  ploy 
into  column  at  full  distance,  in  rear  of  the  next  com- 
pany towards  the  color,  which  will  be  executed  in  the 
following  manner.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  ob- 
Btacle  only  covers  the  third  company,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

Third  company,  obstacle, 

683.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  the  third 
company  will  place  himself  in  its  front,  turn  to  it, 
and  command,  1.  Third  company,  by  the  left  flank ,  to  the 


834        SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 


rear  into  column.  2.  Double  quick.  3.  March.  H< 
will  then  hasten  to  the  left  of  his  company. 

684.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  fac< 
to  the  left  in  marching;  the  two  left  files  will  promptly 
disengage  to  the  rear  in  double  quick  time ;  the  left 
guide,  placing  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front  rank, 
will  conduct  it  behind  the  fourth  company,  directing 
himself  parallelly  with  this  company ;  the  captain  of 
the  third  will  himself  halt  opposite  to  the  captain  of 
the  fourth,  and  see  his  company  file  past ;  when  its 
right  file  shall  be  nearly  up  with  him,  he  will  com- 
mand, 1.  Third  company.  2.  By  the  right  flank.  3. 
March.  4.  Guide  rights  and  place  himself  before  the 
centre  of  his  company. 

685.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right,  preserving  the  same  gait,  but  the  moment 
it  shall  be  at  the  prescribed  distance,  its  captain  will 
command ; 

1.  Quick  time.    2.  March. 

686.  This  company  will  thus  follow  in  column  that 
behind  which  it  finds  itself,  and  at  wheeling  distance, 
its  right  guide  marching  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the 
captain  of  that  company. 

687.  As  soon  as  the  third  company  shall  have  faced 
to  the  left,  the  left  guide  of  the  second  will  place  him- 
8elf  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  his  company,  and 
maintain  between  himself  and  the  right  of  the  fourth 
the  space  necessary  for  the  return  into  line  of  the 
third. 

688.  The  obstacle  being  passed,  the  colonel  will 
command: 

Third  company,  forward,  into  line. 

689.  At  this  command,  the  captain,  turning  to  hia 
company,  will  add : 

1.  By  company,  right  half  wheel.    2.  Double  quick. 
3.  March. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y,  335 


690.  At  the  command  marchy  the  company  will  take 
Q  (    '  ^  -        "  -*/M-v  and  execute  a  half  wheel ;  its 
apt'  — ^    2.  Maucil 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y.  335 

690.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will  take 
the  double  quick  step,  and  execute  a  half  wheel ;  its 
captain  will  then  command,  1.  Forward.  2.  Makcil 
Z,  Guide  left.  The  second  command  will  be  given 
when  the  company  shall  have  sufficiently  wheeled. 

691.  At  the  command  march,  the  company  will 
direct  itself  straight,  forward  towards  the  line  of 
battle,  and  retake  its  position  in  it  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  for  the  formation  forward  into 
line  of  battle. 

692.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  obstacle  covers 
several  contiguous  companies  (the  three  companies 
on  the  right, for  example),  the  colonel  will  command: 

1.  Three  right  companies,  obstacle.    2.  Bi/  the  Uft  flanh, 
to  the  rear,  into  column.    3.  Double  quick — March. 

693.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the 
designated  companies  will  each  place  himself  before 
the  centre  of  his  company,  and  caution  it  as  to  the 
movement  about  to  be  executed. 

694.  At  the  command  march,  the  designated  com- 
panies will  face  to  the  left  in  marching,  and  imme- 
diately take  the  double  quick  step  ;  each  captain  will 
cause  the  head  of  his  company  to  disengage  itself  tc 
the  rear,  and  the  left  guide  will  place  himself  at  the 
head  of  the  front  rank;  the  captain  of  the  third 
company  will  conform  himself  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  684  and  following ;  the  captains  of  the  other 
companies  will  conduct  them  by  the  flank  in  rear  of 
the  third,  inclining  towards  the  head  of  the  column ; 
and,  as  the  head  of  each  company  arrives  opposite  to 
the  right  of  the  one  next  before  it  in  column,  its 
captain  will  himself  halt,  see  his  company  file  past, 
and  conform  himself  for  facing  it  to  the  front,  in 
marching,  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  684  and  fol- 
lowing. 

695.  When  the  last  company  in  column  shall  have 
passed  the  obstacle  the  colonel  will  command: 


336 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y. 


1.  Three  right  companies,  forward,  into  line, 

696.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  theso 
three  companies  will  command,  Bij  company,  right  half 
wheel.    The  colonel  will  then  add  : 

1.  Double  quick.    2.  March. 

697.  At  this,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains  of 
the  three  companies,  each  company  will  conform  it- 
self to  what  is  prescribed  No.  690  and  following. 

698.  It  is  supposed,  in  the  foregoing  examples,  that 
the  companies  belonged  to  the  right  wing;  if  they 
make  part  of  the  other,  they  will  execute  the  passage 
of  an  obstacle  according  to  the  same  principles  and 
by  inverse  means. 

699.  When  flank  companies  are  broken  off  to  pass 
an  obstacle,  the  general  guide  on  that  flank  will  place 
himself  six  paces  in  front. of  the  outer  file  of  the 
nearest  company  to  him  remaining  in  line. 

700.  In  the  preceding  movements,  it  has  been  sup- 
posed that  the  battalion  was  marching  in  quick  time; 
but  if  it  be  marching  in  double  quick  time,  and  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  several  contiguous  com- 
panies to  break  to  the  rear,  he  will  first  order  the 
battalion  to  march  in  quick  time;  the  companies  will 
break  as  indicated  No.  692. 

701.  When  the  movement  is  completed,  the  colonel 
will  order  the  double  quick  step  to  be  resumed.  He 
will  also  cause  the  battalion  to  march  in  quick  time 
when  he  shall  wish  to  bring  into  line  the  several  com- 
panies which  are  to  the  rear  in  column ;  the  move- 
ment will  be  executed  as  previously  indicated ;  and 
when  the  last  company  shall  have  nearly  completed 
its  movement,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  double  quick 
step  to  be  resumed. 

702.  In  the  movement  of  a  single  company,  or  of 
several  companies  not  contiguous  to  each  other,  the 
battalion  will  continue  to.  march  in  double  quick 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  337 


time;  but  in  these  cases  the  companies  which  are  to 
ploy  into  column,  or  re-enter  the  line,  will  increase 
the  gait. 

703.  In  the  march  in  retreat,  these  several  move* 
ments  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles  as  if 
the  battalion  marched  by  the  front  rank. 

704.  When  a  battalion,  advancing  in  line  cf  battle, 
shall  be  obliged  to  execute  the  right  about  in  order 
to  retreat,  if  there  be  companies  in  column,  behind 
the  rear  rank,  these  companies  will  also  execute  the 
right  about,  ,put  themselves  in  march,  at  the  same 
time  with  the  battalion,  and  will  thus  precede  it  in 
the  retreat;  they  will  afterwards  successively  put 
themselves  into  line  by  the  oblique  step,  as  the 
ground  may  permit. 

705.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  retreat  in 
doub"'e  quir^k  time,  and  many  contiguous  companies 
be  marching  before  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion, 
the  colonel  will  not  change  the  gait  of  the  battalion 
in  causing  them  to  re-enter  into  line. 

706.  When  the  color-company  shall  be  obliged  to 
execute  the  movement  of  passing  an  obstacle,  the 
color-rank  will  return  into  line  at  the  moment  the 
company  shall  face  to  the  left  or  right ;  the  major 
will  place  himself  six  paces  before  the  extremity  of 
the  company  behind  which  the  color  -  company 
marches  in  column,  in  order  to  give  the  step  and  the 
direction ;  he,  himself,  first  taking  the  step  from  the 
battalion. 

707.  As  soon  as  the  color-company  shall  have  re- 
turned into  line,  the  front  rank  of  the  color-guard 
will  again  move  out  six  paces  in  front  of  the  batta- 
lion, and  take  the  step  from  the  major;  the  latter 
will  immediately  place  himself  twenty  or  thirty  paces 
in  front  of  the  color-bearer,  and  face  to  the  colonel 
placed  behind  the  centre  of  the  battalion,  who  will 
establish  him  on  the  perpendicular-;  and,  as  soon  as 
ht  shall  be  assured  on  it,  the  color-bearer  will  in- 

28 


338        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 


Etantly  take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  him* 
Belf  and  the  major. 

708.  It  is  prescribed,  as  a  general  rule,  that  the 
companies  of  the  right  wing  ought  to  execute  the 
movement  of  passing  obstacles  by  the  left  flank,  and 
the  reverse  for  the  companies  of  the  other  wing;  but 
if  the  obstacle  cover  at  .once  several  companies  of  the 
centre,  each  will  file  into  column  behind  that,  still  in 
line,  and  of  the  same  wing,  which  may  be  the  nearest 
to  it. 

Article  Ninth. 

To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the  right  or  left 
flank. 

709.  When  a  battalion,  retiring  in  line,  shall  en- 
counter a  defile  which  it  must  pass,  the  colonel  will 
halt  the  battalion,  and  face  it  to  the  front. 

710.  It  will  be  supposed  that  the  defile  is  in  rear  of 
the  left  flank,  and  that  its  width  is  sufficient  to  give 
passage  to  a  column  by  platoon;  the  colonel  will 
place  a  marker  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the 
file  closers  at  the  point  around  which  the  subdivisions 
will  have  to  change  direction  in  order  to  enter  the 
defile;  he  will  then  command: 

To  the  rear,  by  the  right  flank,  pass  the  defile, 

711.  The  captain  of  the  first  company  will  imme- 
diately command: 

1.  First  company,  right — Face.    2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

712.  At  the  command  march,tlie  first  company  will 
commence  the  movement ;  the  first  file  will  wheel  to 
the  right,  march  to  the  rear  till  it  shall  have  passed 
four  paces  beyond  the  file  closers,  when  it  will  wheel 
again  to  the  right,,  and  then  direct  itself  straight  for- 
ward towards  the  left  flank.    All  the  other  files  of 


/ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  T.  339 


this  company  will  come  to  wheel  in  succession  at  the 
same  place  where  the  first  had  wheeled. 

713.  The  second  company  will  execute,  in  its  turn, 
the  same  movement,  by  the  commands  of  its  captain, 
who  will  give  the  command  March,  so  that  the  first 
file  of  his  company  may  immediately  follow  the  last 
of  the  first,  without  constraint,  however,  as  to  taking 
the  step  of  the  first ;  the  first  file  of  the  second  com- 
pany will  wheel  to  the  right,  on  its  ground ;  all  the 
other  files  of  this  company  will  come  in  succession  to 
wheel  at  the  same  place.  The  following  companies 
will  execute,  each  in  its  turn,  what  has  just  been  pre- 
Bcribed  for  the  second. 

714.  When,  the  whole  of  the  second  company  shall 
be  on  the  same  direction  with  the  first,  the  captain 
of  the  first  will  cause  it  to  form,  by  platoon,  into 
line,  and  the  moment  that  it  is  in  column,  the  guid^ 
of  the  first  platoon  will  direct  himself  on  the  marker 
around  whom  he  has  to  change  direction  in  order  to 
enter  tho  defile. 

715.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march 
by  the  flank,  directing  itself  parallelly  with  the  line 
of  battle ;  and  it,  in  its  turn,  will  form  by  platoon 
into  line,  when  the  third  company  shall  be  wholly  on 
the  same  direction  with  itself. 

716.  The  following  companies  will  successively 
execute  what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  the  second, 
and  each  will  form  by  platoon  into  line,  when  the 
next  company  shall  be  on  the  same  direction  with 
itself. 

717.  The  first  platoon  of  the  leading  company  hav- 
ing arrived  opposite  to  the  marker  placed  at  the 
entrance  of  the  defile,  will  turn  to  the  left,  and  the 
following  platoons  will  all  execute  this  movement  at 
the  same  point.  As  the  last  companies  will  not  be 
able  to  form  platoons  before  reaching  the  defile,  they 
will  so  direct  themselves,  in  enteriog  it,  as  to  leave 
loom  to  the  left  for  this  movement. 


340        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y. 


718.  The  battalion  will  thus  pass  the  defile  by  pla- 
toon ;  and,  as  the  two  platoons  of  each  company 
Bhall  clear  it,  companies  will  be  successively  formed 
by  the  means  indicated,  school  of  the  company,  No. 
'273  and  following. 

719.  The  head  of  the  column  having  cleared  the 
defile,  and  having  reached  the  distance  at  which  the 
colonel  wishes  to  re-form  line  faced  to  the  defile,  he 
may  cause  the  leading  company  to  turn  to  the  left, 
to  prolong  the  column  in  that  direction,  and  then 
form  it  to  the  left  into  line  of  battle ;  or  he  may  halt 
the  column,  and  form  it  into  line  of  battle  faced  to 
the  rear. 

720.  If  the  defile  be  in  the  rear  of  the  right  flank, 
it  will  be  passed  by  the  left ;  the  movement  will  be 
executed  according  to  the  same  principles,  and  by 
inverse  means. 

721.  If  the  defile  be  too  narrow  to  receive  the  front 
of  a  platoon,  it  will  be  passed  by  the  flank.  Captains 
find  file  closers  will  be  watchful  that  the  files  do  not 
lose  their  distances  in  marching.  Companies  or  pla- 
toons will  be  formed  into  line  as  the  width  of  the  de- 
file may  permit,  or  as  the  companies  shall  successively 
clear  it. 

Article  Tenth. 
To  march  by  the  flank. 

722.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  battalion  to  march 
by  the  flank,  will  command ; 

1.  Battalion.    2.  Ri^ht  (or  left) — Face.    3.  Forward. 
4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

723.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  and 
covering  sergeants  will  place  themselves  as  pre- 
scribed Nos.  186  and  141,  school  of  the  company. 

724.  The  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion  wiU 
place  himself  to  the  left  and  by  the  side  of  the  lasi 
file  of  his  '^ompany,  covering  the  captains  in  file. 


340 


PI. 


T 

hzna 
r~r-n 


L_i_rTD 

To  «^rt;c7?  %  thejlanh  forming  fours  (No.  722). 


SCHOOL  OE  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  341 

725.  The  battalion  having  to  face  by  the  left  flank, 
the  captains,  at  the  second  command,  will  shift 
rapidly  to  the  left  of  their  companies,  and  each  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant  of  the 
company  preceding  his  own,  except  the  captain  of 
the  left  company,  who  will  place  himself  by  the  side 
of  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  battalion.  The 
covering  sergeant  of  the  right  company  will  place 
himself  by  the  right  side  of  the  front  rank  man  of 
the  rearmost  file  of  his  company,  covering  the  cap- 
tains in  file. 

726.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will 
step  off  with  life ;  the  sergeant  placed  before  the 
leading  file  (right  or  left  in  front)  will  be  careful  to 
preserve  exactly  the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step, 
ana  to  direct  nimseif  straight  forward;  lo  this  end, 
he  will  take  points  on  the  ground. 

727.  Whether  the  battalion  march  by  the  right  or 
left  flank,  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself 
abreast  with  the  leading  file,  and  the  major  abreast 
with  the  color-file,  both  on  the  side  of  the  front  rank, 
and  about  six  paces  from  it. 

728.  The  adjutant,  placed  between  the  lieutenant 
colonel  and  the  front  rank,  will  march  in  the  same 
step  with  the  head  of  the  battalion,  and  the  sergeant 
major,  placed  between  the  major  and  the  color- 
bearer,  will  march  in  the  same  step  with  the  ad- 
jutant. 

729.  The  captains  and  file  closers  will  carefully 
see  that  the  files  neither  open  out,  nor  close  too 
much,  and  that  they  regain  insensibly  their  dis- 
tances, if  lost. 

730.  The  colonel  wishing  the  battalion  to  wheel 
by  file,  will  command : 

1.  By  file  right  [ov  lefC),    2.  March. 

731.  The  files  will  wheel  in  succession,  and  au  at 
the  place  where  the  first  had  wheeled,  in  conforming 


342        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  7, 


to  the  principles  prescribed  in  the  school  of  the 
company. 

732.  The  battalion  marching  by  the  flank,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  it  to  halt,  he  will  command  : 

1.  Battalion.    2.  Halt.    3.  Front. 

733.  These  commands  will  be  executed  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  company,  No.  146. 

734.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  by  the  flank,  and 
the  colonel  should  wish  to  cause  it  to  march  in  line, 
either  to  the  front  or  to  the  rear,  the  movements  will 
be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  company. 

Article  Eleventh. 

To  form  the  battalion  on  the  right  or  left,  by  file,  into 
line  of  battle. 

735.  The  battalion  mai^ching  by  the  right  flank, 
when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  on  the  right 
by  file,  he  will  determine  the  line  of  battle,  and  the 
lieutenant  colonel  will  place  two  markers  on  that 
line,  in  conformity  with  what  is  prescribed  No.  415. 

736.  The  head  of  the  battalion  being  nearly  up 
with  the  first  marker,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  On  the  right,     fi^a-,  into  line.    2.  March  (or  double 
quick — March)  . 

737.  At  the  command  march,  the  leading  com- 
pany will  form  itself  on  the  right,  by  fi.le,  into  line 
of  battle,  as  indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company. 
No.  149  ;  the  front  rank  man  of  the  first  file  will  rest 
his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  the  fii^t 
marker;  the  other  companies  will  follow  the  move- 
ment of  the  leading  company ;  each  captain  will 
place  himself  on  the  1  ne  at  the  same  time  with  the 
front  rank  man  of  his  first  file,  and  on  the  right  of 
this  man. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  V.  343 

738.  The  left  guide  of  each  company,  except  the 
leading  one,  will  place  himself  on  the  direction  of  the 
markers,  and  opposite  to  the  left  file  of  his  company, 
at  the  instant  that  the  front  rank  man  of  this  fie 
arrives  on  the  line. 

739.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

740.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  successive 
formation  of  the  battalion,  moving  along  the  front  of 
tvhe  line  of  battle. 

741.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will,  in  succession, 
assure  the  direction  of  the  gaides,  and  see  that  the 
men  of  the  front  rank,  in  placing  themselves  on  the 
line,  do  not  pass  it. 

742.  If  tlie  battalion  march  by  the  left  flank,  the 
movement  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 

Article  Twelfth. 
Changes  of  front. 

Change  of  front  perj)endicidarlij  forward, 

743.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  it  is 
supposed  to  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  a 
change  of  front  forward  on  the  right  company,  and 
that  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new  positions 
be  a  right  angle,  or  a  few  degrees  more  or  less  than 
one ;  he  will  cause  two  markers  to  be  placed,  on  the 
new  direction,  before  the  position  to  be  occupied  by 
that  company,  and  order  its  captain  to  establish  it 
against  the  markers. 

744.  The  captain  of  the  right  company  will  imme- 
diately direct  it  upon  the  markers  by  a  wheel  to  the 
right  on  the  fixed  pivot ;  and,  af  )r  having  halted  it, 
he  will  align  it  by  the  right. 


344        SCHCOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

745.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command; 

I.  Change  front  forward  on  first  company,  2.  By 
company^  right  half  wheel,  3.  Mauch  (or  double 
quick — March). 

746.  At  the  second  command,  each  captain  will 
place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company. 

747.  At  the  third,  each  company  will  wheel  to 
the  right  on  the  fixed  pivot;  the  left  guide  of  each 
will  place  himself  on  its  left  as  soon  as  he  shall  be 
able  to  pass ;  and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge 
that  the  companies  have  sufficiently  wheeled,  he  will 
command : 

4.  Forward,    5.  March.    6.  Guide  right, 

748.  At  the  fifth  command,  the  companies  ceasing 
to  wheel  will  march  straight  forward  ;  at  the  sixth, 
the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right. 

749.  The  right  guide  of  the  second  company  will 
march  straight  forward  until  this  company  shall 
arrive  at  the  point  where  it  should  turn  to  the  right ; 
each  succeeding  right  guide  will  follow  the  file  imme- 
diately before  him  at  the  cessation  of  the  wheel,  and 
will  march  in  the  trace  of  this  file  until  this  company 
shall  turn  to  the  right  to  move  upon  the  line ;  this 
guide  will  then  march  straight  forward. 

750.  The  second  company  having  arrived  opposite 
to  the  left  file  of  the  first,  its  captain  will  cause  it  to 
turn  to  the  right ;  the  right  guide  will  direct  himself 
fio  as  to  arrive  squarely  upon  the  line  of  battle,  and, 
when  he  shall  be  at  three  paces  from  that  line,  the 
captain  will  command: 

1.  Second  company.     2.  Halt. 

751.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt;  the  files  not  yet  in  line  with  the  guide  will 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 


345 


come  into  it  promptly,  the  left  guide  will  place  him- 
self on  the  line  of  battle,  and  as  soon  as  he  is  assured 
in  the  direction  by  the  lieutenant  colonel,  the  captain 
will  align  the  company  by  the  right. 

752.  Each  following  company  will  conform  to 
what  has  j  ist  been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

753.  Tha  formation  ended,  the  colonel  will  com* 
mand : 

Guides — Posts. 

754.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  and  the  colonel 
shall  wish  to  change  front  forward  on  the  first  com- 
pany, and  that  the  angle  formed  by  the  old  and  new 
positions  be  a  right  angle,  he  will  cause  two  markers 
to  be  placed  on  the  new  direction,  before  the  position 
to  be  occupied  by  that  company,  and  will  command : 

1.  Change  front  forward  on  first  company.  2.  By 
company^  right  half  wheel.  3.  March  (or  double 
quick — March). 

755.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  move 
rapidly  before  the  centre  of  their  respective  compa- 
nies ;  the  captain  of  the  first  company  will  com- 
mand: 1.  Right  turn;  2.  Quick  time;  the  captains 
of  the  other  companies  will  caution  them  to  wheel 
to  the  right. 

756.  At  the  command  march^  the  first  company  will 
turn  to  the  right,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed in  the  school  of  the  soldier,  No.  402;  its 
captain  will  halt  it  at  three  paces  from  the  markers, 
and  the  files  in  rear  will  promptly  come  into  line. 
The  captain  will  align  the  company  by  the  right. 

757.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the 
right  on  a  fixed  pivot;  the  left  guides  will  place 
themselves  on  the  left  of  their  respective  companies, 
and  when  the  colonel  shall  judge  they  have  wheeled 
sufficiently,  he  will  command: 


34G        SCHOOL  OF  THE  B ATT ALIOxN —PART  Y. 


4.  Forward.    5.  March.    6.  Guide  right, 

758.  These  ccmmands  will  be  executed  as  indi^ 
cated  No.  746  and  following. 

759.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  change 
front  forward  on  the  eighth  company  according  to 
the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

Change  of  front  j)Grpendicularly  to  the  rear, 

760.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  change  front  to  the 
rear  on  the  right  company,  will  impart  his  purpose 
to  the  captain  of  this  company.  The  latter  will  im- 
mediately face  his  company  about,  wheel  it  to  the 
left  on  the  fixed  pivot,  and  halt  it  when  it  shall  bo 
in  the  direction  indicated  to  him  by  the  colonel ;  the 
captain  will  then  face  his  company  to  the  front,  ^nd 
align  it  by  the  right  against  the  two  markers,  whom 
the  colonel  will  cause  to  be  established  before  the 
right  and  left  files. 

761.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

1.  Change  front  to  the  rear^  on  first  company.  2.  Bat- 
talion, about — Face.  3.  By  company,  left  half  wheeL 
4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

762i  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
except  the  right,  will  face  about. 

763.  At  the  third,  the  captains,  whose  companiea 
have  faced  about,  will  each  place  himself  behind  the 
centre  of  his  company,  two  paces  from  the  front  rank, 
now  the  rear. 

764.  At  the  fourth,  these  companies  will  wheel  to 
the  left  on  the  fixed  pivot  by  the  rear  rank;  the  left 
guide  of  each  will,  as  soon  as  he  is  able  to  pass,  place 
himself  on  the  left  of  the  rear  rank  of  his  company, 
now  become  the  right;  and  when  the  colonel  shall 
judge  that  the  compani:js  have  sufficiently  wheeled, 
he  will  command ; 


34G 


catec 
75 
fron 
the  : 


75! 


7' 
real 
to  t 
me» 
left 
in 
ca] 
ali 
th 
ri} 

w 
1. 


1 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALIOIs — PART  V. 


347 


6.  Forward.    6.  March.    7.  Guide  left, 

765.  At  the  sixth  command,  the  companies  will 
cease  to  wheel,  march  straight  forward  towards  the 
new  line  of  battle,  and,  at  the  seventh,  take  the  touch 
of  the  elbow  towards  the  left. 

766.  The  guide  of  each  company  on  its  right  flank, 
become  left,  will  conform  himself  to  the  principles 
prescribed  No.  748: 

767.  The  second  company,  from  the  right,  having 
arrived  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  first,  will  turn  to 
the  left ;  the  guide  will  so  direct  himself  as  to  arrive 
parallelly  with  the  line  of  battle,  cross  that  line,  and 
when  the  front  rank,  now  in  the  rear,  shall  be  three 
paces  beyond  it,  the  captain  will  command:  1.  Second 
company;  2.  Halt. 

768.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will 
halt;  the  files  which  may  not  yet  be  in  line  with  the 
guide  will  promptly  come  into  it;  the  captain  will 
cause  the  company  to  face  about,  and  then  align  it  by 
the  right. 

769.  All  the  other  companies  will  execute  what  has 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second,  each  as  it  suc- 
cessively arrives  opposite  to  the  left  of  the  company 
that  precedes  it  on  the  new  line  of  battle. 

770.  The  formation  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command ;  . 

Guides — Posts. 

771.  The  colonel  will  cause  a  change  of  front  oir 
the  left  company  of  the  battalion  to  the  rear,  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

772.  In  changes  x)f  front,  the  colonel  will  give  a 
general  superintendence  to  the  movement. 

773.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the  direct  ion 
of  the  guides  as  they  successively  move  out  on  the 
line  of  battle,  conforming  himself  to  what  has  been 
prescribed  in  the  successive  formations. 


348        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y. 


Eemarks  on  changes  of  front. 

774.  When  the  new  direction  is  perpendicular,  CT 
nearly  so,  to  that  of  the  battalion,  the  companies 
ought  to  make  about  a  half  wheel  (the  eighth  of  the 
circle)  before  marching  straight  forward ;  but  when 
th^se  two  lines  are  oblique  to  each  other,  the  smaller 
the  angle  which  they  form,  the  less  ought  the  com- 
panies to  wheel.  It  is  for  the  colonel  to  judge,  ac- 
cording to  the  angle,  the  precise  time  when  he  ought 
to  give  the  command  march  after  the  caution  forward, 
and  if  he  cannot  catch  the  exact  moment,  the  word 
of  execution  should  rather  be  given  a  little  too  soon, 
than  an  instant  too  late. 

776.  When  the  old  and  the  new  lines  form  an  angle 
of  forty-five  or  fewer  degrees,  the  colonel  will  find  it 
necessary  to  arrest  the  wheel  of  the  companies  when 
the  marching  flanks  shall  have  taken  but  a  few  paces, 
or,  it  may  be,  have  but  disengaged,  respectively,  from 
the  fixed  pivots  of  the  next  companies ;  and  in  all 
such  cases  the  companies  will  arrive  so  nearly 
parallel  to  the  new  line  as  to  be  able  to  align  them- 
selves upon  it  without  the  intermediate  turn  to  the 
right  or  left :  to  execute  the  movement  under  either 
circumstance  supposed,  the  colonel  will  command : 

Oblique  change  of  front,  forward  (or  to  the  rear)  on  (such 
company). 

Article  Thirteenth. 

To  ploy  tt*^  battalion  into  column  doubled  on  the 
centre. 

776.  This  morement  consists  in  ploying  the  corre- 
sponding companies  of  the  right  and  left  wings  into 
column  at  company  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  in 
rear  of  the  two  centre  companies,  according  to  the 
principles  prescribed  Article  Third,  Part  Second,  of 
this  School. 


^^^^ 


P  71 


'""Hi;iliilii!ii  liiliillNiiiiliiillMllF"^ 


T--~-:7-v:::::::::::::::::5  P 


GMffl 


Ri(jht  iiiTd  hu('  whi"^l .  li'i r  ,\'i.'iji:iiiii's       rJu^  riijlit  Im,-  <>('4 


C'Opyri.jht  secured 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  349 


777.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  form  the  double 
column  at  company  distance  (the  battalion  being  in 
Ime  of  battle),  will  command : 

1.  Double  columrij  at  half  distance.  2.  Battalion,  in- 
wards— Face.   3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

778.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  place 
themselves  two  paces  in  front  of  their  respective 
companies  ;  the  captains  of  the  two  centre  companies 
will  caution  them  to  stand  fast,  and  the  other  cap- 
tains will  caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  left 
and  right,  respectively.  The  covering  sergeants  will 
step  into  the  front  rank. 

779.  At  the  second  command,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies  will  stand  fast ;  the  others  of  the  right 
wing  will  face  to  the  left,  and  the  others  of  the  left 
wing  will  face  to  the  right ;  each  captain  whose  com- 
pany has  faced  will  hasten  to  break  to  the  rear  the 
"two  files  at  the  head  of  his  company  ;  the  left  guide 
of  each  right  company,  and  the  right  guide  of  each 
left  company,  will  each  place  himself  at  the  head 
of  its  front  rank,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  of  his 
guide. 

780.  At  the  command  march,  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies,  which  are  to  form  the  first  division,  will 
stand  fast ;  the  senior  captain  of  the  two  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  the  division,  and  com- 
mand:  Guide  right;  the  junior  captain  will  place 
himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two  companies, 
and  the  left  guide  of  the  left  company  will  place  him- 
self in  the  front  rank  on  the  left  of  the  division,  as 
soon  as  he  shall  be  able  to  pass. 

781.  All  the  other  companies,  conducted  by  their 
captains,  will  step  oif  with  life  to  arrange  themselves 
in  column  at  company  distance,  each  company  behind 
the  preceding  one  in  the  column  of  the  same  wing,  so 
that,  in  the  right  wing,  the  tlrrd  may  be  next  behind 
the  fourth,  the  second  next  to  the  third,  and  so  on  to 

29 


350       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

the  right  company ;  and,  in  the  left  wing,  the  sixth 
may  be  next  behind  the  fifth,  the  seventh  next  to  the 
sixth,  and  so  on  to  the  left  company  of  the  battalion. 

782.  The  coiTesponding  companies  of  the  two  winga 
will  unite  into  divisions  in  arranging  themselves  in 
column;  an  instant  before  the  union,  at  the  centre  of 
the  column,  the  left  guides  of  right  companies  will 
pass  into  the  line  of  file  closers,  and  each  captain 
will  command:  1.  Such  company ;  2.  Halt;  3.  Front, 

783.  At  the  second  command,  which  will  be  given 
at  the  instant  of  union,  each  company  will  halt ;  ai 
the  third,  it  will  face  to  the  front.  The  senior  cap- 
tain in  each  division  will  place  himself  on  its  right, 
and  command.  Right — Dress,  and  the  junior  captaiti 
will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the  two 
companies.  The  division  being  aligned,  its  chief  will 
command  Front,  and  take  his  position  two  paces  be- 
fore its  centre. 

784.  The  column  being  thus  formed,  the  divisions 
will  take  the  respective  denominations  of  first,  second, 
third,  &c.,  according  to  position  in  the  column,  begin- 
ning at  the  front. 

785.  The  lieutenant  colonel,  who  at  the  second 
command  given  by  the  colonel  will  have  placed  him- 
self at  a  little  more  than  company  distance  in  rear 
of  the  right  guide  of  the  first  division,  will  assure  the 
right  guides  on  the  direction  as  they  successively 
arrive,  by  placing  himself  in  their  rear. 

786.  The  music  will  pass  to  the  rear  of  the  column. 

787.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  form  the 
double  column  at  company  distance  without  halting 
the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Double  column,  at  half  distance.  2.  Battalion  bp  the 
right  and  left  flanks,  3.  March  (or  double  quick — 
— March). 

788.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  move 
briskly  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company  ;  the 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  351 

captains  of  the  fourth  and  fifth  will  caution  their 
companies  to  march  straight  forward ;  the  other  cap- 
tains will  caution  their  companies  to  face  to  the  right 
and  left. 

789.  At  the  command  march^  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward ; 
the  senior  captain  will  place  himself  before  the  centre 
of  his  division,  and  command,  Guide  right;  the  junior 
captain  will  place  himself  in  the  interval  between  the 
two  companies.  The  left  guide  of  the  fifth  company 
will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the 
division.  The  men  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to 
the  right.  The  color  and  general  guides  will  retake 
their  places.  The  three  right  companies  will  face  to 
the  left,  and  the  three  left  companies  will  face  to  the 
right.  Each  captain  will  break  to  the  rear  two  files 
at  the  head  of  his  company ;  the  left  guides  of  the 
right  companies,  and  the  right  guides  of  the  left  com- 
panies, will  each  place  himself  at  the  head  of  the  front 
rank  of  his  company,  and  the  captain  by  the  side  @f 
bis  guide. 

790.  The  third  and  sixth  companies  will  enter  the 
column  and  direct  themselves  parallelly  to  the  first 
division.  Each  of  the  other  companies  will,  in  like 
manner,  place  itself  behind  the  company  of  the  wing 
to  which  it  belongs,  and  will  be  careful  to  gain  as 
much  ground  as  possible  towards  the  head  of  the 
column. 

791.  The  corresponding  companies  of  each  wing 
will  unite  into  divisions  on  taking  their  positions  in 
column,  and  each  captain,  the  instant  the  head  of  his 
company  arrives  at  the  centre  of  the  column,  will 
command :  1.  Such  company  by  the  right  (or  left)  flanh, 
2.  March.  The  senior  captain  of  the  two  companies 
will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  di- 
vision, and  commind.  Guide  right;  the  junior  captain 
will  place  himsel;  in  the  interval  between  the  two 
companies.    The  two  ccmpanies  thus  formed  into  a 


352 


SCHOOL  OF  inE  BATTALION — FART  V. 


division  will  take  the  touch  of  elbows  to  the  rights 
and  when  each  division  has  gained  its  proper  dis- 
tance, its  chief  will  cause  it  to  march  in  quick  time. 

792.  When  the  battalion  presents  an  odd  number 
of  companies,  the  formation  will  be  made  in  like  man- 
ner, and  the  company  on  either  flank  which  shall  find 
itself  without  a  correspondiug  one,  will  place  itself 
at  company  distance  behind  the  wing  to  which  it  be- 
longs. 

793.  The  double  column,  closed  in  mass,  will  be 
formed  according  to  the  same  principles  and  by  the 
same  commands,  substituting  the  indication,  closed  in 
mass,  for  that  of  at  half  distance. 

794.  The  double  column  never  being  formed  when 
two  or  more  battalions  are  to  be  in  one  general  column, 
it  will  habitually  take  the  guide  to  the  right,  some- 
times to  the  left,  or  in  the  centre  of  the  column;  in 
the  last  case,  the  command  will  be,  Guide  centre.  The 
column  will  march  and  change  direction  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  a  simple  column  by 
division. 

795.  The  double  column  at  company  distance  will 
be  closed  in  mass,  or,  if  in  mass,  will  take  half  dis- 
tance, by  the  commands  and  means  indicated  for  a 
simple  column  by  division. 

Deployment  of  the  double  column,  faced  to  the  front. 

796.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  deploy  the  double 
column,  will  place  a  marker  respectively  before  the 
right  and  left  files  of  the  first  division,  and  a  third 
before  the  left  file  of  the  right  company,  same  di- 
vision ;  which  being  done,  he  will  cause  the  two 
general  guides  to  spring  out  on  the  alignment  of  the 
markers  a  little  beyond  the  points  at  which  the  re- 
Bpective  flanks  of  the  battalion  ought  to  rest ;  he  wilJ 
then  command  : 

1.  Deploy  column.    2.  Battalion  outwards — Face. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — Makch). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION  PART  V,  353 


797.  The  column  will  deploy  itself  on  the  two  com- 
panies at  its  head,  according  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed for  the  deployment  of  columns  in  mass.  The 
captains  of  these  companies  will  each,  at  the  com- 
mand march^  place  himself  on  the  right  of  his  own 
company,  and  align  it  by  the  right;  the  captain  of 
the  fourth  will  then  place  himself  in  the  rear  rank, 
and  the  covering  sergeant  in  the  rank  of  file  closers, 
at  the  moment  the  captain  of  the  third  shall  come  to 
its  left  to  align  it. 

798.  The  deployment  being  ended,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

799.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  to  cause  the 
fire  to  commence  pending  the  deployment,  he  will 
give  an  order  to  that  elFect  to  the  captains  of  the 
fourth  and  fifth  companies,  and  the  fire  will  be  exe- 
cuted according  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  438. 

800.  The  battalion  being  in  double  column  and  in 
march,  if  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  deploy  it  without 
halting  the  column,  he  will  cause  three  markers  to  be 
posted  on  the  line  of  battle,  and  when  the  head  of 
the  column  shall  arrive  near  the  markers,  he  will 
command : 

1.  Deploy  column,    2.  Battalioriy  by  the  right  and  left 
flanks.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

801.  The  column  will  deploy  on  the  two  leading 
companies,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for 
the  deployment  of  a  close  column,  No.  633  and  fol- 
lowing ;  at  the  command  march,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  halt  it,  and  the  captains  of  the  fourth 
and  fifth  companies  will  align  their  companies  by  ^ 
the  right. 

802.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  and  it  be  the  wish 
of  the  colonel  to  deploy  the  column  and  to  continue 
to  march  in  the  order  of  battle,  he  will  not  cause 
markers  to  be  established  at  the  head  of  the  column. 


354       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y, 

The  movement  -will  be  executed  by  the  commands  and 
means  indicated  No.  800,  observing  what  follows.  At 
the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
command,  Quick  time.  At  the  command  march,  the 
first  division  will  continue  to  march  in  quick  time , 
the  colonel  will  command,  Guide  centre.  The  captains 
of  the  fourth  and  fifth  companies,  the  color,  and  the 
men,  will  immediately  conform  to  the  principles  of 
the  march  in  line  of  battle.  The  companies  will  take 
the  quick  step  by  the  command  of  their  captains,  as 
they  successively  arrive  in  line.  The  movement  com- 
pleted, the  colonel  may  cause  the  battalion  to  march 
in  double  quick  time. 

To  form  the  double  column  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to 
the  right  or  left. 

803.  The  double  column,  being  at  company  distance 
and  at  a  halt,  may  be  formed  into  line  of  battle  faced 
to  the  right  or  left ;  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to 
form  it  faced  to  the  right,  he  will  command ; 

].  Eiffht  into  line  wheel,  left  companies  on  the  right  into 
line.  2.  Battalion,  guide  right,  3.  March  (or  doubU 
quick — March). 

804.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  before  the  centre  of  his  company ;  the  right 
companies  will  be  cautioned  that  they  will  have  to 
wheel  to  the  right  into  line,  the  left  companies  that 
they  will  have  to  march  straight  forward. 

805.  At  the  second  command,  the  left  guide  of  the 
f earth  company  will  place  himself  briskly  on  the 
direction  of  the  right  guides  of  the  column,  face  to 
them,  and  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  last  files  of 
his  company  when  in  line  of  battle ;  the  lieutenant 
colonel  will  assure  him  in  that  position. 

806.  At  the  command  march,  briskly  repeated  by 
all  the  captains,  the  right  companies  will  form  to  the 
right  into  line  of  battle,  the  left  companies  will  put 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  355 

themselves  in  march  in  order  to  form  on  the  right  into 
line  of  battle ;  these  formations  will  be  executed  by 
the  means  indicated  No.  391  and  following,  No.  416 
and  following ;  the  lieutenant  colonel  will  assure  the 
guides  of  the  left  wing  on  the  line  of  battle  as  they 
Buccessively  come  upon  it. 

807.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

1,  Right  into  line  wheel.  2.  Left  companies^  on  the 
right  into  line.  3.  Battalion,  guide  right.  4.  March 
(or  double  quick — March). 

808.  At  the  first  command,  each  captain  will  place 
himself  promptly  before  the  centre  of  his  company ; 
the  right  companies  will  be  cautioned  that  they  will 
have  to  wheel  to  the  right,  and  the  left  companies 
that  they  will  have  to  form  on  the  right  into  line. 

809.  At  the  command  march.,  briskly  repeated,  the 
right  companies  will  form  to  the  right  into  line,  and 
the  left  companies  on  the  right  into  line.  These  form- 
ations will  be  executed  as  prescribed  Nos.  402,  417, 
and  following. 

810.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  move  the  bat- 
talion forward,  at  the  moment  the  right  companies 
have  completed  the  wheel,  he  will  command : 

5.  Forward.    6.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

811.  At  the  command  forward,  the  captains  of  the 
right  companies  will  command.  Quick  time.  At  the 
command  march,  the  right  companies  will  cease  to 
wheel,  and  march  straight  forward.  The  colonel  will 
then  add : 

7.  Guide  centre. 

812.  The  movement  of  the  left  companies  will  be 
executed  in  double  quick  time  as  prescribed  above, 
and  as  they  arrive  on  the  line  each  captain  will  cause 
his  company  to  march  in  quick  time. 


356         SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 


818.  The  column  may  be  formed  faced  to  the  left 
into  line  of  battle  according  to  the  same  principles. 

814.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass  instead  of  at 
company  distance,  these  movements  will  be  executed 
according  to  the  principles  prescribed  Nos.  417,  502, 
and  510. 

Eemark  on  the  deployment  of  the  double  column. 

815.  The  depth  of  the  double  column,  at  company 
distance,  being  inconsiderable,  closing  it  in  mass,  if 
at  a  halt,  in  order  to  deploy  it,  may  be  dispensed 
with ;  but  if  it  be  in  march,  it  will  be  preferable  to 
cause  it  so  to  close,  in  halting,  before  deploying. 

816.  The  double  column  will  be  deployed  habitually 
on  the  centre  companies,  but  the  colonel  may  some- 
times deploy  it  on  any  interior  company,  or  on  the 
first  or  eighth  company. 

Article  Fourteenth. 
Dispositions  against  Cavalry. 

817.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  company,  at 
full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  it  into  square,  he  will  first 
cause  divisions  to  be  formed;  which  being  done,  ho 
will  command : 

1.  To  form  square.    2.  To  half  distance,  close  column, 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

818.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  clos€ 
to  company  distance,  the  second  division  taking  its 
distance  from  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  division. 

819.  At  the  moment  of  halting  the  fourth  division, 
the  file  closers  of  each  company  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed, passing  by  the  outer  flank  of  their  companies, 
will  place  themselves  two  paces  before  the  front  rank 
©pposite  to  their  respective  places  in  line  of  battle, 
and  face  towards  the  head  of  the  column 


35G 


Fl.  72. 


I  I 

i  ! 
i      1^  IIP 

T'o  /orm  square,  to  half  distance,  close  column  (No.  818). 


c  u  i-c  C-.  0  n  n  n  CT 

1-: 

0        \  / 

r-  n  r  ->'n'c  r-  n  c  O  I"! 

:i,llllliiill!lliillliilll^lllillll!llllllllli:liilUlti 

 i-i.:::.:  

Form  square,  riyht  and  left  into  line,  u  Jieel  (Xo.  822). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTAL:GN — PART  V,  357 

820.  At  the  commencement  of  the  movement,  the 
major  will  place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  column 
abreast  with  the  first  division ;  the  buglers  formed  in 
two  ranks  will  place  themselves,  at  platoon  distance, 
behind  the  inner  platoons  of  the  second  division. 

821.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
may,  according  to  circumstances,  put  the  column  in 
march  or  cause  it  to  form  square ;  if  he  wish  to  do 
the  latter,  he  will  command: 

1.  Fonn  square,    2.  Right  and  left  into  limy  wheel. 

822.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant  colonel, 
facing  to  the  left  guides,  and  the  major,  facing  to 
those  of  the  right,  will  align  them,  from  the  front, 
on  the  respective  guides  of  the  fourth  division,  who 
will  stand  fast,  holding  up  their  pieces,  inverted, 
perpendicularly;  the  right  guides,  in  placing  them- 
selves on  the  direction,  will  take  their  exact  dis- 
tances. 

823.  At  the  second  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  all  the  captains 
of  the  second  and  third  divisions  will  place  them- 
selves before  the  centres  of  their  respective  com 
panics,  and  caution  them  that  they  will  have  to  wheel, 
the  right  companies  to  the  right,  and  the  left  com- 
panies to  the  left  into  line  of  battle. 

824.  The  color-bearer  will  step  back  into  the  line 
of  file  closers,  opposite  to  his  place  in  line  of  battle, 
and  will  be  replaced  by  the  corporal  of  his  file  who 
is  in  the  rear  rank ;  the  corporal  of  the  same  file  who 
is  in  the  rank  of  file  closers  will  step  into  the  rear 
rank. 

825.  The  chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  com- 
mand: 1.  Fourth  division,  forward ;  2.  Guide  left,  o^ndi 
place  himself  at  the  same  time  two  paces  outside  of 
its  left  flank. 

826.  These  dispositions  ended,  the  colonet  wilT 
command : 


358        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 


Mabch  (or  double  quick — March). 

827.  At  this  command,  briskly  repeated,  the  first 
division  will  stand  fast ;  but  its  right  file  will  face  to 
the  right,  and  its  left  file  to  the  left. 

828.  The  companies  of  the  second  and  third  di- 
visions will  wheel  to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  and 
the  buglers  will  advance  a  space  equal  to  the  front 
of  a  company. 

829.  The  fourth  division  will  close  up  to  form  the 
square,  and  when  it  shall  have  closed,  its  chief  will 
halt  it,  face  it  about,  and  align  it  by  the  rear  rank 
upon  the  guides  of  the  division,  who  will,  for  this 
purpose,  remain  faced  to  the  front.  The  junior  cap- 
tain will  pass  into  the  rear  rank,  now  become  the 
front,  and  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  left  company 
will  place  himself  behind  him  in  the  front  rank, 
become  rear.  The  file  closers  will,  at  the  same  time, 
close  up  a  pace  on  the  front  rank,  and  the  outer  file 
on  each  flank  of  the  division  will  face  outwards. 

830.  The  square  being  formed,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

Guides — Posts. 

831.  At  this  command,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and 
fourth  divisions,  as  well  as  the  guides,  will  enter  the 
square. 

832.  The  captains  whose  companies  have  fo/mcd 
to  the  right  into  line  will  remain  on  the  left  of  their 
companies;  the  left  guide  of  each  of  those  companies 
will,  in  the  rear  rank,  cover  his  captain,  and  the 
covering  sergeant  of  each  will  place  himself  as  a  file 
closer  behind  the  right  file  of  his  company. 

833.  The  field  and  staff  will  enter  the  squnre,  the 
lieutenant  colonel  placing  himself  behind  the  left, 
and  the  major  behind  the  right,  of  the  first  division. 

834.  If  the  battalion  present  ten  instead  of  eight 
companies,  the  fourth  division  will  make  the  same 
movemonis  prescribed  above  for  the  second  and  third 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION- -PART  V. 


358  ^ 


divisions,  and  the  fifth  the  movements  prescribed  for 
the  fourth  division. 

835.  A  battalion  ought  never  to  present,  near  the 
enemy's  cavalry,  an  odd  company.  The  odd  com- 
pany, under  that  circumstance,  ought,  when  the 
battalion  is  under  arms,  to  be  consolidated,  for  the 
time,  with  the  other  companies. 

836.  The  fronts  of  the  square  will  be  designated 
as  follows :  the  first  division  will  always  be  the  first 
front;  the  last  division,  the  fourth  front;  the  right 
companies  of  the  other  divisions  will  form  the  s^econd 
front;  and  the  left  companies  of  the  same  divisions 
the  third  front. 

837.  A  battalion  being  in  column  by  company,  at 
full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  in  march,  when  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square,  he  will  cause  this 
movement  to  be  executed  by  the  commands  and 
means  indicated  No.  817. 

838.  At  the  command  march,  the  column  will  close 
to  company  distance,  as  is  prescribed  No.  278. 
When  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division  shall  command. 
Quick,  march,  the  file  closers  of  this  division  will 
place  themselves  before  the  front  rank. 

839.  The  major  and  the  buglers  will  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed  No.  820. 

840.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square,  he 
will  command : 

1.  Form  square.    2.  Eir/ht  and  left  into  line,  ivheeL 
3.  March. 

841.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  it  to  halt;  all  the  captains  of 
the  second  and  tliird  divisions  will  rapidly  place 
themselves  liefore  the  centres  of  their  respective  com- 
panies, and  caution  them  that  they  will  have  to  wheel, 
the  right  companies  to  the  right,  and  the  left  com- 
panies to  the  left  into  line.  The  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  caution  it  to  continue  its  march,  and 


*  360        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

will  bai5ten  to  its  left  flank.  At  the  third  command, 
briskly  repeated,  the  chief  of  the  first  division  will 
halt  his  division  and  align  it  to  the  left,  the  outer 
files  will  face  to  the  right  and  left,  the  rest  of  the 
movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  828  and 
following. 

842.  The  lieutenant  colonel  and  the  major,  at  the 
command  marcli,  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed 
No.  822. 

843.  If  the  battalion,  before  the  square  is  formed, 
be  in  double  column,  the  two  leading  companies  will 
form  the  first  front,  the  two  rear  companies  the 
fourth :  the  other  companies  of  the  right  half  batta- 
lion will  form  the  second,  and  those  of  the  left  half 
battalion  the  third  front. 

844.  The  first  and  fourth  fronts  will  be  commanded 
by  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and  fourth  divisions ;  each 
of  the  other  two  by  its  senior  captain, 

845.  The  commander  of  each  front  will  place  him- 
self four  paces  behind  its  present  rear  rank,  and  will 
be  replaced  momentarily  in  the  command  of  his  com- 
pany by  the  next  in  rank  therein. 

846.  If  the  column  be  at  full  distance,  instead  of 
at  company  distance,  as  has  been  supposed,  the 
square  will  be  formed  in  the  manner  prescribed  No. 
817  or  838,  and  following ;  and  the  dispositions  indi- 
cated Nos.  819  and  820  will  be  executed  at  the  com- 
mand form,  square. 

847.  If  the  column  by  division,  whether  double  or 
simple,  be  in  mass,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form 
it  into  square,  he  will  first  cause  it  to  take  company 
distance  \  to  this  effect,  he  will  command : 

1  To  form  square.   2.  By  the  head  of  column^  take  half 
distance. 

848.  The  divisions  will  take  half  distance  by  the 
means  indicated  No  324  and  following.    What  ia 


SCHOOL  OP  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  361 

prescribed  No.  820  will  be  executed  as  the  first  and 
second  divisions  are  put  in  motion. 

849.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  the  moment 
the  third  division  shall  have  its  distance.  As  soon  as 
the  column  is  halted,  the  dispositions  indicated  No. 

819  will  be  executed,  and  when  these  are  completed, 
the  colonel  may  proceed  to  form  square. 

850.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  he  will  also,  in 
the  first  place,  cause  company  distance  to  be  taken, 
and,  for  this  purpose,  will  command : 

"I.  To  form  square.    2.  By  the  head  of  column^  takt 
half  distance.  3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

851.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
No.  330  and  following.     What  is  prescribed  No. 

820  will  be  executed  as  the  first  and  second  divisions 
are  put  in  motion. 

852.  The  colonel  will  proceed  to  form  square  the 
moment  the  third  division  shall  have  its  distance ;  at 
the  command  form  square,  the  dispositions  indicated 
No.  819  will  be  executed.  If  it  be  intended  merely 
to  dispose  the  column  for  square,  the  colonel  will  not 
halt  the  column  until  the  las,t  division  has  its  dis- 
tance. 

853.  In  a  simple  column,  left  in  front,  these  several 
movements  will  be  executed  according  to  the  same 
principles  and  by  inverse  means  ;  but  the  fronts  of 
the  square  will  have  the  same  designations  as  if  the 
right  of  the  column  were  in  front,  that  is,  the  first 
division  will  constitute  the  first  front,  and  thus  of  the 
other  subdivisions. 

854.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  dis- 
tance less  than  thirty  paces,  he  will  command : 

1.  Bij  (such.)  front,  forward.    2.  March. 

855.  If  it  be  supposed  that  the  advance  be  macH 


362        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 


by  the  first  front,  the  chief  of  this  front  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  First  division,  forward.    2.  Guide  centre. 

'856.  The  chief  of  the  second  front  will  face  his 
front  to  the  left.  The  captains  of  the  companies 
composing  this  front  will  place  themselves  outside, 
and  on  the  right  of  their  left  guides,  who  will  replace 
them  in  the  front  rank  ;  the  chief  of  the  third  front 
will  face  bis  front  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  in 
this  front  will  place  themselves  outside,  and  on  the 
left  of  their  covering  sergeants  ;  the  chief  of  the 
fourth  front  will  face  his  front  about,  and  command  : 
1.  Fourth  division,  forward;  2.  Guide  centre.  The 
captain  who  is  in  the  centre  of  the  first  front  will  be 
charged  with  the  direction  of  the  march,  and  will 
regulate  himself  by  the  means  indicated  in  the  school 
of  the  company.  No.  89. 

857.  At  the  command  march,  the  square  will  put 
itself  in  motion ;  the  companies  marching  by  the 
flank  will  be  careful  not  to  lose  their  distances.  The 
chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  cause  his  division  to 
keep  constantly  closed  on  the  flanks  of  the  second 
and  third  fronts. 

858.  This  movement  will  only  be  executed  in  quick 
^me. 

859.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself  in 
rear  of  the  file  of  direction  in  order  to  regulate  hia 
march. 

860.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  halt  the  square, 
he  will  command ; 

1.  Battalion.    2.  Halt. 

861.  At  the  second  command,  the  square  will  halt; 
the  fourth  front  will  face  about  immediately,  and 
without  further  command ;  the  second  and  third 
fronts  will  face  outwards ;  the  captains  of  eompaniea 
will  resume  their  places  as  in  square. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  363 

862.  In  moving  the  square  forward  by  the  second, 
third,  or  fourth  fronts,  the  same  rules  will  be  observed. 

863.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  square,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cause  it  to  advance  a  greater 
distance  than  thirty  paces,  he  will  command : 

1.  Form  column, 

864.  The  chief  of  the  first  front  will  command ; 
1.  First  division  forward.    2.  Guide  left. 

865.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will 
caution  it  to  stand  fast ;  the  commander  of  the  second 
front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  left,  and  then  com- 
mand, Bi/  company^  by  file  left.  The  commander  of 
the  third  front  will  cause  it  to  face  to  the  right,  and 
then  comxmand,  By  company^  by  file  right.  At  the 
moment  the  second  and  third  fronts  face  to  the  left 
and  right,  each  captain  will  cause  to  break  to  the  rear 
the  two  leading  files  of  his  company. 

866.  These  dispositions  being  made,  the  colonel 
will  command : 

3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

867.  At  this  command,  the  first  front  will  march 
forward ;  its  chief  will  halt  it  when  it  shall  have 
advanced  a  space  equal  to  half  its  front,  and  align  it 
by  the  left. 

868.  The  corresponding  companies  of  the  second 
and  third  fronts  will  wheel  by  file  to  the  left  and 
right,  and  march  to  meet  each  other  behind  the  centre 
of  the  first  division,  and  the  moment  they  unite,  the 
captain  of  each  company  will  halt  his  company  and 
face  it  to  the  front.  The  division  being  re-formed, 
its  chief  will  align  it  by  the  left. 

869.  The  commander  of  the  fourth  front  will  cause 
it  to  face  about :  its  file  closers  will  remain  before  ihe 
front  rank. 

870.  The  column  being  thus  re-formed,  the  colonel 

30 


364       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

may  put  it  in  marcli  by  tlie  commands  and  means 
prescribed  No.  164  and  following;  the  right  guides 
will  preserve  company  distance  exactly  as  the  direct- 
ing guides. 

871.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  square, 
he  will  give  the  commands  indicated  No.  840. 

872.  To  cause  the  square  to  march  in  retreat  a  dis- 
tance greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will  first 
cause  column  to  be  formed  as  indicated  No.  863 ;  and 
when  formed,  he  will  cause  it  to  face  by  the  rear 
rank ;  to  this  end,  he  will  command : 

1.  To  march  in  retreat.    2.  Face  by  the  rear  rank.  3. 
Battalion  about — Face. 

873.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the 
interior  divisions'  will  place  themselves,  passing  by 
the  outer  flanks  of  their  respective  companies,  behind 
the  front  rank  opposite  to  their  places  in  line  of  bat- 
tle ;  the  file  closers  of  the  other  divisions  will  stand 
fast. 

874.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
about ;  each  chief  of  division  will  place  himself  before 
its  rear  rank,  become  front,  passing  through  the  in- 
terval between  its  two  companies;  the  guides  will 
step  into  the  rear  rank,  now  front. 

875.  The  column  being  thus  disposed,  the  colonel 
may  put  it  in  march,  or  cause  it  to  form  square  as  if 
it  were  faced  by  the  front  rank.  The  square  being 
formed,  its  fronts  will  preserve  the  same  designations 
they  had  when  faced  by  the  front  rank. 

876.  The  battalion  being  in  square  by  the  rear 
rank,  when  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in 
retreat  or  in  advance,  a  distance  less  than  thirty 
paces,  he  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  854 
and  following ;  otherwise,  he  will  re-form  the  column 
accordiDg  to  the  principles  prescribed  No.  863,  by 
marching  forward  the  fourth  front.  ' 

877.  If  the  square  is  to  be  marched  to  the  front  a 


364  PL  73. 


.1       bl  1, 

a    u         ^  Li  o 

>•  4^  -1  Q  a 

□  n  n  n  TJ  a 

a  r3  a  rir* 

rl  W 

n  n  a  n  B 

□  a  □  aa  a  o 

ona  n  rr 

rl  l-i 

1- 

I 


Column  faced  hy  the  rear  rank,  to  march  in  retreat 
(No.  873). 


./d-  J 

I 


J 


1 

lllillliiHiillllliiiiMiiiiiliililiiliilUp 

D                 .'I  C& 

;i!riilllliiliiliiiiiliii:Mliiiii!iiiiiiiiltiiiii)ii 

> 


7b  form,  square^  inarching  in  retreat  (No.  875). 


365  PL  74. 


)  o     o  c  cocoa 


Fig.  2. 


To  reduce  the  square  (No.  883). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  365 


distance  greater  than  thirty  paces,  the  colonel  will 
lace  the  column  by  the  front  rank ;  to  this  end,  he 
will  command : 

1.  To  march  in  advance.    2.  Face  by  thej^ront  rank, 
3.  Battalion  about — Face. 

878.  Which  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  No.  873 
and  following. 

879.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  advance,  and 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat,  he  will 
command : 

1.  To  march  in  retreat.     2.  Battalion  right  about. 
3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

880.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the 
second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves  rapidly 
before  the  front  rank  of  their  respective  divisions.  At 
the  command  march,  the  column  will  face  about  and 
move  off  to  the  rear ;  the  chiefs  of  divisions  and  the 
guides  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  No.  874. 

881.  If  the  column  be  marching  in  retreat,  and  the 
colonel  shall  wish  to  march  it  in  advance,  he  will 
command  : 

1.  To  m.arch  in  advance.    2.  Battalion  right  about.  3 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

882.  At  the  second  command,  the  file  closers  of  the 
second  and  third  divisions  will  place  themselves  before 
the  rear  rank  of  their  respective  divisions ;  at  the 
third,  the  column  will  face  by  the  front  rank. 

To  reduce  the  square. 

883.  The  colonel,  wishing  to  break  the  square,  will 
command : 

1.  Reduce  square.    2.  March  (or  double  quick — 
March). 


366        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 


884.  This  movement  will  be  executed  in  the  man 
ner  indicated  No.  863  and  following;  but  the  file 
closers  of  the  fourth  front  will  place  themselves 
behind  the  rear  rank  the  moment  it  faces  about ; 
the  field  and  stafi",  the  color-bearer  and  buglers, 
will,  at  the  same  time,  return  to  their  places  in 
column. 

To  form  square  from  line  of  battle. 

885.  A  battalion  deployed  may  be  formed  into 
square  in  a  direction  either  parallel  or  perpendicu- 
lar to  the  line  of  battle. 

886.  In  the  first  case,  the  colonel  will  cause  the 
battalion  to  break  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the 
right  or  left,  and  then  close  the  column  to  half  dis- 
tance, as  indicated  No.  817  and  following. 

887.  In  the  second  case,  he  will  ploy  the  battalion 
into  simple  column  by  division  at  half  distance  in  rear 
of  the  right  or  left  division,  or  into  column  doubled 
on  the  centre. 

888.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column  upon  one 
of  the  flank  divisions,  the  colonel  will  command ; 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Column  at  half  distance  hy  divi- 
sion. 3.  On  the  first  (or  fourth)  division.  4.  Bat- 
talion right  (or  left) — Face.  5.  March  (or  double 
quick— M-ASicn), 

889.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  No.  119  and  following. 

890.  If  the  battalion  be  marching  in  line  of  battle, 
and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square  in  a  direc- 
tion perpendicular  to  the  line  of  battle,  he  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  On  the  first  {or  fozirth)  division^ 
form  column.  3.  Battalion  hy  the  right  (or  left)  flank. 
4.  Makch  (or  double  quick — March). 


SCHOOL   >r  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y.  367 

891.  This  movement  will  be  executed  according  to 
the  principles  prescribed  for  ploying  a  column  by 
division  at  half  distance,  No.  150.  The  chief  of  the 
first  division  will  halt  his  division  at  the  command 
march. 

892.  To  ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column,  the 
colonel  will  command : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Double  column  at  half  distance. 
8.  Battalion  inwards — Face.  4.  March  (or  double 
quick — March) 

893.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
No.  778  and  following. 

894.  The  battalion  being  in  march,  to  ploy  it  into 
double  column  to  form  square,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand : 

1.  To  form  square.  2.  Form  double  column.  3.  Bat- 
talion  by  the  right  and  left  flanks.  4.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

895.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
No.  788.  The  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  halt 
his  division  at  the  command  march. 

Observations  relative  to  the  formation  of  squares  in 
two  ranks. 

896.  When  the  colonel  shall  judge  it  proper  to  have 
a  reserve,  this  reserve,  in  a  column  of  three  divisions, 
will  be  formed  of  the  inner  platoons  of  the  second  divi- 
sion. The  second  division  will,  in  this  case,  close  to 
platoon  distance  on  the  first  division.  When  the  square 
is  formed,  the  reserve  platoons  will  move  forward  a 
distance  nearly  equal  to  a  platoon  front. 

897.  In  re-forming  column,  the  first  division  will 
move  forward  platoon,  instead  of  company  distance, 

898.  If  the  column  be  formed  of  four  divisions,  the 
inner  platoons  of  the  third  division  will  compose  the 
reserve;  then,  in  re-forming  column,  the  first  divi- 


368        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  T. 

sion  will  conform  to  the  general  rule,  and  the  chief 
of  the  third,  as  soon  as  his  division  is  formed,  will 
close  it  to  platoon  distance  on  the  second  division. 
The  colonel  may,  if  necessary,  form  the  reserve  of 
the  entire  third  division.  In  this  case,  the  movement 
will  be  executed  in  the  following  manner. 

899.  If  the  column  be  at  full  distance,  when  it 
shall  close,  at  the  command  to  form  square,  to  half 
distance,  the  chief  of  the  third  division  will  cause 
four  files  to  break  to  the  rear  from  the  right  and  left 
of  his  division ;  the  guides  will  close  upon  the  outer 
files  remaining  in  line,  and  the  left  guide  will  march 
exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  file  immediately  in  front 
of  him.  This  division  will  then  close  in  mass  on  the 
second  division ;  and  the  chief  of  the  fourth  division 
will  close  to  half  distance  on  the  same  division. 

900.  At  the  command  form  square,  the  chief  of  the 
reserve  division  will  command,  1.  Third  division  for- 
ward.  2.  Guide  centre;  at  this  command,  the  guides 
on  the  flanks  will  fall  into  the  line  of  file  closers.  At 
the  command  march,  the  reserve  will  move  forward 
the  distance  of  a  company  front.  When  halted,  its 
chief  will  cause  the  platoons  to  be  doubled,  and  for 
this  purpose  will  command  : 

1.  On  the  centre  double  platoons.    2.  March. 

901.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoon 
will  place  themselves  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their 
respective  platoons ;  the  chief  of  each  outer  platoon 
will  face  his  platoon  towards  the  centre,  and  cause 
to  break  to  the  rear  two  files  from  the  left  or  right. 
At  the  command  march,  the  outer  platoons  will  direct 
their  march  so  as  to  double  on  the  centre  platoon  at 
the  distance  of  four  paces;  their  chiefs  will  align 
these  outer  platoons  on  the  centre,  and  the  files  pre- 
viously broken  to  the  rear  will  come  into  line. 

902.  If  the  column  be  at  half  instead  of  full  dis- 
tance, the  colonel  before  forming  square  will  order 


SCQOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y.  369 

the  chiefs  of  the  third  and  fourth  divisions  to  mo"ve 
forward  their  divisions  as  prescribed  No.  899. 

903.  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass,  at  the  com- 
mand to  form  square,  the  chief  of  the  third  division 
will  break  four  files  to  the  rear  from  each  of  the 
flanks  as  prescribed  No.  899. 

904.  The  colonel  will  halt  the  column  as  soon  as 
the  second  division  shall  have  gained  its  distance. 

905.  If  the  colonel  shall  wish  the  column  to  con- 
tinue marching,  at  the  command,  hy  the  headof  column 
take  half  distance,  the  chief  of  the  reserve  division 
will  give  his  cautionary  commands  in  sufficient  time 
to  place  his  division  in  motion  simultaneously  with 
the  one  which  precedes  it.  The  chief  of  the  fourth 
division  will  give  the  command  march  at  the  instant 
there  is  company  distance  between  his  division  and 
the  second. 

906.  AVhen  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  re-form  the 
column,  at  the  command  form  column,  the  chief  of  the 
third  division  will  command,  Form  division;  at  this 
command,  the  chiefs  of  the  outer  platoons  which  have 
doubled  in  rear  of  the  centre  platoons,  will  give  the 
commands  and  make  the  preparatory  movements  for 
deploying  on  the  centre  platoons,  which  will  be  ei5:e- 
cuted  at  the  command  march  given  by  the  colonel 
and  briskly  repeated  by  the  chief  of  this  division. 
The  division  being  re-formed,  the  chiefs  of  the  outer 
platooDS  will  retake  their  places  in  column,  and  the 
chief  of  this  division  will  again  cause  four  files  from 
each  of  its  flanks  to  break  to  the  rear. 

907.  If  before  the.  formation  of  the  square,  the 
column  had  been  left  in  front,  it  would  be  formed  by 
the  same  commands  and  according  to  the  same  prin- 
ciples. The  second  division,  in  this  case,  would  form 
the  reserve. 

908.  The  column  being  formed,  if  the  colonel 
should  wish  to  march  it  in  retreat  he  will  face  it  ly 
the  rear  rank.    The  files  of  the  third  divisirn  broken 


370        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y. 

off  to  the  rear,  will  face  about  with  the  battalion,  and 
when  the  column  is  put  in  motion  will  march  in  front 
of  the  rear  rank.  But  should  the  colonel  wish  to 
re-form  the  square,  he  will  cause  the  battalion  to  face 
by  the  front  rank. 

909.  If  the  battalion  be  in  line,  instead  of  in 
column,  the  chief  of  the  reserve  division  will  bring 
it  into  column  in  such  manner  that  there  may  be  a 
distance  of  only  four  paces  between  this  division  and 
the  one  which  is  to  be  immediately  in  front  of  it ;  and 
when  this  division  is  halted  and  aligned,  its  chief 
will  cause  the  usual  number  of  files  to  be  broken  to 
the  rear.  The  chief  of  the  division  which  should 
occupy  in  column  a  position  immediately  in  rear  of 
the  reserve  division  will,  on  entering  the  column, 
take  a  distance  of  twelve  paces  between  it  and  the 
division  established  immediately  in  front  of  the  re- 
serve division. 

Squares  in  four  ranks. 

910.  If  the  square  formed  in  two  ranks,  according 
to  the  preceding  rules,  should  not  be  deemed  suffi- 
ciently strong,  the  colonel  may  cause  the  square  to 
be  formed  in  four  ranks. 

911.  The  battalion  being  in  column  by  company 
at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  and  at  a  halt,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  square  in  four  ranks, 
he  will  first  cause  divisions  to  be  formed,  which  being 
executed,  he  will  command : 

1.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks.    2.  To  half  distance^ 
close  column.    3.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

912.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  first 
division  will  caution  the  right  company  to  face  to  the 
left,  and  the  left  company  to  face  to  the  right.  The 
chiefs  of  the  other  divisions  will  caution  their  divi- 
sions to  move  forward. 

913.  At  the  comnand  march,  the  right  company  of 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V,  371 

the  first  division  will  form  into  four  ranks  on  its  left 
file,  and  the  left  company  into  four  ranks  on  its  right 
file.  The  formation  ended,  the  chief  of  this  division 
will  align  it  by  the  left. 

914.  The  other  divisions  will  move  forward  and 
double  their  files  marching;  the  right  company  of 
each  division  will  double  on  its  left  file,  and  the  left 
company  on  its  right  file.  The  formation  completed, 
each  chief  of  division  will  command,  Guide  left.  Each 
chief  will  halt  his  division  when  it  shall  have  the  dis- 
tance of  a  company  front  in  four  ranks  from  the  pre- 
ceding one,  counting  from  its  rear  rank,  and  will 
align  his  division  by  the  left.  At  the  instant  the 
fourth  division  is  halted,  the  file  closers  will  move 
rapidly  before  its  front  rank. 

915.  The  colonel  will  form  square,  re-form  column, 
and  reduce  square  in  four  ranks,  by  the  same  com- 
mands and  means  as  prescribed  for  a  battalion  in  two 
ranks. 

916.  If  the  square  formed  in  four  ranks  be  reduced 
and  at  a  halt,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the 
battalion  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command : 

1.  In  tivo  ranks  undouhle  files.    2.  Battalion  outwards 
— Face.    3.  March. 

917.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  will  step 
before  the  centres  of  their  respective  companies,  and 
those  on  the  right  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the 
right,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face  to  the  left. 

918.  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 
face  to  the  right  and  left. 

919.  At  the  command  march,  each  company  will 
undouble  its  files  and  re-form  into  two  ranks  as 
indicated  in  the  school  of  the  company  No.  376  and 
following.  Each  captain  will  halt  his  company  and 
face  it  to  the  front.  The  formation  completed,  each 
chief  of  division  will  align  his  division  by  the  left. 

920.  If  the  column  be  in  march,  with  divisiona 


372        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  T. 


formed  in  four  ranks,  and  the  colonel  shall  wish 
re-form  them  into  two  ranks,  he  will  command  ; 

1.  Guide  centre.    2.  In  tivo  ranks,  undouble  files, 
3.  March. 

921.  The  captain,  p_aced  in  the  centre  of  each 
division,  will  continue  to  march  straight  to  the  front, 
as  will  also  the  left  file  of  the  right  company,  and 
the  right  file  of  the  left  company.  Each  company 
will  then  be  re-formed  into  two  ranks,  as  prescribed 
in  the  school  of  the  company. 

922.  The  battalion  being  formed  into  two  ranks, 
the  colonel  will  command.  Guide  left  (or  right). 

923.  To  form  square  in  four  ranks  on  one  of  the 
flank  divisions,  the  colonel  will  command ; 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Column  at  half 
distance,  by  division.  3.  On  the  first  (or  fourth) 
division.  4.  Battalion,  right  (or  left) — Face.  6. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

924.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  division 
will  place  himself  before  the  centre  of  his  division, 
and  caution  it  to  face  to  the  right. 

925.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  right  guide  of 
the  first  division  will  remain  faced  to  the  front,  the 
battalion  will  face  to  the  right. 

926.  At  the  command  march,  the  first  file  of  four 
men  of  the  first  division  will  face  to  the  front,  re- 
maining doubled.  All  the  other  files  of  four  men 
will  step  off  together,  and  each  in  succession  will 
close  up  to  its  jDroper  distance  on  the  file  preceding 
it,  and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  When 
the  last  file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division 
will  command.  Left — Dress. 

927.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into  column  in 
the  same  manner  as  with  a  battalion  in  two  ranks, 
observing  what  follows :  the  chiefs  of  division,  in- 
fitead  of  allowing  their  divisions  to  file  past  them  on 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  T.  373 

entering  the  column,  will  continue  to  lead  them,  and 
as  each  division  shall  arrive  on  a  line  with  the  right 
guide  of  the  first  division,  its  chief  will  halt  the  right 
guide,  who  will  immediately  face  to  the  front ;  the 
first  file  of  four  men  will  also  halt  at  the  same  time 
and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The 
second  file  will  close  on  the  first,  and,  when  closed, 
halt,  and  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled.  All 
the  other  files  will  execute  successively  what 
just  been  prescribed  for  the  second.  When  the  1 
file  shall  have  closed,  the  chief  of  division  will  com- 
mand, Left — Dress. 

928.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
command : 

'  1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  On  the  first 
division,  form  column.  3.  Battalion,  by  the  right 
flank.    4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

929.  At  the  second  command,  each  chief  of  divi- 
sion will  step  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  division 
and  caution  it  to  face  by  the  right  flank.  The  chief 
of  the  first  division  will  caution  his  covering  ser- 
geant to  halt,  and  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

930.  At  the  command  march,  the  battalion  will 
face  to  the  right ;  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  first 
division  will  halt  and  remain  faced  to  the  front,  the 
first  division  will  then  form  into  four  ranks  as  here- 
tofore prescribed.  The  other  divisions  will  ploy  into 
column  in  the  same  manner  as  if  the  movement  had 
taken  place  from  a  halt. 

931.  If  the  colonel  should  wish  to  form  a  per- 
pendicular square  in  four  ranks,  by  double  column, 
he  will  command : 

1.  To  form  square,  in  four  ranks.  2.  Double  column, 
at  half  distance.  3.  Battalion  inwards — Face.  4. 
March  (or  double  quick — March). 

932.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  com- 
panies will  place  themselves  before  the  centres  of 


374        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  Y. 

their  respective  companies,  and  caution  those  on  the 
right  to  face  to  the  left,  and  those  on  the  left  to  face 
to  the  right.  The  captain  of  the  fifth  company  will 
caution  his  covering  sergeant  to  stand  fast. 

933.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  left  and  right ;  at  the  command  marchy  the 
left  file  of  the  fourth  and  ths  right  file  of  the  fifth 
company  will  face  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled. 
The  fourth  company  will  close  successively  by  file 
of  fours  on  the  left  file,  and  the  fifth  company,  in 
like  manner,  on  the  right  file  ;  the  files  will  face  to 
the  front,  remaining  doubled.  The  formation  com- 
pleted, the  chief  of  division  will  command,  Right 
dress.  The  junior  captain  will  place  himself  in  the 
interval  between  the  two  companies. 

934.  The  other  companies  will  close  as  prescribed 
for  the  double  column  in  two  ranks,  observing  what 
follows :  each  captain  will  halt  the  leading  guide  of 
his  company  the  moment  the  head  of  his  company 
arrives  on  a  line  with  the  centre  of  the  column.  In 
the  right  companies,  the  left  guides  will  step  into  the 
line  of  file  closers,  and  the  left  file  of  four  men  will 
face  immediately  to  the  front,  remaining  doubled, 
and  by  the  side  of  the  right  guide  of  the  left  com 
pany.  The  companies  will  each  form  into  four  ranks, 
as  prescribed  No.  926,  the  right  companies  on  the 
left  file,  and  the  left  companies  on  the  right  file.  The 
formation  completed,  the  junior  captain  will  place 
himself  between  the  two  companies,  and  the  senior 
will  command.  Right  dress. 

935.  If  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel  will 
ccmmand : 

1.  To  form  square^  in  four  ranks.  2.  Form  doubU 
column.  3.  Battalion  hy  the  right  and  left  flanks, 
4.  March  (or  double  quick — March). 

986.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  will 
place  themselves  before  the  centres  of  their  re- 


To  form.'  olmqiie  suunr,^ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  375 

spective  companies,  and  those  on  the  right  will 
caution  them  to  face  by  the  left  flank,  and  those  on 
the  left  to  face  by  the  right  flank;  the  captain  of  the 
fifth  company  will  caution  his  covering  sergeant  to 
halt  and  remain  faced  to  the  front. 

937.  At  the  command  march^  the  fourth  and  fifth 
companies  will  halt.  The  battalion  will  face  to  the 
left  and  right ;  the  covering  sergeant  of  the  fifth 
company  will  halt  and  remain  faced  to  the  front ;  the 
movement  will  then  be  executed  as  if  the  battalion 
was  at  a  halt. 

Oblique  squares. 

938.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  when 
the  colonel  shall  wish  to  form  the  oblique  square,  he 
will  command : 

1.  2h  form  oblique  square,    2.  On  the  first  division 
form  column. 

339,  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant  colo- 
nel will  trace  the  alignment  of  the  first  division  in 
the  following  manner :  he  will  place  himself  before 
and  near  the  right  file  of  this  division,  face  to  the 
left,  march  twelve  paces  along  the  front  rank,  halt, 
face  to  the  right,  march  twelve  paces  perpendicularly 
to  the  front,  halt  again,  face  to  the  right,  and  imme- 
diately place  a  marker  at  this  point.  The  covering 
sergeant  of  the  right  company  will  step,  at  the  same 
time,  before  its  right  file,  face  to  the  left,  and  conform 
the  line  of  his  shoulders  to  that  of  the  shoulders  of  the 
marker  established  by  the  lieutenant  colonel.  These 
two  markers  being  established,  the  lieutenant  colonel 
will  place  a  third  marker  on  the  same  alignment,  at 
the  point  where  the  left  of  the  division  will  halt. 

940.  The  chiefs  of  division  will  place  themselves 
in  front  of  the  centres  of  their  divisions ;  the  chief 
of  the  first  division  will  immediately  establish  it  by 
a  wheel  to  the  right  on  a  fixed  pivot,  against  the 


376        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION"-— PART  r. 


markers,  and  align  it  by  the  left.  The  chiefs  of  the 
ither  divisions  will  caution  them  to  face  to  the  right. 
The  colonel  will  then  command : 

\.  Battalion^  right — Face.     4.  March   (or  double 
quick — March). 

941.  The  three  rear  divisions  will  direct  their 
aiarch  so  as  to  place  themselves  at  half  distance 
irom  each  other,  and  in  the  rear  of  the  first  division, 
as  previously  indicated^  observing  what  follows : 

942.  The  chief  of  the  second  division,  instead  of 
breaking  the  headmost  files  to  the  rear,  will  break 
them  to  the  front,  and,  at  the  command  march,  will 
conduct  his  division  towards  the  point  of  entrance 
into  the  column.  Arrived  at  this  point,  he  will  halt 
in  his  own  person,  cause  his  division  to  wh^el  by  file 
to  the  right,  instructing  the  right  guide  to  direct 
himself  parallelly  to  the  first  division  ;  and  as  soon 
as  the  left  file  has  passed,  its  chief  will  halt  the 
division,  and  align  it  by  the  left.  The  other  divisions 
will  break  to  the  rear,  but  slightly  ;  each  will  enter 
the  column  as  prescribed  for  the  second,  and  the 
moment  the  battalion  is  ployed  into  column  the 
colonel  will  cause  it  to  form  square. 

943.  The  formation  of  a  l3attalion  into  oblique 
square  on  the  left  division,  will  be  executed  accord- 
ing to  the  same  principles  and  by  inverse  means. 

944.  Should  the  battalion  be  in  march,  the  colonel 
will  first  cause  it  to  halt. 

946.  In  the  preceding  example,  the  battalion  was 
supposed  to  be  deployed  ;  but  if  it  be  already  formed 
in  column,  the  desired  obliquity  will  be  established 
by  causing  it  to  change  direction  by  the  flank;  to 
this  end,  the  colonel  will  command  ; 

1.  To  form  oblique  square.    2.  Change  direction  by  the 
right  (or  left)  flank. 

946.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant  colo- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V,  377 

nel  will  trace  the  new  direction  in  the  following 
manner :  he  will  place  before  the  right  and  left  files 
of  the  headmost  division,  two  markers,  and  a  third 
on  the  prolongation  of  the  first  two,  on  the  side  of 
the  change  of  d.rection,  and  at  twelve  paces  from 
the  flank  of  :he  column.  He  will  then  place  himself 
before  the  third  marker,  march  twelve  paces  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  front,  halt,  and  finish  tracing  the 
new  direction  in  the  manner  indicated  No.  939. 

947.  The  colonel  will  then  command : 

8.  Battalion  right  (or  left) — Face.     4.  March  (or 
double  quick — March). 

948.  The  change  of  direction  having  been  executed, 
the  colonel  will  cause  the  square  to  be  formed. 

949.  Should  the  column  be  in  march,  the  colonel 
will  first  cause  it  to  halt. 

950.  Oblique  squares  in  four  ranks  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  same  means,  and  according  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed  for  the  formation  of  squares  in  four 
ranks. 

951.  Whether  the  battalion  be  ployed  into  simple 
or  double  column,  the  particular  dispositions  for  the 
formation  of  the  square  will  be  executed  as  prescribed 
No.  819  and  following.  The  division  which  is  to  form 
the  rear  of  the  column  will  be  closed  in  mass,  and, 
as  soon  as  it  is  aligned,  the  major  will  rectify  the 
position  of  the  guides  on  the  side  of  the  column 
opposite  to  the  direction. 

952.  If  it  be  the  wish  of  the  colonel  merely  to 
prepare  for  square,  he  will  in  all  formations  with 
that  view  substitute  the  command  prepare  for  square 
in  place  of  to  form  square,  and  in  that  case  the  last 
division  will  enter  the  column  at  company  distance. 

Kemarks  on  the  formation  of  squares. 

953.  It  is  a  general  principle  that  a  column  by 
company,  which  is  to  be  formed  into  square,  will 


378       SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  T. 


first  form  divisions,  and  close  to  half  distance. 
Nevertheless,  if  it  find  itself  suddenly  threatened  by 
cavalry  without  sufficient  time  to  form  divisions,  the 
colonel  will  cause  the  column  to  close  to  platoon 
distance,  and  then  form  square  by  the  commands  and 
means  which  have  been  indicated ;  the  leading  and 
rearmost  companies  will  conform  themselves  to  what 
has  been  prescribed  for  divisions  in  those  positions. 
The  other  companies  will  form  by  platoon  to  the 
right  and  left  into  line  of  battle,  and  each  chief  of 
platoon,  after  having  halted  it,  will  place  himself  on 
the  line,  as  if  the  platoon  were  a  company,  and  he 
will  be  covered  by  the  guide  in  the  rear  rank. 

954.  A  battalion  in  column  at  full  distance,  having 
to  form  square,  will  always  close  on  the  leading  sub- 
division; and  a  column  closed  in  mass  will  always, 
for  the  same  purpose,  take  distances  by  the  head. 
In  either  case,  the  second  subdivision  should  be  care- 
ful, in  taking  its  distance,  to  reckon  from  the  rear 
rank  of  the  subdivision  in  front  of  it. 

955.  If  a  column  by  company  should  be  required 
to  form  square  in  four  ranks,  the  doubling  of  files 
will  always  take  place  on  the  file  next  the  guide. 

956.  When  a  column,  disposed  to  form  square, 
shall  be  in  march,  it  will  change  direction  as  a  column 
at  half  distance ;  thus,  having  to  execute  this  move- 
ment, the  column  will  take  the  guide  on  the  side  op- 
posite to  that  to  which  the  change  of  direction  is  to 
be  made,  if  that  be  not  already  the  side  of  the  guide. 

957.  A  column  doubled  on  the  centre  at  company 
distance  or  closed  in  mass,  may  be  formed  into  square 
according  to  the  same  principles  as  a  simple  column. 

958.  When  a  battalion  is  ployed,  with  a  view  to  the 
square,  it  will  always  be  in  rear  of  the  right  or  left 
division,  in  order  that  it  may  be  able  to  commence 
firing,  pending  the  execution  of  the  movement.  The 
double  column,  also,  affords  this  advantage,  and  being 
•Dore  promptly  formed  than  any  other,  it  will  habit- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V.  3^9 

nally  be  employed,  unless  particular  circumstaii^ea 
cause  a  different  formation  to  be  preferred. 

959.  A  battalion,  in  square,  will  never  use  any 
other  than  the  fire  by  file  and  by  rank ;  the  color 
being  in  the  line  of  file  closers,  its  guard  will  not  fail 
back  as  prescribed  No.  41 ;  it  will  fire  like  the  meu 
of  the  company  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

9G().  If  the  square  be  formed  in  four  ranks,  the 
first  two  ranks  will  alone  execute  the  firings  pre- 
scribed above  ;  the  other  two  ranks  will  remain  either 
at  shoulder  or  support  arms 

961.  The  formation  of  the  square  being  often  ne- 
cessary in  war,  and  being  the  most  complicated  of  the 
manoeuvres,  it  will  be  as  frequently  repeated  as  the 
supposed  necessity  may  require,  in  order  to  render 
its  mechanism  familiar  to  both  officers  and  men. 

962.  In  the  execution  of  this  manoeuvre,  the  colonel 
will  carefully  observe  that  the  divers  movements  which 
it  involves  succeed  each  other  without  loss  of  time, 
but  also  without  confusion ;  for,  if  the  rapidity  of 
cavalry  movements  requires  the  greatest  promptitude 
in  the  formation  of  squares,  so,  on  the  other  hand, 
precipitancy  always  results  in  disorder ;  and  in  no 
circumstance  is  disorder  more  to  be  avoided. 

963.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  cover  by  skir* 
mishers  the  movements  of  a  column  preparing  to  forn 
square,  he  will  detach  for  this  purpose  one  or  two 
inner  platoons  of  one  of  the  interior  divisions  of  the 
column.  In  this  case,  the  exterior  platoons  of  this 
division  and  the  following  subdivisions,  will,  accord- 
ing to  circumstances,  close  on  the  preceding  subdi- 
vision, in  such  manner,  that  there  may  be  between 
them  only  the  distance  necessary  for  forming  into 
line. 

964.  When  the  colonel  shall  be  ready  to  form  square, 
he  will,  in  order  to  recall  the  skirmishers,  cause  to 
the  color  to  be  sounded.  If,  on  the  return  of  the 
fikirmishers,  there  be  nol  room  for  them  to  form  into 


380        SCHOOL  CP  THE  BATTALION — PART  T. 

line  of  battle,  they  will  double  on  the  outer  platoons 
of  their  respective  companies. 

Column  against  Cavalry. 

965.  When  a  column  closed  in  mass  has  to  form 
square,  it  will  begin  by  taking  company  distance; 
but,  if  so  suddenly  threatened  by  cavalry  as  not  to 
allow  time  for  this  disposition,  it  will  be  formed  in 
the  following  manner : 

966.  The  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Column  against  cavalry.    2.  Maech. 

967.  At  the  first  command,  the  chief  of  the  leading 
division  will  caution  it  to  stand  fast  and  pass  behind 
the  rear  rank ;  in  the  interior  divisions  each  captain 
will  promptly  designate  the  number  of  files  necessary 
to  close  the  interval  between  his  company  and  the 
one  in  front  of  it.  The  captains  of  the  divisions 
next  to  the  one  in  rear,  in  addition  to  closing  the 
interval  in  front,  will  also  close  up  the  interval 
which  separates  this  division  from  the  last ;  the 
chief  of  the  fourth  division  will  caution  it  to  face 
about,  and  its  file  closers  will  pass  briskly  before  the 
front  rank. 

968.  At  the  command  march,  the  guides  of  each 
division  will  place  themselves  rapidly  in  the  line  of 
file  closers.  The  first  division  will  stand  fast,  the 
fourth  will  face  about,  the  outer  file  of  each  of  these 
divisions  will  then  face  outwards ;  in  the  other  divi- 
sions the  files  designated  for  closing  the  intervals  will 
form  to  the  right  and  left  into  line,  but  in  the  division 
next  to  the  rearmost  one,  the  first  files  that  come  into 
line  will  close  to  the  right  or  left  until  they  join  the 
rear  division.  The  files  of  each  company  which  re- 
main in  column  will  close  on  their  outer  files,  formed 
into  line,  in  order  to  create  a  vacant  space  in  tho 
middle  of  the  column. 


380 


ri  77. 


Column  ocjainst  cavcdry  (No.  967). 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V,  381 

961).  If  the  column  be  in  march,  the  column  against 
cavalry  will  be  formed  by  the  same  commands  and 
means.  At  the  command  marchy  the  first  and  fourth 
divisions  will  halt  and  the  latter  division  will  face 
about;  the  interior  divisions  will  conform  to  what 
has  been  prescribed  above. 

970.  The  battalion  being  no  longer  threatened  by 
cavalry,  the  colonel  will  command : 

1.  Form  column.    2.  March. 

971.  At  the  command  march,  the  files  in  column 
will  close  to  the  left  and  right  to  make  room  for  those 
in  line,  who  will  retake  their  places  in  column  by  step- 
ping backwards,  except  those  closing  the  interval  be- 
tween the  two  rear  divisions,  who  will  take  their 
places  in  column  by  a  flank  movement.  The  fourth 
division  will  face  about,  the  guides  will  resume  their 
places. 

972.  If  the  colonel  should  be  so  pressed  as  not  to 
have  time  to  order  bayonets  to  be  fixed,  the  men  will 
fix  them,  without  command  or  signal,  at  the  cau- 
tionary command,  column  against  cavalry. 

973.  As  this  manoeuvre  is  often  used  in  war,  and 
with  decided  advantage,  the  colonel  will  frequently 
cause  it  to  be  executed  in  order  to  render  it  familiar. 

Article  Fifteenth. 
The  Rally. 

974.  The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  the  colo* 
nel  will  sometimes  cause  the  disperse  to  be  sounded, 
at  which  signal,  the  battalion  will  break  and  dis- 
perse. 

975.  When  the  colonel  shall  wish  to  rally  the  bat- 
talion, he  will  cause  to  the  color  to  be  sounded,  and 
at  the  same  time  place  two  markers  and  the  color- 
bearer  in  the  direction  he  may  wish  to  give  to  the 
battalion. 


SCHOOI,  OP  TtTi.  T, 

aligned  oS  the  coloAoZT""  "'^Ptair^ill  be 

-P.es  heretofore  prl.ZZr  '"""'''''^ 

'alion  in  /c^uS^he^^ijf  ^"  to  rally  the  bat- 
sounded,  and  place 'tw^^     "f"'^  '^'^^  to  h« 

two  Tf^'^'y  rally  hi  c2r^''  '^^oap'tain  o? 
0-  Which  shoVp  -  ttS  in^tiF 

Article  Sixteenth 

yso.  The  battalion  hpin  Ji^l       ^  observed, 
tbe  colonel  shall  w  °sh  to  m!  ^       ^^"""^  'ank,  when 
be  will  command  r       °  '"^"^"^re  by  the  rear  Znk, 

^-  F<^ce  b,j      rear  rank.  2 

willt  e'Lie'dlSbe!  '^P^^'^'  '^'^  ""orement 
the  rear  rank.  '        >nd,cated  for  the  fire  by 

by  plat/on;  Hg  by  company,  or 

division,  to  take  their  ne^  nt''  of  subf 

each  pas.s  by  the  loft  fl  7  5^""^  column  will 
*e  ^t'''''''  VZ  Zl:itt  ^",'^^-i-on;  Tnd 
place  themselves  in  the  refr  ranb!^'  ' 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  7.  383 

983.  If  the  column  be  formed  by  division,  the 
chiefs  of  division  will  each  pass  by  the  interval  in 
the  centre  of  his  division,  and  the  file  closers  by  the 
outer  flanks  of  their  respective  companies  ;  the  junior 
captain  in  each  division  will  step  into  the  rear  rank, 
and  be  covered  in  the  front  rank  by  the  covering 
sergeant  of  the  left  company. 

984.  The  lieutenant  colonel  will  place  himself 
abreast  with  the  leading  subdivision,  and  the  major 
abreast  with  the  rearmost  one. 

985.  The  battalion,  being  faced  by  the  rear  rank, 
companies,  divisions,  and  wings,  will  preserve  their 
prior  denominations  respectively. 

986.  The  manoeuvres  by  the  rear  rank  will  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  same  commands  and  on  the  same  prin- 
ciples as  if  the  battalion  faced  by  the  front  rank  ;  but 
in  such  manner  that  when  the  battalion  shall  be 
brought  to  its  proper  front,  all  the  subdivisions  may 
find  themselves  in  their  regular  order  from  right  to 
left. 

987.  According  to  this  principle,  when  a  column 
faced  by  the  rear  rank  is  deployed,  the  subdivisions 
which,  in  line  of  battle  by  the  front  rank,  ought  to 
find  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  subdivision  on 
which  the  deployment  is  made,  will  face  to  the  left ; 
and  those  which  ought  to  be  placed  on  its  left,  will 
face  to  the  right. 

988.  When  a  battalion  in  line  of  battle,  faced  by 
*.he  rear  rank,  is  to  be  ployed  into  column,  the  colonel 
will  announce,  in  the  commands,  left  or  right  in  fronts 
according  as  it  may  be  intended  that  the  first  or  last 
subdivision  shall  be  at  the  head  of  tlie  column,  be* 
cause  the  first  subdivision  is  on  the  left,  anl  the  last 
on  the  right  of  the  battalion  faced  by  the  rear  rank. 
The  column  by  the  rear  rank  will  take  the  guide  to 
the  right,  if  the  first  subdivision  be  in  front,  and  to 
the  left  in  the  reverse  case. 


384        SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION — PART  V. 

989.  A  column,  faced  by  the  rear  rank,  will  bo 
brought  to  its  proper  front  by  the  means  heretofore 
prescribed.  If  the  column  be  formed  by  company, 
or  by  platoon,  the  chiefs  of  subdivision,  in  order  to 
take  their  new  places  in  column,  will  pass  by  the  left 
subdivisions,  now  right,  and  the  file  closers  by  the 
right,  now  left. 


STREET  FIRING. 


Street  firing  is  the  method  of  firing  adapted  to 
defend  or  clear  a  street,  lane,  or  narrow  pass,  in  the 
execution  of  which  the  company  or  platoon  must  be 
formed  according  to  the  width  of  the  place,  leaving 
sufficient  space  on  the  flanks  for  the  platoons  to  file 
successively  to  the  rear. 

When  the  column  has  arrived  at  the  place  where 
the  firing  is  to  commence,  the  commanding  officer  will 
give  the  word,  Column,  halt — Prepare  for  street  firing. 
At  this  command,  all  the  captains  will  pass  by  the 
right  flank  to  the  rear  of  their  companies,  covering 
the  centre.  The  colonel  next  commands — Commence 
firing.  The  captain  of  the  first  company  will  promptly 
command:  First  company — ready — aim  —  fire — re- 
cover arms — outward  face — quick  march. 

The  first  platoon  face  to  the  right,  the  second  to 
the  left ;  the  first  platoon  conducted  by  the  captain, 
the  second  by  the  first  lieutenant,  will  file  right  and 
left  around  the  flanks  towards  the  rear,  halt  on  the 
flanks  opposite  the  centre  of  the  column,  re-load,  and 
as  soon  as  the  rear  of  the  column  has  passed  the  pla- 
toons, the  captain  will  command :  Platoons — right 
and  left  face — march.  At  which  command,  the  first 
platoon  faces  to  the  left,  and  files  left,  and  the  second 
to  the  right,  and  files  right,  and  unite  in  rear  of  the 
column.  At  the  instant  the  men  of  the  first  company 
recover  their  arms  after  firing,  the  captain  of  the 
second  will  order  such  company:  Ready — and  wait 
in  that  position  until  the  front  is  cleared  by  the  first 
company,  when  the  captain  will  cause  it  to  advance 
twice  its  front  (followed  by  all  the  companies  in  rear), 

385 


386 


STREET  FIRING. 


and  fire,  file  down  the  ranks  in  the  3ame  order  as 
prescribed  for  the  first  company. 

Firing  in  retreat  is  conducted  on  the  same  princi- 
ples as  on  the  advance,  except  that  the  companies 
fire  "without  advancing,  on  the  front  being  cleared  by 
the  former  company ;  and,  instead  of  halting  on  the 
flanks,  the  platoons  will  pass  immediately  to  the  rear 
of  the  column,  counter-march,  form,  and  re-load. 
The  same  principle  will  be  observed  in  column  of 
platoons  as  column  of  company. 

If  a  column  by  company  find  itself  in  a  narrow 
street  or  pass,  or  in  any  position  without  cover  for 
either  flank  or  rear,  and  is  suddenly  menaced  at 
diiferent  points,  ae  colonel  will  cause  it  to  form 
square,  notwithstanding  the  general  principle  that  a 
column  by  company,  with  a  view  to  the  square,  will 
first  form  divisions ;  the  colonel  will  close  the  column 
to  half  or  platoon  distance ;  the  file  closers  of  the 
eighth  company  will  conform  themselves  to  what  is 
prescribed  in  paragraph  823,  p.  357,  for  the  file 
closers  of  the  fourth  division. 

These  dispositions  ended,  he  will  command :  Right 
and  left,  into  line,  wheel,  quick — march !  At  this, 
briskly  repeated,  the  leading  company  will  stand  fast, 
the  second,  third,  fourth,  fifth,  sixth,  and  seventh 
companies  will  wheel  by  platoons,  right  and  left,  into 
line  of  battle,  the  right  platoons  to  the  right  and  the 
left  to  the  left ;  the  eighth  company  will  close  up  to 
form  the  square,  and  when  it  shall  have  closed  up, 
its  captain  will  halt  it,  face  it  about,  and  align  it  by 
the  rear  rank  ;  the  right  file  of  the  first  company  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  its  left  file  to  the  left,  and  the 
outer  files  on  each  flank  of  the  eighth  company  will 
face  outward.  The  square  being  formed,  the  colonel 
will  command;  "Guides  post;"  at  this,  the  field  and 
staff,  captains  of  the  first  and  eighth  companies,  will 
enter  the  square. 

In  case  it  becomes  necessary  to  use  artillery  in  the 


STREET  FIRING. 


387 


suppression  of  riots  or  insurrection,  the  mounted 
howitzer  can  be  used  with  much  effect,  and  without 
injury  to  property  in  the  vicinity ;  the  lightness  and 
ready  manner  in  which  they  can  be  conveyed  from 
place  to  place  make  this  arm  peculiarly  adapted  for 
this  purpose. 


APPENDIX. 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 

AN  ACT  FOR  ESTABLISHINa  RULES  AND  ARTICLES  FOR  THB 
GOVERNMENT  OF  THE  ARMIES  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES.* 

Section  1.  Be  it  enacted,  hy  the  Senate  and  House  of 
Representatives  of  the  United  States  of  America,  in  Con' 
gresa  assembled,  That,  from  and  after  the  passing  of  this 
act,  the  following  shall  be  the  rules  and  articles  by  which 
the  armies  of  the  United  States  shall  be  governed : 

Article  1.  Every  ofiQcer  now  in  the  army  of  the  United 
States  shall,  in  six  months  from  the  passing  of  this  act, 
and  every  officer  who  shall  hereafter  be  appointed  shall, 
before  he  enters  on  the  duties  of  his  office,  subscribe  theso 
rules  and  regulations. 

Art.  2.  It  is  earnestly  recommended  to  all  officers  and 
soldiers  diligently  to  attend  divine  service ;  and  all  officers 
who  shall  behave  indecently  or  irreverently  at  any  place 
of  divine  worship  shall,  if  commissioned  officers,  be  brought 
before  a  general  court-martial,  there  to  be  publicly  and 
severely  reprimanded  by  the  president;  if  non-commis- 
sioned officers  or  soldiers,  every  person  so  offending  shall, 
for  his  first  offence,  forfeit  one-sixth  of  a  dollar,  1o  be  de- 
ducted out  of  his  next  pay;  for  the  second  offence,  he  shall 
not  only  forfeit  a  like  sum,  but  be  confined  twenty-four 
hours;  and  for  every  like  offence,  shall  suffer  and  pay  in 
like  manner;  which  money,  so  forfeited,  shall  be  apj lied, 
by  the  captain  or  senior  officer  of  the  troop  or  company,  t© 
the  use  of  the  sick  soldiers  of  the  company  or  troop  to 
which  the  offender  belongs. 

Art.  3.  Any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who 


*  These  rules  and  articles,  with  the  exceptions  indicated  by  the 
notes  annexed  to  articles  20,  65,  and  87,  remain  unaltered,  and  ia 
force  at  present. 

82  389 


390 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


Fhall  use  any  profane  oath  or  execration  shall  incur  the 
penalties  expressed  in  the  foregoing  article ;  and  a  commis- 
sioned officer  shall  forfeit  and  pay,  for  each  and  every  such 
offence,  one  dollar,  to  be  applied  as  in  the  preceding 
article. 

Art.  4.  Every  chaplain  commissioned  in  the  army  or 
armies  of  the  United  States,  who  shall  absent  himself  from 
the  duties  assigned  him  (excepting  in  cases  of  sickness  or 
leave  of  absence),  shall,  on  conviction  thereof  before  a 
court-martial,  be  fined  not  exceeding  one  month's  pay,  bo- 
sides  the  loss  of  his  pay  during  his  absence;  or  be  dis- 
charged, as  the  said  court-martial  shall  judge  proper. 

Art.  5.  Any  othcer  or  soldier  who  shall  use  contempt- 
uous or  disrespectful  words  against  the  President  of  the 
United  States,  against  the  Vice-President  thereof,  against 
the  Congress  of  the  United  States,  or  against  the  Chief 
Magistrate  or  Legislature  of  any  of  the  United  States  in 
which  he  may  be  quartered,  if  a  commissioned  officer,  shall 
be  cashiered,  or  otherwise  punished,  as  a  court-martial 
shall  direct;  if  a  non-commissioned  offieer  or  soldier,  he 
shall  suffer  such  punishment  as  shall  be  inflicted  on  him 
by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  6.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  behave  himself 
with  contempt  or  disrespect  toward  his  commanding  officer, 
shall  be  punii^hed,  according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence, 
by  the  judgment  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  7.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  begin,  excite, 
cause,  or  join  in,  any  mutiny  or  sedition,  in  any  troop  or 
company  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  or  in  any 
party,  post,  detachment,  or  guard,  shall  suffer  death,  or 
such  other  punishment  as  by  a  court-martial  shall  be  in- 
flicted. 

Art.  8.  Any  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  or  soldier, 
who,  being  present  at  any  mutiny  or  sedition,  does  not  use 
his  utmost  endeavor  to  suppress  the  same,  or,  coming  to 
the  knowledge  of  any  intended  mutiny,  does  not,  without 
delay,  give  information  thereof  to  his  commanding  officer, 
shall  be  punished  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial  with 
death,  or  otherwise,  according  to  the  nature  of  his  offence. 

Art.  9.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  strike  his  supe- 
rior officer,  or  draw  or  lift  up  any  weapon,  or  offer  any 
violence  against  him,  being  in  the  execution  of  his  office, 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


391 


on  any  pret^n  e  whatsoever,  or  shall  disobey  any  lawful 
command  of  his  superior  ofiScer,  shall  suflfer  death,  or  such 
other  punishment  as  shall,  according  to  the  nature  of  his 
ofience,  be  inflicted  upon  him  by  the  sentence  of  a  court- 
martial. 

Art.  10.  Every  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier,  who 
shall  enlist  himself  in  the  service  of  the  United  States, 
shall,  at  the  time  of  his  so  enlisting,  or  within  six  days 
afterward,  have  the  Articles  for  the  government  of  the 
armies  of  the  United  States  read  to  him,  and  shall,  by  the 
officer  who  enlisted  him,  or  by  the  commanding  officer  of 
the  troop  or  company  into  which  he  was  enlisted,  be  taken 
before  the  next  justice  of  the  peace,  or  chief  magistrate 
of  any  city  or  town  corporate,  not  being  an  officer  of  the 
army,  or,  where  recourse  cannot  be  had  to  the  civil  magis- 
trate, before  the  judge  advocate,  and  in  his  presence  shall 
taJke  the  following  oath  or  affirmation:  '^I,  A.  B.,  do 
solemnly  swear  or  affirm  (as  the  case  may  be)  that  I  will 
bear  true  allegiance  to  the  United  States  of  America,  and 
that  I  will  serve  them  honestly  and  faithfully  against  all 
their  enemies  or  opposers  whatsoever ;  and  observe  and 
obey  the  orders  of  the  President  of  the  United  States,  and 
the  orders  of  the  officers  appointed  over  me,  according  to 
the  Rules  and  Articles  for  the  government  of  the  armies 
of  the  United  States."  Which  justice^  magistrate,  or 
judge  advocate  is  to  give  to  the  officer  a  certificate,  signi- 
fying that  the  man  enlisted  did  take  the  said  oath  or  affirm- 
ation. 

Art.  11.  After  a  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier 
shall  have  been  duly  enlisted  and  sworn,  he  shall  not  be 
dismissed  the  service  without  a  discharge  in  writing ;  and 
no  discharge  granted  to  him  shall  be  sufficient  which  is 
not  signed  by  a  field  officer  of  the  regiment  to  which  he 
belongs,  or  commanding  officer,  where  no  field  officer  of 
the  regiment  is  present;  and  no  discharge  shall  be  given 
to  a  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  before  his  term  of 
service  has  expired,  but  by  order  of  the  President,  the 
Secretary  of  War,  the  commanding  officer  of  a  depart- 
ment, or  the  sentence  of  a  general  court-martial;  nor  shall 
a  commissioned  officer  be  discharged  the  service  but  by 
order  of  the  President  of  the  United  States,  or  by  senten<5© 
of  t  general  court-martial. 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


Art.  12.  Every  colonel,  or  other  officer  conmanding  a 
regiment,  troop,  or  company,  and  actually  quartered  with 
it,  may  give  furloughs  to  non-commissioned  officers  or  sol- 
diers,  in  such  numbers,  and  for  so  long  a  time,  as  he  shall 
judge  to  be  most  consistent  with  the  good  of  the  service ; 
and  a  captain,  or  other  inferior  officer,  commanding  a  troop 
or  company,  or  in  any  garrison,  fort,  or  barrack  of  the 
United  States  (his  field  officer  being  absent),  may  give 
furloughs  to  non-commissioned  officers  or  soldiers,  for  a 
time  not  exceeding  twenty  days  in  six  months,  but  not  to 
more  than  two  persons  to  be  absent  at  the  same  time,  ex- 
cepting some  extraordinary  occasion  should  require  it. 

Art.  13.  At  every  muster,  the  commanding  officer  of 
each  regiment,  troop,  or  company,  there  present,  shall  giv« 
to  the  commissary  of  musters,  or  other  officer  who  mustera 
the  said  regiment,  troop,  or  company,  certificates  signed  by 
himself,  signifying  how  long  such  officers,  as  shall  not 
appear  at  the  said  muster,  have  been  absent,  and  the  rea- 
son of  their  absence.  In  like  manner,  the  commanding 
officer  of  every  troop  or  company  shall  give  certificates, 
signifying  the  reasons  of  the  absence  of  the  non-commis- 
sioned officers  and  private  soldiers ;  which  reasons  and 
time  of  absence  shall  be  inserted  in  the  muster-rolls,  oppo- 
site the  names  of  the  respective  absent  officers  and  sol- 
diers. The  certificates  shall,  together  with  the  muster 
rolls,  be  remitted  by  the  commissary  of  musters,  or  other 
officer  mustering,  to  the  Department  of  War,  as  speedily  as 
the  distance  of  the  place  will  admit. 

Art.  14.  Every  officer  who  shall  be  convicted  before  a 
general  court-martial  of  having  signed  a  false  certificate 
relating  to  the  absence  of  either  officer  or  private  soldier 
or  relative  to  his  or  their  pay,  shall  be  cashiered. 

Art.  15.  Every  officer  who  shall  knowingly  make  a  false 
muster  of  man  or  horse,  and  every  officer  or  commissary 
of  musters  who  shall  willingly  sign,  direct,  or  allow  the 
signing  of  muster-rolls  wherein  such  false  muster  is  con- 
tained, shall,  upon  proof  made  thereof,  by  two  witnesses, 
before  a  general  court-martial,  bo  cas'iiered,  and  shall  bo 
thereby  utterly  disabled  to  have  or  ho.d  any  office  or  em- 
ployment in  the  service  of  the  United  States. 

Art.  16.  Any  commissary  of  musters,  or  other  officer, 
who  shall  be  convicted  of  having  taken  money,  or  other 


ARTICLES  or  WAR. 


393 


fching,  by  way  of  gratification,  on  mustering  any  regiment, 
troop,  or  company,  or  on  signing  muster-rolls,  shall  be 
displaced  from  his  office,  and  shall  be  thereby  utterly  dis- 
abled to  have  or  hold  any  office  or  employment  in  the  ser- 
vice of  the  United  States. 

Art.  17.  Any  officer  who  shall  presume  to  muster  a 
person  as  a  soldier  who  is  not  a  soldier,  shall  be  deemed 
guilty  of  having  made  a  false  muster,  and  shall  sufiei 
accordingly. 

Art.  18.  Every  officer  who  shall  knowingly  make  a 
false  return  to  the  Department  of  War,  or  to  any  of  his 
superior  officers,  authorized  to  call  for  such  returns,  of  tho 
state  of  the  regiment,  troop,  or  company,  or  garrison, 
under  his  command,  or  of  the  arms,  ammunition,  clothing, 
or  other  stores  thereunto  belonging,  shall,  on  conviction 
thereof  before  a  court-martial,  be  cashiered. 

Art.  19.  The  commanding  officer  of  every  regiment, 
troop,  or  independent  company,  or  garrison,  of  the  United 
States,  shall,  in  the  beginning  of  every  month,  remit, 
through  the  proper  channels,  to  the  Department  of  War, 
an  exact  return  of  the  regiment,  troop,  independent  com- 
pany, or  garrison,  under  his  command,  specifying  tha 
names  of  the  officers  then  absent  from  their  posts,  with  the 
reasons  for  and  the  time  of  their  absence.  And  any  officer 
who  shall  be  convicted  of  having,  through  neglect  or  de- 
sign, omitted  sending  such  returns,  shall  be  punished, 
according  to  the  nature  of  his  crime,  by  the  judgment  of 
a  general  court-martial. 

Art.  20.  All  officers  and  soldiers  who  have  received  pay, 
or  have  been  duly  enlisted  in  the  service  of  the  United 
States,  and  shall  be  convicted  of  having  deserted  the  same, 
shall  sufier  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as,  by  sentence 
of  a  court-martial,  shall  be  inflicted.* 

Art.  21.  Any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who 
shall,  without  leave  from  his  commanding  officer,  absent 
himself  from  his  troop,  company,  or  detachment,  shall, 
upon  being  convicted  thereof,  be  punished  according  to  the 
tiature  of  his  offence,  at  the  discretion  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  22.  No  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  shall 
enlist  himself  in  any  other  regiment,  troop,  or  company, 


*  Modified  by  Act  of  29th  May,  1830. 


394 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


without  a  regular  Jischarge  from  the  regiment,  trc  >p,  or 
company  in  which  he  last  served,  on  the  penalty  of  being 
reputed  a  deserter  and  sufiering  accordingly.  And  in  case 
any  officer  shall  knowingly  receive  and  entertain  such  non- 
commissioned officer  or  soldier,  or  shall  not,  after  his  being 
discovered  to  be  a  deserter,  immediately  confine  him,  and 
give  notice  thereof  to  the  corps  in  which  he  last  served,  th< 
Baid  officer  shall,  by  a  court-martial,  be  cashiered. 

Art.  23.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  be  convicted  of 
having  advised  or  persuaded  any  other  officer  or  soldier  to 
desert  the  service  of  the  United  States,  shall  suffer  death, 
or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  inflicted  upon  him  by 
the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  24.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  use  any  reproachful 
or  provoking  speeches  or  gestures  to  another,  upon  pain, 
if  an  officer,  of  being  put  in  arrest:  if  a  soldier,  confined, 
and  of  asking  pardon  of  the  party  ottended,  in  the  pre- 
sence of  his  commanding  officer. 

Art.  25.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  send  a  challenge  to 
another  officer  or  soldier,  to  fight  a  duel,  or  accept  a  chal- 
lenge if  sent,  upon  pain,  if  a  commissioned  officer,  of  being 
cashiered;  if  a  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier,  of  suf- 
fering corporeal  punishment,  at  the  discretion  of  a  court- 
martial. 

Art.  26.  If  any  commissioned  or  non-commissioned 
officer  commanding  a  guard  shall  knowingly  or  willingly 
suffer  any  person  whatsoever  to  go  forth  to  fight  a  duel,  he 
shall  be  punished  as  a  challenger;  and  all  seconds,  pro- 
moters, and  carriers  of  challenges,  in  order  to  duels,  shall 
be  deemed  principals,  and  be  punished  accordingly.  And 
it  shall  be  the  duty  of  every  officer  commanding  an  army, 
regiment,  company,  post,  or  detachment,  who  is  knowing  to 
a  challenge  being  given  or  accepted  by  any  officer,  non- 
commissioned officer,  or  soldier,  under  his  command,  or  has 
reason  to  believe  the  same  to  be  the  case,  immediately  to 
arrest  and  bring  to  trial  such  oftenders. 

Art.  27.  All  officers,  of  what  condition  soever,  have 
power  to  part  and  quell  all  qui  'rels,  frays,  and  disorders, 
though  the  persons  concerned  should  belong  to  another 
regiment,  troop,  or  company;  and  either  to  order  officers 
into  arrest,  or  non-commissioned  ofiicers  o/  soldiers  into 
confinement,  until  their  proper  superior  officers  shall  bo 


ARTICLES  OF  R. 


395 


ftcquainted  therewith ;  and  whosoever  shall  ref  ase  to  obey 
such  officer  (though  of  an  inferior  rank),  or  shall  draw  his 
sword  upon  him,  shall  be  punished  at  the  discretion  of  a 
general  court-martial. 

Aet.  28.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  upbraid  another 
for  refusing  a  challenge,  shall  himself  be  punished  as  a 
challenger :  and  all  officers  and  soldiers  are  hereby  dis- 
charged from  any  disgrace  or  opinion  of  disadvantage 
which  might  arise  from  their  having  refused  to  accept  of 
challenges,  as  they  will  only  have  acted  in  obedience  to  the 
laws,  and  done  their  duty  as  good  soldiers  who  subject 
themselves  to  discipline. 

Art.  29.  No  sutler  shall  be  permitted  to  sell  any  kind  of 
liquors  or  victuals,  or  to  keep  their  houses  or  shops  open 
for  the  entertainment  of  soldiers,  after  nine  at  night,  or 
before  the  beating  of  the  reveille,  or  upon  Sundays,  during 
divine  service  or  sermon,  on  the  penalty  of  being  dismissed 
from  all  future  suttling. 

Art.  30.  All  officers  commanding  in  the  field,  forts,  bar- 
racks, or  garrisons  of  the  United  States  are  hereby 
required  to  see  that  the  persons  permitted  to  suttle  shall 
supply  the  soldiers  with  good  and  wholesome  provisions, 
or  other  articles,  at  a  reasonable  price,  as  they  shall  be 
answerable  for  their  neglect. 

Art.  31.  No  officer  commanding  in  any  of  the  garrisons, 
forts,  or  barracks  of  the  United  States,  shall  exact  exor- 
bitant prices  for  houses  or  stalls  let  out  to  sutlers,  or  con- 
nive at  the  like  exactions  in  others ;  nor  by  his  own 
authority,  and  for  his  private  advantage,  lay  any  duty  or 
imposition  upon,  or  be  interested  in,  the  sale  of  any  vic- 
tuals, liquors,  or  other  necessaries  of  life  brought  into  the 
garrison,  fort,  or  barracks,  fcr  the  use  of  the  soldiers,  on 
the  penalty  of  being  discharged  from  the  service. 

Art.  32.  Every  officer  commanding  in  quarters,  gar- 
risons, or  on  the  march,  shall  keep  good  order,  and,  to  the 
Titmost  of  his  power,  redress  all  abuses  or  disorders  which, 
may  be  committed  by  any  officer  or  soldier  under  his  com- 
mand; if,  upon  complaint  made  to  him  of  officers  or  soldiers 
beating  or  otherwise  ill  treating  any  person,  or  disturbing 
fairs  or  markets,  or  of  committing  any  kind  of  riots,  to  the 
disquieting  of  the  citizens  of  the  United  States,  he,  the 
laid  commander,  who  shall  refuse  or  omit  to  see  justic*? 


m 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


done  to  the  offender  or  offenders,  and  reparation  made  to 
the  party  or  parties  injured,  as  far  as  part  of  the  offender's 
pay  shall  enable  him  or  them,  shall,  upon  proof  thereof,  be 
cashiered,  or  otherwise  punished,  as  a  general  court-mar- 
tial shall  direct. 

Art.  33.  When  any  commissioned  oflBcer  or  soldier  shall 
be  accused  of  a  capital  crime,  or  of  having  used  violence 
or  committed  any  offence  against  the  person  or  property 
of  any  citizen  of  any  of  the  United  States,  such  as  is 
punishable  by  the  known  laws  of  the  land,  the  command- 
ing oflficer  and  officers  of  every  regiment,  troop,  or  com- 
pany, to  which  the  person  or  persons  so  accused  shall 
belong,  are  hereby  required,  upon  application  duly  made 
by  or  in  behalf  of  the  party  or  parties  injured,  to  use  their 
utmost  endeavors  to  deliver  over  such  accused  person  or 
persons  to  the  civil  magistrate,  and  likewise  to  be  aiding 
and  assisting  to  the  officers  of  justice  in  apprehending  and 
securing  the  person  or  persons  so  accused,  in  order  to  bring 
him  or  them  to  trial.  If  any  commanding  officer  or  officers 
shall  wilfully  neglect,  or  shall  refuse,  upon  the  application 
aforesaid,  to  deliver  over  such  accused  person  or  persons  to 
the  civil  magistrates,  or  to  be  aiding  and  assisting  to  the 
officers  of  justice  in  apprehending  such  person  or  persons, 
the  officer  or  officers  so  offending  shall  be  cashiered. 

Art.  34.  If  any  officer  shall  think  himself  wronged  by  his 
colonel,  or  the  commanding  officer  of  the  regiment,  and 
shall,  upon  due  application  being  made  to  him,  be  refused 
redress,  he  may  complain  to  the  general  commanding  in 
the  State  or  Territory  where  such  regiment  shall  be  sta- 
tioned, in  order  to  obtain  justice;  who  is  hereby  required 
to  examine  into  said  complaint,  and  take  proper  measures 
for  redressing  the  wrong  complained  of,  and  transmit,  as 
soon  as  possible,  to  the  Department  of  War,  a  true  state  of 
such  complaint,  with  the  proceedings  bad  thereon. 

Art.  35.  If  any  inferior  officer  or  soldicf  shall  think  him- 
self wronged  by  his  captain  or  other  officer,  he  is  to  com- 
plain thereof  to  the  commanding  officer  of  the  regiment, 
who  is  hereby  required  to  summon  a  regimental  court- 
martial,  for  the  doing  justice  to  the  complainant;  from 
which  regimental  court-martial  either  party  may,  if  he 
thinks  himself  still  aggrieved,  appeal  to  a  general  court- 
martial.    Bi.t  if,  upon  a  second  hearing,  the  appeal  shall 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


39T 


appear  vexatious  and  groundless,  the  person  so  appealing 
shall  be  punished  at  the  discretion  of  the  said  courts 
martial. 

Art.  36.  Any  commissioned  officer,  store-keeper,  or  com- 
missary, who  shall  be  convicted  at  a  general  court-martial 
of  having  sold,  without  a  proper  order  for  that  purpose,  em- 
bezzled, misapplied,  or  wilfully,  or  through  neglect,  suf- 
fered any  of  the  provisions,  forage,  arms,  clothing,  ammu- 
nition, or  other  military  stores  belonging  to  the  United 
States  to  be  spoiled  or  damaged,  shall,  at  his  own  expense, 
make  good  the  loss  or  damage,  and  shall,  moreover,  forfeit 
all  his  pay,  and  be  dismissed  from  the  service. 

Art.  37.  Any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who 
shall  be  convicted  at  a  regimental  court-martial  of  having 
sold,  or  designedly,  or  through  neglect,  wasted  the  ammu- 
nition delivered  out  to  him,  to  be  employed  in  the  service 
of  the  United  States,  shall  be  punished  at  the  discretion 
of  such  court. 

Art.  38.  Every  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  who 
shall  be  convicted  before  a  court-martial  of  having  sold, 
lost,  or  spoiled,  through  neglect,  his  horse,  arms,  clothes, 
or  accoutrements,  shall  undergo  such  weekly  stoppages 
(not  exceeding  the  half  of  his  pay)  as  such  court-martial 
shall  judge  sufficient  for  repairing  the  loss  or  damage; 
and  shall  suffer  confinement,  or  such  other  corporeal  pun- 
ishment as  his  crime  shall  deserve. 

Art.  39.  Every  officer  who  shall  be  convicted  before  a 
court-martial  of  having  embezzled  or  misapplied  any  money 
with  which  he  may  have  been  intrusted,  for  the  payment 
of  the  men  under  his  command,  or  for  enlisting  men  into 
the  service,  or  for  other  purposes,  if  a  commissioned  officer, 
shall  be  cashiered,  and  compelled  to  refund  the  money ; 
if  a  non-commissioned  officer,  shall  be  reduced  to  the 
ranks,  be  put  under  stoppages  until  the  money  be  made 
good,  and  suffer  such  corporeal  punishment  as  such  court- 
martial  shall  direct. 

Art.  40.  Every  captain  of  a  troop  or  company  is  charged 
with  the  arms,  accoutrements,  ammunition,  clothing,  or  other 
warlike  stores  belonging  to  the  troop  or  company  under  his 
command,  which  he  is  to  be  accountable  for  to  his  colonel 
in  case  of  their  being  lost,  spoiled,  or  damaged,  DOt  by  un- 
ftvoidable  accidents,  or  o>  actual  service. 


398 


iLRTICLES  OF  WAR. 


Art.  41.  All  ncn-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers  who 
shall  be  found  one  mile  from  the  camp  without  leave,  in 
writing,  from  their  commanding  officer,  shall  suffer  such 
punishment  as  shall  be  inflicted  upon  them  by  the  sentence 
of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  42,  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  lie  out  of  his  quarters, 
garrison,  or  camp  without  leave  from  his  superior  officer, 
upon  penalty  of  being  punished  according  to  the  nature 
of  his  oftence,  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  43.  Every  non-commissioned  officer  and  soldier 
shall  retire  to  his  quarters  or  tent  at  the  beating  of  the  re- 
treat; in  default  of  which  he  shall  be  punished  according  to 
the  nature  of  his  offence. 

Art.  44.  No  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  or  soldier 
shall  fail  in  repairing,  at  the  time  fixed,  to  the  place  of 
parade,  of  exercise,  or  other  rendezvous  appointed  by  his 
commanding  officer,  if  not  prevented  by  sickness  or  some 
other  evident  necessity,  or  shall  go  from  the  said  place  of 
rendezvous  without  leave  from  his  commanding  officer, 
before  he  shall  be  regularly  dismissed  or  relieved,  on  the 
penalty  of  being  punished,  according  to  the  nature  of  his 
offence,  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  45.  Any  commissioned  officer  who  shall  be  found 
drunk  on  his  guard,  party,  or  other  duty,  shall  be  cash- 
iered. Any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier  so  offend- 
ing shall  suffer  such  corporeal  punishment  as  shall  be  in- 
flicted by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  46.  Any  sentinel  who  shall  be  found  sleeping  upon 
his  post,  or  shall  leave  it  before  he  shall  be  regularly  re- 
lieved, shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall 
be  inflicted  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  47.  No  soldier  belonging  to  any  regiment,  troop, 
or  company  shall  hire  another  to  do  his  duty  for  him,  oi 
be  excused  from  duty  but  in  cases  of  sickness,  disability, 
or  leave  of  absence ;  and  every  such  soldier  found  guilty 
of  hiring  his  duty,  as  also  the  party  so  hired  to  do  another^s 
duty,  shall  be  punished  at  the  discretion  of  a  regimental 
court-martial. 

Art.  48.  And  every  non-commissioned  officer  conniving 
at  such  hiring  of  duty  aforesaid,  shall  be  reduced;  and 
every  commissioned  officer  knowing  and  allowing  such  iiJ 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


399 


practices  in  the  service,  shall  be  punished  by  tie  judgment 
of  a  general  court-martial. 

Art.  49.  Any  oflBcer  belonging  to  the  service  of  the 
United  States,  who,  by  discharging  of  firearms,  drawing  of 
swords,  beating  of  drums,  or  by  any  other  means  what- 
soever, shall  occasion  false  alarms  in  camp,  garrison,  or 
quarters,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as 
ehall  be  ordered  by  the  sentence  of  a  general  court-martial. 

Art.  50.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall,  without  urgent 
necessity,  or  without  the  leave  of  his  superior  officer,  quit 
his  guard,  platoon,  or  division,  shall  be  punished,  according 
to  the  nature  of  his  offence,  by  the  sentence  of  a  court- 
martial. 

Art.  51.  No  officer  or  soldier  shall  do  violence  to  any 
person  who  brings  provisions  or  other  necessaries  to  the 
camp,  garrison,  or  quarters  of  the  forces  of  the  United 
States,  employed  in  any  parts  out  of  the  said  States,  upon 
pain  of  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  a  court-martial 
shall  direct. 

Art.  52.  Any  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  misbehave  him- 
self before  the  enemy,  run  away,  or  shamefully  abandon 
any  fort,  post,  or  guard  which  he  or  they  may  be  com- 
manded to  defend,  or  speak  words  inducing  others  to  do 
the  like,  or  shall  cast  away  his  arms  and  ammunition,  or 
who  shall  quit  his  post  or  colors  to  plunder  and  pillage, 
every  such  offender,  being  duly  convicted  thereof,  shall 
suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  ordered 
by  the  sentence  of  a  general  court-martial. 

Art.  53.  Any  person  beloniring  to  the  armies  of  the 
United  States  who  shall  make  known  the  watchword  to  any 
person  who  is  not  entitled  to  receive  it  according  to  the 
rules  and  discipline  of  war,  or  shall  presume  to  give  a 
parole  or  watchword  different  from  what  he  received,  shall 
suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  ordered 
by  the  sentence  of  a  general  court-martial. 

Art.  54.  All  officers  and  soldiers  are  to  behave  themselves 
orderly  in  quarters  and  on  their  march ;  and  whoever  shall 
commit  any  waste  or  spoil,  either  in  walks  of  trees,  parks, 
warrens,  fish-ponds,  houses,  cr  gard  ms,  corn-fields,  en- 
closures of  meadows,  or  shall  rialiciously  destroy  any  pro- 
perty whatsoever  belonging  to  the  inhabitants  of  the  United 
States,  unless  by  order  of  the  then  commander-in-chief  of 


400 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


the  armies  of  the  said  States,  shall  (besides  such  penalties 
as  they  are  liable  to  by  law)  be  punished  according  to  the 
nature  and  degree  of  the  offence,  by  the  judgment  of  a 
regimental  or  general  court-martial. 

Art.  55.  Whosoever,  belonging  to  the  armies  of  the 
United  States  in  foreign  parts,  shall  force  a  safeguard,  shall 
suffer  death. 

Art.  56.  Whosoever  shall  relieve  the  enemy  with  money, 
victuals,  or  ammunition,  or  shall  knowingly  harbor  or 
protect  an  enemy,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other  punish- 
ment as  shall  be  ordered  by  the  sentence  of  a  court- 
martial. 

Art.  57.  Whosoever  shall  be  convicted  of  holding  cor- 
respondence with,  or  giving  intelligence  to,  the  enemy, 
either  directly  or  indirectly,  shall  suffer  death,  or  such  other 
punishment  as  shall  be  ordered  by  the  sentence  of  a  court- 
martial. 

Art.  58.  All  public  stores  taken  in  the  enemy's  camp, 
towns,  forts,  or  magazines,  whether  of  artillery,  ammu- 
nition, clothing,  forage,  or  provisions,  shall  be  secured  for  / 
the  service  of  the  United  States ;  for  the  neglect  of  which 
the  commanding  officer  is  to  be  answerable. 

Art.  59.  If  any  commander  of  any  garrison,  fortress,  or 
post  shall  be  compelled,  by  the  officers  and  soldiers  under 
his  command,  to  give  up  to  the  enemy,  or  to  abandon  it, 
the  commissioned  officers,  non-commissioned  officers,  or 
soldiers  who  shall  be  convicted  of  having  so  offended,  shall 
suffer  death,  or  such  other  punishment  as  shall  be  inflicted 
upon  them  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  60.  All  sutlers  and  retainers  to  the  camp,  and  all 
persons  whatsoever,  serving  with  the  armies  of  the  United 
States  in  the  field,  though  not  enlisted  soldiers,  are  to  be 
subject  to  orders,  according  to  the  rules  and  discipline  of 
Arar. 

Art.  61.  Officers  having  brevets  or  commissions  of  a 
prior  date  to  those  of  the  regiment  in  which  they  serve, 
may  take  place  in  courts-martial  and  on  detachments,  when 
composed  of  different  corps,  according  to  the  ranks  given 
them  in  their  brevets  or  dates  of  their  former  commissions; 
but  in  the  re,i>iment,  troop,  or  ccmpany  to  which  such  offi- 
cers belong,  they  shall  do  duty  and  take  rank,  both  in  courts- 
martial  and  on  detachments  which  shall  be  composed  oi 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


401 


theif  own  corps,  according  to  the  cc/mnissions  by  which 
they  are  mustered  in  the  said  corps. 

Akt.  62.  If,  upon  marches,  guards,  or  in  quarters,  dif- 
ferent corps  of  the  army  shall  happen  to  join,  or  do  duty 
together,  the  officer  highest  in  rank  of  the  line  of  the  army, 
marine  corps,  or  militia,  by  commission,  there  on  duty  or 
in  quarters,  shall  command  the  whole,  and  give  orders  for 
what  is  needful  to  the  service,  unless  otherwise  specially 
directed  by  the  President  of  the  United  States,  according 
to  the  nature  of  the  case. 

Art.  63.  The  functions  of  the  engineers  being  generally 
confined  to  the  most  elevated  branch  of  military  science, 
they  are  not  to  assume,  nor  are  they  subject  to  be  ordered 
on  any  duty  beyond  the  line  of  their  immediate  profession, 
except  by  the  special  order  of  the  President  of  the  United 
States;  but  they  are  to  receive  every  mark  of  respect  to 
which  their  rank  in  the  army  may  entitle  them  respectively, 
and  are  liable  to  be  transferred,  at  the  discretion  of  the 
President,  from  one  corps  to  another,  regard  being  paid  to 
rank. 

Art.  64.  General  courts-martial  may  consist  of  any 
number  of  commissioned  officers,  from  five  to  thirteen,  in- 
clusively; but  they  shall  not  consist  of  less  than  thirteen 
where  that  number  can  be  convened  without  manifest  in- 
jury to  the  service. 

Art.  65."^*  Any  general  officer  commanding  an  army,  or 
colonel  commanding  a  separa,te  department,  may  appoint 
general  courts-martial  whenever  necessary.  But  no  sen- 
tence of  a  court-martial  shall  be  carried  into  execution 
until  after  the  whole  proceedings  shall  have  been  laid 
before  the  officer  ordering  the  same,  or  the  officer  com- 
manding the  troops  for  the  time  being;  neither  shall  any 
sentence  of  a  general  court-martial,  in  the  time  of  peace, 
extending  to  the  loss  of  life,  or  the  dismission  of  a  com- 
missioned officer,  or  which  shall,  either  in  time  of  peace  or 
war,  respect  a  general  officer,  be  carried  into  execution, 
until  after  the  whole  proceedings  shall  have  been  trans- 
mitted to  the  Secretary  of  War,  to  be  laid  before  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States  for  his  confirmation  or  disap- 
proval, and  orders  in  the  case.    All  other  sentences  may 


*  Modified  by  Act  of  29th  May,  1830. 


402 


ARTICLES  CF  WAR. 


be  confirmed  and  executed  by  the  ofl5cer  ordering  the  court 
to  assemble,  or  the  commanding  officer  for  the  time  being, 
as  the  case  may  be. 

Art.  66.  Every  officer  commanding  a  regiment  or  corps 
may  appoint,  for  his  own  regimen*  or  corps,  courts-martial, 
to  consist  of  three  commissioned  officers,  for  the  trial  and 
punishment  of  oflfences  not  capital,  and  decide  upon  their 
sentences.  For  the  same  purpose,  all  officers  commanding 
any  of  the  garrisons,  forts,  barracks,  or  other  places  where 
the  troops  consist  of  different  corps,  may  assemble  courts- 
martial,  to  consist  of  three  commissioned  officers,  and  de- 
cide upon  their  sentences. 

Art.  67.  No  garrison  or  regimental  court-martial  shall 
have  the  power  to  try  capital  cases  or  commissioned  offi- 
cers; neither  shall  they  inflict  a  fine  exceeding  one  month's 
pay,  nor  imprison,  nor  put  to  hard  labor,  any  non-com- 
missioned officer  or  soldier  for  a  longer  time  than  one 
month. 

Art.  68.  Whenever  it  may  be  found  convenient  and  ne- 
cessary to  the  public  service,  the  officers  of  the  marines 
shall  be  associated  Avith  the  officers  of  the  land  forces,  for 
the  purpose  of  holding  courts-martial,  and  trying  offenders 
belonging  to  either,*  and,  in  such  cases,  the  orders  of  the 
senior  officer  of  either  corps  who  may  be  present  and  duly 
authorized,  shall  be  received  and  obeyed. 

Art.  69.  The  judge  advocate,  or  some  person  deputed  by 
him,  or  by  the  general,  or  officer  commanding  the  army, 
detachment,  or  garrison,  shall  prosecute  in  the  name  of  the 
United  States,  but  shall  so  far  consider  himself  as  counsel 
for  the  prisoner,  after  the  said  prisoner  shall  have  made  hia 
plea,  as  to  object  to  any  leading  question  to  any  of  the 
witnesses,  or  any  question  to  the  prisoner,  the  answer  to 
which  might  tend  to  criminate  himself;  and  administer  to 
each  member  of  the  court,  before  they  proceed  upon  any 
trial,  the  following  oath,  which  shall  also  be  taken  by  ail 
members  of  the  regimental  and  garrison  courts-martial: 

"You,  A.  B.,  do  swear  that  you  will  well  and  truly  try 
and  determine,  according  to  evidence,  the  matter  now 
before  you,  between  the  United  States  of  America  and  the 
prisoner  to  be  tried,  and  that  you  will  duly  administer  jus- 
tice, according  to  the  provisions  of  *An  act  establishing 
Eiilca"  and  Articles  fci*  the  government  of  the  armies  of  tho 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


403 


United  States/  without  partiality,  favor,  or  affection ;  and 
if  any  doubt  should  arise,  not  explained  by  said  Articles, 
according  to  your  conscience,  the  best  of  your  understand- 
ing, and  the  custom  of  war  in  like  cases;  and  you  do  fur- 
ther swear  that  you  will  not  divulge  the  sentence  of  the 
court  until  it  shall  be  published  by  the  proper  authority; 
neither  will  you  disclose  or  discover  the  vote  or  opinion  of 
any  particular  member  of  the  court-martial,  unless  required 
to  give  evidence  thereof,  as  a  w  tness,  by  a  court  of  justice, 
in  a  due  course  of  law.    So  hel[)  you  God." 

And  as  soon  as  the  said  oath  shall  have  been  adminis- 
tered to  the  respective  members,  the  president  of  the  court 
shall  administer  to  the  judge  advocate,  or  person  officiating 
as  such,  an  oath  in  the  following  words : 

You,  A.  B.,  do  swear,  that  you  will  not  disclose  or  dis 
cover  the  vote  or  opinion  of  any  particular  member  of  the 
court-martial,  unless  required  to  give  evidence  thereof,  as 
a  witness,  by  a  court  of  justice,  in  due  course  of  law ;  nor 
divulge  the  sentence  of  the  court  to  any  but  the  proper 
authority,  until  it  shall  be  duly  disclosed  by  the  same. 
So  help  you  God/' 

Art.  70.  When  a  prisoner,  arraigned  before  a  general 
court-martial,  shall,  from  obstiuacy  and  deliberate  design, 
stand  mute,  or  answer  foreign  to  the  purpose,  the  court 
may  proceed  to  trial  and  judgment  as  if  the  prisoner  had 
regularl37^  pleaded  not  guilty. 

Art.  71.  When  a  member  shall  be  challenged  by  a  pri 
soner,  he  must  state  his  cause  of  challenge,  of  which  the 
court  shall,  after  due  deliberation,  determine  the  relevancy 
or  validity,  and  decide  accordingly ;  and  no  challenge  to 
more  than  one  member  at  a  time  shall  be  received  by  the 
court. 

Art.  72.  AH  the  members  of  a  court-martial  are  to  be- 
have with  decency  and  calmness,  and  in  giving  their  votes 
fire  to  begin  with  the  youngest  in  commission. 

Art.  73.  All  persons  who  give  evidence  before  a  court- 
martial  are  to  be  examined  on  oath  or  affirmation,  in  the 
following  form : 

"  You  swear,  or  affirm  (as  the  case  may  be),  the  evidence 
you  shall  give  ii  the  cause  now  in  hearing  shall  be  the  . 
truth,  the  whole  trulh,  and  nothing  but  the  truth.   So  help 
you  God.'' 


404 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


Art.  74.  On  the  trials  of  cases  not  capital,  before  courts, 
martial,  the  deposition  of  witnesses,  not  in  the  line  or  staff 
of  the  army,  may  be  taken  before  some  justice  of  the  peace, 
and  read  in  evidence ;  provided  the  prosecutor  and  person 
accused  are  present  at  the  taking  the  same,  or  are  duly 
notified  thereof. 

Art.  75.  No  officer  shall  be  tried  but  by  a  general  court- 
martial,  nor  by  officers  of  an  inferior  rank,  if  it  can  be 
avoided.  Nor  shall  any  proceedings  of  trials  be  carried 
on,  excepting  between  the  hours  of  eight  in  the  morning 
and  three  in  the  afternoon,  excepting  in  cases  which,  in 
the  opinion  of  the  officer  appointing  the  court-martial,  re- 
quire immediate  example. 

Art.  76,  No  person  whatsoever  shall  use  any  menacing 
words,  signs,  or  gestures,  in  presence  of  a  court-martial,  or 
shall  cause  any  disorder  or  riot,  or  disturb  their  proceed- 
ings, on  the  penalty  of  being  punished  at  the  discretion  of 
the  said  court-martial. 

Art.  77.  Whenever  any  officer  shall  be  charged  with  a 
crime,  he  shall  be  arrested  and  confined  in  his  barracks, 
quarters,  or  tent,  and  deprived  of  his  sword  by  the  com- 
manding officer.  And  any  officer  who  shall  leave  his  con- 
finement before  he  shall  be  set  at  liberty  by  his  command- 
ing officer,  or  by  a  superior  officer,  shall  be  cashiered. 

Art.  78.  Non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers,  charged 
with  crimes,  shall  be  confined  until  tried  by  a  court-mar- 
tial, or  released  by  proper  authority. 

Art.  79.  No  officer  or  soldier  who  shall  be  put  in  arrest 
shall  continue  in  confinement  more  than  eight  days,  or 
until  such  time  as  a  court-martial  can  be  assembled. 

Art.  80.  No  officer  commanding  a  guard,  or  provost 
marshal,  shall  refuse  to  receive  or  keep  any  prisoner  com- 
mitted to  his  charge  by  an  officer  belonging  to  the  forces 
of  the  United  States  ;  provided  the  officer  committing  shall, 
at  the  same  time,  deliver  an  account  in  writing,  signed  by 
himself,  of  the  crime  with  which  the  said  prisoner  is 
charged. 

Art.  81.  No  officer  commanding  a  guard,  or  provost 
marshal,  shall  presume  to  release  any  person  committed  to 
his  charge  without  proper  authority  for  so  doing,  nor  shall 
he  suffer  pny  person  to  escape,  on  the  penalty  of  being 
punished  for  it  by  the  sentence  of  a  court-martial. 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


405 


Art.  S2.  Every  officer  or  provosfc  marshal,  td  whoso 
charge  prisoners  shall  be  committed,  shall,  within  twenty- 
four  hours  after  such  commitment,  or  as  soon  as  he  shall 
be  relieved  from  his  guard,  make  report  in  writing,  to  the 
commanding  officer,  of  their  names,  their  crimes,  and  the 
names  of  the  officers  who  committed  them,  on  the  penaiiy 
of  being  punished  for  disobedience  or  neglect,  at  the  dis- 
cretion of  a  court-martial. 

Art.  83.  Any  commissioned  officer  convicted  before  a 
general  court-martial  of  conduct  unbecoming  an  officer 
and  a  gentleman,  shall  be  dismissed  the  service. 

Art.  84.  In  cases  where  a  court-martial  may  think  it 
proper  to  sentence  a  commissioned  officer  to  be  suspended 
from  command,  they  shall  have  power  also  to  suspend  his 
pay  and  emoluments  for  the  same  time,  according  to  the 
nature  and  heinousness  of  the  offence. 

Art.  85.  In  all  cases  where  a  commissioned  officer  is 
cashiered  for  cowardice  or  fraud,  it  shall  be  added  in  the 
sentence,  that  the  crime,  name,  and  place  of  abode,  and 
punishment  of  the  delinquent,  be  published  in  the  news- 
papers in  and  about  the  camp,  and  of  the  particular  State 
from  w^hich  the  offender  came,  or  where  he  usually  re- 
sides ;  after  which  it  shall  be  deemed  scandalou?  for  an 
officer  to  associate  with  him. 

Art.  83.  The  commanding  officer  of  any  post  or  detach- 
ment, in  which  there  shall  not  be  a  number  of  officers  ade- 
quate to  form  a  general  court-martial,  shall,  in  cases  which 
require  the  cognizance  of  such  a  court,  report  to  the  com- 
manding officer  of  the  department,  who  shall  order  a  court 
to  be  assembled  at  the  nearest  post  or  department,  and  tho 
party  accused,  with  necessary  witnesses,  to  be  transported 
to  the  place  where  the  said  court  shall  be  assembled. 

Art.  87."-^  No  person  shall  be  sentenced  to  suffer  death 
but  by  the  concurrence  of  two-thirds  of  the  members  of 
a  general  court-martial,  nor  except  in  the  cases  herein  ex- 
pressly mentioned ;  nor  shall  more  than  jifty  lashes  he  inflicted 


*  So  much  of  these  rules  and  articles  as  authorizes  the  infliction  of 
corporeal  punishment  by  stripes  or  lashes,  was  specially  repealed 
by  eu^t  of  16th  May,  1812.  By  act  of  2d  March,  1833,  the  repealing 
act  was  repealed,  so  far  as  it  fipplied  to  the  crime  of  desertion,  which, 
of  course,  revived  the  punishment  by  laahes  for  that  offence. 
33 


406 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


(ni  any  offender^  at  tli-e  discretion  of  a  court-martial ;  and 
no  officer,  non-commissioned  officer,  soldier,  or  follower  of 
the  army  shall  be  tried  a  second  time  for  the  same  offence. 

Art.  88.  No  person  shall  be  liable  to  be  tried  and  pun- 
ished by  a  general  court-martial  for  any  offence  which 
shall  appear  to  have  been  committed  more  than  two  years 
before  the  issuing  of  the  order  for  such  trial,  unless  the 
person,  by  reason  of  having  absented  himself,  or  some 
other  manifest  impediment,  shall  not  have  been  amenable 
to  justice  within  that  period. 

Art.  89.  Every  officer  authorized  to  order  a  general 
court-martial  shall  have  power  to  pardon  or  mitigate  any 
punishment  ordered  by  such  court,  except  the  sentence  of 
death,  or  of  cashiering  an  officer;  which,  in  the  cases 
where  he  has  authority  (by  Article  65)  to  carry  them  into 
execution,  he  may  suspend,  until  the  pleasure  of  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States  can  be  known  ;  which  suspension, 
together  with  copies  of  the  proceedings  of  the  court- 
^nartial,  the  said  officer  shall  immediately  transmit  to  the 
President  for  his  determination.  And  the  colonel  or  com- 
manding officer  of  the  regiment  or  garrison  where  any 
regimental  or  garrison  court-martial  shall  be  held,  may 
pardon  or  mitigate  any  punishment  ordered  by  such  court 
to  be  inflicted. 

Art.  90.  Every  judge  advocate,  or  person  officiating  as 
such,  at  any  general  court-martial,  shall  transmit,  with  as 
much  expedition  as  the  opportunity  of  time  and  distance 
of  place  can  admit,  the  original  proceedings  and  sentence 
of  such  court-martial  to  the  Secretary  of  War;  which  said 
original  proceedings  and  sentence  shall  be  carefully  kept 
and  preserved  in  the  office  of  said  Secretary,  to  the  end 
that  the  persons  entitled  thereto  may  be  enabled,  upon 
application  to  the  said  office,  to  obtain  copies  thereof. 

The  party  tried  by  any  general  court-martial  shall,  upon 
demand  thereof,  made  by  himself,  or  by  any  person  or 
persons  in  his  behalf,  be  entitled  to  a  copy  of  the  sentence 
and  proceedings  of  such  court-martial. 

Art.  91.  In  cases  where  the  general  or  commanding 
officer  may  order  a  court  of  inquiry  to  examine  into  the 
nature  of  any  transaction,  accusation,  or  imputation 
against  any  officer  or  soldier,  the  said  court  shall  consist  of 
one  or  more  officers,  not  exceeding  three/ and  a  judge  advo- 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


407 


Cfvte,  or  other  niitable  person,  as  a  recorder,  to  reduce  the 
proceedings  and  evidence  to  writing;  all  of  whom  shall  be 
sworn  to  the  faithful  performance  of  their  duty.  This 
court  shall  have  the  same  power  to  summon  witnesses  as  a 
court-martial,  and  to  examine  them  on  oath.  But  they 
shall  not  give  their  opinion  on  the  merits  of  ihe  case,  ex- 
cepting they  shall  be  thereto  specially  required.  The  par- 
ties accused  shall  also  be  permitted  to  cross-examine  and 
hiterrogate  the  witnesses,  so  as  to  investigate  fully  the  cir- 
cumstances in  the  question. 

Art.  92.  The  proceedings  of  a  court  of  inquiry  must  bo 
authenticated  by  the  signature  of  the  recorder  and  the 
president,  and  delivered  to  the  commanding  officer,  and  the 
said  proceedings  may  be  admitted  as  evidence  by  a  court- 
martial,  in  cases  not  capital,  or  extending  to  the  dismission 
of  an  officer,  provided  that  the  circumstances  are  such  that 
oral  testimony  cannot  be  obtained.  But  as  courts  of 
inquiry  may  be  perverted  to  dishonorable  purposes,  and 
may  be  considered  as  engines  of  destruction  to  military 
merit,  in  the  hands  of  weak  and  envious  commandants, 
they  are  hereby  prohibited,  unless  directed  by  the  President 
of  the  United  States,  or  demanded  by  the  accused. 

Art.  93.  The  judge  advocate  or  recorder  shall  administer 
to  the  members  the  following  oath : 

"You  shall  well  and  truly  examine  and  inquire,  accord- 
ing to  your  evidence,  into  the  matter  now  before  you, 
without  partiality,  favor,  affection,  prejudice,  or  hope  of 
reward.    So  help  you  God." 

After  which  the  president  shall  administer  to  the  judge 
advocate  or  recorder  the  following  oath  : 

"  You,  A.  B.,  do  swear  that  you  will,  according  to  your 
best  abilities,  accurately  and  impartially  record  the  pro- 
ceedings of  the  court,  and  the  evidence  to  be  given  in  tho 
case  in  hearing.    So  help  you  God." 

The  witnesses  shall  take  the  same  oath  as  witnesses  sworn 
before  a  court-martial. 

Art.  94.  When  any  commissioned  officer  shall  die  or  be 
killed  in  the  service  of  the  United  States,  the  major  of  the 
regiment,  or  the  officer  doing  the  major's  duty  in  his  ab- 
gence,  or,  in  any  post  or  garrison,  the  second  officer  in  com- 
mand, or  the  assistant  military  agent,  shall  immediately 
secure  all  his  effects  or  equipage,  then  in  camp  or  quarterS| 


m 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


and  shall  make  an  inventory  thereof,  and  forthwith  trans- 
mit the  same  to  the  office  of  the  Department  of  War,  to  the 
end  that  his  executors  or  administrators  may  receive  the 
same. 

Art.  95.  When  any  non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier 
shall  die,  or  be  killed  in  the  service  of  the  United  States, 
the  then  commanding  officer  of  the  troop  or  company  shall, 
in  the  presence  of  two  other  commissioned  officers,  take  an 
account  of  what  effects  he  died  possessed  of,  above  his  arnfg 
and  accoutrements,  and  transmit  the  same  to  the  office  of 
the  Department  of  War,  which  said  effects  are  to  be  ac- 
counted for,  and  paid  to  the  representatives  of  such  deceased 
non-commissioned  officer  or  soldier.  And  in  case  any  of 
the  officers,  so  authorized  to  take  care  of  the  effects  of  de- 
ceased officers  and  soldiers,  should,  before  they  have  ac- 
counted to  their  representatives  for  the  same,  have  occasion 
to  leave  the  regiment  or  post,  by  preferment  or  otherwi  e, 
they  shall,  before  they  be  permitted  to  quit  the  same,  de- 
posit in  the  hands  of  the  commanding  officer,  or  of  the 
assistant  military  agent,  all  the  effects  of  such  deceased 
non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers,  in  order  that  the 
same  may  be  secured  for,  and  paid  to,  their  respective 
representatives. 

Art.  96.  All  officers,  conductors,  gunners,  matrosses, 
drivers,  or  other  persons  whatsoever,  receiving  pay  or  hire 
in  the  service  of  the  artillery,  or  corps  of  engineers  of  the 
United  States,  shall  be  governed  by  the  aforesaid  Rules 
and  Articles,  and  shall  be  subject  to  be  tried  by  courts- 
martial,  in  like  manner  with  the  officers  and  soldiers  of 
the  other  troops  in  the  service  of  the  United  States. 

Art.  97.  The  officers  and  soldiers  of  any  troops,  whether 
militia  or  others,  being  mustered  and  in  pay  of  the  United 
States,  shall,  at  all  times  and  in  all  places,  Avhen  joined 
or  acting  in  conjunction  with  the  regular  forces  of  the 
United  States,  be  governed  by  these  rules  and  articles 
of  war,  and  shall  be  subject  to  be  tried  by  courts-martial, 
in  like  manner  with  the  officers  and  soldiers  in  the  re- 
gular forces,*  save  only  that  such  courts-martial  shall  be 
composed  entirely  of  militia  officers. 

Art.  98.  All  officers  serving  by  commission  from  the 
authority  of  any  particular  State,  shall,  on  all  detach- 
ments, courts-martial,  or  other  duty,  wherein  they  may  bo 


ARTICLES  OF  WAR. 


409 


CTuploysd  in  conjunction  with  the  regular  forces  of  the 
United  States,  take  rank  next  after  all  officers  of  the  like 
grade  in  said  regular  forces,  notwithstanding  the  com- 
missions of  such  militia  or  State  officers  may  be  elder 
than  the  commissions  of  the  officers  of  the  regular  forces 
of  the  United  States. 

Art.  99.  All  crimes  not  capital,  and  all  disorders  and 
neglects  which  officers  and  soldiers  may  be  guilty  of,  to  the 
prejudice  of  good  order  and  military  discipline,  though  not 
mentioned  in  the  foregoing  articles  of  war,  are  to  be  taken 
cognizance  of  by  a  general  or  regimental  court-martial, 
according  to  tbe  nature  and  degree  of  the  offence,  and  be 
punished  at  their  discretion. 

Art.  100.  The  President  of  the  United  States  shall  have 
power  to  prescribe  the  uniform  of  the  army. 

Art.  101,  The  foregoing  articles  are  to  be  read  and  pub- 
lished, once  in  every  six  months,  to  every  garrison,  regi- 
ment, troop,  or  company,  mustered,  or  to  be  mustered,  in 
the  service  of  the  United  States,  and  are  to  be  duly  ob- 
served and  obeyed  by  all  officers  and  soldiers  who  are,  or 
shall  be,  in  said  service. 

Sec.  2.  And  be  it  further  enacted^  That  in  time  of  war,  all 
persons  not  citizens  of,  or  owing  allegiance  to,  the  United 
States  of  America,  who  shall  be  found  lurking  as  spies  in 
or  about  the  fortifications  or  encampments  of  the  armies 
of  the  United  States,  or  any  of  them,  shall  suffer  death, 
according  to  the  law  and  usage  of  nations,  by  sentence  of  a 
general  court-martial. 

Sec.  3.  And  he  it  further  enacted,  That  the  rules  and 
regulations  by  which  the  armies  of  the  United  States  have 
heretofore  been  governed,  and  the  resolves  of  Congress 
thereunto  annexed,  and  respecting  the  same,  shall  hence- 
forth be  void  and  of  no  effect,  except  so  far  as  may  relate 
to  any  transactions  under  them  prior  to  the  promulgation 
of  this  act,  at  the  several  posts  and  garrisons  respectively, 
Occupied  by  any  part  of  the  ai'my  of  the  United  States. 
[Approved,  April  10,  1806.] 


A  DICTIONAEY 

OP 

MILITARY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES. 


Abandon. — To  retire  from,  and  yield  to  the  enemy,  a  posi- 
tion which  cannot  be  defended  or  ought  not  to  be  re- 
tained. 

Abatis  {})ron,  Ab-haf-tee,). —  Felled  trees,  with  their  sharp 
branches  placed  outward,  and  so  interlaced  as  to  present 
an  irregular  and  thick  row  of  pointed  stakes  towards  the 
enemy. 

They  are  easily  prepared,  and  expose  the  enemy  to  a 
destructive  fire  while  endeavoring  to  remove  them. 

Absence  (Leave  of). — The  permission  obtained  by  officers 
to  absent  themselves  from  their  regiments  or  posts. 

(Without  leave.) — Every  absence  without  permission, 
or  after  the  term  of  the  leave  is  expired,  is  entered  upon 
the  daily  roll  as  absence  without  leave,  and  constitutes  a 
military  offence. 

Accoutrements. — A  word  which  comprises  the  belts,  car- 
tridge-box, bayonet-scabbard,  <fcc.  of  a  soldier.  When 
besides  these  he  has  his  arms,  he  is  said  to  be  armed  and 
accoutred. 

Adjutant  (From  a  Latin  verb  meaning  to  help), — Is  the 
regimental  staff  officer  who  assists  the  colonel  or  other 
commander  in  the  details  of  regimental  or  garrison  duty. 
Wnen  serving  with  a  detachment  of  a  regiment  at  a  post, 

411 


412 


A  DICTIOXARY  OF 


he  is  called  a  post  adjutant.  The  adjutant  is  usually 
selected  from  the  rank  of  lieutenants,  and  receives  extra 
pay  and  ailoTvances.  lie  receives  and  issues  orders,  forma 
the  daily  parade,  details  and  mounts  the  guards,  Ac. 

Adjutant  General. — The  principal  staff  officer  of  an  army, 
to  whom  the  communications  for  the  head-quarters  are 
addressed.  He  keeps  careful  and  systematic  account 
of  the  strength,  posts,  and  condition  of  the  various  corps, 
and  is  the  organ  of  the  general  commanding  in  issuing 
orders.  In  the  U.  S.  Army  there  is  a  department  called 
the  Adjutant  General's  Department,  composed  of  one 
colonel,  one  lieutenant  colonel,  four  brevet  majors,  and 
eight  brevet  captains :  all  except  the  colonel  are  called 
assistant  adjutant  generals. 

Affair. — An  engagement  between  hostile  bodies,  less  in 
importance  than  a  battle,  and  usually  of  short  duration. 

Aide-de-Ca'mp  (Commonly  called  aid). — An  officer  on  the 
personal  staff  of  a  general,  whose  orders  ho  receives  and 
executes.  Aids  are  usually  regimental  officers  tempo- 
rarily detached. 

Alignment  (From  the  French  aligner^  to  j)lr(ce  in  line). — 
the  line  upon  which  troops  are  formed  in  battle  order. 

Ambulance. — A  large  spring  wagon  for  conveying  the 
wounded.    A  flying  hospital. 

Ambuscade. — A  body  of  troops  concealed  from  the  enemy's 
approach,  designed  to  surprise  him  and  cause  confusion. 
The  place  where  they  lie  is  called  an  ambush. 

Ammunition. — Powder,  either  loose  or  in  cartridges,  balls, 
shells,  and  other  projectiles;  in  short,  every  thing  de- 
signed to  supply  cannon  and  firearms. 

Amnesty. — Pardon  and  release. from  all  charges  connected 
with  war, — usually  stipulated  for  in  treaties  of  peace,  or 
conceded  by  monarchs  upon  coming  into  power. 

Angle. — la  gunnery,  the  inclination  which  the  barrel  of 


MILITARY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES.  413 


the  piece  makes  -witli  a  horizontal  line  is  called  the  angle 
of  elevation,  or  the  angle  of  the  piece. 
Approaches. — The  lines  of  entrenchment,  ditches,  <fec.  hy 
which  the  besiegers  approach  a  fortified  place.  Tho 
principal  trenches  are  called  the  first,  second,  and  third 
parallels. 

Apron. — A  piece  of  sheet-lead,  used  to  cover  the  vent  of  a 

cannon,  to  keep  it  from  the  weather. 
Armistice  (Latin,  armisticium), — A  temporary  suspension 

of  hostilities. 

Armory. — A  store-house  in  which  arms  are  deposited.  Some- 
times, also,  the  place  where  arms  are  made  and  repaired. 
The  person  who  makes  or  repairs  them  is  called  an  armorer. 

Armstrong  Gun. — A  rifle  cannon  loaded  at  the  breech. 
Its  projccdie  is  made  of  cast  iron,  surrounded  by  two 
leaden  rings  placed  at  the  extremity  of  the  cylindrical 
part,  for  the  purpose  of  fitting  the  grooves  when  it  is 
forced  through  the  bore. 

Army. — A  body  of  troops  of  various  corps  (infantry,  cavalry, 
artillery,  and  engineers),  organized  and  commanded  by  a 
general.    They  constitute  a  military  unit. 

Arrest. — The  confinement  of  an  ofiicer,  and  his  temporary 
suspension  from  duty,  preparatory  to  his  trial  on  military 
charges. 

Arsenal. — A  place  where  arms  are  made,  repaired,  and  de- 
posited.   Military  stores  are  also  placed  in  arsenals. 

Articles  of  War. — The  various  sections  and  articles  of  an 
act  of  Congress  "  for  establishing  rules  and  articles  foi 
the  government  of  the  armies  of  the  United  States." 

Artillery. — In  this  term  are  included  all  kinds  of  cannon, 
mortars,  howitzers,  &c.,  with  all  the  munitions  and  im- 
plements requisite  for  service. 

Assembly. — An  army-call  beaten  upon  the  drum,  foi- 
assembling  the  troops  by  company^ 


414  A  DICTIONARY  OF 

Attack. — Any  oDset  upon  the  enemy.  In  sieges  it  implies 
the  works  carried  on  by  the  besiegers.  When  an  assault 
is  only  partly  made,with  the  design  of  deceiving  the  enemy 
and  diverting  his  attention,  it  is  called  a  false  attack, 

A  TTENTiON. — A  word  of  command  preparatory  to  the  drill 
or  exercise  of  troops,  as,  Attention,  squad  (or  company,  or 
battalion). 

Baggage. — The  utensils,  tents,  provision,  <fec.  of  an  army  or 
corps.  The  wagons  in  which  these  are  carried  constitute 
the  baggage  traiHy  which  is  always  defended  by  a  guard. 

Band. — A  number  of  trained  musicians,  atcached  to  a 
regiment  or  corps,  usually  under  the  immediate  direction 
of  the  adjutant. 

Banquette. — A  small  elevation  of  earth  on  the  inside  of  a 
fort,  upon  which  the  soldiers  stand  to  fire  over  the  para- 
pet which  shelters  thera  when  loading.  It  is  usually 
three  or  four  feet  wide  and  less  than  five  feet  high. 

Barbette  Guns. — Are  guns  which  fire  entirely  over  the 
parapet,  on  raised  platforms,  and  thus  have  a  free  range 
in  all  outer  directions.  They  are  distinguished  from 
guns  in  embrasure,  which  fire  through  a  narrow  cut  in 
the  parapet,  and  have  but  a  limited  field  of  fire. 

Barracks  (From  the  Spanish  Barraca.) — Grovernment 
buildings  for  lodging  troops.  They  are  provided  with 
kitchens,  mess-rooms,  soldiers'  quarters,  <fcc.,  and  are  in 
reality  a  kind  of  military  hotel. 

Barricade. — To  obstruct  the  avenues  of  access,  as  roads, 
streets,  <fcc.  This  is  done  by  wagons,  heaps  of  stones, 
abatis,  &c.;  ditches  are  also  dug  across  the  approaches, 
and  trees  felled. 

Bastion. — In  fortification,  the  advanced  portion  of  a  regular 
work,  consisting  of  two  faces  enclosing  a  i^alient  angle, 
and  two  flanks.    When  two  such  bastions  are  united  Jjj 


MILITARY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES.  415 


a  retired  line  called  a  curtain,  they  constitute  a  hastioned 
front.  The  advantages  of  bastions  consist  in  their  flank- 
ing arrangements. 

BATTALION. — One-half  of  a  regiment  of  infantry.  Thia 
word  is  loosely  used.  Two  companies  are  sometimes 
called  a  battalion,  while  the  whole  regiment  at  drill  is 
also  called  thus.  It  is  commonly  understood,  however, 
that  a  regiment  is  composed  of  two  battalions. 

Batter. — To  beat  down  with  cannon-balls.  To  batter  in 
breach  is  to  discharge  cannon  for  the  purpose  of  making 
a  break  or  breach  in  a  fortification  sufficiently  large  for 
attacking  troops  to  enter. 

Battery. — A  number  of  cannon  of  any  kind  arranged  for 
firing  together.  Sometimes  the  place  where  they  are 
parked  receives  the  name  of  battery. 

Battle. — A  contest  between  considerable  bodies  of  hostile 
troops.  A  battle  is  more  important  than  an  affair  or 
a  skirmish. 

Bayonet  (So  called  because  first  made  at  Bayonne.) — The 
sharp-pointed  steel  instrument  made  to  fit  upon  the  end 
of  a  musket  or  rifle,  as  an  additional  weapon.  The  new 
rifles  are  armed  with  sabre-bayonets. 

Berm. — A  narrow  space  between  the  parapet  and  the  ditch, 
left  vacant  in  the  construction,  so  that  the  mass  of  the 
parapet  may  be  secure  from  falling  into  the  ditch. 

Besiege. — To  surround  and  shut  in  a  place  by  an  armed 
force.  The  dwellers  in  the  place  are  called  the  besieged 
the  force  surrounding  them,  the  besiegers. 

Billeting. — The  temporary  lodgment  of  soldiers  in  the 
houses  of  the  inhabitants  of  a  town  or  village.  It  is 
often  attended  with  evil  consequences,  and  is  only  re- 
sorted to  when  separate  quarters  cannot  be  had. 

I^ivouAO. — When  an  army  passes  the  night  without  shelter, 
except  such  as  can  be  hastily  made  of  plants,  branche?, 


m 


A  DICTIONARY  OF 


Ac,  it  is  said  to  bivouac.  (From  lis,  double,  and  wacht^ 

the  German  for  guard.) 
Blockade. — Shutting  in  a  fortress  or  place  so  that  there 

is  neither  ingress  nor  egress  practicable.    On  land,  this  is 

done  by  troops.    By  sea,  a  competent  force  of  vessels 

must  be  provided. 
Bomb. — A  word  formerly  used  to  mean  a  shell,  such  as  is 

thrown  from  a  mortar.    When  mortars  are  fired  upon  a 

place,  they  are  said  to  bombard  it. 
BoYAU. — Zigzag  ditches  by  which  the  besiegers  approach 

a  fortified  place.    The  plural  is  boyanx. 
Breach. — An  opening  made  by  cannon  in  a  wall  or  fort, 

by  which  infantry  troops  may  attack  it. 
Breastwork. — Any  wall  of  defence  breast-high,  which 

shelters  infantry  in  loading  and  firing  upon  the  enemy. 
Breech. — The  extremity  of  a  gun  near  the  vent. 
Brevet. — An  honorary  commission  given  to  officers  for 

meritorious  service,  but  not  affecting  the  lineal  rank 

except  under  special  circumstances. 
Brigade. — A  body  of  troops  consisting  of  two  or  three 

regiments. 

Brigade  Inspector.  —  The  officer  appointed  to  inspect 
troops  in  companies,  before  they  are  mustered  into 
service. 

Brigadier  General. — An  officer  who  commands  a  bri- 
gade. The  second  rank  in  our  service,  next  below  a 
major-general  and  above  a  colonel. 

Cadence. — Exact  time  in  marching  and  executing  the 
manual  of  arms.  It  is  indispensable  to  uniformity  of 
motion. 

Caisson. — The  ammunition  carriage  accompanying  a  field- 
piece. 

Calibre. — The  diameter  of  the  bore  of  a  cannon  of  any  Kind. 


MILITARY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES. 


417 


Camp. — Implies  the  ground  upon  which  troops  encamp,  the 

form  of  the  encampment,  and  the  tents  or  temporary 

shelters  of  any  l^ind  which  are  used. 
Campaign. — The  strategic  arrangements  of  troops  in  o 

war  for  some  definite  end. 
Cannon. — The  name  given  to  pieces  of  artillery  of  every 

form. 

Canteen. — A  small  flat  bottle,  or  runlet,  in  which  a  sol- 
dier carries  water.  Canteens  are  made  of  wood,  tin,  oi 
India-rubber. 

Captain. —  The  commander  of  a  company. 

Carbine. — A  small  musket  or  rifle  used  by  cavalry. 

Cartridge. — A  charge  of  powder  for  any  kind  of  fire- 
arms. Those  for  muskets  are  rolled  in  paper  those  for 
cannon  are  put  up  in  flannel.  A  ball  cartridge  is  one 
which  has  a  ball  inserted  at  the  end  of  the  powder,  so 
that  the  piece  is  entirely  loaded  at  once. 

Cartridge-Box. — The  leather  box  worn  on  the  right  hip, 
in  which  cartridges  are  kept. 

Cascable. — The  knob  of  a  cannon  at  the  end  of  the 
breech. 

Casemate. — Casemates  are  bomb-proof  chambers  in  forti- 
fications, through  holes  in  which,  called  embrasure^f 
heavy  guns  are  fired. 

Cashier. — To  dismiss  an  officer  ignominiously  from  the 
army. 

Cavalry. — This  term  includes  all  kinds  of  mounted 
troops,  dragoons,  hussars,  light  and  heavy  cavalry,  &c. 

Chamber. — The  cavity  at  the  bottom  of  the  bore  of  a 
mortar  or  howitzer  into  which  the  charge  of  gunpowder 
is  put. 

Chevau-de-Friss. — A  square  beam  (or  hexagonal)  of 
timber  or  iron,  from  six  to  nine  feet  long,  in  each  side  of 
which  pointed  stakes  are  placed  at  right  angles  to  the 


418 


A  DICTIONARY  OF 


.sides.  They  are  designed  as  obstacles  for  stopping,  a 
breach,  or  for  obstructing  the  ditch.  (Plural,  chevauX'- 
de-frise.) 

Colonel. — The  commander  of  a  regiment. 

Colors  [Eegimental). — The  two  silken  flags  belonging  to  a 
regiment.  The  regimental  colors  contain  the  name  and 
number  of  the  regiment.  The  r.ational  colors  are  the  fiag 
of  the  United  States.  In  our  service  the  colors  are  borne 
by  color-sergeants ;  in  the  English,  by  ensigna. 

CoLUMBiAD. — A  gun  of  very  large  calibre,  used  for  throw- 
ing solid  shot  or  shells.  The  old  columbiads  had  cham- 
bers; the  modern  are  made  without  them. 

Commissary. — An  officer  who  purchases  and  issues  pro- 
visions. 

Company. — A  body  of  men,  from  fifty  to  one  hundred,  com- 
manded by  a  captain. 

Corporal. — The  lowest  grade  of  non-commissioned  officers. 

Countermarch. — To  change  the  direction  of  a  company 
or  battalion  from  front  to  rear,  by  a  flank  movement, 
retaining  the  same  ground. 

Counterscarp. — The  outer  wall  or  slope  of  the  ditch  of  a 
fort. 

Countersign. — A  secret  word  of  communication  to  the 
sentinels  on  post,  without  a  knowledge  of  which  no  one 
is  permitted  to  pass  the  lines. 

Coup-de-Main. — A  sudden  attack  connected  with  a  surprise, 

Court-Martial. — A  military  court  of  justice  to  try  and 
punish  ail  offences  against  military  law.  It  is  composed 
of  military  officers.  They  are  divided  into  general  courts^ 
to  try  important  cases,  garrison  courts,  for  lesser  delin- 
quencies, and  drum-head  courts,  for  summary  punish- 
ment.   (Plural,  courts-martial.) 

Cuirassiers. — Heavy  cavalry  protected  by  breastplates. 
There  are  no  cuirassiers  in  the  United  States  service. 


MILITARY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES. 


419 


Dahlgren  Gun. — An  improved  cannon,  bearing  the  name 

of  the  inventor. 
Defile. — A  narrow  passage  or  road,  in  marching  through 

which  the  troops  can  show  but  a  small  front. 
Deploy." — To  open  the  order  of  troops  from  column  into 

line  of  battle. 

Ditch. — The  excavation  in  front  of  a  fort,  from  which 
earth  has  been  taken  to  build  the  parapet,  and  which 
offers  an  obstacle  to  the  enemy. 

Dragoon. — A  kind  of  cavalry,  who  sometimes  serve  also 
on  foot. 

Echelon  (A  French  word,  meaning  ladder). — A  forma- 
tion of  troops,  where  battalions  or  brigades  follow  each 
other  on  separate  lines  like  the  steps  of  a  ladder. 

Embrasure. — An  opening  cut  in  a  parapet,  for  cannon  to 
lire  through.  When  guns  fire  over  a  parapet,  they  are 
called  barbette  guns. 

Enfilade. — To  sweep  with  a  battery  the  whole  length  of  a 
work  or  line  of  troops. 

Engineers. — Ofiicers  who  build  fortifications.  There  is  a 
corps  of  engineers  in  the  United  States  service.  The 
topographical  engineers  are  those  who  make  military 
surveys  or  reconnoissances. 

Enlistment. — The  mode  of  bringing  soldiers  into  service* 
The  term  of  enlistment  varies  according  to  circumstances. 

Entrench. — To  throw  up  a  parapet  with  a  ditch  in  front 
of  it,  so  as  to  render  a  position  stronger. 

Epaulettes. — Ornaments  of  gold  or  silver  worn  upon 
the  .shoulders  of  commissioned  officers,  and  marked  so 
as  to  determine  their  rank. 

Eprouvette. — A  small  mortar  for  testing  the  strength  and 
equality  of  gunpowder. 

Escalade. — The  attack  upon  a  fort  with  scaling-ladder*. 


420 


A  DICTIONARY  OF 


Evolutions  of  tpie  Line. — Movements  by  which  troops, 
consisting  of  more  regiments  than  one,  change  their  posi- 
tion with  order  and  reguhirity  upon  the  field  of  battle. 

Fascines. — Brushwood,  or  long  twigs,  such  as  osier  ot 
willow,  collected  together  and  bound  into  bundles  of 
convenient  size  :  used  to  revet  a  parapet,  or  to  make  firm 
footing  on  marshy  ground,  and  for  other  purposes. 

Field  Officers. — The  colonel,  lieutenant  colonel,  and 
major  of  a  regiment  are  called  field  ofiicers. 

File. — The  front  and  rear  rank  man  constitute  a  file. 

File  Closer. — The  oflScers  and  non-commissioned  ofiBcera 
of  a  company,  whose  habitual  position  is  two  paces  be- 
hind the  rear  rank,  are  called  file  closers. 

Forage. — The  hay,  stra  w,  and  oats  required  for  the  horses. 

Flank. — Literally,  side.  The  right  or  left  flank  is  the 
right  or  left  side  or  at  right  angles.  The  fl^anks  of  an 
army  are  the  troops  on  the  right  or  left. 

Forlorn  Hope. — A  party  of  ofiicers  and  men  selected — 
general!}^  volunteers — to  attack  a  breach  in  storming  a 
work.  The  duty  is  very  dangerous,  and  the  survivors 
receive  promotion. 

Fort. — Any  military  work  designed  to  strengthen  a  point 
against  every  attack  is  a  fort.  If  it  be  an  important  and 
complete  fort,  it  is  called  a  fortress. 

Fortifications. — Are  works  of  strong  character  to  defend 
a  city  or  some  extensive  front.  When  they  are  made 
entirely  of  earth,  they  are  called  field  fortificationa ; 
when  of  masonry,  permanent  fortifications. 

Fturlough. — Leave  of  absence  granted  to  warrant  and 
non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers. 

Fuse. — A  tube  filled  with  combustible  materials,  which  is 
fixed  in  a  shell:  it  burns,  when  ignited,  for  a  calcu- 
lated time  before  it  reaches  the  powder  in  the  shell  and 
explodes  it. 


MILITARY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES.  42i 


Gabion. — Cylindrical  baskets,  without  top  or  bottom,  mad© 
of  pliant  twigs,  filled  with  earth,  and  placed  to  resist 
cannon-shot. 

Garrison.  —  A  strong  place  in  which  troops  are  quartered. 
Often  the  troops  themselves  are  called  the  garrison. 

fiENERALS.  — All  officers  above  the  rank  of  colonel.  Wo 
have  in  the  United  States  service  only  tAvo  grades,  major 
general  and  brigadier  general.  By  special  act,  the  brevet 
of  lieutenant  general  was  conferred  on  General  Winfield 
Scott. 

Glacis. — The  declivity  of  ground  running  from  beyond 
the  counterscarp  of  the  ditch  to  the  open  country,  and 
swept  by  the  fire  of  the  parapet. 

Grape. — Large  shot  (usually  nine)  sewed  together  in  cylin- 
drical bags,  which  are  made  to  fit  like  cartridges  into 
cannon. 

Grenade. — A  small  shell  with  a  short  fuse,  which  may  be 

thrown  into  the  enemy's  works. 
Grenadiers. — The  infantry  company  on  the  right  of  the 

regiment  is  called  the  grenadier-company,  because  they 

formerly  carried  ha/fid-grenades. 
Guard. — A  portion  of  troops  regularly  detailed,  whose 

duty  is  to  watch  against  surprise  and  disorder.  The 

individual  soldiers  of  the  guard  are  called  sentinels. 
Guidon. — Small  silken  flags  borne  by  cavalry  and  light 

artillery. 

Gunpowder. — A  composition  of  saltpetre  (76  parts),  char- 
coal (14  parts),  and  sulphur  (10  parts).  The  charcoal  is 
the  combustible  part;  the  saltpetre  furnishes  the  oxy- 
gen, and  changes  the  mass  into  gas ;  the  sulphur  gives 
intensity  of  heat. 

Handspike. — A  wooden  lever,  placed  at  the  rear  end  of  a 
gun-carriage  for  convenience  in  turning  it. 

34 


422 


A  DICTIONARY  OF 


HA.VERSACK. — A  coarse  bag  of  linen,  cotton,  or  India 
rubber,  in  which  a  soldier  carries  his  rations  for  daily 
use. 

Holsters. — Cases  fixed  to  the  front  of  cavalry  saddles  to 
hold  a  pair  of  pistols. 

HoRS  DE  Combat  (French:  literally,  out  of  combat). — Not 
able  to  take  part  in  immediate  action.  The  term  in- 
cludes all  dead,  wounded,  missing,  or  those  who  from  any 
cause  are  thus  disabled. 

Howitzer. — A  chambered  cannon,  which  fires  a  species  of 
shell  called  a  liowitz.  They  are  of  various  calibres  and 
dimensions. 

Infantry. — The  foot  troops  of  an  army.  They  constitute 
the  chief  element,  and  are  usually  armed  with  the  musket 
or  rifle.  They  are  divided  into  infantry  of  the  line  and 
light  infantry. 

Inspection. — A  stated  examination,  by  commanders,  of  the 
condition  of  their  troops  in  every  respect. 

Inspector  General. — The  officer  (with  the  rank  of  colo- 
nel) who  makes  regular  tours  of  inspection  in  the  dif- 
ferent departments  of  a  country,  and  reports  to  head- 
quarters on  the  condition  of  the  troops. 

Interval. — The  distances  between  platoons,  companies, 
regiments,  or  any  other  divisions  of  troops  are  called 
intervals.  In  manoeuvring  it  is  important  to  preserve 
the  interval. 

Invest. — To  take  measures  for  besieging  a  town  or  place, 
by  shutting  in  the  inhabitants  and  shutting  off  all  ap- 
proach. 

Judge  Advocate. — A  person  (commonly  an  officer)  who 
conducts  the  prosecution  before  courts-martial.  He  also 
acts  as  counsel  to  the  prisoner,  should  there  be  no  other 


MILITARY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES. 


423 


counsel.  He  summons  witnesses,  and  makes  all  the 
arrangements  for  trial. 

Knapsack. — A  square  frame,  to  fit  across  the  shoulders, 
covered  with  canvas  or  India-rubber,  and  containing 
the  entire  necessaries  of  an  infantry  soldier. 

Ladders  (Scaling). — A"e  made  of  fiat  staves,  fastened  in 
ropes,  which  are  provided  at  the  end  with  hooks  for  grap- 
pling the  enemy's  ramparts  that  soldiers  may  mount  them. 

Lieutenant  {lieu-tenant,  French,  holding  the  place  of). — 
An  officer  below  the  rank  of  captain,  who  has  specific 
company  duties. 

Lieutenant  General. — A  general  of  rank  next  above  a 
major  general.  We  have  no  such  lineal  rank  in  the 
United  States  service.  It  is  conferred  by  brevet  upon 
General  Scott. 

Light  Infantry. — Infantry  whose  habitual  order  is  that 
of  skirmishers,  or  dispersed  as  sharp-shooters. 

Limber. — A  two-wheeled  carriage  fastened  to  the  trail  of  a 
cannon  when  it  is  to  be  removed  to  a  considerable  dis- 
tance ]  when  the  piece  is  brought  into  action,  it  is  nn- 
limbered. 

Linstock. — A  piece  of  wood  shod  with  iron,  and  easily 
stuck  in  the  ^-ound,  through  a  hole  in  the  upper  end  of 
which  a  piece  of  prepared  tow-rope  is  kept  burning. 

L:>GiSTics. — That  branch  of  the  art  of  war  which  concerni 
moving  and  supi^lying  armies. 

Lunette.  —  Small  triangular  field  forts,  with  the  base 
angles  cut  away. 

Magazine.— The  place  where  arms,  ammunition,  pro- 
visions, and  all  other  army  stores  are  collected. 
Major. — A  field  officer  just  below  the  lieutenant  colonel. 


424 


A  DICTIONARY  OF 


Malingerer.- -A  soldier  who  feigns  ill  healtb  to  avoid 
doing  his  duty.  When  discovered,  his  conduct  is  declared 
disgraceful,  and  he  is  tried. 

Mangeuvre. — Any  concerted  movement  of  troops  at  drill. 

Martial  Law. — A  subordination  of  the  civil  law  to  the 
military,  by  which  the  habeas  corpus  act  is  suspended. 
Subjection  to  the  articles  of  war. 

Metre. — A  French  measure  of  distances,  containing  three 
feet  and  a  third. 

Mine. —  A  subterraneous  passage  dug  under  a  work  or 
glacis,  and  stocked  with  gunpowder,  which  may  be  ex- 
ploded by  a  long  train  fired  without  danger. 

Minie. — A  kind  of  rifle  invented  by  Captain  Mini^,  of 
France,  which  carries  a  conical  ball,  hollow  at  the  base. 

Mortars. — Short  pieces  of  ordnance,  with  large  calibre? 
and  chambers,  from  whicli  shells  are  fired  at  an  elevated 
angle. 

Muster-Roll.  —  A  roll,  prepared  at  intervals  of  two 
months,  containing  all  the  details  of  company  organi- 
zation. At  the  same  time  the  troops  are  mustered  and 
inspected. 

Mutiny. — Seditious  or  refractory  conduct  among  troops: 
the  name  is  given  to  insubordination  associated  with 
violence. 

Muzzle. — The  extremity  of  a  cannon,  or  any  firearm^ 
through  which  the  ball  makes  its  exit. 

NoN-CoMMTSSioNED — OfiSccrs,  are  sergeants  of  various  grades 
and  corporals :  they  are  appointed  by  authorities  lowei 
than  the  President, — commissions  issuing  from  him.  As 
a  punishment,  non-commissioned  ofiicers  may  be  reduced 
to  the  ranks. 

Orderly. — A  soldier  of  any  grade,  appointed  to  wait  offi- 


MILITARY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES.  425 


cially  upon  a  general  or  other  officer,  to  carry  orders 
or  messages.  The  orderly  sergeant  is  the  first  sergeant 
of  the  company.  The  officer  of  the  day  is  sometimes 
called  the  orderly  officer. 

Ordnance  Corps. —  A  corps  of  officers  with  regimental 
grades,  having  charge  of  the  making,  keeping,  and 
issuing  of  arms  aud  ammunition.  They  are  usually 
quartered  at  arsenals  and  armories. 

Outpost. — A  body  of  troops — usually  considered  as  guards, 
and  relieved  from  time  to  time — posted  beyond  the  lines, 
to  guard  against  surprise  of  the  main  body. 

Outworks. — The  detailed  works  constructed  outside  the 
regular  fortification,  but  connected  with  it  according  to 
the  principles  of  defence. 

Paixhan. — A  large  howitzer,  similar  to  a  columbiad,  and 
throwing  very  large  shells  and  balls.  It  is  named  after 
the  inventor. 

Parade. — The  assembling  of  troops  in  a  prescribed  man- 
ner. When  equipped  with  arms,  it  is  called  a  dress 
parade;  when  without,  undress. 

Parallels. — The  deep  trenches  parallel  to  the  general 
direction  of  a  fort,  by  means  of  which  the  besiegers  ap- 
proach it. 

Parapet. — The  mass  of  earth  or  masonry  elevated  so  aa 

to  screen  a  place  from  the  fire  of  the  enemy.    It  is  mado 

so  thick  that  shot  cannot  penetrate  it. 
Park. —  A  number  of  cannon  arranged  in  close  order. 

Also,  the  place  where  they  are. 
Parole  (French). — The  word  of  honor  given  by  a  prisoner 

to  his  captor. 

Patrol. — A  small  party,  under  a  non-commissioned  officer, 
which  goes  through  or  around  an  encampment  at  night, 
to  keep  order. 


42o 


A  DICTIONARY  OF 


pAf. — The  stipend  or  salary  allowed  to  officers  and  sol 
diers.  Besides  the  pay,  certain  allovmncesy  such  aa 
rationSf  are  made  to  soldiers;  while  officers  have  also 
servants,  fuel,  stationery,  and  other  allowances. 

Picket. — A  small  outpost  guard. 

ViONEERS. — Soldiers  equipped  with  axes,  saws,  and  other 

instruments  for  clearing  the  way  before  an  advancing 

army,  or  to  entrench. 
Platoon. — One-half  a  company.     The  two  platoons  are 

called,  respectively,  first  and  second  platoons. 
Ploy. — To  close  a  battalion,  or  any  other  division  of  troops, 

from  line  of  battle  into  column. 
Point-Blank. — The  point  of  distance  at  which  when  a 

cannon  or  firearm  is  aimed,  the  axis  of  the  piece  is  on  the 

line  with  it. 

Police. — In  military  parlance,  keeping  the  camp  or  bar- 
racks clean  and  neat. 

Pontoon,  or  Ponton. — Boats,  or  India-rubber  bags,  made 
into  compartments,  and  filled  with  air,  which  are  an- 
chored in  a  stream  at  dilferent  distances,  and  upon  which 
planks  are  placed  to  form  a  bridge. 

Port-Fire. — A  cylindrical  case  of  stiff  paper  filled  with 
a  combustible  material,  and  used  sometimes  in  firing 
cannon. 

Projectiles. — All  kinds  of  shot  and  shells.  Every  thing 
which  is  projected  from  firearms. 

Quarter-Master,  <fec. — The  quarter-master  is  the  oflficer 
charged  with  providing  quarters  and  furnishing  clothing. 
In  the  United  States  service,  there  is  a  Quarter-Master 
Department,  containing  ofiicers  of  all  grades  from  the 
colonel  commanding  to  captains. 

Quarters, — The  places  where  troops  are  lodged.  Head- 
quarters are  the  residence  of  the  commander. 


MILITARY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES. 


427 


Rally.  —  To  reform  disordered  troops;  to  bring  skir- 
mishers into  close  order;  to  collect  retreating  troop* 
for  a  new  attack. 

K  AMP  ART. — A  broad  embankment  surrounding  a  fortified 
place.   It  includes  tbe  parapet  and  other  raised  works. 

Rank. — The  range  or  order  of  seniority  in  commission. 

Rank  and  Ejle. — The  corporals  and  privates  of  an  army, 
or  those  who  parade  in  the  ranks  habitually.  Lineal 
rank  is  the  order  of  promotion  by  seniority.  Brevet 
rank  is  honorary  rank  conferred  for  meritorious  service. 

Rations. — The  daily  allowance  of  meat,  bread,  and  other 
provisions  to  a  soldier. 

Reconnoissance. — The  survey  and  examination  of  a  por* 
tion  of  country,  or  any  point,  with  a  view  to  military 
movements. 

Recruit. — Literally,  a  soldier  enlisted  to  take  a  vacant 
place  in  a  company ;  commonly,  any  new  soldier. 

Redan. — A  portion  of  fortification  included  in  a  single 
salient  angle. 

Redoubt. — Any  small  isolated  fort.  It  is  usually  defensible 
on  all  sides. 

Regiment. — A  body  of  troops  comprising  ten  companies, 
and  commanded  by  a  colonel. 

Regulations. — A  system  of  orders  and  instructions  on  all 
subjects  connected  with  the  management  of  the  array. 
They  are  published  together,  and  constitute  "  The  Army 
Regulations."    The  last  were  issued  in  1857. 

Relief. —  A  division  of  the  guard, — usually  one-third. 
These  are  called  first,  second,  and  third  relief.  The  sen- 
tinels of  each  relief  are  on  post  for  two  hours,  and  off  for 
four. 

TipESERVE. — A  select  body  of  troops  held  back  for  a  de- 
cisive moment.  In  light  infantry,  the  compact  nucleui 
upon  which  the  skirmishers  rally. 


428 


A  DICTIONARY  OP 


Ketreat. — The  parade  at  sunset,  jn  the  evening  gun  is 
fired,  and  the  flag  taken  down  for  the  night. 

Reveille  (pronounced  rev-il-lee'). —  The  early  morning 
drum-beat  and  roll-call,  usually  accompanied  by  tho 
morning  gun. 

Revetment. — Any  wall  or  strengthening  process  of  tho 
earth-works  of  a  fori.  Sometimes  a  work  is  revetted 
with  sand-bags  or  fascines.  Permanent  forts  are  revetted 
with  masonry. 

Ricochet. — The  rebounding  of  a  shot,  usually  propelled 
by  a  small  charge,  and  with  the  gun  pointed  at  an  ele- 
7ation  of  less  than  10°.  By  striking  in  more  spots  than 
one,  it  does  greater  damage. 

Rifle. — Any  firearm  which  has  a  curved  groove  running 
down  its  length  from  the  muzzle  to  the  bottom  of  the 
bore.    Cannon  are  rendered  more  effective  by  rifling. 

Roll-Calls. — Stated  daily  parades  of  the  company,  with 
or  without  arms,  for  calling  the  roll  and  seeing  that 
every  man  is  in  his  place. 

Roster. — A  list  of  ofiicers  and  men,  from  which  details  for 
guard  and  other  duties  are  made, — on  the  principle  that 
the  longest  off  any  duty  shall  be  detailed  for  the  next 
tour. 

Sabretasche  (German,  Sahel,  sabre,  and  Tasche,  pocket), 

— A  leathern  case,  suspended  at  the  left  side  of  a  mounted 

officer,  in  which  papers  are  carried. 
Safeguard. — A  passport  given  by  competent  authority 

to  a  person  passing  through  military  lines.   It  is  usually 

both  for  persons  and  property. 
Salient. — Any  advanced  point  or  angle  in  fortification. 
Sally-Port. — The  chief  entrance  to  a  fort,  to  afford  egress 

to  bodies  of  troops,  as  in  a  sortie. 
Balute. — A  discharge  of  artillery  or  musketry  in  honor 


MILITARY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES.  429 


of  persons  of  rank.  The  rank  is  denoted  by  the  number 
of  guns  fired. 

Sand-Bags.— Coarse  bags  filled  with  sand,  for  revettingf 
earth-works  and  repairing  breaches  made  in  them  by 
rhot. 

Sap. —  A  ditch  constructed  rapidly  by  the  besiegers  in 
advancing  upon  a  besieged  place.  According  to  the 
dimensions,  it  is  called  a  full  sap,  a  flying  sap,  or  a 
double  sap.  Those  who  make  them  are  called  sap- 
pers. 

Sentinel. — An  individual  of  the  guard  who  is  posted  to 
watch  for  the  safety  of  the  camp,  and  who  paces  on  his 
post,  always  alert,  and  holding  no  communication  with 
any  persons  unauthorized  to  approach  him. 

Sergeant. — The  highest  grade  of  non-commissioned  officer. 
Besides  the  sergeants  who  form  part  of  the  company 
organization,  in  each  regiment  there  is  a  sergeant  major, 
who  assists  the  adjutant,  a  quarter-master  sergeant, 
who  assists  the  quarter-master,  a  color-sergeant,  who 
carries  the  colors,  and,  at  military  posts,  an  ordnance 
sergeant,  who  has  charge  of  the  ammunition. 

Shells. — Hollow  balls,  filled  with  combustible  matter, 
which  is  fired  by  a  fuse.  They  are  shot  from  guns  and 
mortars,  and  explode  when  they  reach  the  object 
aimed  at. 

Siege. — The  act  of  surrounding  a  fort  or  place  with  an 
army,  with  a  view  to  reducing  it  by  regular  ap- 
proaches. 

Skirmish. — A  loose,  desultory  kind  of  engagement,  gene- 
rally between  light  troops  thrown  forward  to  test  the 
strength  and  position  of  the  enemy. 

Sortie. — A  secret  movement,  made  by  a  strong  detach- 
ment of  troops  in  a  besieged  place,  to  destroy  or  retard 
the  enemy's  approaches. 


430  A  DICTIONARY  OJ 

Spherical  Case. — A  very  thin  shell,  filled  with  musket 
balls  and  powder. 

Spike. — To  close  the  vent  of  a  gun  with  a  nail  forci- 
bly driven  in,  so  as  to  render  it  temporarily  use- 
less. 

Squad. — A  small  party  of  men  assembled  for  drill  or 
inspection.  Squads  of  recruits  for  drill  should  not 
number  more  than  four  or  five. 

Squadron. — A  body  of  cavalry,  comprising  two  troops  or 
companies. 

Staff. — The  oflScers  connected  with  head-quarters,  who 
assist  in  the  general  conduct  of  affairs.  Such  are  quar- 
ter-masters, commissaries,  adjutants,  adjutant-generals, 
and  aids. 

Strategy. — The  science  by  which  armies  are  conducted  in 
a  campaign.  It  implies  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the 
theatre  of  the  war,  and  the  power  to  avail  one's  self  of 
the  natural  features.  The  art  of  throwing  masses  of 
troops  upon  important  points. 

Subaltern. — Any  commissioned  officer  below  a  captain. 
(Pronounced  sub'al-tern.) 

Subsistence  Department.  —  The  department,  regularly 
organized,  with  a  colonel  and  officers  of  all  grades,  in- 
cluding captains,  who  have  charge  of  supplying  troops 
with  provisions  and  forage. 

Surgeon. — An  officer  of  the  medical  staff,  with  a  thorough 
medical  education,  who  is  charged  with  the  health  and 
comfort  of  the  troops,  hospitals,  and  all  care  of  the 
wounded,  &c. 

Tactics. — As  opposed  to  strategy,  the  movements  of 
armies  upon  the  battle-field,  within  sight  and  reach  of 
the  enemy. 

Tattoo. — The  drum-beat,  sometimes  with  roll-call,  jus* 


illLITAPvY  WORDS  AND  PHRASES. 


431 


preceding  the  retirement  of  troops,  the  putting  out  of 

lights,  <fec.   It  is  usuaily  at  9i  o'clock. 
Tents. —  Small  canvas  houses,  easily  erected  or  pitched, 

for  the  shelter  of  troops  in  camp. 
Time. — The  regular  cadence  in  marching.    Common  time 

is  90  steps  to  the  minute;   quick  time,  110;  double 

quick,  165. 

Tkaverses. — Masses  of  earth  thrown  up  at  short  dis- 
tances in  forts  along  the  line  of  the  work,  to  screen  the 
troops  from  shot  and  shells  fired  in  ricochet. 

Trenches. — The  parallels  dug  by  the  besipgers  in  ap- 
proaching a  work.  The  boyaux  are  sometimes  included 
in  this  term. 

Troop. — A  company  of  cavalry. 

Trous  de  Loup. — Conical  holes  dug  in  the  earth,  about 
six  feet  deep,  and  four  and  a  half  wide  at  top.  A  sharp 
stake  is  fastened  at  the  bottom,  and  the  whole  slightly 
covered,  so  as  to  conceal  them  from  the  enemy.  Rows 
of  trous  de  loup  are  very  destructive  to  cavalry.  (The 
name  is  French,  and  means  ivolf-holes.) 

Uniform. — The  clothing  and  accoutrements,  the  same  for 
all  the  troops  of  a  corps,  by  which  uniformity  of  ap- 
pearance, and  easy  recognition  in  battle,  are  assured. 

Vanguard. — The  body  of  troops  constituting  a  guard, 
detailed,  from  day  to  day,  to  march  in  advance  of  the 
army. 

Vidette.  —  Originally,  sentinels  on  the  farthest  out- 
posts. Now  confined  to  mounted  sentinela  on  outpost 
duty. 

Volley. — The  simultaneous  discharge  of  a  number  of 
cannon,  or  muskets,  or  any  firearms. 


432      A  DICTIONARY  OF  MILITARY  WORDS,  ETC. 


"WfNDAGE. — The  small  space  by  which  a  ball  fails  to  fii 
exactly  into  a  piece;  i.e.  the  difference  between  the 
diameter  of  the  ball  and  the  calibre  of  the  piece. 

Wings. — The  portions  of  the  army  on  the  right  and  left. 
An  army  consists  of  the  centre  and  two  wings.  A  regi- 
ment on  drill  is  said  to  consist  of  two  wings,  right  and 
left. 

Works. — A  word  used  to  express  all  kinds  of  fortifications 
and  entrenchments. 

Zouaves. — Light  infantry  troops  in  the  French  service, — 
(the  name  has  also  been  adopted  in  the  United  States,) 
— originally  composed  of  Arabs  and  Moors  in  Algeria, 
but  afterwards  recruited  with  French  soldiers. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION, 


ARRANGED  INTO  LESSONS. 


Lesson  First. 

Article  I. — Open  ranks  (No.  23). 
Article  II. — Close  ranks  (No.  29). 

Article  III. — Manual  of  arms  (No.  30).  Loading  at  will 
(No.  31). 

Article  IV. — Different  fires  hy  the  front  rank  (No.  39), 
and  bj  the  rear  rank  (No.  54). 

Lesson  Second. 

Article  I. — Break  by  company  to  the  right  (No.  69),  or  to 
the  left  (No.  74). 

Article  II. — March  in  column,  at  the  caden^ed  step,  a  con- 
siderable distance  (No.  164).  Change  of  direction  (No. 
231).  Diminish  and  increase  front  in  marching  (No. 
196.)    March  in  retreat  (No.  170). 

Article  III. — Halt  the  column  (No.  239).  Form  it  to  the 
left  or  right  into  line  of  battle  (No.  390).  Execute  thia 
formation,  the  column  marching  (No.  402). 

Article  IV. — Execute  the  countermarch,  and  repeat  thg 
same  movements  (No,  351). 

Article  V. — Form  column  into  line  of  battle,  to  the  right 
or  left,  by  inversion  (No.  407). 

433 


434 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION". 


Lesson  Third. 
Article  I. — Break  by  company  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or 
left,  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt  (No.  87),  or  marching 
(No.  94). 

Article  IL — March  in  the  route  step  (No.  198).  Cause  to 
be  executed,  at  this  gait  and  in  double  quick  time,  the 
divers  movements  incident  to  the  column  in  route,  and 
cause  the  cadeneed  step  to  be  resumed. 

Article  III. — Form  the  column  forward  into  line  of  battle 
(Nos.  440,  452),  faced  to  the  rear  into  line  of  battle  (Nos. 
466,  480),  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt,  or  marching. 
Form  the  column  forward  into  line,  and  continue  the 
march  in  this  order  (No.  456). 

Article  IV. — Form  the  column  on  the  right  (No.  416),  or 
the  left  (No.  432),  into  line  of  battle. 

Article  V. — March  by  the  flank  (No.  722),  and  form  com- 
panies into  line,  marching. 

Article  VI. — The  column  supposed  to  arrive  before  (No. 
175)  or  behind  the  line  of  battle  (No.  184),  to  prolong  it 
on  that  line. 

Article  VII. — Change  front  forward  (No.  743),  or  in  rear 

(No.  760),  on  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  in  directions 

perpendicular  or  oblique. 
Article  VIII. — March  by  the  right  flank  (No.  722),  or  by 

the  left  flank  (No.  725).    Change  direction  by  file  (No. 

730).    Form  the  battalion  into  line  of  battle,  cn  the 

right  or  left,  by  file  (No.  735). 
Article  IX. — Pass  the  defile  in  retreat  by  the  right  (No. 

709),  or  by  the  left  flank  (No.  720). 

Lesson  Fourth. 

Article  L — Break  by  division  to  the  rear,  by  the  right  or 
left,  the  battalion  being  at  a  halt  or  marching  (No.  102), 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION". 


435 


Article  11. — March  in  column  by  division  (No.  161). 

Diminish  and  increase  front  by  company  (No.  196). 
Article  III. — Close  the  column  to  half  distance  on  tho 

headmost  or  the  rearmost  division  (No.  278). 
Article  IV. — March  in  column  at  half  distance  (No.  281), 

and  change  direction  (No.  287). 
Article  V. — The  column  being  at  half  distance,  to  form 

square  at  a  halt  (No.  817),  or  marching  (No.  837). 
Article  VI. — The  battalion  being  in  square,  to  march  to 

the  front  (No.  854).    Halt  the  square  (No.  860).  Form 

column  to  march  to  the  front  (No.  863),  or  in  retreat 

(No.  872).  Re-form  the  square  (No.  875). 
Article  VII. — Reduce  the  square  (No.  883), 
Article  VIII. — Close  the  column  in  mass  on  the  headmost 

or  rearmost  division  (No.  279). 
Article  IX. — March  in  column  closed  in  mass,  and  change 

direction  by  the  front  of  subdivisions  (No.  288). 
.  Article  X. — Form  the  column  against  cavalry  (No.  966). 
Article  XI. — Take  distances  by  the  head  (Nos.  323  and 

330),  or  on  rear  of  the  column  (No.  333),  the  column 

being  at  a  halt  or  marching. 
Article  XIL — The  column  being  by  company,  cause  to 

be  executed  the  movements  indicated  in  Nos.  3,  4,  5,  6, 

7,  8,  9,  10,  and  11  of  this  lesson.    The  column  being 

at  half  distance,  or  closed  in  mass,  to  form  to  the  left, 

or  right,  into  line,  wheel,  on  the  rear  of  the  column  (No. 

602). 

Article  XIII. — The  column  being  by  company,  form 
divisions  from  a  halt  (No.  364),  or  in  march  (No.  376). 

Article  XIV. — The  column  being  by  division,  to  form  it 
to  the  left  or  right  into  line  of  battle  at  a  halt  (No.  401), 
or  in  march  (No.  402). 


436 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION-. 


Lesson  Fifth. 

Article  I. — The  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle,  and  at 
a  halt,  to  ploy  it  by  division  into  column  closed  in  masa 
on  the  right  division  (No.  119),  or  on  the  left  division 
(No.  141),  or  on  an  interior  division  (No.  143),  the  right 
or  left  in  front.  Ploy  the  battalion  marching  in  line  cf 
battle  on  the  right  or  left  division  (No.  149). 

Article  II. — Execute  the  countermarch  (No.  352). 

Article  III. — Change  direction  to  the  right  (No.  307), 
to  the  left  (No.  313),  by  the  flank  of  the  column. 

Article  IV. — Deploy  the  column  on  the  right  division 
(No.  514),  on  the  left  division  (No.  541),  or  on  any  inte- 
rior division,  the  column  being  at  a  halt,  or  marching 
(No.  563). 

Article  V. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  column  by  division  at 

half  distance,  marching  (No.  556). 
Article  VI. — Ploy  the  battalion  by  company,  closed  in  • 

mass,  and  form  it  on  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle 

(No.  577). 

Article  VII. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  double  column,  at 
half  distance  (No.  777),  or  closed  in  mass  (No.  793),  the 
battalion  being  at  a  halt,  or  marching. 

Article  VIII. — March  in  this  order,  and  change  direction 
(No.  794). 

Article  IX. — Deploy  the  column  at  a  halt  (No.  796),  or 
marching  (No.  800),  and  without  suspending  the  march 
(No.  802). 

Article  X. — The  double  column  being  at  half  distance, 
form  it  into  line  of  battle  faced  to  the  right  or  left 
(No.  803),  the  column  being  in  march  (No.  807). 
Execute  the  same  movement  without  suspending  thG 
march  (No.  810). 

Article  XL — Perpendicular  or  parallel  squares,  the  bat- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


437 


talion  being  deployed  (Nos.  889,  895).  Oblique  squares, 
the  battalion  being  in  line  of  battle  (No.  938),^  or  in 
column  (No.  945).    Squares  in  four  ranks  (No.  911). 

Lesson  Sixth. 

AuTKLE  I. — March  in  line  of  battle  (No.  587).    Halt  the 

battalion  (No.  635),  and  align  it  (No.  640). 
Article  II. — Change  direction  in  line  of  battle  advancing 

(No.  652),  or  in  retreat  (No.  681).    Execute  passage  of 

obstacle^  (No.  682). 
A.RT1CLE  III. — Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle  (No.  623). 
Article  IV. — Disperse  and  rally  the  battalion  in  lino  of 

battle  (No.  974),  and  rally  the  battalion  in  column  by 
■  company  (No.  978). 


REMARKS 

ON  THE  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

In  every  course  of  instruction,  the  first  lesson  will  be  exo- 
cated  several  times  in  the  order  in  which  it  is  arranged  ; 
but  as  soon  as  the  battalion  shall  be  confirmed  in  the  prin- 
ciples of  the  lesson,  the  fires  will  be  executed  after  the 
advance  in  line,  and  after  the  various  formations  into  line 
of  battle,  and  into  square.  Particular  attention  will  bo 
given  to  the  fire  by  file,  which  is  that  principaMy  used 
in  war. 

Every  lesson  of  this  school  will  be  executed  with  the 
utmost  precision ;  but  the  second,  which  comprehends  the 
inarch  in  column  and  the  march  in  line  of  battle,  being  of 
the  most  importance,  will  be  the  oftenest  repeated,  espe- 
viially  in  the  beginning, 

35 


138 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 


Great  attention  ought,  also,  to  be  given  to  the  fourth 
lesson,  which  comprehends  the  march  in  column  by  divi- 
eion,  and  the  dispositions  against  cavalry. 

The  successive  formations  will  sometimes  be  executed 
by  inversion. 

In  the  beginning,  the  march  in  column,  the  march  ia 
line  of  battle,  and  the  march  by  the  flank,  will  be  executed 
only  in  quick  time,  and  will  be  continued  until  the  batta- 
lion shall  have  become  well  established  in  the  cadence  of 
this  step. 

The  non-cadenced  step  will  be  employed  in  this  school 
only  in  the  repetition  of  the  movements  incident  to  a 
column  in  route,  or  when  great  celerity  may  be  required. 

When  it  may  be  desired  to  give  the  men  relief,  arms 
may  be  supported,  if  at  a  halt,  or  marching  by  the  flank. 

In  marching  by  the  front,  arms  may  be  shifted  to  the 
right  shoulder;  but  not  in  the  march  in  line  of  battle  until 
the  battalions  shall  be  well  instructed. 

After  arms  have  been  carried  for  some  time  on  the  right 
shoulder,  they  may  be  shifted,  in  like  manner,  to  the  left 
shoulder. 

When  a  battalion  is  manoeuvring,  its  movements  will  be 
covered  by  skirmishers. 

All  the  companies  will  be  exercised,  successively,  in  thij 
service. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


TITLE  FIRST. 

Article  First. 


Formation  of  a  regiment  in  order  of  battle,  or  in  line..  7 

Posts  of  company  officers,  sergeants  and  corporals   8 

Posts  of  field  officers  and  regimental  staflf   9 

Posts  of  field  music  and  band   10 

Color-guard   10 

General  guides   11 

Article  Second. 

Instruction  of  the  battalion   2 

Instruction  of  officers   14 

Instruction  of  sergeants   14 

Instruction  of  corporals   14 

Commands   15 


TITLE  SECOISTD. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER. 
Part  First. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  sclwol  of  the  soldier  16 
Lesson  L — Position  of  the  soldier  (No.  78).  Eyes 

right,  left  ajid  front  (Nos.  80,  83)   21 

439 


4-10 


TABLE  OF  CONTEXTS. 


Lesson  IL — Facings  (Nos.  88,  91)   21 

Lesson  III. — Principles  of  the  direct  step  in  common 

and  quick  time  (Nos.  94,  102)   22 

Lesson  IV. — Principles  of  the  double  quick  step  (No. 

104)   24 

Part  Second. 

General  rules   2n 

Lesson  I. — Principles  of  shouldered  arms  ,   26 


Lesson  II. — Mpjiual  of  arms.  Support  arms  (No. 
133).  Presp-Jt  arms  (No.  143).  Order  arms  (No. 
147).  Position  of  order  arms  (No.  149).  Load  in 
nine  iimp,s  (No.  156).  Ready  (No.  171).  Aim  (No. 
174).  I^ire  (No.  177).  Fix  bayonet  (No.  188). 
Charge  bayonet  (No.  193).  Trail  arms  (No.  197). 
Unfix  bayonet  (No.  200).  Secure  arms  (No.  204). 
Right  shoulder  shift  arms  (No.  210).  Arms  at  will 
(No.  2X9).  Ground  arms  (No.  222).  Inspection 
arms  (No.  227).  Remarks  on  the  manual  of  arms 
(No.  237).    Mark  time  (No.  241).     Change  step 


(No.  245).    March  backwards  (No.  247)   27 

Lesson  III. — Load  in  four  times  (No.  250).    Load  at 

will  (No.  257)   47 

Lesson  IV. — Firings.    Direct  fire  (No.  261).  Oblique 


firings  (No.  266).  Position  of  the  two  ranks  in  the 
oblique  fire  to  the  right  (No.  267).  Position  of  the 
two  ranks  in  the  oblique  fire  to  the  left  (No.  270). 
Fire  by  file  (No.  275).    Fire  by  rank  (No.  285)   48 

Lesson  V. — Fire  and  load,  kneeling  (No.  292).  Fire 
and  load,  lying  (No.  300)   52 

Lesson  VI. — Bayonet  exercise   55 

Part  Third. 

Lesson  I. — Alignments   56 

Lesson  II. — March  by  the  front  (No.  325).  March 
by  the  front  in  double  quick  time  (No.  334).  Face 
about  in  marching  (No.  343).  March  backwards 
(No.  345)   58 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  44l 

PAQlt 

Lesson  III. — March  by  the  flank  (No.  351).  March 
by  the  flank  in  double  quick  time  (No.  368)   63 


Lesson  IV. — General   Principles  of  wheeling  (No. 
377).    Wheeling  from  a  halt  (No.  383).  Wheeling 


in  marching  (No.  393).  Turning  (No.  400). 
Wheeling  and  turning  in  double  quick  time  (No. 

403)   6T 

Lesson  V. — Long  marches  in  double  quick  time  and 
the  run  (No.  406).  Stack  arms  (No.  410).  Take 
arms  (No.  413)   71 


Manual  op  Arms  for  the  Musket.    (No.  414.) 

Shoulder  arms  (No.  415).  Support  arms  (No.  417). 
Carry  arms  (No,  421).  Present  arms  (No.  424). 
Order  arms  (No.  429).    Charge  bayonet  (No.  434). 

Loading  and  Firing  (No.  439).  Load  in  ten  times 
(Nos.  440  to  455).  Ready  (No.  456).  Aim  (No.  460). 
Fu-e  (No.  462).  Recover  arms  (No.  470).  Load  in 
four  times  (No.  474).  Unfix  bayonet  (No.  479). 
Secure  arras  (No.  485).  Fix  bayonet  (No.  489). 
Trail  arms  (No.  493).  Right  shoulder  shift  arms 
(No.  496).  Inspection  of  arms  (No.  498).  Fix  ba- 
yonet (No.  504).  Spring  rammers  (No.  506).  Arms 
port  (No.  507).    Arms  at  will  (No.  511)   74 


TITLE  THIUD. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY. 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the  com- 
pany  89 

Lesson  First. 

Article  I. — To  open  ranks  (No.  8)   92 

Article  II. — Alignments  in  open  ranks  (No.  18)   93 

Article  HI. — Manual  of  arms  (Na  26)   94 


442 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PAOB 


Article  TV. — To  close  ranks  (No.  28)   95 

Article  V. — Alignments,  and  manual  of  arms  in 
closed  ranks  (No.  30)   95 

Lesson  Second. 

Article  I. — To  load  in  four  times,  and  at  will  (No. 

44)   97 

Article  II. — To  fire  by  company  (No.  48)   98 

Article  III.— To  fire  by  file  (No.  55)   98 

Article  IV. — To  fire  by  rank  (No.  68)   99 

Article  V. — To  fire  by  the  rear  rank  (No.  68)   100 

Lesson  Third. 

Article  I. — To  advance  in  line  of  battle  (No.  84)   103 

Article  11. — To  halt  the  company,  marching  in  line 

of  battle,  and  to  align  it  (No.  99)   105 

Article  III. — Oblique  n^arch  in  line  of  bat^^le  (No. 

101)   106 

Article  IV. — To  mark  time,  to  march  in  double  quick 

time,  and  the  back  step  (No.  109)   107 

Article  V. — To  march  in  retreat  (No.  119)   109 

Lesson  Fourth. 

Article  L— To  march  by  the  flank  (No.  135)   Ill 

Article  IL — To  change  direction  by  file  (No.  142)...  112 
Article  III. — To  halt  the  company,  marching  by  the 

flank,  and  to  face  it  to  the  front  (No.  145)   113 

Article  IV. — The  company  being  in  march  by  the 
flank,  to  form  it  on  the  right  or  left,  by  file,  into  line 

of  battle  (No.  148)  .'   114 

Article  V. — The  company  marching  by  the  flank,  to 
form  it  by  company  or  platoon  into  line,  and  cause 
it  to  face  to  the  right  and  left  in  marching  (No.  153)  118 

Lesson  Fifth. 

Article  I. — To  break  into  column  by  platoon,  either 

at  a  halt,  or  marching  (No.  171)   118 

Article  II. — To  march  in  column  (No.  195)   123 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  4^3 

PAQB 

Article  III. — To  change  direction  (No.  211)...   125 

Article  IV.— To  halt  the  column  (No.  231)   129 

Article  V. — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  to 
the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle,  either  at  a  halt, 
or  marching  (No.  235)   129 

Lesson  Sixth. 

Article  L — To  break  the  company  into  platoons,  and 

to  re-form  the  compan}'-  (No.  265)   134 

Article  II. — To  break  files  to  the  rear,  and  to  cause 

them  to  re-enter  into  line  (No.  289)   137 

Article  III. —  To  march  in  column  in  route,  and  to 

execute  the  movements  incident  thereto  (No.  306)...  140 

Article  IV. — Countermarch  (No.  334)   145 

Article  V. — Being  in  column  by  platoon,  to  form  on 

the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  343)   147 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  single 

rank,  and  reoiprocaliy  (No.  359)   149 

Formation  of  a  company  from  two  ranks  into  four,  and 

reciprocally,  at  a  halt,  and  marching  (No.  371)   151 


INSTEUCTION  FOE  SKIRMISHERS. 
Greneral  principles  and  division  of  the  instruction   155 

Article  First. 

Deployments  (No.  15).  Deploy  forward  (No.  22).  De- 
ploy by  the  flank  (No.  37).  Extend  intervals  (No. 
51).  Close  intervals  (No.  59).  Relieve  skirmishers 
(No.  66)   157 

Article  Second. 

March  to  the  front  (No.  71).  March  in  retreat  (No. 
79).  Change  direction  (No.  86).  March  by  the  flank 
(No.  96.)   167 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


Article  Third. 

PAOB 

Firings  (No.  106).  Fire  at  a  halt  (No.  107).  Fire  march- 
ing (No.  111).    Observations  (No.  120)   171 

Article  Fourth. 

Rally  (No.  127).  Rally  by  sections  (No.  132).  Rally 
by  platoons  (No.  lo7).  Rally  on  the  reserve  (No. 
139).  Form  column  (No.  143).  Rally  on  the  bat- 
talion (No.  161).   Assemble  on  the  reserve  (No.  171). 


Assemble  on  the  centre  (No.  174)  175 

Article  Fifth. 

Deploy  the  battalion  as  skirmishers  (No,  178).  Obser- 
vations (No.  194).    Rally  (No.  197)   184 


Manual  of  the  sabre  for  officers   190 

Salute  of  the  color   190 

Manual  for  relieving  sentinels   191 

Instruction  for  parade  rest  ^   192 

Instruction  for  chief  bugler,  &g   192 

General  calls   192 

Calls  for  skirmishers   193 


MUSIC. 

GENERAL  CALLS. 

1.  Attention   195 

2.  The  general   196 

3.  The  assembly   196 

4.  To  the  color   197 

5.  The  recall   197 

6.  Quick  time   197 

7.  Double  quick  time   3  98 

8.  The  charge   199 

9.  The  reveille   20 C 

10.  Retreat   200 

11.  Tattoo   201 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


445 


PAGB 

12.  To  extinguish  lights   202 

13.  Assembly  of  the  buglers   202 

14.  Assembly  of  the  guard   202 

15.  Orders  for  orderly  sergeants   20.S 

16.  For  officers  to  take  their  places  in  line  after  firing..  203 

17.  The  disperse   203 

18.  Officers'  call   204 

19.  Breakfast  call   204 

20.  Dinner  call   205 

21.  Sick  call   205 

22.  Fatigue  call   205 

23.  Church  call   206 

2-1.  Drill  call   206 

25.  School  call   207 


CALLS  FOR  SKIRMISHERS. 

1.  Fix  bayonet   20S 

2.  Unfix  bayonet     208 

3.  Quick  time   208 

4.  Double  quick  time   209 

5.  The  run....    209 

6.  Deploy  as  skirmishers   210 

7.  Forward   210 

8.  In  retreat  ,.  210 

9.  Halt   211 

10.  By  the  right  flank  ,   211 

11.  By  the  left  flank   211 

12.  Commence  firing   21 1 

13.  Cense  firing   212 

14.  Change  direction  to  the  right   212 

15.  Change  direction  to  the  left   212 

16.  Lie  down   212 

17.  Rise  up   213 

18.  Rally  by  fours   213 

19.  Rally  by  sections   213 

20.  Rally  by  platoons     213 

21.  Rally  on  the  reserve   214 

22.  Rally  on  the  battalion   214 

23.  Assemble  on  the  battalion   214 


446 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


TITLE  FOUKTH. 
SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION. 

pAoa 


Formation  of  the  battalion  (No.  1)   ..  215 

Composition  and  march  of  the  color-escort  (No.  4)   215 

Honors  paid  to  the  color  (No.  11)   216 

General  rules  and  division  of  the  school  of  the  bat- 
talion (No.  14)   217 

Part  First. 

Article  I. — To  open  and  close  ranks  (No.  22)   218 

Article  TI. — Manual  of  arms  (No.  30)   219 

Article  III. — Loading  at  will,  and  the  firings  (No. 

  219 

Part  Second. 

Article  I. — To  break  by  company  to  the  right  (No. 
69).  Break  by  company  to  the  left  (No.  74).  Break 
by  division  (No.  75).  To  break  by  company, 
niarching  (No.  84)   225 


Article  11. — Break  to  the  rear  by  the  right  or  left  of 
companies  (No.  87).  Break  to  the  rear  by  the  right 
or  left  of  companies,  marching  (No.  94).  Advance 
or  retire  by  the  right  or  left  of  companies  (No. 
105).  Advance  or  retire  hy  the  right  or  left  of 
companies,  inarching  (No.  110.)  Advancing  or  re- 
tiring, by  the  right  or  left  of  companies,  to  form 
line  to  the  front  (No.  113)   229 

Article  III. — Ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column 
on  the  first  division  (No.  119).  Ploy  the  battalion 
into  close  column  on  the  fourth  division  (No.  141). 
Ploy  the  battalion  into  close  column  on  any  inte- 
rior division  (No.  143).  Battalion  being  in  march, 
to  ploy  it  into  column  cn  the  first  division  (No. 
149)   234 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


447 


Part  Third. 

PAGE 

A-RTiCLE  I. — Marcli  in  column  at  full  distance  (No. 
164).  Column  being  in  march,  to  execute  the  about 
(No.  170).  Column  arriving  in  front  of  the  line 
of  battle,  to  prolong  it  on  this  line  (No.  175). 
Column  arriving  behind  the  line  of  battle,  to  pro- 
long it  on  this  line  (No.  184).  Column  arriving 
on  the  right  or  the  left  of  the  line  of  battle,  to  pro- 
long it  on  this  line  (No.  188).    Manner  of  prolong- 


ing a  line  by  markers  (No.  189)   240 

Article  II. — Column  in  route  (No.  198)   249 

Article  III. — Change  of  direction  in  column  at  full 

distance  (No.  231)   255 

Article  IV.— Halt  the  column  (No.  239)   257 

Article  V. — Close  the  column  to  half  distance,  or 
in  mass  (No.  252).  Close  the  column  on  the 
eighth  company  (No.  267).  Execute  this  move- 
ment, marching  (No.  273)   -59 

Article  VI. — March  in  column  at  half  distance,  or 

closed  in  mass  (No.  281)   263 

Article  VII. — Change  dhection  in  column  at  half 

distance  (No.  287)   264 

Article  VIII. — Change  direction  of  a  column  closed 
in  mass,  marching  (No.  288).  Change  direction 
of  a  column,  closed  in  mass,  from  a  halt  (No.  306).  264 
Article  IX. — Take  distances  by  the  head  of  the 
column  (No.  323).  Take  distances  by  the  rear  of 
the  column  (No.  333).    Take  distances  on  the  head 

of  the  column  (No.  341)   269 

Article  X. — Countermarch  of  a  column  at  full  or 
half  distance  (No.  351).   Countermarch  of  a  column 

closed  in  mass  (No.  352)   274 

Article  XI. — Being  in  column  by  company,  closed 
in  mass,  to  form  divisions  (No.  364).  To  form  di- 
visions, marching  (No.  376)   276 

Part  Fourth. 

Article  I. — Manner  of  determining  the  line  of  battle 
(No.  389)   280 


448 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PAOl 

Article  IL  —To  form  a  column,  at  full  distance, 
to  the  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  390).  To  form 
a  column  to  the  right  into  line  of  battle  (No.  399 j. 
A  column  being  in  march,  to  form  it  into  line  of 
battle  (No.  402).  To  form  a  column  into  line  of 
battle,  and  to  move  it  forward  (No.  403).  By  in- 
version to  the  right  or  left  into  line  of  battle  (No. 
407).  Column  at  full  distance,  to  form  it  on  the 
right  or  left  into  line  of  battle  (No.  414).  Column 
at  full  distance,  forward  into  line  of  battle  (No. 
440).  Forward  into  line  of  battle,  marching  (No. 
452).  Column  at  full  distance,  faced  to  the  rear 
into  line  of  battle  (No.  466).  Execute  this  move- 
ment, marching  (No.  479)   281 

Article  III. — Formation  in  line  of  battle  by  two 
movements  (No.  485)   299 

Article  IV. — Different  modes  of  forming  column  at 
half  distance,  to  the  left  or  right,  into  line  of  bat- 
tle (No.  501).  By  the  rear  of  column,  left  or  right, 
into  line,  wheel  (No.  503).  Column  at  half  dis- 
tance, on  the  right  or  left,  into  line  (No.  507). 
Column  at  half  distance,  forward  into  line  (No. 
508).  Column  at  half  distance,  faced  to  the  rear 
into  line  (No.  509)   301 

Article  V. — Deployment  of  columns  closed  in  mass 
(No.  510).  Deployment  on  the  first  division  (No. 
514).  To  deploy,  whilst  marching,  on  the  first  divi- 
sion (No.  532).  To  deploy  without  halting  the  column, 
and  to  continue  inarching  (No.  536).  To  deploy  on 
the  fourth  division  (No.  541).  To  deploy,  whilst 
marching,  on  the  fourth  division  (No.  556).  To  de- 
ploy on  an  interior  division  (No.  563).  To  deploy, 
whilst  marching,  on  an  interior  division  (No.  567)...  303 


Part  Fifth. 

Article  L — To  advance  in  line  of  battle  (No.  587)....  316 
Article  II. — Oblique  march  in  line  of  battle  (No. 

623)   323 

Article  III. — To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  line 

of  battle,  and  to  align  it  (No.  635)   325 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS.  449 

PAGB 

Article  IV. — Chan^^e  of  direction  in  marching  in  line 
of  battle  (No.  652)   328 

Article  V. — To  march  in  retreat  in  line  of  battle  (No. 
664)   330 

Article  VI. — To  halt  the  battalion,  marching  in  re- 
treat, and  to  face  it  to  the  front  (No.  676)   332 

Article  VII. —  Change  of  direction,  in  marching  in 
retreat  (No.  681)   333 

Article  VIII. — Passage  of  obstacles,  advancing  and 
retreating  (No.  682)   333 

Article  IX. — To  pass  a  defile,  in  retreat,  by  the  right 
or  left  flank  (No.  710)     338 

Article  X.— To  march  by  the  flank  (No.  722)   340 

Article  XI. — To  form  the  battalion  on  the  right  or 
left,  by  file,  into  line  of  battle  (No.  735)   342 

Article  XII. — Change  of  front  perpendicularly  for- 
ward (No.  743).  Change  front  forward  on  the  first 
company,  marching  (No.  754).  Change  of  front 
perpendicularly  to  the  rear  (No.  761)   343 


Article  XIIL — To  ploy  the  battalion  into  column, 
doubled  on  the  centre  (No.  776).  To  form  double 
column,  marching  (No.  787).  Deployment  of  the 
double  column,  faced  to  the  front  (No.  796).  De- 
ployment of  the  double  column,  marching  (No.  800). 
To  form  the  double  column  into  line  of  battle,  faced 
to  the  right  or  left  (No.  803).  To  form  the  double 
column  into  line  of  battle,  faced  to  the  right  or  left, 
marching  (No.  807)   34S 

Article  XIV. — Dispositions  against  cavalry  (No.  817). 
A  column  being  in  march  at  full  distance,  to  form 
square  (No.  837).  If  the  column  be  closed  in  mass, 
to  make  dispositions  to  form  square  (No.  847).  The 
battalion  being  in  square,  to  move  it  in  advance  by 
one  of  its  fronts  (No.  854).  To  halt  the  square 
(No.  860.)  The  battalion  being  in  square,  to  form 
column  to  march  to  the  front,  a  distance  greater 
than  thirtj^  paces  (No.  863).  To  march  the  square 
in  retreat  a  greater  distance  than  thirty  paces  (No. 
872).  The  battalion  being  in  square,  to  march  it  in 
advance,  or  in  retreat,  a  distance  less  than  thirty 
paces  (No.  876).  The  column  marching  to  the  front, 


450 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


to  march  it  in  retreat  (No.  879).  The  column  march- 
ing iu  retreat,  to  march  it  to  the  front  (No.  881). 
To  reduce  the  square  (No.  883).  To  form  square 
from  line  of  battle  (No.  885).  Perpendicular  square 
(No.  888).  Perpendicular  square,  marching  (No. 
890).  To  form  square  by  double  column  (No.  892). 
To  form  square  by  double  column,  marching  (No. 
894).  Observations  relative  to  the  formation  of 
squares  in  two  ranks  (No.  896).  The  column  being 
formed  of  four  divisions,  to  place  the  inner  platoons 
of  the  third  division  in  reserve  (No.  898).  Squares 
in  four  ranks  (No.  910).  The  square  formed  in  four 
ranks  being  reduced,  and  at  a  halt,  to  form  the  bat- 
talion into  two  ranks  (No.  916).  The  column  being 
in  march  with  divisions  formed  in  four  ranks,  to  re- 
form it  into  two  ranks  (No.  920).  To  form  square 
in  fcur  ranks  on  one  of  the  flank  divisions  (No. 
923).  Form  square  in  four  ranks  on  the  first  divi- 
sion, marching  (No.  928).  Form  perpendicular 
square  in  four  ranks,  by  double  column  (No.  931). 
Form  perpendicular  square  in  four  ranks,  by  double 
column,  marching  (No.  935).  Oblique  square  (No. 
938).  Oblique  square,  being  in  column  (No.  945). 
Column  against  cavalry  (No.  965).  The  battalion 
being  no  longer  threatened  by  cavalry,  to  form 


column  (No.  970)   353 

^  RTiCLE  XV.— The  rally  (No.  974)   381 

Article  XVI. — Rules  for  manoeuvring  by  the  rear 

rank  (No.  979)   382 

Street  Firing   385 

APPENDIX. 

Articles  op  War  ,   3Cd 

Dictionary  of  Military  Words  and  Phrases   411 


THE  END. 


J.  B.  Lippincott  &  Co/s  Military  Publications. 


McCLELLAN'S  AEMIES  OP  EUEOPE. 

THE  ARMIES  OF  EUROPE;  comprising  descriptions  in 
detail  of  the  Military  Systems  of  England,  France,  Rus- 
sia, Prussia,  Austria,  and  Sardinia.  Adapting  thei? 
advantages  to  all  arms  of  the  United  States  Service. 
Embodying  the  Report  of  Observations  in  Europe  during 
the  Crimean  war,  as  Military  Commissioner  from  the 
United  States  Government  in  1855-56.  By  Geo.  B.  Mc- 
Clellan,  Major-General  U.S.A.  Originally  published 
under  the  direction  of  the  War  Department,  by  order  of 
Congress,  1  vol.  8vo.  Illustrated  with  a  fine  steel  Por- 
trait and  several  hundred  engravings.  $3.50. 

"  Of  the  publications  occasioned  by  the  crisis,  doubtless  the  most 
important  is  the  reissue,  in  a  form  adapted  to  general  circulation,  ol 
the  great  report  on  the  armies  of  Europe  of  Geo.  B.  McClellan,  now 
commander-in-chief  of  the  armies  of  the  United  States." — The,  Metlvo- 
dist 

"The  young  captain  of  calvary  is  now  a  major-general,  and  to  his 
hands  the  destinies  of  our  nation  are  in  a  great  measure  intrusted ; 
and  his  book  will  now  be  recognized  as  a  popular  necessity,  and  find 
Its  way  into  the  bands  of  the  multitude." — JSFew  York  Times. 

"  The  work  contains  all  that  vast  body  of  detailed  information  per- 
taining to  the  equipment,  direction,  and  care  of  our  military  forces, 
which  is  actually  indispensable  to  every  oflScer  in  the  army,  and  may 
be  of  the  greatest  service  to  every  private  in  the  ranks." — Boston 
Transcript. 

"The  book  is  invaluable  to  military  men  from  the  technical  in- 
formation and  the  sagacious  views  it  presents.  It  is  of  the  greatest 
interest  to  the  public  in  general,  from  the  striking  revelation  it  makes 
ot  the  character  aad  genius  of  its  modest  and  gifted  author." — Boston 
Journal. 

"  The  volume  will  be  of  great  importance  to  the  hoRt  of  young 
oflBcers  who  are  ambitious  to  escel  in  the  art  or  profession  to  which 
they  have  now  devoted  themselves."-iJVew  York  Sun* 


McCLELLAN'S 

UNITED  STATES  CAVALRY. 

 ^  

REGULATIONS  AND  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  THK 
FIELD  SERVICE  of  the  United  States  Cavalry  in  Time 
of  War. 

BY  GEO.  B.  McCLELLAN, 

MAJOR-GENERAL  JJ.  S.  ARMY. 

One  vol.  12mo.    Fully  Illustrated.  $1.60. 

To  which  is  added  the  Basis  of  Instruclion  for  the  U.  S. 
Cavalry,  from  the  Authorized  Tactics, —  including  the 
formation  of  regiments  and  squadrons,  the  duties  and 
posts  of  officers,  lessons  in  the  training  and  use  of  the 
horse, — illustrated  by  numerous  diagrams,  with  the  sig- 
nals and  calls  now  in  use.  Also,  instructions  for  officers 
and  non-commissioned  officers  on  outpost  and  patrol 
duty.  With  a  drill  for  the  use  of  cavalrv  as  skirmishers, 
mounted  and  dismounted. 

"  The  volume  is  a  complete  manual  for  this  arm  of  the  service,  and 
Its  value  cannot  be  overrated.  Gen.  McClellan  enjoyed  almost  tm- 
equaled  facilities  for  perfecting  himself  in  a  knowledge  of  the  modern 
European  systems  of  tactics  while  a  member  of  the  Commission  sent 
by  our  Government  to  the  Old  World,  and  he  has  concentrated  the 
results  of  his  observations  within  this  volume.  No  work  on  the 
sutyect  could  have  more  weight,  and  we  can  think  of  none  which 
will  be  more  useful  while  the  country  is  prosecuting  the  war  for  its 
existence." — Evening  Bulletin. 

"The  precepts  contained  in  this  volume  are  applicable  to  every 
detail  of  duty  which  cavalry  may  be  expected  to  perform  in  time  of 
war  in  the  field.  It  could  not,  therefore,  be  more  valuable  or  more 
timely  than  at  present."  ♦  ♦  «  «'  Every  cavalry  soldier  should 
have  it  in  his  hands." — North  American. 

"  "We  question  whether  ever  before,  in  the  same  compass,  so  much 
practical  information  on  the  cavalry  arm  of  war  was  collected.  It  is 
a  thoroughly  complete  vade  niecum  for  every  mounteii  soldier  in  tL« 
aervice." — Tlie  Press*  ^ 


McCLELLAN'S 

MANUAL  OF  BAYONET  EXERCISES. 

PREPARED  FOR  THE  USE  OF 
TliE  ARIMY  OTP-  THE  XJlSriTED  STA.TES. 

BY  GEORGE  B.  McCLELLAN, 

MAJOR-GENERAL  U.  S.  ARM7. 

Printed  by  order  of  the  War  Department. 
One  vol.  12mo.  $1.25. 

Headquarters  op  the  Army,  Washington,  D.C. 
Hon.  C.  M.  Conrad,  Secretary  of  War. 

Sir:  Herewith  I  have  the  honor  to  submit  a  system  of  Bayonet  Ex- 
ercises, translated  from  the  French  by  Capt.  Geo.  B.  McClellan,  Corpa 
Engineers,  U.  S.  Army. 

I  strongly  recommend  its  being  printed  for  distribution  to  the 
Army;  and  that  it  be  made,  by  regulation,  a  part  of  the  system  of 
instruction. 

The  inclosed  extracts  from  reports  of  the  Inspector-General,  etc., 
show  the  value. 

I  have  the  honor  to  be,  sir,  with  high  respect,  your  most  obedient 
servant,  WINFIELD  SCOTT. 

R.  Jones,  Adjutant-General. 
Approved.  C.  M.  Conrad,  Secretary  of  War. 


McCLELLAFS 

EUROPEAN  CAVALRY. 

EUROPEAN  CAVALRY,  including  details  of  the  organi- 
zation of  the  Cavalry  Service  among  the  principal  na- 
tions of  Europe;  comprising  England,  France,  Russia, 
Prussia,  Austria,  and  Sardinia.  By  Geo.  B.  McClellan, 
Major-Gerieral  U.  S.  Army. 

One  vol.  12mo.   Fully  illustrated.  $1.25. 


HARDEE'S  TACTICS. 


Rifle  and  Light  Infantry  Tactics, 

For  the  Exercise  aad  Manoeuvres  of  Troops  when 
acting  as  Light  Infantry  or  Ilifiemen. 

Prepared  untlcr  tlie  direction  of  tlie  War  Department, 

By  Brevet  Lieutenant-Coionel  W.  J.  HARDEl^ 
U.S.A. 

ITwo  Vols,  complete.  $l.i50. 


VOL.  I. 

Schools  of  the  Soldier  and  Company;  Instruc- 
tion for  Skirmishers. 

VOL.  II. 
School  of  the  Battalion. 


This  work  is  a  cnreful  revision  of  the  rifle  and  light  in- 
fantry taciics  Tor  the  exercise  and  manaiuvres  of  troops 
when  acting  as  light  infantry  or  riiienien.  It  was  prepared, 
under  the  direction  of  the  War  Department,  by  Brevet 
Lieutenai)t-Coh)i)el  m.  J.  Hahpee,  hite  Tactical 4nstrnctor 
at  West  Point.  JJardee's  Tactics  have  been  adopted  as  the 
t'Oxt-book  in  the  military  establishments  of  nearly  every 
State  in  the  Union,  and  hold  a  high  rank  among  military 
men  as  of  great  practical  utility  in  the  ligb.t  infantry  arm. 
The  work  is  pre})arcd  in  a  clear  and  lucid  manner  and  with 
numerous  pictorial  illustrations.  The  famous  Chicago 
Zouave  drill  is  essentially  JIardee's  tactics,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  some  few  fancy  movements  of  no  utility  except  to 
give  a  liuish  to  an  exhibition  drill.  The  work  is  printed  in 
clear  type,  and  is  invaluable  as  a  book  of  instruction  to  our 
volunteer  corps. — New  York  Herald,  Jan.  2S,  1S61. 


[BY  AUTHOEITT.] 


XJUSriTElD  STATES 

INFANTRY  TACTICS: 

FOR  THE  INSTRUCTION,  EXERCISE,  AND  MAN- 
OEUVRES OF  THE  U.  S.  INFANTRY,  including  In- 
fantry of  the  Line,  Light  Infantry,  and  Riflemen.  Pre- 
pared under  the  direction  of  the  War  Dapartment,  and 
authorized  and  adopted  by  Simon  Cameron,  Secretary  of 
War.  Containing  The  School  of  the  Soldier;  The  School 
of  the  Company;  Instruction  for  Skirmishers;  The  Gen- 
eral Calls ;  The  Calls  for  Skirmishers,  and  the  School  of 
the  Battalion;  including  a  Dictionary  of  Military  TermS. 
One  volume,  complete  illustrated  with  numerous  Engrav- 
ings. $1.25. 

War  DEPAR-raiENT,  Washington,  May  1, 1861. 
This  System  of  United  States  Infantry  Tactics  for  Light  Infantry 
and  Killernen,  prepared  under  the  direction  of  the  War  Department, 
having  been  approved  by  the  President,  18  adopted  for  tlie  instruction 
of  the  troops  when  acthiji;  as  Light  iiiiantry  or  Riflemen,  and,  under 
the  act  of  May  12,  1820,  for  the  observance  of  the  militia  when  so  em- 
ployed. SIMON  CAMEUOxV,  Secretary  of  War, 


INSTRUCTIONS  FOR 

OUTPOST  AND  PATROL  DUTY. 

Instructions  for  Officers  and  Non-commissioned  Officers  oc 
Outpost  and  Patrol  Duty,  with 

THE  SKIRMISH  DRILL 

for  Mounted  Troops.  Authorized  and  adopted  by  the 
Secretary  of  War,  Sept.  2d,.  1861.    Price  25  cents. 

*      *      *      *      All  Colonels,  and  others  in  authority,  will  see 
it  that  their  commauda  are  instructed  in  tliese  duties.  *""**• 
SIMON  CAMEKOxN,  Secretary  of  War. 


COOKE'S 
U.  S.  CAVALRY  TACTICS. 

Cavalry  Tactics;  or  Regulations  for  the  Instruction,  Form- 
ations, and  Movements  of  the  Cavalry  of  the  Army  and 
Volunteers  of  the  United  States.  Prepared  under  the 
direction  of  the  War  Department,  and  authorized  and 
adopted  by  the  Secretary  of  War,  Nov.  1st,  1861. 

BY  PHILIP  ST.  GEO.  COOKE, 

BRia.  GEN.  U.  8.  ARMY. 

In  two  vols.  18mo.    Price  $1.50. 

Vol.  I. — School  of  the  Trooper,  of  the  Platoon,  and  of 
the  Squadron. 

Vol.  II. — Evolutions  of  a  Regiment  and  of  the  Line. 


THE  SOLDIER'S  KANDY-BOOK. 

THE  HANDY-BOOK  FOR  THE  U.  S.  SOLDIER,  ON 
coming  into  Service.  Containing  a  complete  System  of 
Instruction  in  the  School  of  the  Soldier;  embracing  the 
Manual  for  the  Rifle  and  Musket,  with  a  preliminary  ex- 
planation of  the  Formation  of  a  Battalion  on  Parade,  the 
Position  of  the  Officers,  etc.  etc.  Also,  Instructions  for 
Street  Firing.  Being  a  First  Book  or  Introduction  to 
the  authorized  United  States  Infantry  Tactics. 

Coir  pie  te  in  one  voL  128  pages,  illustrated.    25  cts. 

To  the  recruit  jnst  mustered  into  service,  the  system  of  tactic* 
•eems  extensive  and  difficult. 

The  design  of  this  little  Ilandy-Book  is  to  divide  the  instruction 
and,  by  presenting  a  complete  system  for  the  drill  of  the  individual 
soldier,  to  prepare  him  for  the  use  and  study  of  the  authorized 
United  States  Infantry  Tactics,  in  the  school  of  the  company  and  the 
battalion. 


ORDNANCE  MMkl 

 <§>  

THE  ORDNANCE  MANUAL, 

For  the  nse  of  the  Officers  of  the  Army  and  others, 

PREPARED  UNDER  THE  DIRECTION  OF  THE  WAR  DEPARTMENT. 

Third  edition.  One  vol.  demi-8vo.  i'ully  illustrated 
with  Engravings  on  steel.  $2.50. 

CONTENTS.- -Chap.  I.  Ordnance.  II.  Shot  and  Shell. 
III.  Artillery  Carriages.  IV.  Machines,  etc.  for  Siege 
and  GarrisoE.  Service.  V.  Artillery  Implements  an(? 
Equipments.  VI.  Artillery  Harness  and  Cavalry  Equip- 
ments. VII.  Paints,  Lackers,  etc.  VIII.  Small  Arms, 
Swords,  and  Accoutrements.  IX.  Gunpowder,  Lightning 
Rods.  X.  Ammunition  of  all  kinds,  Fireworks.  XI. 
Equipment  of  Batteries  for  Field,  Siege,  and  Garrison 
Service.  XII.  Mechanical  Manoeuvres.  XIII.  Artillery 
Practice,  Ranges,  Penetration,  etc.  XIV.  Materials, 
Strength  of  Materials.  XV.  Miscellaneous  information. 
Tables  of  Weights  and  Measures,  Physical  Data,  Mathe- 
matical Formula9,  Ballistics,  Tables,  etc. 

Ordnance  Department, 
Washington,  Nov.  4, 1861. 

Hmj.  S.  Cameron,  Secretary  of  War. 

It  is  respectfully  recommended  that  the  reviBed  edition  of  the  Ord- 
"^ce  Manual  be  published  for  the  use  of  the  Army. 

WILLIAM  MAYNADIER, 
Lt.  Ool.     Ordnance  in  charge  of  Bureau, 

Approved,  Nov.  4,  1861. 
Thomas  A.  Scott, 

Acting  Secretary  of  War. 

This  most  valuable  work  to  persons  engaged  in  the  military  serv- 
ice and  in  the  preparation  of  any  of  the  various  military  supplies, 
(the  construction  of  which  is  given  in  minute  detail,)  will  also  prove 
Ufoful  to  mechanics  generally  for  the  valuable  tables  and  misG«Ilanei 
ovs  information  which  it  contains. 


JOMIHI'S 


THE  ART  OF  WAR.  By  Baron  D.  Jomixi,  General  and 
Aid-de-Camp  of  the  Emperor  of  Russia.  A  New  Edi- 
tion, with  Appendices  and  Maps.  Translated  from  the 
French  by  Capt.  G.  H.  Mend  ell,  U.S.A.,  Corps  of  Topo- 
graphical Engineers,  and  Lieut.  W.  P.  Craighill,  U.S.A., 
Corjjs  of  Engineers. 

One  vol.  demi  8vo.  $1.50. 

SUMUtART  OP  CONTEXTS. 

Chap.  I. — Policy  of  War.  TI.  Military  Policy  or  the  Philosophy  of 
War.  III.  Strategy.  R^  Grand  Tactics  and  Battles.  V.  Of  Dif- 
ferent mixed  Operations  which  participate  at  the  same  time  of 
Strategy  and  Tactics.  VI.  Logistics,  or  the  Practical  art  of  moving 
Armies.  VII.  The  Formation  and  Employment  of  Troops  for 
Combat.   Conclusion.   Supplement.  Appendices. 


MAEMONT'S 
MILITARY  INSTITUTIONS. 

THE  SPIRIT  OF  MILITARY  INSTITUTIONS,  from 
the  latest  Paris  edition.  Translated,  with  Notes,  by 
Henry  Coppeb,  Professor  in  the  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, and  late  a  Cantain  in  the  Army  of  the  United 
States.   1  vol.  12mo.  $1.00. 

This  book  contains,  in  a  sman  compass,  the  principles  of  the  art  oi 
war,  as  learned  and  practiced  by  this  great  marshal  during  the  Napo- 
leonic wars.  It  treats  of  strategy,  tactics,  and  grand  tactics;  of  the 
organization  and  formation  of  armies;  the  principles  of  fortification; 
of  military  justice;  wars  olSfensive  and  defensive;  marches  and  en- 
campments, reconnoissances,  battles;  and  various  important  topics, 
fncludiug  the  tactics  of  the  three  arms,  as  applied  in  actual  movo- 
ments  before  the  enemy, — with  the  peculiar  characteristics  and  dutie« 
of  general  officers. 


INSTRUCTION  IN  FIELD  ARTILLERY. 

Prepared  by  a  Board  of  Artillery  Officers. 
ONE  VOL.  8vo.  $2.50. 

Baltimore,  Md.,  Jan.  15,  1859. 
Col.  S.  Cooper,  Ad;t.-Gen.  U.S.A. 

Sir : — The  Light  Artillery  Board  assembled  by  Special 
Orders  No.  184,  of  1856,  and  Special  Orders  No.  116,  of 
1858,  has  the  honor  to  submit  a  revised  system  of  Light 
Artillery  Tactics  and  Regulations  recommended  for  that 
arm. 

AVm.  II.  Frrnch,  Dt.  Jffnjor,  Capt.  First  Artillery. 
William  F.  Barry,  Copt,  Second  ArtiUenj. 
Henry  J.  Hunt,  Bt.  Major,  Cajjt.  Second  Artillery, 


CAVALRY  TACTICS. 

Published  by  Order  of  the  War  Department. 

First  Part: 
School  of  the  Trooper;  of  the  Platoon  and  of  the 
Squadron  Dismounted. 

Second.  Part : 
Of  the  Platoon  and  of  the  Squadron  mounted. 
Tliird  Part: 
Evolutions  of  a  Regiment. 
Three  Vols.  ISmo.  ^3.SO. 
War  Department,  Washington,  Feb.  10,  1841. 
The  system  of  Cavalry  Tactics  adapted  to  the  organiza- 
tion of  Dragoon  regiments,  having  been  approved  by  the 
President  of  the  United  States,  is  now  published  for  th« 
government  of  the  said  service. 

Accordingly,  instruction  in  the  same  will  be  given  aftor 
the  method  pointed  out  therein  ;  and  all  additions  to  or 
departures  from  the  exercises  and  manoeuvres  laid  down  in 
this  system  are  positively  forbidden. 

J.  E. 'POINSETT,  Secretary/ of  War, 


DUFFIELD'S 

SCHOOL  OF  THE  BRIGADE. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BRIGADE,  AND  EVOLUTIONS 
of  the  Line ;  or,  Rules  for  the  Exercise  and  Manoeu- 
vres of  Brigades  and  Divisions.  Designed  as  a  Se- 
quel to  the  United  States  Infantry  Tactics,  adopted 
May  1,  1861.  By  William  W.  Duffield,  Acting 
Brigadier-General  Twenty-third  Brigade,  and  Colonei 
Ninth  Michigan  Infantry. 

One  vol.  18mo.    75  cents. 


MAJOR  MORDECArS  REPORT. 

REPORT  OF  THE  MILITARY  COMMISSION  TO  EUROPE 

IN  1855  AND  1856. 

BY  MAJOR  MORDECAF,  of  the  Ordnance  Department. 
To  which  is  appended 

Rifled  Infantry  ^rms. 

A  BRIEF  DESCRIPTION  OF  THE  MODERN  SYS- 
tem  of  Small  Arms,  as  adopted  in  the  various  Euro- 
pean Armies.  By  J.  Schon,  Captain  in  the  Royal 
Saxon  Infantry,  etc.  etc.  Second  edition,  revised  and 
augmented  with  Explanatory  Plates.  Translated  from 
the  German  by  J.  Gorgas,  Capt.  of  Ordnance,  U.S.A. 
One  vol.  4to.    Numerous  Engravings.  $3.50. 


WILLARD'S 

TARGET  PRACTICE. 

MANUAL  OF  TARGET  PRACTICE  FOR  THE  U.  S. 
Army.    By  Maj.  G.  L.  Willard,  U.S.A. 

One  vol.  18mo.    50  cents. 


Head  Quarters,  Army  of  the  Potomac, 

August  10th,  1862. 

Major  : — The  General  Commanding  desires  me  to  say 
that  he  has  examined  your  '^Manual  of  Target  Practice,^* 
and  thinks  it  well  adapted  for  the  use  of  troops.  It  con- 
tains improvements  on  the  system  laid  down  in  "Heth's 
Manual,"  is  got  up  in  a  very  convenient  form,  and  its  gen- 
eral distribution,  especially  to  the  new  troops,  will  no  doubt 
accomplish  valuable  results. 

Very  respectfully, 

Your  obedient  servant, 

S.  WILLIAMS, 

Asst.  Adjutant  General. 
Major  G.  L.  Willard,  19^^  Infajitry. 


Head  Quarters,  Sth  Army  Corps, 
Western  Va.,  August  8th,  1862. 
Major  : — I  have  read  your  work  on  "  Target  Practice" 
with  much  interest,  and  am  pleased  to  see  so  valuable  an 
addition  to  our  means  of  military  instruction.    I  trust  it 
will  be  adopted  by  government,  and  freely  distributed  to 
troox^s  in  the  field  as  well  as  at  camps  of  instruction. 
I  am,  Major, 

Very  respectfully, 

Your  obedient  servaht, 

F.  J.  PORTER, 

Maj.  General  Com.  Corps. 
To  Major  G.  L.  Willard,  19^^  U.  S.  Tn/antri/,  Head  Quar- 
ters Army  of  the  Potomac,  Harrison's  Landing. 


EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE. 


FIELD  MANUAL  OF  EVOLUTIONS  OF  THE  LINE, 
arranged  ia  a  tabular  form,  for  the  use  of  ofScers  of  the 
United  States  Infantry;  being  a  sequel  to  the  authorized 
United  States  Infantry  Tactics.  Translated,  with  adap- 
tation to  the  United  States  Service,  from  the  latest  French 
authorities.  By  Captain  JIenry  Coppee,  late  Instructor 
in  the  United  States  Military  Academy  at  West  Point. 

I8mo.    50  cents. 

A  most  valuable  and  timely  book;  every  officer  should  have  it  In 
hia  pocket,  in  the  mantKUvres  of  brigades  and  divisious.  It  contains  a 
condensed  and  tabular  statement  of  the  commandtj  of  the  instructor 
aod  of  the  battalion  commauders,  with  short  but  sufficient  explana- 
tions accompanying  each. 

Man}'  of  our  officers  find  the  evolutions  of  the  line  a  most  compli- 
cated study.  They  are  here  rendered  easy  both  of  knowledge  and 
reference. 


MANUAL  OF  BATTALION  DRILL. 

THE  FIELD  MANUAL  OF  BATTALION  DRILL,  con- 
taining  all  the  movements  and  manoeuvres  in  the  School 
of  the  Battalion,  with  the  commands  arranged  in  tabular 
forms,  and  properly  explained.  Translated  from  the 
French,  with  adaptation  to  the  United  States  service,  by 
Capt.  Henry  Coppee,  late  Instructor  in  the  United  States 
Military  Academy  at  West  Point. 

18mo.    50  cents. 

This  little  mantial  is  an  invaluable  aid  to  officers  of  every  grade, 
\n  battalion  drill.  The  study  of  the  tactics  is  not  only  shortened,  but 
very  much  tiicilitated ;  the  ai  raugement  of  the  conanands  in  every 
case  explaining  the  movement,  and  setting  forth  the  duty  of  evej-j 
officer  at  a  glance. 

ltd  small  size  renders  it  a  vade  mecurn  for  the  officer  on  the  field. 


SCHALK'S 


SUMMARY  OF  THE  AllT  OF  WAR.  Written  ex- 
pressly for,  and  dedicated  to,  the  United  States  Vol- 
unteer Army.  By  Emil  Schalk,  Officer  of  Artil- 
lery. 

One  vol.  12 mo.  Illustrated  with  beautifully- engraved 
Maps,  Plates,  and  Diagrams.  $1.50. 

"  Mr.  Schalk,  in  our  humble  opinion,  has  admirably  suc- 
ceeded. He  has  here,  in  language  simple  and  readily  com- 
prehended, un vailed  the  whole  mystery  of  strategy,  tactics, 
grand  tactics,  mixed  operations,  and  logistics,  including 
copious  historical  and  professional  descriptions  of  some  of 
the  most  celebrated  battles,  marches,  and  sieges  of  modern 
times,  with  numerous  original  diagrams  and  maps  of  the 
greatest  interest.  Mr.  Schalk's  first  grand  example  of 
strategy  is  the  war  in  the  United  States,  presupposing  the 
movements,  on  both  sides,  of  the  campaign  now  actually  in 
progress.  The  results  at  which  the  writer  arrives  are  so 
utterly  at  variance  with  popular  ideas  on  the  subject,  and 
yet  so  astonishingly  in  consonance  with  the  actual  state  of 
our  military  chess-board,  that  the  reflecting  reader  will  be 
startled  at  their  resemblance  to  a  fixed  prediction.  The 
positions  and  forces  of  the  opposing  armies,  both  east  and 
west,  are  given  v/ith  singular  accuracy,  and  the  very  battle- 
fields which  have  just  become,  or  arc  becoming  memorable, 
are  marked  beforehand.  The  diagrams  accompanying  this 
part  of  the  work  are  extremely  interesting,  especially  thoso 
covering  the  region  of  Yorktown'and  Fredericksburg.'*' — 
Y.  TniES. 


J.  B.  LIPPmCOTT  &  Oo.'s 

MILITARY  PUBLICATIONS. 


McClellan's  Armies  of  Europe.     8vo   $3.50 

McGlellan's  United  States  Cavalry.    12mo    1.50 

McClellan's  Manual  of  Bayonet  Exercises.  12mo.  1.25 

McClellan's  European  Cavalry.    12mo   1.25 

U.  S.  Rifle  and  Light  Infantry  Tactics.    1  vol   1.25 

Instructions  for  Outpost  and  Patrol  Duty.  12mo.,  25 

Hardee's  Tactics — Rifle  and  Light  Inf.    2  vols...  1.50 

Cooke's  United  States  Cavalry  Tactics.    2  vols...  1.50 

The  Soldier's  Handy  Book.    1  vol   25 

The  Ordnance  Manual.    Demy  8vo   2.50 

Instruction  in  Field  Artillery.    Demy  8vo   2.50 

Cavalry  Tactics  (by  Authority.)    3  vols.  IBmo..  3.50 

Jomini's  Art  of  War.    Demy  8vo   1.50 

Marmont's  Military  Institutions.    12mo   1.00 

Evolutions  of  the  Line.    18mo   50 

Manual  of  Battalion  Drill.    18mo   50 

Revised  Army  Regulations.    8vo   1.75 

Willard's  Target  Practice.    18mo   50 

Stromeyer  and  Esmarch  —  Gunshot  I'ractures; 

Resection  in  Gunshot  Injuries.    12mo   75 

Maxims  and  Instructions  on  Art  of  War.    18mo..  75 

Schalk's  Art  of  War.    12mo  ,   1.50 

Duffield's  School  of  the  Brigade.    18mo   75 

Major  Mordecai's  Report  of  the  Military  Commis- 
sion to  Europe — Schon's  Rifled  Infantry  Arms. 

4to   8.50 

Power's  Anatomy  of  the  Arteries.    12mo   2.00 

Hospital  Steward's  Manual.    12mo   1.25 

Macleod's  Surgery  of  the  Crimean  War.  12mo   1.50 

Guthrie's  Commentaries  on  the  Surgery  of  War. 

12mo.  7.   2.25 

Longmore's  Gunshot  Wounds.    12mo   75 

Treatise  on  Military  Hygiene  In  press. 

Military  Encyclopedia  In  press. 

Jebb's  Treatises  on  Attack  and  Defence  In  press. 


30112  077313598 


